Acura TL 2009 Sedan Owner's Manual PDF

1 of 648
1 of 648

Summary of Content for Acura TL 2009 Sedan Owner's Manual PDF

Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights and responsibilities.

As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded by a symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owners manual in your vehicle so you can refer to it at any time.

Maintaining your vehicle according to the maintenance minder shown in the instrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your dealers staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answer any questions and concerns.

Congratulations! Your selection of a 2009 Acura TL was a wise investment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.

Introduction

i

2009 TL

California Proposition 65 Warning

This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

Event Data Recorders

This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.

Service Diagnostic Recorders This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential.

Introduction

WARNING:

This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. These devices record front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failure of any airbag system component.

ii

2009 TL

Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility.

Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You must use your own good judgement.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms, including:

on the vehicle. preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of

three signal words: , , or . These signal words mean:

such as Important Safety Reminders or Important Safety Precautions.

such as Driver and Passenger Safety. how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read it carefully.

To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have provided operating procedures and other information on labels and in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that could hurt you or others.

Safety Labels Safety Messages

Safety Headings

Safety Section Instructions

A Few Words About Safety

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

iii

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you dont follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you dont follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you dont follow instructions.

2009 TL

!"#$%

&'() *

+,-

-%

.&') /0*

&')*-

*%%

1)+#234 *0-

# ,--

+5266+ 7,

#8 5266 7,%%

3

'

-

A convenient reference to the sections in this manual.

A quick reference to the main controls in your vehicle.

Explains the purpose of each instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use the controls on the dashboard and steering column.

What gasoline to use, how to break- in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo.

ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information.

The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park.

The maintenance minder shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer for maintenance service. There is also a list of things to check and instructions on how to check them.

This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and details how to handle them.

Important information about the proper use and care of your vehicles seat belts, an overview of the supplemental restraint system, and valuable information on how to protect children with child restraints.

A summary of the warranties covering your new vehicle, and how to contact us for any reason. Refer to your warranty manual for detailed information.

How to order manuals and other technical literature.

A summary of the information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.

How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features.

Contents

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Driver and Passenger Safety

Instruments and Controls

Features

Before Driving

Driving

Technical Information

Maintenance

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Warranty and Client Relations (U.S. and Canada only)

Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)

Index

Service Information Summary

Overview of Contents

2

2009 TL

: If equipped

Your Vehicle at a Glance Y

our V

ehicle ata

G lance

3

COMPASS

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK

DRIVERS FRONT AIRBAG

MIRROR CONTROLS

DRIVING POSITION MEMORY SYSTEM BUTTONS

POWER DOOR LOCK MASTER SWITCH

POWER WINDOW SWITCHES

TRUNK RELEASE BUTTON

FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE BUTTON

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

PASSENGERS FRONT AIRBAG

HAZARD WARNING BUTTON

AUDIO CLOCK

CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET

INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS GAUGES MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY

MOONROOF SWITCH(P. 63) (P. 75)

(P. 77)

(P. 9, 26)

(P. 162)

(P. 164)

(P. 146)

(P. 195)

(P. 148)

(P. 487)

(P. 489) USB ADAPTER CABLE (P. 256, 266, 347, 358) (P. 375) (P. 204)

HOMELINK BUTTONS (P. 389) (P. 199)

(P. 9, 26)

(P. 139)

(P. 223) (P. 377)

(P. 382)

(P. 204)

(P. 507)

(P. 214)

2009 TL

To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.

Refer to the navigation system owners manual. If equipped

1 : 2 : 3 :

Your Vehicle at a Glance

4

WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS

CENTER DISPLAY

CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONSHORN

NAVIGATION DISPLAY

STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENTS

PADDLE SHIFTERS

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS/ FOG LIGHTS PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

HAZARD WARNING BUTTON

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/ HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

: Models with keyless access system

SEAT HEATER SWITCHES

KEYLESS ACCESS REMOTE SLOT

VOICE CONTROL BUTTONS for NAVIGATION SYSTEM / BLUETOOTH HANDSFREELINK SYSTEM

IGNITION SWITCH

MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY BUTTONS

ENGINE START/ STOP BUTTON

BLUETOOTH HANDSFREELINK SYSTEM BUTTONS

(P. 133, 137)

(P. 374)

(P. 394)

(P. 140)

(P. 78)

(P. 145)

(P. 193)

(P. 386)

(P. 277) (P. 224)

(P. 131)

(P. 34)

(P. 139)

(P. 178)

(P. 189)

(P. 424)

(P. 512)

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM OFF SWITCH (P. 524)

HEADLIGHT WASHERS (P. 132)

INTERFACE DIAL SELECTOR KNOB

(P. 215, 278)

(P. 139/163)

INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS (P. 137)

REMOTE AUDIO CONTROL BUTTONS

1

3

2

3

2

2

2009 TL

This section gives you important information about how to protect yourself and your passengers. It shows you how to use seat belts. It explains how your airbags work. And it tells you how to properly restrain infants and children in your vehicle.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6 .......Your Vehicles Safety Features . 7

.......................................Seat Belts . 8 ...........................................Airbags . 9

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11 .....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 11

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 13 ............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 14

...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 15 5. Fasten and Position the

.............................Seat Belts . 16 6. Maintain a Proper Sitting

................................Position . 18 .....Advice for Pregnant Women . 18 ...Additional Safety Precautions . 19

Additional Information About .......................Your Seat Belts . 20

..Seat Belt System Components . 20 ......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 21

Automatic Seat Belt ...............................Tensioners . 22

...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 23 Additional Information About

...........................Your Airbags . 24 ......Airbag System Components . 24

How Your Front Airbags .........................................Work . 26

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 30 How Your Side Curtain Airbags

.........................................Work . 32 ..How the SRS Indicator Works . 32

How the Side Airbag Off ......................Indicator Works . 33

How the Passenger Airbag Off ......................Indicator Works . 34

.............................Airbag Service . 35 ...Additional Safety Precautions . 36

Protecting Children General ................................Guidelines . 37

All Children Must Be ...............................Restrained . 37

All Children Should Sit in a .................................Back Seat . 38

The Passengers Front Airbag .........Can Pose Serious Risks . 38

If You Must Drive with Several ...................................Children . 40

If a Child Requires Close ..................................Attention . 40

...Additional Safety Precautions . 41 Protecting Infants and Small

...................................Children . 42 .......................Protecting Infants . 42

.........Protecting Small Children . 43 .....................Selecting a Child Seat . 45 ....................Installing a Child Seat . 46

...............................With LATCH . 47 .........With a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 49

..............................With a Tether . 51 ...........Protecting Larger Children . 53

...............Checking Seat Belt Fit . 53 ..................Using a Booster Seat . 54

When Can a Larger Child Sit in .........................................Front . 55

...Additional Safety Precautions . 56 .............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 57

...................................Safety Labels . 58

Driver and Passenger Safety D

river and

P assenger

Safety

5

2009 TL

Youll find many safety recommendations throughout this section, and throughout this manual. The recommendations on this page are the ones we consider to be the most important.

A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and wear them properly (see page ).

Alcohol and driving dont mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with

every additional drink. So dont drink and drive, and dont let your friends drink and drive, either.

While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children, and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and warnings in this manual.

Children age 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger children should use a booster seat and a lap/ shoulder belt until they can use the belt properly without a booster seat (see pages ).

Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous. To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance (see page ).

Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds. Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum speed posted.

16

37 56

568

Important Safety Precautions

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Dont Drink and Drive

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards

Restrain All Children

Keep Your Vehicle in Safe Condition

Control Your Speed

6

2009 TL

Your vehicle is equipped with many features that work together to protect you and your passengers during a crash.

Some features do not require any action on your part. These include a strong steel framework that forms a safety cage around the passenger compartment; front and rear crush zones; a collapsible steering column; and tensioners that tighten the front seat belts in a crash.

CONTINUED

Your Vehicles Safety Features D

river and

P assenger

Safety

7

(4)

(7)

(2)

(5)

(2)

(9)

(7)

(10)

(1) (8) (9)

(3)

(11)

(8)

(6)

(1) Safety Cage (2) Crush Zones (3) Seats and Seat-Backs (4) Head Restraints (5) Collapsible Steering Column (6) Seat Belts (7) Front Airbags (8) Side Airbags (9) Side Curtain Airbags (10) Door Locks (11) Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

2009 TL

Your vehicle is equipped with seat belts in all seating positions.

However, you and your passengers cant take full advantage of these features unless you remain sitting in a proper position and

. In fact, some safety features can contribute to injuries if they are not used properly.

The following pages explain how you can take an active role in protecting yourself and your passengers. Seat belts are the single most

effective safety device for adults and larger children. (Infants and smaller children must be properly restrained in child seats.)

Not wearing a seat belt properly increases the chance of serious injury or death in a crash, even though your vehicle has airbags.

In addition, most states and all Canadian provinces require you to wear seat belts.

When properly worn, seat belts:

Keep you connected to the vehicle so you can take advantage of the vehicles built-in safety features.

Help protect you in almost every type of crash, including frontal, side and rear impacts, and rollovers.

Your seat belt system also includes an indicator on the instrument panel and a beeper to remind you and your passengers to fasten your seat belts.

Your Vehicles Safety Features

Seat Belts

Why Wear Seat Belts

always wear your seat belts

8

Not wearing a seat belt properly increases the chance of serious injury or death in a crash, even though your vehicle has airbags.

Be sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts and wear them properly.

2009 TL

Help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the vehicle and against other occupants.

Keep you from being thrown out of the vehicle.

Help keep you in a good position should the airbags ever deploy. A good position reduces the risk of injury from an inflating airbag and allows you to get the best advantage from the airbag.

Of course, seat belts cannot completely protect you in every crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your risk of serious injury.

Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly.

Your vehicle has a supplemental restraint system (SRS) with front airbags to help protect the heads and chests of the driver and a front seat passenger during a moderate to severe frontal collision (see page

for more information on how your front airbags work).

Your vehicle also has side airbags to help protect the upper torso of the driver or a front seat passenger during a moderate to severe side impact (see page for more information on how your side airbags work).26

30

CONTINUED

Your Vehicles Safety Features

What You Should Do:

Airbags

D river

and P

assenger Safety

9

2009 TL

They are designed to supplement the seat belts.

The most important things you need to know about your airbags are:

The rest of this section gives more detailed information about how you can maximize your safety.

In addition, your vehicle has side curtain airbags to help protect the heads of the driver, front passenger, and passengers in the outer rear seating positions during a moderate to severe side impact (see page

for more information on how your side curtain airbags work).

Remember however, that no safety system can prevent all injures or deaths that can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags deploy.

Always wear your seat belt properly, and sit upright and as far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as possible.

To do their job, airbags must inflate with tremendous force. So while airbags help save lives, they can cause minor injuries or more serious or even fatal injuries if occupants are not properly restrained or sitting properly.

32

Your Vehicles Safety Features

Airbags do not replace seat belts.

Airbags offer no protection in rear impacts, or minor frontal or side collisions.

What you should do:

Airbags can pose serious hazards.

10

2009 TL

The following pages provide instructions on how to properly protect the driver, adult passengers and teenage children who are large enough and mature enough to drive or ride in the front seat.

After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure the doors and trunk are closed and locked.

See pages for important guidelines on how to properly protect infants, small children, and larger children who ride in your vehicle.

Your vehicle has a door/ trunk open indicator (red)

on the instrument panel to indicate when any door or the trunk lid is not tightly closed.

Your vehicle also has a door and trunk open indicator on the multi- information display to indicate when a specific door or the trunk is not tightly closed. You will see the appropriate indicator(s) for each condition.

See page for how to lock the doors, and page for how the door/ trunk open indicator works.

You will also hear a beep when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, and each time you open any door or the trunk with the key in the ON (II) position.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

37 56

146 12

:

178 180

CONTINUED

Protecting Adults and Teens

Close and Lock the DoorsIntroduction 1.

D river

and P

assenger Safety

11

2009 TL

The above illustration shows that all doors and the trunk are open.

When one or more doors or the trunk lid are not tightly closed, the corresponding indicator for each condition will come on.

The above example shows the front right and rear left doors, and the trunk open.

When the trunk is not tightly closed, the TRUNK OPEN indicator will come on.

Protecting Adults and Teens

12

2009 TL

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that drivers allow at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the steering wheel and the chest. In addition to adjusting the seat, you can adjust the steering wheel up and down, and in and out (see page ).

If you cannot get far enough away from the steering wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend that you investigate whether some type of adaptive equipment may help.

If you sit too close to the steering wheel or dashboard, you can be seriously injured by an inflating front airbag, or by striking the steering wheel or dashboard.

Adjust the drivers seat as far to the rear as possible while allowing you to maintain full control of the vehicle. Have a front passenger adjust their seat as far to the rear as possible.

Locking the doors reduces the chance of someone being thrown out of the vehicle during a crash, and it helps prevent passengers from accidentally opening a door and falling out.

Locking the doors also helps prevent an outsider from unexpectedly opening a door when you come to a stop.

Your vehicle has the auto door locking/unlocking feature. For more information, see page .120

140

CONTINUED

Protecting Adults and Teens

Adjust the Front Seats2.

D river

and P

assenger Safety

13

2009 TL

Adjust the drivers seat-back to a comfortable, upright position, leaving ample space between your chest and the airbag cover in the center of the steering wheel.

Passengers with adjustable seat- backs should also adjust their seat- back to a comfortable, upright position.

See page for how to adjust the front seats.

155

Protecting Adults and Teens

Adjust the Seat-Backs3.

14

Reclining the seat-back too far can result in serious injury or death in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to an upright position, and sit well back in the seat.

Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious injury or death if the front airbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from the front airbags as possible.

2009 TL

CONTINUED

Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the occupants chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury.

See page for how to adjust the seat-backs.

Adjust the drivers head restraint so the center of the back of your head rests against the center of the restraint.

Have passengers adjust their head restraints properly as well. Taller persons should adjust their restraint as high as possible.

155

Protecting Adults and Teens

Adjust the Head Restraints4.

D river

and P

assenger Safety

15

Improperly positioning head restraints reduces their effectiveness and you can be seriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints are in place and positioned properly before driving.

2009 TL

Properly adjusted head restraints will help protect occupants from whiplash and other crash injuries.

See page for how to adjust the head restraints and how the drivers and front passengers active head restraints work.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then tug on the belt to make sure the belt is securely latched. Also check that the belt is not twisted, because a twisted belt can cause serious injuries in a crash.

Position the lap part of the belt as low as possible across your hips, then pull up on the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic bones take the force of a crash and reduces the chance of internal injuries.

156

Fasten and Position the Seat Belts

5.

Protecting Adults and Teens

16

2009 TL

If necessary, pull up on the belt again to remove any slack, then check that the belt rests across the center of your chest and over your shoulder. This spreads the forces of a crash over the strongest bones in your upper body.

This could cause very serious injuries in a crash.

If a seat belt does not seem to work properly, it may not protect the occupant in a crash.

See page for additional information about your seat belts and how to take care of them.

If the seat belt touches or crosses your neck, or if it crosses your arm instead of your shoulder, you need to adjust the seat belt anchor height.

The front seats have adjustable seat belt anchors. To adjust the height of an anchor, press and hold the release button and slide the anchor up or down as needed (it has four positions).

Using a seat belt that is not working properly can result in serious injury or death. Have your dealer check the belt as soon as possible.

20

Never place the shoulder portion of a lap/shoulder belt under your arm or behind your back.

No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat belt.

Protecting Adults and Teens D

river and

P assenger

Safety

17

RELEASE BUTTON

Improperly positioning the seat belts can cause serious injury or death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts are properly positioned before driving.

2009 TL

If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt, and keep the lap part of the belt as low as possible across the hips.

In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an inflating front airbag.

After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints, and put on their seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their seats, with their feet on the floor, until the vehicle is parked and the engine is off.

Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased.

Advice for Pregnant WomenMaintain a Proper Sitting Position

6.

Protecting Adults and Teens

18

Sitting improperly or out of position can result in serious injury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back in the seat, with your feet on the floor.

2009 TL

If your hands or arms are close to an airbag cover, they could be injured if the airbags inflate.

If they do, they could be very seriously injured in a crash.

When driving, remember to sit upright and adjust the seat as far back as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle. When riding as a front passenger, adjust the seat as far back as possible.

Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if its okay for you to drive.

Objects on the covers marked SRS AIRBAG could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate.

Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your airbags inflate.

If a side airbag or a side curtain airbag inflates, a cup holder or other hard object attached on or near the door could be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone.

This will reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your unborn child that can be caused by a crash or an inflating front airbag.

Devices intended to improve occupant comfort or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability of the belt and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.

Keep your hands and arms away from the airbag covers.Two people should never use the

same seat belt.

Do not attach or place objects on the front airbag covers.

Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag.

Do not attach hard objects on or near a door.

Do not put any accessories on seat belts.

Additional Safety Precautions

Protecting Adults and Teens D

river and

P assenger

Safety

19

2009 TL

Your seat belt system includes lap/ shoulder belts in all seating positions. The front seat belts are also equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners.

This system uses the same sensors as the front airbags to monitor whether the front seat belts are latched or unlatched, and how much weight is on the front passengers seat (see pages and ).

The seat belt system includes an indicator on the

instrument panel and a beeper to remind you and your passengers to fasten your seat belts.

If either the driver or a front passenger does not fasten their seat belt while driving, the beeper will sound and the indicator will flash again at regular intervals.

You will also see a FASTEN SEAT BELT or FASTEN PASSENGER SEAT BELT message on the multi- information display (see page ).

When no one is sitting in the front passengers seat, or a child or small adult is riding there, the indicator should not come on and the beeper should not sound.You will also see a FASTEN SEAT

BELT message on the multi- information display.

If a front passenger does not fasten their seat belt, the indicator will come on about 6 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the ON (II) position.

This system monitors the front seat belts. If you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position before your seat belt is fastened, the beeper will sound and the indicator will flash. If your seat belt is not fastened before the beeper stops, the indicator will stop flashing but remain on.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

28 29

78

:

178 180

Seat Belt System Components

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

20

2009 TL

If the indicator comes on or the beeper sounds when the drivers seat belt is latched and there is no front seat passenger and no items on the front seat, something may be interfering with the monitoring system. Look for and remove:

Any items under the front passengers seat.

Any object(s) hanging on the seat or in the seat-back pocket.

Any object(s) touching the rear of the seat-back.

The lap/shoulder belt goes over your shoulder, across your chest, and across your hips.

To fasten the belt, insert the latch plate into the buckle, then tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is latched (see page for how to properly position the belt).

To unlock the belt, press the red PRESS button on the buckle. Guide the belt across your body so that it retracts completely. After exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the way and will not get closed in the door.

All seat belts have an emergency locking retractor. In normal driving, the retractor lets you move freely in your seat while it keeps some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop, the retractor automatically locks the belt to help restrain your body.

The seat belts in all positions except the drivers have a lockable retractor that must be activated to secure a child seat (see page ).

If the shoulder part of the belt is pulled all the way out, the lockable retractor will activate. The belt will retract, but it will not allow the passenger to move freely.

If no obstructions are found, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

16

49

CONTINUED

Lap/Shoulder Belt

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts D

river and

P assenger

Safety

21

2009 TL

To deactivate the lockable retractor, unlatch the buckle and let the seat belt fully retract. To refasten the seat belt, pull it out only as far as needed.

For added protection, the front seat belts are equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners. When activated, the tensioners immediately tighten the belts to help hold the driver and a front passenger in position.

The tensioners can also be activated during a collision in which the front airbags . In this case, the airbags would not be needed, but the additional restraint could be helpful.

When the tensioners are activated, the seat belts will remain tight until they are unbuckled.

The tensioners are designed to activate in any collision severe enough to cause the front airbags to deploy.

If a side curtain airbag deploys during a side impact, the tensioner on that side of the vehicle will also deploy.

do not deploy

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

22

2009 TL

For safety, you should check the condition of your seat belts regularly.

If a seat belt is worn during a crash, it must be replaced by your dealer. A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of protection in a subsequent crash.

The dealer should also inspect the anchors for damage and replace them if needed. If the automatic seat belt tensioners activate during a crash, they must be replaced.

Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check that the latches work smoothly and the belts retract easily. If a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem (see page

). Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide good protection and should be replaced as soon as possible.

Acura provides a limited warranty on seat belts. See your

booklet for details.

564

Acura Warranty Information

Seat Belt Maintenance

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts D

river and

P assenger

Safety

23

Not checking or maintaining seat belts can result in serious injury or death if the seat belts do not work properly when needed.

Check your seat belts regularly and have any problem corrected as soon as possible.

2009 TL

Airbag System Components

Additional Information About Your Airbags

24

(3)

(4) (5)

(6)

(1)

(15) (8) (9) (2)

(14)

(8)

(10)

(13) (16)

(5) (11)

(10)

(13)

(14)

(7)

(7) (12)

(15) Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator (16) Safing Sensor

(6) Drivers Seat Position Sensor (7) Front Passengers Weight Sensors (8) Front Impact Sensors (9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator (10) Side Impact Sensors (First)

(1) Drivers Front Airbag (2) Passengers Front Airbag (3) Control Unit (4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners (5) Side Airbags

(11) Occupant Detection System (ODS) Sensors (12) Front Passengers Weight Sensors Control Unit/

ODS Sensors Control Unit (13) Side Impact Sensors (Second) (14) Side Curtain Airbags

2009 TL

Automatic front seat belt tensioners (see page ).

Sensors that can detect a moderate to severe front impact or side impact.

Sensors that can detect whether a child is in the passengers side airbag path and signal the control unit to turn the airbag off (see page ).

Your airbag system includes:

Two side airbags, one for the driver and one for a front passenger. The airbags are stored in the outer edges of the seat- backs. Both are marked SIDE AIRBAG (see page ).

Two SRS (supplemental restraint system) front airbags. The drivers airbag is stored in the center of the steering wheel; the front passengers airbag is stored in the dashboard. Both are marked SRS AIRBAG (see page ).

Two side curtain airbags, one for each side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored in the ceiling, above the side windows. The front and rear pillars are marked SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG (see page

).

Sensors that can detect whether the drivers seat belt and the front passengers seat belt are latched or unlatched (see page ).

A drivers seat position sensor that monitors the distance of the seat from the front airbag. If the seat is too far forward, the airbag will inflate with less force (see page

).

Weight sensors that monitor the weight on the front passengers seat. If the weight is about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less (the weight of an infant or small child), the passengers front airbag will be turned off (see page ).

26

30

32

22

20

28

31

29

CONTINUED

Additional Information About Your Airbags D

river and

P assenger

Safety

25

2009 TL

If you ever have a moderate to severe frontal collision, sensors will detect the vehicles rapid deceleration.

If the rate of deceleration is high enough, the control unit will inflate the drivers and front passengers airbags, at the time and with the force needed.

An indicator on the instrument panel that alerts you that the passengers side airbag has been turned off (see page ).

An indicator on the instrument panel that alerts you to a possible problem with your airbags, sensors, or seat belt tensioners (see page ).

An indicator on the dashboard that alerts you that the passengers front airbag has been turned off (see page ).

Emergency backup power in case your vehicles electrical system is disconnected in a crash.

A sophisticated electronic system that continually monitors and records information about the sensors, the control unit, the airbag activators, the seat belt tensioners, and driver and front passenger seat belt use when the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

:

33

32

34

178 180

Additional Information About Your Airbags

How Your Front Airbags Work

26

2009 TL

CONTINUED

After a crash, you may see what looks like smoke. This is actually powder from the airbags surface. Although the powder is not harmful, people with respiratory problems may experience some temporary discomfort. If this occurs, get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

The total time for inflation and deflation is one-tenth of a second, so fast that most occupants are not aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in their laps.

After inflating, the front airbags immediately deflate, so they wont interfere with the drivers visibility, or the ability to steer or operate other controls.

During a frontal crash, your seat belt restrains your lower body and torso, and the front airbag helps protect your head and chest.

Although both airbags normally inflate within a split second of each other, it is possible for only one airbag to deploy.

This can happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin, or threshold, that determines whether or not the airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.

Only the drivers airbag can deploy if there is no passenger in the front seat, or if the advanced airbag system has turned the passengers airbag off (see page ).34

Additional Information About Your Airbags D

river and

P assenger

Safety

27

2009 TL

Your front airbags are also advanced airbags. The main purpose of this feature is to help prevent airbag- caused injuries to short drivers and children or small statured adults who ride in front.

For both advanced airbags to work properly:

Failure to follow these instructions could damage the sensors or prevent them from working properly.

Occupants must sit upright and wear their seat belts properly.

Do not spill any liquids on or under the seats, cover the sensors, or put any cargo or metal objects under the front seats.

Back seat passengers should not wedge objects or intentionally force their feet under the front passenger seat.

Your front airbags are also dual- threshold airbags. Airbags with this feature have two deployment thresholds that depend on whether sensors detect the occupant is wearing a seat belt or not.

If the occupants belt is , the airbag will deploy at a slightly lower threshold, because the occupant would need extra protection.

If the occupants belt is , the airbag will inflate at a slightly higher threshold, when the airbag would be needed to supplement the protection provided by the seat belt.

Your front airbags are dual-stage airbags. This means they have two inflation stages that can be ignited sequentially or simultaneously, depending on crash severity.

In a crash, both stages will ignite simultaneously to provide the quickest and greatest protection.

In a crash, one stage will ignite first, then the second stage will ignite a split second later. This provides longer airbag inflation time with a little less force.

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Advanced AirbagsDual-Threshold Airbags

not latched

latched

Dual-Stage Airbags

more severe

less severe

28

2009 TL

The passengers advanced front airbag system has weight sensors under the seat. Although Acura does not encourage carrying an infant or small child in front, if the sensors detect the weight of an infant or small child (up to about 65 lbs or 29 kg), the system will automatically turn the passengers front airbag off.

Be aware that objects placed on the passengers seat can also cause the airbag to be turned off.

When the passenger airbag gets turned off by the weight sensors, a passenger airbag off indicator in the center of the dashboard comes on (see page ).

If the weight sensors detect there is no passenger in the front seat, the airbag is automatically turned off. However, the passenger airbag off indicator in this situation will not come on.

The drivers advanced front airbag system includes a seat position sensor under the seat. If the seat is too far forward, the airbag will inflate with less force, regardless of the severity of the impact.

If there is a problem with the sensor, the SRS indicator will come on, and the airbag will inflate in the normal manner regardless of the drivers seating position.

34

CONTINUED

Additional Information About Your Airbags D

river and

P assenger

Safety

29

PASSENGERS SEAT WEIGHT SENSORS

DRIVERS SEAT POSITION SENSOR

2009 TL

To ensure that the passengers advanced front airbag system will work properly,

This includes:

A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of the front passengers seat.

Moving the front seat or seat-back forcibly back against cargo on the seat or floor behind it.

Hanging heavy items on the front passenger seat, or placing heavy items in the seat-back pocket.

Also, make sure the floor mat behind the front passengers seat is hooked to the floor mat anchor (see page ). If it is not, the mat may interfere with the proper operation of the sensors and operation of the seat.

If you ever have a moderate to severe side impact, sensors will detect rapid acceleration and signal the control unit to instantly inflate either the drivers or the passengers side airbag.

565

How Your Side Airbags Work

Additional Information About Your Airbags

do not do anything that would increase or decrease the weight on the front passengers seat.

30

2009 TL

There will be some delay between the moment the passenger moves into or out of the airbag deployment path and when the indicator comes on or goes off.

A front seat passenger should not use a cushion or other object as a backrest. It may prevent the cutoff system from working properly.

Only one airbag will deploy during a side impact. If the impact is on the passengers side, the passengers side airbag will deploy even if there is no passenger.

To get the best protection from the side airbags, front seat occupants should wear their seat belts and sit upright and well back in their seats.

The side airbag may also shut off if a short adult leans sideways, or a larger adult slouches and leans sideways into the airbags deployment path.

Objects placed on the front passenger seat can also cause the side airbag to be shut off.

Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoff system designed primarily to protect a child riding in the front passengers seat.

If the side airbag off indicator comes on (see page ), have the passenger sit upright. Once the passenger is out of the airbags deployment path, the system will turn the airbag back on, and the indicator will go out.Although Acura does not encourage

children to ride in front, if the position sensors detect a child has leaned into the side airbags deployment path, the airbag will shut off.

33 Side Airbag Cutoff System

Additional Information About Your Airbags D

river and

P assenger

Safety

31

2009 TL

The SRS indicator alerts you to a potential problem

with your airbags or seat belt tensioners.

If the impact is on the passengers side, the passengers side curtain airbag will inflate even if there are no occupants on that side of the vehicle.

In a moderate to severe side impact, sensors will detect rapid acceleration and signal the control unit to instantly inflate the side curtain airbag and activate the seat belt tensioner on the drivers or the passengers side of the vehicle.

One or both side curtain airbags may inflate in a moderate to severe frontal collision which causes the front airbags to deploy.

To get the best protection from the side curtain airbags, occupants should wear their seat belts and sit upright and well back in their seats.

When you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, this indicator comes on briefly then goes off. This tells you the system is working properly.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

:

180178

How Your Side Curtain Airbags Work

How the SRS Indicator Works

Additional Information About Your Airbags

32

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG

2009 TL

If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, you should have the system checked by your dealer. For example:

This indicator alerts you that the passengers side airbag has been automatically shut off. It does mean there is a problem with your side airbags.

You will also see a PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAG OFF message on the multi-information display.

If the SRS indicator does not come on after you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position or on models with keyless access system, press the engine start/ stop button to set ON mode (see page ).

If you see any of these indications, the airbags and seat belt tensioners may not work properly when you need them.

If the indicator stays on after the engine starts.

If the indicator comes on or flashes on and off while you drive.

You will also see a CHECK AIRBAG SYSTEM message on the multi-information display.

When you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, the indicator should come on briefly and then go out (see page ). If it doesnt come on, stays on, or comes on while driving without a passenger in the front seat, have the system checked.

180

67

CONTINUED

Additional Information About Your Airbags

How the Side Airbag Off Indicator Works

not

D river

and P

assenger Safety

33

U. S. Canada

Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in serious injury or death if the airbag systems or tensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts you to a possible problem.

2009 TL

Be aware that objects placed on the front seat can cause the indicator to come on.

If no weight is detected on the front seat, the airbag will be automatically shut off. However, the indicator will not come on.

The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and off repeatedly if the total weight on the seat is near the airbag cutoff threshold.

If an adult or teenage passenger is riding in front, move the seat as far to the rear as possible, and have the passenger sit upright and wear the seat belt properly.

This indicator alerts you that the passengers front airbag has been shut off because weight sensors detect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less (the weight of an infant or small child) on the front passengers seat. It does there is a problem with the airbag.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

:

178 180

Additional Information About Your Airbags

How the Passenger Airbag Off Indicator Works

not mean

34

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

U. S. Canada

2009 TL

If the indicator comes on with no front seat passenger and no objects on the seat, or with an adult riding there, something may be interfering with the weight sensors. Look for and remove:

Any items under the front passengers seat.

Your airbag systems are virtually maintenance free, and there are no parts you can safely service. However, you must have your vehicle serviced if:

Do not try to remove or replace any airbag by yourself. This must be done by an authorized dealer or a knowledgeable body shop.

If no obstructions are found, have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

Any object hanging on the seat or in the seat-back pocket.

Any object(s) touching the rear of the seat-back.

Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible. If you ignore this indication, your airbags may not operate properly.

Even if your airbags do not inflate, your dealer should inspect the drivers seat position sensor, the front passengers weight sensors, the front seat belt tensioners, and all seat belts and their anchors worn during a crash to make sure they are operating properly.

Any airbag that has deployed must be replaced along with the control unit and other related parts. Any seat belt tensioner that activates must also be replaced.

Airbag Service

Additional Information About Your Airbags

The SRS indicator alerts you to a problem.

If your vehicle has a moderate to severe impact.

An airbag ever inflates.

D river

and P

assenger Safety

35

2009 TL

Together, airbags and seat belts provide the best protection.

Tampering could cause the airbags to deploy, possibly causing very serious injury.

If water or another liquid soaks into a seat- back, it can prevent the side airbag cutoff system from working properly.

This could make the drivers seat position sensor or the front passengers weight sensors ineffective. If it is necessary to remove or modify a front seat to accommodate a person with disabilities, first contact Acura Client Services at 800-382-2238.

Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back covers can prevent your side airbags from inflating during a side impact.

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Additional Safety Precautions Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags.

Do not tamper with airbag components or wiring for any reason.

Do not expose the front passengers seat-back to liquid.

Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting your dealer.

Do not cover or replace front seat- back covers without consulting your dealer.

36

2009 TL

Children depend on adults to protect them. However, despite their best intentions, many adults do not know how to protect child passengers.

If you have children, or ever need to drive with a child in your vehicle, be sure to read this section. It begins with important general guidelines, then presents special information for infants, small children, and larger children.

Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle accidents are the number one cause of death of children age 12 and under.

To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state and Canadian province requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride in a vehicle.

(see pages ). (see pages ).

42 52 53 56

properly

All Children Must Be Restrained

Infants and small children must be restrained in an approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle

Larger children must be restrained with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on a booster seat until the seat belt f its them properly

Protecting Children General Guidelines D

river and

P assenger

Safety

37

Children who are unrestrained or improperly restrained can be seriously injured or killed in a crash.

Any child too small for a seat belt should be properly restrained in a child seat. A larger child should be properly restrained with a seat belt and use a booster seat if necessary.

2009 TL

Whenever possible, larger children should sit in the back seat, on a booster seat if needed, and be properly restrained with a seat belt (see page for important information about protecting larger children).

Front airbags have been designed to help protect adults in a moderate to severe frontal collision. To do this, the passengers front airbag is quite large, and it can inflate with enough force to cause very serious injuries.

If the vehicle seat is too far forward, or the childs head is thrown forward during a collision, an inflating front airbag can strike the child with enough force to kill or very seriously injure a small child.Even though your vehicle has an

advanced front airbag system that automatically turns the passengers front airbag off (see page ), please follow these guidelines:

If the airbag inflates, it can hit the back of the child seat with enough force to kill or very seriously injure an infant.

According to accident statistics, children of all ages and sizes are safer when they are restrained in a back seat.

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that all children age 12 and under be properly restrained in a back seat. Some states have laws restricting where children may ride.

Children who ride in the back are less likely to be injured by striking interior vehicle parts during a collision or hard braking. Also, children cannot be injured by an inflating front airbag when they ride in the back.

34

53

Children who have outgrown child seats are also at risk of being injured or killed by an inflating passengers front airbag.

Small Children

Larger Children

Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat of a vehicle equipped with a passengers front airbag can be hazardous.

Infants Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front seat of a vehicle equipped with a passengers front airbag.

All Children Should Sit in a Back Seat

The Passengers Front Airbag Can Pose Serious Risks

Protecting Children General Guidelines

38

2009 TL

To remind you of the passengers front airbag hazards, and that children must be properly restrained in a back seat, your vehicle has warning labels on the dashboard (U.S. models) and on the front visors. Please read and follow the instructions on these labels.

U.S. Models

Canadian Models

Protecting Children General Guidelines D

river and

P assenger

Safety

39

SUN VISOR

SUN VISOR

DASHBOARD

2009 TL

Many parents say they prefer to put an infant or a small child in the front passenger seat so they can watch the child, or because the child requires attention.

Placing a child in the front seat exposes the child to hazards in a frontal collision, and paying close attention to a child distracts the driver from the important tasks of driving, placing both of you at risk.

Your vehicle has a back seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front:

Place the largest child in the front seat, provided the child is large enough to wear the lap/shoulder belt properly (see page ).

Move the vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible (see page ).

Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat (see page ).

Make sure the seat belt is properly positioned and secured (see page

).

If a child requires close physical attention or frequent visual contact, we strongly recommend that another adult ride with the child in the back seat. The back seat is far safer for a child than the front.

If you are not wearing a seat belt in a crash, you could be thrown forward and crush the child against the dashboard or a seat-back. If you are wearing a seat belt, the child can be torn from your arms and be seriously hurt or killed.

During a crash, the belt could press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries.

If they do, they could be very seriously injured in a crash.

This can prevent children from accidentally falling out (see page ).

53

155

18

16

147

If You Must Drive with Several Children

If a Child Requires Close Attention

Additional Safety Precautions

Protecting Children General Guidelines

Never hold an infant or child on your lap.

Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child.

Never let two children use the same seat belt.

Use the childproof door locks to prevent children from opening the rear doors.

40

2009 TL

If a child wraps a loose seat belt around their neck, they can be seriously or fatally injured. (See pages and for how to activate and deactivate the lockable retractor.)

Leaving children without adult supervision is illegal in most states, Canadian provinces/ territories, and can be very hazardous.

Children who play in vehicles can accidentally get trapped inside. Teach your children not to play in or around vehicles. Know how to operate the emergency trunk opener and decide if your children should be shown how to use this feature (see page ).

Even very young children learn how to unlock vehicle doors, turn on the ignition switch , and open the trunk, which can lead to accidental injury or death.

Your vehicle has the engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. For more information on selecting the power mode, see page .

For example, infants and small children left in a vehicle on a hot day can die from heatstroke. A child left alone with the key in the ignition switch can accidentally set the vehicle in motion, possibly injuring themselves or others.

50 51

150

:

178

On models with keyless access system

Protecting Children General Guidelines

Make sure any unused seat belt that a child can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor is activated, and the belt is fully retracted and locked.

Do not leave children alone in a vehicle.

Lock all doors and the trunk when your vehicle is not in use.

Keep vehicle keys/remote transmitters or keyless access remotes out of the reach of children.

D river

and P

assenger Safety

41

2009 TL

An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing, reclining child seat until the child reaches the seat makers weight or height limit for the seat, and the child is at least one year old.

Only a rear-facing child seat provides proper support for a babys head, neck, and back.

Two types of seats may be used: a seat designed exclusively for infants, or a convertible seat used in the rear- facing, reclining mode.

If placed facing forward, an infant could be very seriously injured during a frontal collision.

A rear-facing child seat can be placed in any seating position in the back seat, but not in the front.

If the passengers front airbag inflates, it can hit the back of the child seat with enough force to kill or seriously injure an infant.

When properly installed, a rear- facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front passenger from moving their seat as far back as recommended, or from locking their seat-back in the desired position.

It can also interfere with proper operation of the passengers advanced front airbag system.

Protecting Infants

Child Seat Type

Do not put a rear-facing child seat in a forward-facing position.

Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front seat.

Rear-facing Child Seat Placement

Protecting Infants and Small Children

42

2009 TL

Of the different seats available, we recommend those that have a five- point harness system as shown.

In any of these situations, we strongly recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front passengers seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat.

If the vehicle seat is too far forward, or the childs head is thrown forward during a collision, an inflating airbag can strike the child with enough force to cause very serious or fatal injuries.

We also recommend that a small child use the child seat until the child reaches the weight or height limit for the seat.

We strongly recommend placing a forward-facing child seat in a back seat, not the front.

A child who is at least one year old, and who fits within the child seat makers weight and height limits, should be restrained in a forward- facing, upright child seat.

CONTINUED

Protecting Small Children

Child Seat Type

Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat of a vehicle equipped with a passengers airbag can be hazardous.

Child Seat Placement

Protecting Infants and Small Children D

river and

P assenger

Safety

43

Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death during a collision.

Always place a rear-facing child seat in the back seat, not the front.

2009 TL

Even with advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passengers front airbag off (see page ), a back seat is the safest place for a small child.

If it is necessary to put a forward- facing child seat in the front, move the vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible, and be sure the child seat is firmly secured to the vehicle and the child is properly strapped in the seat.

34

Protecting Infants and Small Children

44

Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death if the front airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward- facing child seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far back as possible, and properly restrain the child.

2009 TL

Since LATCH-compatible child seats are easier to install and reduce the possibility of improper installation, we recommend selecting this style.

When buying a child seat, you need to choose either a conventional child seat, or one designed for use with the lower anchors and tethers for children (LATCH) system.

Conventional child seats must be secured to a vehicle with a seat belt, whereas LATCH-compatible seats are secured by attaching the seat to hardware built into the two outer rear seats.

In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH- compatible child seat can be installed using a seat belt.

Whatever type of seat you choose, to provide proper protection, a child seat should meet three requirements:

Look for FMVSS 213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.

Rear-facing for infants, forward- facing for small children.

Before purchasing a conventional child seat, or using a previously purchased one, we recommend that you test the seat in the specific vehicle seating position or positions where the seat will be used.

Selecting a Child Seat

The child seat should meet U.S. or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

The child seat should be of the proper type and size to fit the child.

The child seat should fit the vehicle seating position (or positions) where it will be used.

1.

2.

3.

D river

and P

assenger Safety

45

2009 TL

After selecting a proper child seat and a good place to install the seat, there are three main steps in installing the seat:

All child seats must be secured to the vehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt or with the LATCH (lower anchors and tethers for children) system. A child whose seat is not properly secured to the vehicle can be endangered in a crash.

After installing a child seat, push and pull the seat forward and from side-to-side to verify that it is secure.

A child seat secured with a seat belt should be installed as firmly as possible. However, it does not need to be rock solid. Some side-to-side movement can be expected and should not reduce the child seats effectiveness.

If the child seat is not secure, try installing it in a different seating position, or use a different style of child seat that can be firmly secured.

Make sure the child is properly strapped in the child seat according to the child seat makers instructions. A child who is not properly secured in a child seat can be seriously injured in a crash.

The following pages provide guidelines on how to properly install a child seat. A forward-facing child seat is used in all examples, but the instructions are the same for rear- facing child seats.Properly secure the child seat to

the vehicle.

Make sure the child seat is firmly secured.

Secure the child in the child seat.

1.

2.

3.

Installing a Child Seat

46

2009 TL

Your vehicle is equipped with LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) at the outer rear seats.

To install a LATCH-compatible child seat:

Move the seat belt buckle or tongue away from the lower anchors. Make sure there are no objects

near the anchors that could prevent a secure connection between the child seat and the anchors.

Use the pull strap to lower the anchor cover on the lower seat cushion that covers the LATCH anchor holes in the seat.

The location of each lower anchor is indicated by a small button above the anchor point.

The lower anchors are located between the seat-back and seat bottom, and are to be used only with a child seat designed for use with LATCH.

1.

3.

2.

CONTINUED

Installing a Child Seat with LATCH

Installing a Child Seat D

river and

P assenger

Safety

47

LOWER ANCHORS

STRAP

COVER

Outer seating position

BUTTONS

2009 TL

Push the buttons located next to each rear head restraint to pivot the head restraints down.

Place the child seat on the vehicle seat, then attach the seat to the lower anchors according to the child seat makers instructions.

Some LATCH-compatible seats have a rigid-type connector as shown above.

Other LATCH-compatible seats have a flexible-type connector as shown above.

Whatever type you have, follow the child seat makers instructions for adjusting or tightening the fit.

4. 5.

6.

Installing a Child Seat

48

BUTTON

HEAD RESTRAINT

Outer seating position Rigid type Flexible type

2009 TL

Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the child seat maker.

Push and pull the child seat forward and from side-to-side to verify that it is secure.

When not using the LATCH system, all child seats must be secured to the vehicle with the lap part of a lap/ shoulder belt.

In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in all seating positions except the drivers have a lockable retractor that must be activated to secure a child seat.

Route the tether strap over the head restraint, then attach the tether strap hook to the anchor, making sure the strap is not twisted.

With the child seat in the desired seating position, route the belt through the child seat according to the seat makers instructions, then insert the latch plate into the buckle.

7.

8.

9.

1.

CONTINUED

Installing a Child Seat

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/ Shoulder Belt

D river

and P

assenger Safety

49

TETHER STRAP HOOK

ANCHOR

COVER

2009 TL

After the belt has retracted, tug on it. If the belt is locked, you will not be able to pull it out. If you can pull the belt out, it is not locked, and you will need to repeat these steps.

To activate the lockable retractor, slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all the way out until it stops, then let the belt feed back into the retractor.

To remove slack, it may help to put weight on the child seat, or push on the back of the seat while pulling up on the belt.

After confirming that the belt is locked, grab the shoulder part of the belt near the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack from the lap part of the belt. Remember, if the lap part of the belt is not tight, the child seat will not be secure.

Push and pull the child seat forward and from side-to-side to verify that it is secure enough to stay upright during normal driving maneuvers. If the child seat is not secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to retract fully, then repeat these steps.

2.

3.

4. 5.

Installing a Child Seat

50

2009 TL

To deactivate the lockable retractor and remove a child seat, unlatch the buckle, unroute the seat belt, and let the belt fully retract.

A child seat with a tether can be installed in any seating position in the back seat, using one of the anchorage points shown above.

Since a tether can provide additional security to the lap/shoulder belt installation, we recommend using a tether whenever one is required or available.

After properly securing the child seat with the lap/shoulder belt (see page ), pivot the head restraint down (see page ) and route the tether strap over the head restraint.

1.

156 21

CONTINUED

Installing a Child Seat with a Tether

Installing a Child Seat

Using an Outer Anchor

D river

and P

assenger Safety

51

COVERANCHOR

TETHER ANCHORAGE POINTS

TETHER STRAP HOOK

ANCHOR

COVER

2009 TL

Lift the anchor cover, then attach the tether strap hook to the anchor, making sure the strap is not twisted.

Tighten the strap according to the seat makers instructions.

After properly securing the child seat (see page ), push the head restraint down, then route the tether strap over the top of the seat-back.

Follow steps 2 and 3 in the previous column.

1.

2.

3.

2.

49

Using the Center Anchor

Installing a Child Seat

52

TETHER STRAP HOOK

COVER

ANCHOR

2009 TL

To determine if a lap/shoulder belt properly fits a child, have the child put on the seat belt, then ask yourself:

Does the child sit all the way back against the seat?

Do the childs knees bend comfortably over the edge of the seat?

When a child reaches the recommended weight or height limit for a forward-facing child seat, the child should sit in a back seat on a booster seat and wear a lap/shoulder belt.

The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who must sit in front.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Checking Seat Belt Fit

Protecting Larger Children D

river and

P assenger

Safety

53

Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in front can result in injury or death if the passengers front airbag inflates.

If a child must ride in front, move the vehicle seat as far back as possible, use a booster seat if needed, have the child sit up properly and wear the seat belt properly.

2009 TL

Does the shoulder belt cross between the childs neck and arm?

Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the childs thighs?

Will the child be able to stay seated like this for the whole trip?

If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward-

facing child seat should ride in a back seat and use a booster seat until the lap/shoulder belt fits them properly without the booster.

Some states and Canadian provinces also require children to use a booster seat until they reach a given age or weight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the states or provinces where you intend to drive.

Booster seats can be high-back or low-back. Whichever style you select, make sure the booster seat meets federal safety standards (see page

) and that you follow the booster seat makers instructions.

If a child who uses a booster seat must ride in front, move the vehicle seat as far back as possible and be sure the child is wearing the seat belt properly.

3.

4.

5.

45

Using a Booster Seat

Protecting Larger Children

54

2009 TL

A child may continue using a booster seat until the tops of their ears are even with the top of the vehicles or boosters seat-back. A child of this height should be tall enough to use the lap/shoulder belt without a booster seat.

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that all children age 12 and under be properly restrained in the back seat.

If the passengers front airbag inflates in a moderate to severe frontal collision, the airbag can cause serious injuries to a child who is unrestrained, improperly restrained, sitting too close to the airbag, or out of position.

A side airbag also poses risks. If any part of a larger childs body is in the path of a deploying side airbag, the child could receive possibly serious injuries.

Of course, children vary widely. And while age may be one indicator of when a child can safely ride in front, there are other important factors you should consider.

Physically, a child must be large enough for the lap/shoulder belt to properly fit (see pages and ). If the seat belt does not fit properly, with or without the child sitting on a booster seat, the child should not sit in front.

To safely ride in front, a child must be able to follow the rules, including sitting properly, and wearing the seat belt properly throughout the ride.

16 53

CONTINUED

When Can a Larger Child Sit in Front

Physical Size

Maturity

Protecting Larger Children D

river and

P assenger

Safety

55

2009 TL

If you decide that a child can safely ride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owners manual, and make sure you understand all seat belt instructions and all safety information.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear- most position.

Have the child sit up straight, back against the seat, and feet on or near the floor.

Check that the childs seat belt is properly and securely positioned.

Supervise the child. Even mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten the seat belts or sit properly.

This could result in serious neck injuries during a crash.

This could cause very serious injuries during a crash. It also increases the chance that the child will slide under the belt in a crash and be injured.

If they do, they could be very seriously injured in a crash.

Devices intended to improve a childs comfort or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can make the belt less effective and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.

Additional Safety Precautions Do not let a child wear a seat belt across the neck.

Do not let a child put the shoulder part of a seat belt behind the back or under the arm.

Two children should never use the same seat belt.

Do not put any accessories on a seat belt.

Protecting Larger Children

56

2009 TL

Your vehicles exhaust contains carbon monoxide gas. Carbon monoxide should not enter the vehicle in normal driving if you maintain your vehicle properly and follow the information on this page.

High levels of carbon monoxide can collect rapidly in enclosed areas, such as a garage. Do not run the engine with the garage door closed. Even with the door open, run the engine only long enough to move the vehicle out of the garage.

The vehicle is raised for an oil change. You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust. The vehicle was in an accident that may have damaged the underside.

Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever:

With the trunk lid open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into your vehicles interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the trunk open, open all the windows, and set the climate control system as shown below.

Select the fresh air mode. Select the mode. Set the fan speed to high. Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting.

If you must sit in your parked vehicle with the engine running, even in an unconfined area, adjust the climate control system as follows:

1. 2. 3. 4.

Carbon Monoxide Hazard D

river and

P assenger

Safety

57

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic. Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and even kill you.

Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that expose you to carbon monoxide.

2009 TL

These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that could cause serious injury or death. Read these labels carefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact your dealer for a replacement.

U.S. models only

U.S. models

Canadian models

Safety Labels

58

DASHBOARDRADIATOR CAP

HOOD

2009 TL

U.S. models

Canadian models

U.S. models Canadian models

Safety Labels D

river and

P assenger

Safety

59

SUN VISOR

DOORJAMB

2009 TL

60

2009 TL

This section gives information about the controls and displays that contribute to the daily operation of your vehicle. All the essential controls are within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 62 ............................Instrument Panel . 63

..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 64 .............................................Gauges . 75

..................................Fuel Gauge . 75 ...................Temperature Gauge . 76

.............Multi-Information Display . 77 Controls Near the Steering

.........................................Wheel . 130 Windshield Wipers and

.....................................Washers . 131 .......Turn Signals and Headlights . 133

Automatic Lighting Off ...................................Feature . 135

.........Daytime Running Lights . 136 .....................................Fog Lights . 137

......Instrument Panel Brightness . 137 ...............Hazard Warning Button . 139 ...............Rear Window Defogger . 139

......Steering Wheel Adjustments . 140 .............................Keys and Locks . 141

......................Immobilizer System . 143 ..............................Ignition Switch . 145

....................................Door Locks . 146 ............Childproof Door Locks . 147

..............................................Trunk . 148 ......Emergency Trunk Opener . 150

.....................Remote Transmitter . 151 ...............................................Seats . 155

......Trunk Pass-through Cover . 160 ...........................................Mirrors . 161

Driving Position Memory ........................................System . 164

................Keyless Access System . 167 ...........Keyless Access Remote . 173

........Engine Start/Stop Button . 177 ..................................Seat Heaters . 193

............................Power Windows . 195 .......................................Moonroof . 199

...............................Parking Brake . 201 .........Interior Convenience Items . 202

.....................Beverage Holders . 203 ........Accessory Power Sockets . 204

..................................Glove Box . 205 .............Console Compartment . 205

............................Vanity Mirror . 206 ...................................Sun Visor . 206

...........................Center Pocket . 207 ....................Sunglasses Holder . 207

..................................Coat Hook . 208 ...............................Interior Lights . 209

Instruments and Controls Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

61

2009 TL

: If equipped

Control Locations

62

CLOCK COMPASS

GAUGES MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY

MIRROR CONTROLS

DRIVING POSITION MEMORY SYSTEM BUTTONS

POWER DOOR LOCK MASTER SWITCH

POWER WINDOW SWITCHES

TRUNK RELEASE BUTTON

FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE BUTTON

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS HOMELINK BUTTONS MOONROOF SWITCH

HAZARD WARNING BUTTON

(P. 63) (P. 75)

(P. 77)

(P. 162)

(P. 164)

(P. 146)

(P. 195)

(P. 148)

(P. 487)

(P. 489) (P. 507)

(P. 204)

(P. 377) (P. 223)

(P. 139)

(P. 199)(P. 389)

AUDIO

(P. 382)

CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (P. 214)

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

SEAT HEATER SWITCHES (P. 193)

USB ADAPTER CABLE (P. 256, 266, 347, 358)

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET (P. 204)

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK (P. 375)

2009 TL

The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.

Instrument Panel Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

63

CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR

CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR

PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR

HIGH BEAM INDICATOR

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR

SIDE AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP

SH-AWD INDICATOR

LIGHTS ON INDICATOR LOW TIRE PRESSURE/TPMS INDICATOR

If equipped:

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM INDICATOR

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) INDICATOR

KEYLESS ACCESS SYSTEM INDICATOR

ELECTRIC POWER STEERING (EPS) INDICATOR

VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR

FOG LIGHT INDICATOR

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM INDICATOR

SEAT BELT REMINDER INDICATOR

CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR

LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR

DOOR/TRUNK OPEN INDICATOR

(P. 65, 595)

(P. 64, 595)

(P. 64, 596)

(P. 71)

(P. 64)

(P. 68)

(P. 73)

(P. 68)

(P. 71) (P. 72)

(P. 74) (P. 69)

(P. 72)

(P. 72)

(P. 67)

(P. 73)

(P. 65, 597)

(P. 65)

(P. 70)

(P. 71)

(P. 67)

(P. 66)

(P. 73)

SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR (P. 72)

MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY (P. 77)

2009 TL

The instrument panel has many indicators to give you important information about your vehicle.

If your front passenger does not fasten their seat belt, the indicator comes on about 6 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the ON (II) position.

You will also see a FASTEN SEAT BELT message on the multi- information display.

You will also see a CHECK EMISSION SYSTEM message on the multi-information display. For more information, see page .

The engine can be severely damaged if this indicator flashes or stays on when the engine is running, and you will see a CHECK ENGINE OIL LEVEL message on the multi- information display. For more information, see page .

If you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position before fastening your seat belt, the beeper sounds and the indicator flashes. If you do not fasten your seat belt before the beeper stops, the indicator stops flashing but remains on.

If either of you do not fasten your seat belt while driving, the beeper will sound and the indicator will flash again at regular intervals, and you will see a FASTEN SEAT BELT or FASTEN PASSENGER SEAT BELT message on the multi- information display. For more information, see page .

This indicator comes on when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. It reminds you and your passengers to fasten your seat belts. A beeper also sounds if you have not fastened your seat belt.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

20

596

595 :

178 180

Instrument Panel Indicators

Seat Belt Reminder Indicator

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Low Oil Pressure Indicator

64

2009 TL

If this indicator comes on when the engine is running, the battery is not being charged, and you will also see a CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM message on the multi-information display. For more information, see page .

This indicator has two functions:

If you drive without releasing the parking brake, a beeper will sound, and you will also see a RELEASE PARKING BRAKE message on the multi-information display (see page ).

This indicator comes on briefly when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. It will then go off if you have inserted a properly coded ignition key, on models with keyless access system, if an appropriate keyless access remote is used. If it is not a properly coded key or keyless access remote, the indicator will blink, and the engines fuel system will be disabled (see page ).

It comes on when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. It is a reminder to check the parking brake. Driving with the parking brake not fully released can damage the brakes and tires.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and . 1.

595

201

143

:

178 180

CONTINUED

Instrument Panel Indicators

Charging System Indicator

Immobilizer System Indicator

Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

65

U.S. Canada

2009 TL

If it stays on after you have fully released the parking brake while the engine is running, or if it comes on while driving, it can indicate a problem in the brake system. You will also see a LOW BRAKE FLUID or CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM message on the multi-information display. For more information, see page .

This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. It may also come on briefly when the ignition switch is turned to the START (III) position.

If this indicator comes on at any other time, there is a problem in the ABS. If this happens, take the vehicle to your dealer to have it checked. With this indicator on, your vehicle still has normal braking ability but no anti-lock function. You will also see a CHECK ABS SYSTEM message on the multi- information display. For more information, see page .

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II), and START Mode is the equivalent of START (III). For more information, see pages and

.

2.

597

521

:

178 180

Instrument Panel Indicators

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Indicator

66

2009 TL

This indicator comes on briefly when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. If it comes on at any other time, it indicates a potential problem with your front airbags. This indicator will also alert you to a potential problem with your side airbags, passengers side airbag cutoff system, side curtain airbags, automatic seat belt tensioners, drivers seat position sensor, or the front passengers weight sensors. You will also see a CHECK AIRBAG SYSTEM message on the multi-information display. For more information, see page .

This indicator comes on briefly when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. If it comes on at any other time, it indicates that the passengers side airbag has automatically shut off. For more information, see page .

You will also see a PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAG OFF message on the multi-information display.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

32

:

33

178 180

Supplemental Restraint System Indicator Side Airbag Off

Indicator

Instrument Panel Indicators Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

67

U.S. Canada

2009 TL

This indicator has three functions:

It comes on as a reminder that you have turned off the vehicle stability assist (VSA) system.

It flashes when VSA is active (see page ).

It comes on along with the VSA system indicator if there is a problem with the VSA or Hill Start Assist (on SH-AWD models only) system. You will also see a CHECK VSA SYSTEM message on the multi-information display.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II), and START Mode is the equivalent of START (III). For more information, see pages and

.

If it comes on and stays on at any other time, or it does not come on when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, there is a problem with the VSA or Hill Start Assist (on SH-AWD models only) system. You will also see a CHECK VSA SYSTEM message on the multi-information display. Take your vehicle to a dealer to have it checked. Without VSA, your vehicle still has normal driving ability, but will not have VSA traction and stability enhancement. For more information, see page .

This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. It may also come on briefly when the ignition switch is turned to the START (III) position.

1.

2.

3.

523

523:

178 180

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System Indicator

VSA Activation Indicator

Instrument Panel Indicators

68

2009 TL

CONTINUED

You will also see a CHECK TIRE PRESSURE message on the multi- information display (see page ).

Check the tire pressure monitor on the multi-information display and determine the cause (see page ).

If this happens, pull to the side of the road when it is safe, check which tire has lost pressure on the multi- information display, and determine the cause. If it is because of a flat tire, have the flat tire repaired as soon as possible. If two or more tires are underinflated, call a professional towing service. For more information, see page .

This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. It may also come on briefly when the ignition switch is turned to the START (III) position. For more information, see page .

This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II), and START Mode is the equivalent of START (III). For more information, see pages and

.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

If it comes on while driving, it indicates that one or more of your vehicles tires are significantly low on pressure.

This indicator has two functions:

1.

527

528

606

523

: :

180 178

178 180

Low Tire Pressure/ TPMS Indicator

Instrument Panel Indicators Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

69

2009 TL

The left or right turn signal indicator blinks when you signal a lane change or turn. If an indicator does not blink or blinks rapidly, it usually means one of the turn signal bulbs is burned out (see pages and ). Replace the bulb as soon as possible, since other drivers cannot see that you are signaling.

When you press the hazard warning button, both turn signal indicators and all turn signals on the outside of the vehicle flash.

If this indicator begins to flash, there is a problem with the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS). You will also see a CHECK TPMS SYSTEM message on the multi-information display. The indicator continues to flash for a while (approximately 1 minute), then stays on. If this happens, have your dealer check the system as soon as possible. For more information, see page

.

This indicator normally comes on when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position and goes off after the engine starts. If it comes on at any other time, there is a problem in the electric power steering system.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

2.

526

559 563 :

180178

Instrument Panel Indicators

Electric Power Steering (EPS) Indicator

Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Indicators

70

2009 TL

If you turn the steering wheel to the full left or right position repeatedly while stopping or driving at very low speed, you may feel slightly harder steering in order to prevent damage to the steering box caused by overheating.

You will also see a CHECK POWER STEERING SYSTEM message on the multi-information display.

This indicator comes on red if any door or the trunk lid is not closed tightly.

You will also see a corresponding indicator(s) on the multi-information display to indicate which door and/ or the trunk is not closed tightly (see page ).

If this happens, stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the engine. Reset the system by restarting the engine. The indicator will stay on, but should go off after driving a short distance. If it does not go off, or comes back on again while driving, take the vehicle to your dealer to have it checked. With the indicator on, the EPS may be turned off, making the vehicle harder to steer.

This indicator comes on with the high beam headlights. For more information, see page .

This indicator also comes on with reduced brightness when the daytime running lights (DRL) are on (see page ).

This indicator comes on when you turn on the fog lights. For more information, see page .

11

134

136

137

Instrument Panel Indicators

Door/Trunk Open Indicator

High Beam Indicator

Fog Light Indicator

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

71

2009 TL

This indicator comes on when you set the cruise control. See page

for information on operating the cruise control.

This indicator comes on when you turn on the cruise control system by pressing the CRUISE button on the steering wheel (see page ).

This indicator comes on when there is a system message on the multi- information display. Press the INFO button on the steering wheel (see page ) to see the message (see page ).

Most of the time, this indicator comes on along with other indicators in the instrument panel such as the seat belt reminder indicator, SRS indicator, VSA system indicator, etc.

This indicator reminds you that the exterior lights are on. It comes on when the light switch is in either the

or position. This indicator will also come on when the light switch is in AUTO and the lights turn on automatically. If you turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0) position without turning off the light switch, this indicator will remain on. A reminder chime will also sound when you open the drivers door.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) Mode is the equivalent of LOCK (0) and ACCESSORY Mode is the equivalent of ACCESSORY (I). For more information, see pages

and .

386

386

88 78

:

180178

Instrument Panel Indicators

Lights On Indicator

Cruise Control Indicator

Cruise Main Indicator System Message Indicator

72

2009 TL

This indicator is in the fuel gauge. It comes on as a reminder that you must refuel soon. You will also see a LOW FUEL message on the multi- information display.

When the indicator comes on, there are about 2.5 U.S. gal (9.6 ) on SH-AWD models, and 2.8 U.S. gal (10.5 ) on 2WD models of fuel remaining in the tank.

When the needle reaches E, there is a very small amount of fuel in the tank.

This indicator comes on when the security system is set. For more information, see page .

This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. If this indicator comes on at any other time, there is a problem in the SH-AWD system. You will also see a CHECK SH-AWD SYSTEM message on the multi-information display (see page ). Take your vehicle to a dealer to have it checked. For more information, see page .

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

517

380

518

:

180178

CONTINUED

On SH-AWD models

Low Fuel Indicator

Security System Indicator

Super Handling-All Wheel Drive (SH-AWD) Indicator

Instrument Panel Indicators Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

73

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

U.S. model is shown.

2009 TL

If the indicator blinks while driving, the differential temperature is too high. You will also see an SH-AWD DIFF TEMP. HIGH message on the multi-information display (see page

).

Pull to the side of the road when it is safe, shift to Park, and let the engine idle until the indicator goes out.

This indicator normally comes on for a few seconds when you select the ON mode with the engine start/stop button (see page ). If it comes on at any other time, it indicates that there is a problem with the system.

If this indicator comes on along with a CHECK KEYLESS STARTING SYSTEM message on the multi-information display, there is a problem with the keyless starting system. In this case, your vehicle may not restart. If you can continue to drive safely, take the vehicle to your dealer and have it checked as soon as possible. For more information, see page .This indicator has two functions:

If this indicator comes on along with a CHECK KEYLESS ACCESS SYSTEM message on the multi-information display, there is a problem with the keyless access system. Have the vehicle checked by your dealer as soon as possible. For more information, see page .

1.

2.

188

188

187518

On models with keyless access system

Instrument Panel Indicators

Keyless Access System Indicator

74

Continuing to drive with the SH-AWD indicator blinking may cause serious damage to the system.

2009 TL

This shows how much fuel you have. It may show slightly more or less than the actual amount. The needle returns to the bottom after you turn off the ignition/power mode.

Fuel Gauge

Gauges Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

75

SPEEDOMETER

TEMPERATURE GAUGE

U.S. model is shown.

TACHOMETER

FUEL GAUGE

MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY

Avoid driving with an extremely low f uel level. Running out of f uel could cause the engine to misf ire, damaging the catalytic converter.

2009 TL

This shows the temperature of the engines coolant. During normal operation, the pointer should rise from the bottom mark to about the middle of the gauge. In severe driving conditions, such as very hot weather or a long period of uphill driving, the pointer may rise to the upper zone. If it reaches the red (hot) mark, pull safely to the side of the road. Turn to page for instructions and precautions on checking the engine cooling system. If the pointer of the temperature

gauge reaches to or above the red mark, you will also see the WATER TEMP HOT message on the multi- information display. This will alert you that the engine should be cooled down.

593

Temperature Gauge

Gauges

76

2009 TL

CONTINUED

You can select the displayed language and also customize some vehicle control settings to your liking with the multi-information display and the three buttons on the steering wheel (see page ).

When you unlock and open the drivers door, the display shows DRIVER 1 or DRIVER 2 depending on which remote transmitter/keyless access remote

you use, and the drivers seat and the outside mirrors move to the position stored in that remote transmitter/ keyless access remote (see page

).

The drivers ID (1 or 2) is displayed when the power mode is set to ON.

The multi-information display in the instrument panel displays various information and messages when the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position. Some of the messages help you operate your vehicle more comfortably. Others help to keep you aware of the periodic maintenance your vehicle needs for continued trouble-free driving.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

There are three types of messages: normal display messages, engine oil life and maintenance messages, and system messages.

78 164

:

180178

On models with keyless access system

Multi-Information Display

Normal Display Messages

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

77

Remote transmitter/keyless access remote 1 is used.

Remote transmitter/keyless access remote 2 is used.

2009 TL

These messages go off several seconds after the key is inserted into the ignition switch.

These messages go off in about several seconds.

If you do not fasten your seat belt, you will also see a FASTEN SEAT BELT message on the multi- information display when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.

With the ignition switch in the ON (II) position, the multi-information display changes as shown on page

each time you press the INFO ( / ) button or the SEL/RESET button.

When you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, your last selection is displayed.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

80

:

178 180

On models with keyless access system

Multi-Information Display

78

SEL/RESET BUTTON

INFO BUTTONS ( / )

2009 TL

CONTINUED

In the multi-information display, the system message is also displayed (see page ) and you can customize your vehicle control settings (see page ).

In the normal display mode, the upper segment displays trip computer information, such as fuel economy or average speed. The lower segment displays the odometer/trip meter (A/B), outside temperature, and engine oil life and maintenance item code(s).

The multi-information display consists of an upper segment and a lower segment.

You will see some keyless access system messages until you select the ON mode by operating the engine start/stop button. These messages can be customized (see page ).

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

87

91

105

:

180178

On models with keyless access system

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

79

LOWER SEGMENT

UPPER SEGMENT

U.S. model is shown.

2009 TL

Multi-Information Display

80

U.S. model is shown.

: Press the INFO button ( / ).

: Press the SEL/RESET button.

1 :

2 : SH-AWD models only

Odometer (See page 81.)

Trip Meter (See page 81.)

Trip Computer (See page 82.)

Engine Oil Life (See page 84.)

SH-AWD Torque Distribution Monitor (See page 86.)

Tire Pressure for each tire (See page 85.)

HFL (See page 86.)

On models without navigation system only This display will be shown when the Bluetooth HandsFreeLink is activated.

Keyless Memory Settings (See page 91.)

Outside Temperature (See page 84.)

2

1

TM

2009 TL

The odometer shows the total distance your vehicle has been driven. It measures miles in U.S. models and kilometers in Canadian models. It is illegal under U.S. federal law and Canadian provincial regulations to disconnect, reset, or alter the odometer with the intent to change the number of miles or kilometers indicated.

This meter shows the number of miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) driven since you last reset it. There are two trip meters: Trip A and Trip B. Each trip meter works independently, so you can keep track of two different distances.

To reset a trip meter, display it, and then press and hold the SEL/RESET button until the number resets to 0.0.

When you reset Trip A, average fuel economy A, average vehicle speed A, and elapsed time A are reset at the same time. When you reset Trip B, average fuel economy B, average vehicle speed B, and elapsed time B are reset.

In the customizing mode, you can set Trip A and average fuel economy A to reset at the same time when you refuel your vehicle (see page ).101

CONTINUED

Multi-Information Display

Odometer Trip Meter

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

81

TRIP METER A

CanadaU.S. U.S. Canada

TRIP METER B

ODOMETER

2009 TL

This shows your vehicles average fuel economy in mpg (U.S. models) or liter/100 km (Canadian models) since you last reset Trip A or Trip B.

Along with the trip meter, the trip computer calculates these values:

Average Fuel Economy Average Vehicle Speed

Instant Fuel Economy Elapsed Time

Range

You can customize the Trip A and AVG. FUEL A reset condition on the multi-information display (see page

).101

Trip Computer

Multi-Information Display

AVG. FUEL A/B

82

: Press the INFO button ( / ).

: Press the SEL/RESET button. U.S. model is shown.

Go to SH-AWD monitor (if equipped) or tire pressure monitor. See page 80 for how to switch the main menu display.

2009 TL

This shows the average speed you are traveling in miles per hour (mph) for U.S. models or kilometers per hour (km/h) for Canadian models.

When you turn off the engine, INST. MPG or INST. L/100 km is also reset.

This shows the estimated distance you can travel on the fuel remaining in the fuel tank. This distance is estimated from the fuel economy you received over the last several miles(U.S.) or kilometers (Canada), so it will vary with changes in speed, traffic, etc.

This shows your current fuel economy.

This shows the time passed traveled since you last reset it. When you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, ELAPSED TIME A or B is reset.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

:

180178

INST. MPG (U.S. models)/INST. L/ 100 km (Canadian models)

RANGE

AVG. SPEED A/B ELAPSED TIME A/B

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

83

2009 TL

This shows the outside Fahrenheit temperature in U.S. models, and Celsius temperature in Canadian models.

In certain weather conditions, temperature readings near freezing (32F, 0C) could mean that ice is forming on the road surface.

You can adjust the outside temperature display (see page ).

The temperature sensor is in the front bumper. The temperature reading can be affected by heat reflection from the road surface, engine heat, and the exhaust from surrounding traffic. This can cause an incorrect temperature reading when your vehicle speed is under 19 mph (30 km/h). When you start your trip, the sensor is not fully acclimatized, therefore it may take several minutes until the proper temperature is displayed.

This shows the remaining engine oil life. It shows 100% after the engine oil is replaced and the display is reset. The engine oil life is calculated based on engine operating conditions. For more information, see page .

100 535

Multi-Information Display

Outside Temperature Engine Oil Life

84

OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE

ENGINE OIL LIFE U.S. CANADA

U.S. model is shown.

2009 TL

You can see the pressure of each tire in this monitor. If one or more tires are low, inflate them to the correct pressure. For more information, see page .527

Tire Pressure Monitor

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

85

U.S. Canada

2009 TL

This monitor shows how much torque is being delivered to each wheel. For more information, see page .

You can receive or make phone calls from your cell phone through your vehicles Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) system without touching your cell phone.

You can see HFL information on the navigation screen (see page ).

To use the system, your cell phone and the HFL system must be linked. Not all cell phones are compatible with this system. Refer to page

for instructions on how to link your cell phone to HFL and how to receive or make phone calls, or visit the acura.com/handsfreelink website.

517

422

392

On models without navigation system

On models with navigation system

SH-AWD models only

Bluetooth HandsFreeLinkSH-AWD Torque Distribution Monitor

Multi-Information Display

86

U.S. model is shown.

U.S. model is shown.

2009 TL

If there is a problem with your vehicle, for example, the engine oil level is low or a door is not fully closed, the multi-information display will show you the problem. It does this by interrupting the current display with one or more messages.

The system message(s) triggers the appropriate indicator(s) on the instrument panel, including the system message indicator, to come on. The system message indicator does not go off until the problem(s) is corrected.

You will also hear a beep when the system message comes on for the first time.

Most of the messages are displayed for about 5 seconds, and then the normal display returns. If there are several system messages to be shown, the display switches these messages every 5 seconds.

To switch the message(s) before 5 seconds have elapsed, press the INFO ( / ) button on the steering wheel.

Even if you press the INFO ( / ) button, some messages stay on or come on again at regular intervals until the problem is corrected.

If the system message indicator remains lit on the instrument panel, you can see the corresponding message(s) again by pressing the INFO ( / ) button repeatedly.

Here is a list of all messages:

CONTINUED

System Messages

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

87

SYSTEM MESSAGE INDICATOR

2009 TL

See page 33

See page 11

See page 20

See page 20

See page 33

See page 201

See page 555

See page 597

See page 595

See page 596

See page 595

See page 521

See page 523

See page 76

Multi-Information Display

88

U.S.

Canada

U.S.

Canada

Canada

U.S.

Canada

U.S.

2009 TL

CONTINUED

See page 527

See page 528

See page 528

See page 529

See page 529

See page 73

See page 518

See page 518

See page 536

See page 537

See page 538

See page 136

See page 488

See page 70

See page 507

See page 504

See page 506

On models without

keyless access

system

On models with

keyless access

system

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

89

U.S.

Canada

SH-AWD model only

SH-AWD model only

U.S. model shown

U.S. model shown

2009 TL

See page 145

See page 188

See page 188

See page 185

See page 186

See page 190

See page 191

See page 181

See page 183

See page 182

See page 181

See page 183

See page 552

Multi-Information Display

On models with keyless access system

90

On models without keyless access system

Canadian models only

2009 TL

CONTINUED

If you try to enter the customizing mode while the vehicle is moving, you will see a MUST STOP AND SHIFT TO PARK TO CHANGE SETTINGS message and you cannot change the settings.

You can customize some vehicle control settings for DRIVER 1 and DRIVER 2 separately.

To have the drivers ID detected, make sure the drivers door is unlocked with a corresponding remote transmitter/keyless access remote.

You can customize some vehicle control settings. To change the settings, the ignition switch must be in the ON (II) position, and the vehicle must be stopped with the transmission in Park.

If you turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0) position, or move the shift lever out of Park, the display will change to the normal screen.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) Mode is the equivalent of LOCK (0), ACCESSORY Mode is the equivalent of ACCESSORY (I), and ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages and

.

If you use the key to unlock the drivers door, the system cannot recognize either DRIVER 1 or DRIVER 2.

:

180 178

On models without keyless access system

Multi-Information Display

Keyless Memory Settings

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

91

TM

2009 TL

Refer to the table on the following pages about the settings you want to customize.

If you want to change any vehicle control settings, select Keyless Memory Settings by pressing either INFO button ( / ), then press the SEL/RESET button. Select CHG SETTING, then press the SEL/RESET button.

Multi-Information Display

92

DRIVERS ID

Press the SEL/RESET button.

TM

2009 TL

CONTINUED

Group Setup Menu Item PageDescription Setting Option

LOW MIN OFF

METER SETUP (P.98)

POSITION SETUP (P.107)

LANGUAGE SELECTION

ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP. DISPLAY

TRIP COMPUTER TRIP A INFO RESET

ADJUST ALARM VOLUME

AUTO INTERIOR ILLUMINATION

KEYLESS START GUIDANCE SCREENS MEMORY POSITION LINK

99

100

101

103

104

105

108

Changes the language used in the display.

Changes the outside temperature reading above or below its current reading.

Causes trip meter A and the average fuel economy to reset when you refuel.

Changes the indicator alarm volumes into three levels.

Changes the interior light sensitivity to your liking.

Changes the display of the keyless start guidance screens. Changes the drivers seat and the outside mirror positions to a stored setting.

ENGLISH FRENCH SPANISH

5F 0F 5F (U.S.)

3C 0C 3C (Canada) WITH REFUEL MANUAL ONLY IGN OFF HIGH MID LOW MAX HIGH MID ON OFF ON OFF

1 : 2 :

Default setting Only on models with Keyless Access system

2

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

93

2009 TL

DescriptionGroup Setup Setting OptionMenu Item Page Changes which doors unlock when you use the remote or grab the drivers door handle. Causes some exterior lights to blink when you unlock/lock the doors by grabbing or touching the sensor/pushing the button on the drivers door handle. Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/lock the doors by grabbing or touching the sensor/ pushing the button on the drivers door handle. Changes how long (in seconds) the interior lights stay on after you close the doors. Changes how long (in seconds) the exterior lights stay on after you close the drivers door.

Changes the timing of when the headlights come on. The headlight switch needs to be in the AUTO position.

15 sec

0 sec

LOW MIN

KEYLESS ACCESS SETUP (P.110)

LIGHTING SETUP (P.115)

DRIVER DOOR ALL DOORS ON OFF

ON OFF

60 sec 30 sec 60 sec 30 sec 15 sec MAX HIGH MID

DOOR UNLOCK MODE

KEYLESS ACCESS LIGHT FLASH

KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP

INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING TIME HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER

AUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITY

111

112

113

116

117

118

1 : 2 :

Default setting Only on models with keyless access system

2

1

1

1

1

1

1

Multi-Information Display

94

2009 TL

DescriptionMenu Item Setting Option PageGroup Setup Changes when the doors automatically lock.

Changes when the doors automatically unlock.

Changes which doors unlock with the remote transmitter/keyless access remote on the first push. The exterior lights flash each time you press the LOCK or UNLOCK button. A beeper will also sound when you press the LOCK button twice. Changes how long it takes (in seconds) for the doors to relock and the security system to set after you unlock but do not open the door. Set/Cancel all the customized settings as default.

AUTO DOOR LOCK

AUTO DOOR UNLOCK

KEY AND REMOTE UNLOCK MODE

KEYLESS LOCK ACKNOWLEDGMENT

SECURITY RELOCK TIMER

SHIFT FROM P WITH VEHICLE SPEED OFF SHIFT TO P/DRIVER DOOR SHIFT TO P/ALL DOORS IGN OFF/DRIVER DOOR IGN OFF/ALL DOORS OFF DRIVER DOOR ALL DOORS

ON OFF

90 sec 60 sec 30 sec SET CANCEL

121

123

125

126

127

129

DOOR/WINDOW SETUP (P.120)

DEFAULT ALL (P.129)

: Default setting

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

95

2009 TL

You can customize some of the vehicle control settings to your preference. Here are the settings you can customize:

METER SETUP

When you want to change the vehicle control settings, press the INFO ( / ) button to select CHG SETTING, then press the SEL/ RESET button.

Each time you press the INFO ( / ) button, the screen changes as

shown on the next page. Press the INFO ( / ) button until you see the setup you want to customize, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

If you do not make any changes, select EXIT, the display returns to normal display.DOOR/WINDOW SETUP

LIGHTING SETUP

If you want the settings as they were when the vehicle left the factory, select DEFAULT ALL, as described on page .

POSITION SETUP KEYLESS ACCESS SETUP

: Only on models with keyless access system

129

Customize Settings

Multi-Information Display

96

2009 TL

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

97

: Press the SEL/RESET button.

: Press the INFO button ( / ).

: On models with keyless access system only

DEFAULT ALL See page 129.

METER SETUP See page 98.

KEYLESS ACCSESS SETUP See page 110.

POSITION SETUP See page 107.

DOOR/WINDOW SETUP See page 120.

LIGHTING SETUP See page 115.

2009 TL

LANGUAGE SELECTION ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP. DISPLAY TRIP COMPUTER TRIP A INFO RESET ADJUST ALARM VOLUME AUTO INTERIOR ILLUMINATION

Here are the five or six custom settings for the meter setup:

KEYLESS START GUIDANCE SCREENS

On models with keyless access system

Meter Setup

Multi-Information Display

98

: Press the SEL/RESET button.

: Press the INFO button ( / ).

See page 99.

See page 100.

See page 101.

See page 103.

See page 104.

See page 105. On models with keyless access system only

2009 TL

Press the SEL/RESET button to see the selections.

Select the desired language by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.

There are three language selections you can make: English, French, and Spanish. To choose the language you want, follow these instructions:

You can choose this item to customize from METER SETUP by pressing the INFO ( / ) button repeatedly.

While METER SETUP is shown, press the SEL/RESET button to enter the customize mode.

Each time you press the INFO ( / ) button, the screen changes as

shown in the illustration. Press the INFO ( / ) button until you see the setting you want to customize, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

Language Selection

CONTINUED

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

99

2009 TL

If you sometimes find that the temperature reading is a few degrees above or below the actual temperature, you can adjust it by following these instructions:

You can choose this item to customize from METER SETUP by pressing the INFO ( / ) button repeatedly. Press the SEL/RESET button to enter the setting.

When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customize item screen.

If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to LANGUAGE SELECTION and repeat the procedure again.

The displayed number is the current adjustment above or below the outside temperature.

Adjust the outside temperature value by pressing the INFO ( / ) button repeatedly. Press the SEL/RESET button to set the desired value.

Adjust Outside Temp. Display

Multi-Information Display

100

Canadian modelsU.S. models

2009 TL

CONTINUED

When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customize item screen.

If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP. DISPLAY and repeat the procedure again.

You can select the reset timing of the Trip A information: Trip A, Average Fuel Economy A, Average Vehicle Speed A, and Elapsed Time A.

You can choose this item to customize from METER SETUP by pressing the INFO ( / ) button repeatedly.

WITH REFUEL The Trip A information is reset every time you refuel your vehicle.

MANUAL ONLY You can reset the Trip A information when Trip A is displayed (see page ).

There are three reset choices you can make:

IGN OFF The Trip A information is reset when you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) Mode is the equivalent of LOCK (0). For more information, see pages

and .

81

:

180178

Trip Computer Trip A Info Reset

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

101

U.S. models Canadian models

2009 TL

If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to TRIP COMPUTER TRIP A INFO RESET and repeat the procedure again.

Press the SEL/RESET button to see the selections.

Select the desired setting by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.

When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customize item screen.

Multi-Information Display

102

2009 TL

Adjust Alarm Volume

Select the warning alarm volume from three levels.

You can choose this item to customize from METER SETUP by pressing the INFO ( / ) button repeatedly.

Press the SEL/RESET button to see the selections.

Select the desired level by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/ RESET button.

When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customize item screen.

If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to ADJUST ALARM VOLUME and repeat the procedure again.

CONTINUED

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

103

2009 TL

Auto Interior Illumination While the headlight switch is turned on, the interior lights gradually dim, as the outside light level gets low. You can customize at which outside light level the lights start to dim.

There are MAX, HIGH, MID, LOW and MIN levels and OFF for the auto interior illumination settings.

If you want the illuminations to start dimming as early as possible, select MAX. For illuminations to start dimming as late as possible, select MIN. Choose HIGH, MID, or LOW for levels in between.

To disable the auto interior illumination function, select OFF.

You can choose this item to customize from METER SETUP by pressing the INFO ( / ) button repeatedly.

Press the SEL/RESET button to see the selections.

Select the desired setting by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.

Multi-Information Display

104

2009 TL

When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customize item screen.

If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to AUTO INTERIOR ILLUMINATION and repeat the procedure again.

When this item is set to ON, you will see some guidance messages on the multi-information display. You can change this setting between on and off. For more information on start guidance messages, see page .181

CONTINUED

Keyless Start Guidance Screens On models with keyless access system

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

105

2009 TL

You can choose this item to customize from METER SETUP by pressing the INFO ( / ) button repeatedly.

Press the SEL/RESET button to see the selections.

Select ON or OFF by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/ RESET button.

When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customize item screen.

If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to KEYLESS START GUIDANCE SCREENS and repeat the procedure again.

Multi-Information Display

106

2009 TL

You can customize the MEMORY POSITION LINK setting in position setup.

While POSITION SETUP is shown, press the SEL/RESET button to enter the customize mode.

Each time you press the INFO ( / ) button, the screen changes as

shown in the illustration. Press the INFO ( / ) button until you see the custom setting then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

CONTINUED

Position Setup

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

107

: Press the SEL/RESET button.

: Press the INFO button ( / ).

See page 108.

2009 TL

Memory Position Link

On models with keyless access system

When Memory Position Link is set to ON, the drivers seat and the outside mirrors move to the positions stored in memory. To cause the memory to activate, open the drivers door with the remote transmitter. On models with keyless access system, open the drivers door with the remote, or grab the door handle while carrying the remote.

To set the memory positions, see page .

For information on using the remote, see page .

You can choose this item to customize from POSITION SETUP by pressing the INFO ( /

) button repeatedly.

Press the SEL/RESET button to see the selections.

Select ON or OFF by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/ RESET button.

164

167

Multi-Information Display

108

2009 TL

When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customize item screen.

If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to MEMORY POSITION LINK and repeat the procedure again.

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

109

2009 TL

Each time you press the INFO ( / ) button, the screen changes as

shown in the illustration. Press the INFO ( / ) button, until you see the setting you want to customize, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

While KEYLESS ACCESS SETUP is shown, press the SEL/RESET button to enter the customize mode.

KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP

KEYLESS ACCESS LIGHT FLASH

DOOR UNLOCK MODE

There are three custom settings for the keyless access setup:

On models with keyless access system Keyless Access Setup

Multi-Information Display

110

: Press the INFO button ( / ).

: Press the SEL/RESET button.

See page 113.

See page 112.

See page 111.

2009 TL

Press the SEL/RESET button to see the selections.

When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customize item screen.

To select whether the drivers door or all doors unlock when you open the drivers door with the remote or by grabbing the door handle (while carrying the remote), follow these instructions:

You can choose this item to customize from KEYLESS ACCESS SETUP by pressing the INFO ( /

) button repeatedly.

Select DRIVER DOOR or ALL DOORS by pressing the INFO ( /

) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.

If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to DOOR UNLOCK MODE and repeat the procedure again.

CONTINUED

Door Unlock Mode

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

111

2009 TL

Press the SEL/RESET button to see the selections.

Select ON or OFF by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/ RESET button.

When KEYLESS ACCESS LIGHT FLASH is set to ON, some exterior lights blink twice when you unlock the doors by grabbing the drivers door handle while carrying the remote.

You can choose this item to customize from KEYLESS ACCESS SETUP by pressing the INFO ( /

) button repeatedly.

The same exterior lights blink once when you lock the doors by pushing the door lock button while carrying the remote.

Keyless Access Light Flash

Multi-Information Display

112

2009 TL

When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customize item screen.

When KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP is set to ON, the beeper sounds twice when you unlock the doors by grabbing the drivers door handle while carrying the remote.

If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to KEYLESS ACCESS LIGHT FLASH and repeat the procedure again.

You can choose this item to customize from KEYLESS ACCESS SETUP by pressing the INFO ( /

) button repeatedly.

When you lock the doors by pushing the door lock button while carrying the remote, the beeper sounds once.

CONTINUED

Keyless Access Beep

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

113

2009 TL

Press the SEL/RESET button to see the selections.

When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customize item screen.Select ON or OFF by pressing the

INFO ( / ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/ RESET button.

If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP and repeat the procedure again.

Multi-Information Display

114

2009 TL

INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING TIME HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER

While LIGHTING SETUP is shown, press the SEL/RESET button to enter the customize mode.

Each time you press the INFO ( / ) button, the screen changes as

shown in the illustration. Press the INFO ( / ) button until you see the setting you want to customize, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

Here are the three custom settings for the lighting setup:

AUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITY

CONTINUED

Lighting Setup

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

115

: Press the SEL/RESET button.

: Press the INFO button ( / ).

See page 116.

See page 117.

See page 118.

2009 TL

Interior Light Dimming Time

Press the SEL/RESET button to see the selections.

When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customize item screen.

If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING TIME and repeat the procedure again.

The interior lights fade out when you close all doors. To change how long the lights stay on before they fade out, follow these instructions:

You can choose this item to customize from LIGHTING SETUP by pressing the INFO ( /

) button repeatedly.

Select the desired setting (15 SEC, 30 SEC, or 60 SEC) by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/ RESET button.

Multi-Information Display

116

2009 TL

Headlight Auto Off Timer

You can choose this item to customize from LIGHTING SETUP by pressing the INFO ( /

) button repeatedly.

Press the SEL/RESET button to see the selections.

Select the desired setting (60 SEC, 30 SEC, 15 SEC or 0 SEC) by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.

The headlights, parking lights, side marker lights, taillights, and license plate lights go off after the selected time when you remove the key from the ignition switch and close the drivers door. On models with keyless access system, the lights go off after the selected time when you close the drivers door and take the remote with you. To change how long the lights stay on before they go off, follow these instructions:

CONTINUED

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

117

2009 TL

Auto Light Sensitivity

When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customize item screen.

If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER and repeat the procedure again.

MIN The headlights come on when it is dark.

You can choose this item to customize from LIGHTING SETUP by pressing the INFO ( /

) button repeatedly.

The headlights automatically come on when the headlight switch is in the AUTO position and the ambient light reaches a changeable level. You can select the auto light sensitivity from the following five levels:

MAX The headlights come on when it is bright.

HIGH The headlights come on when it is somewhat bright.

MID The headlights come on when it is as bright as sunset or sunrise.

LOW The headlights come on when it is somewhat dark.

Multi-Information Display

118

2009 TL

When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customize item screen.

If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to AUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITY and repeat the procedure again.

Press the SEL/RESET button to see the selections.

Select the desired setting (MAX, HIGH, MID, LOW or MIN) by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

119

2009 TL

AUTO DOOR LOCK

Here are the five custom settings for the door setup:

AUTO DOOR UNLOCK

While DOOR/WINDOW SETUP is shown, press the SEL/RESET button to enter the customize mode.

Each time you press the INFO ( / ) button, the screen changes as

shown in the illustration. Press the INFO ( / ) button until you see the setting you want to customize, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

SECURITY RELOCK TIMER

KEYLESS LOCK ACKNOWLEDGMENT

KEY AND REMOTE UNLOCK MODE

Multi-Information Display

Door/Window Setup

120

: Press the SEL/RESET button.

: Press the INFO button ( / ).

See page 121.

See page 123.

See page 125.

See page 126.

See page 127.

2009 TL

Auto Door Lock There are three settings you can choose from:

SHIFT FROM P The doors lock whenever you move the shift lever out of Park.

Select the desired setting by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.

Press the SEL/RESET button to enter the selecting mode.

You can choose this item to customize from DOOR/WINDOW SETUP by pressing the INFO ( /

) button repeatedly.

WITH VEHICLE SPEED The doors lock when the vehicle speed reaches about 10 mph (about 16 km/h).

OFF The auto door lock is deactivated all the time.

CONTINUED

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

121

2009 TL

If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to AUTO DOOR LOCK and repeat the procedure again.

When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customize item screen.

Multi-Information Display

122

2009 TL

Auto Door Unlock

You can choose this item to customize from DOOR/WINDOW SETUP by pressing the INFO ( /

) button repeatedly.

There are five possible settings you can choose from:

DRIVER DOOR WITH SHIFT TO P The drivers door unlocks when

you move the shift lever to Park.

ALL DOORS WITH SHIFT TO P All the doors unlock when you move the shift lever to Park.

OFF The auto door unlock is deactivated all the time.

DRIVER DOOR WITH IGN OFF The drivers door unlocks when you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position.

ALL DOORS WITH IGN OFF All the doors unlock when you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) Mode is the equivalent of LOCK (0). For more information, see pages

and .

:

178 180

CONTINUED

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

123

2009 TL

If you choose IGN OFF, you will see the above display.

Press the SEL/RESET button to see the selections.

Select the desired setting by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.

Press the INFO ( / ) button to switch the door lock mode setting between the drivers door and all doors. Then, press the SEL/RESET button to enter your selection.

When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customize item screen.

If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to AUTO DOOR UNLOCK and repeat the procedure again.

Multi-Information Display

124

2009 TL

If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to KEY AND REMOTE UNLOCK MODE and repeat the procedure again.

When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customize item screen.

Press the SEL/RESET button to enter the selecting mode.

Select the desired setting by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.

You can select whether the drivers door or all the doors unlock the first time you press the unlock button on the remote transmitter/keyless access remote.

You can choose this item to customize from DOOR/WINDOW SETUP by pressing the INFO ( /

) button repeatedly.

Key and Remote Unlock Mode

CONTINUED

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

125

2009 TL

Keyless Lock Acknowledgment

Select ON or OFF by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/ RESET button.

Press the SEL/RESET button to enter the selecting mode.

You can choose this item to customize from DOOR/WINDOW SETUP by pressing the INFO ( /

) button repeatedly.

When you push the LOCK button on the remote transmitter or the keyless access remote, some exterior lights flash, and a beeper sounds when you push the LOCK button again within 5 seconds to verify that the doors and the trunk are locked and the security system has set (see page ). You can customize the exterior lights not to flash and the beeper not to sound.

When you press the UNLOCK button on the remote transmitter or the keyless access remote to unlock the drivers door/all the doors (depending on the customize setting), the exterior lights blink twice to verify that the door(s) is unlocked and the security system is turned off.

To turn this feature on or off, follow these instructions.

380

Multi-Information Display

126

2009 TL

Security Relock Timer

On models with keyless access system

When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customize item screen.

If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to KEYLESS LOCK ACKNOWLEDGMENT and repeat the procedure again.

You can change this relock time from 30 seconds to 60 or 90 seconds.

You can choose this item to customize from DOOR/WINDOW SETUP by pressing the INFO ( /

) button repeatedly.

If you unlock the doors with the remote transmitter or the keyless access remote, but do not open any of the doors within 30 seconds, the doors automatically relock, and the security system sets.

When you unlock the doors by touching either front door handle while carrying the keyless access remote, the relock time is fixed in 30 seconds.

CONTINUED

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

127

2009 TL

When your selection is successfully completed, the display changes as shown above, and then goes back to the customize item screen.Select the desired setting by

pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then enter your selection by pressing the SEL/RESET button.

Press the SEL/RESET button to enter the selecting mode.

If the SETTING INCOMPLETE message appears, go back to SECURITY RELOCK TIMER and repeat the procedure again.

Multi-Information Display

128

2009 TL

If you want to set the default settings, press the INFO ( / ) button to select DEFAULT ALL, then press the SEL/RESET button.

If the setting is not successfully completed, FAILED is shown for several seconds, and then the screen goes back to the normal message mode. Repeat the same procedure to select DEFAULT ALL.

If you want to cancel DEFAULT ALL, select CANCEL, then press the SEL/RESET button. The screen goes back to the previous display.

To set the default settings, press the INFO ( / ) button to select SET then press the SEL/RESET button.

When DEFAULT ALL is set, you will see the above display for several seconds, then the screen returns to the default all setting display.

DEFAULT ALL

Multi-Information Display Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

129

2009 TL

To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel. If equipped Refer to the navigation system owners manual.

1 : 2 : 3 :

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

130

SEAT HEATER SWITCHES

PADDLE SHIFTERS

REMOTE AUDIO CONTROL BUTTONS

INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM OFF SWITCH

CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONS

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF INDICATOR

HAZARD WARNING BUTTON

CENTER DISPLAY

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS

STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENTS

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS/ FOG LIGHTS

BLUETOOTH HANDSFREELINK SYSTEM BUTTONS

HEADLIGHT WASHERS

VOICE CONTROL BUTTONS for NAVIGATION SYSTEM / BLUETOOTH HANDSFREELINK SYSTEM MULTI-INFORMATION

DISPLAY BUTTONS

NAVIGATION DISPLAY

HORN

Vehicle with navigation system is shown.

KEYLESS ACCESS REMOTE SLOT (P. 189)

ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON(P. 177)

(P. 137)

(P. 133, 137)

(P. 394)

(P. 524)

(P. 132)

(P. 140) (P. 78)

(P. 374) (P. 512)

(P. 131)

(P. 134)

(P. 139)

(P. 215, 278)

(P. 139, 163)

(P. 277)

(P. 224)

(P. 193)

(P. 386)

INTERFACE DIAL SELECTOR KNOB

(P. 420, 424)

2

3

3

1

2

2009 TL

MIST OFF INT Intermittent LO Low speed HI High speed Windshield washers

Push the right lever up or down to select a position.

The wipers run at high speed until you release the lever.

The wipers are not activated.

The wipers run at low speed.

The wipers run at high speed.

Pull the wiper control lever toward you, and hold it. The washers spray until you release the lever. The wipers run at low speed, then complete one more sweep after you release the lever.

Vary the delay by turning the adjustment ring. If you turn it to the shortest delay ( position), the wipers change to low speed operation when the vehicle speed exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).

The length of the wipe interval is varied automatically according to vehicles speed.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

CONTINUED

MIST

OFF

LO

HI

Windshield Washers

INT

Windshield Wipers and Washers Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

131

ADJUSTMENT RING

2009 TL

When you activate the windshield washer with the headlights turned on, the headlight washer will be activated under certain conditions. For more information, see

section in the next column.

The headlight washers use the same fluid reservoir as the windshield washers.

The headlight washers can be operated at any time by pressing the headlight washer button located next to the steering wheel column. The headlights must be turned on to use this button. In addition, the headlight washer operates without pressing the button at the first time you turn on the windshield washers after you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

:

178 180

Canadian SH-AWD models only Headlight Washers

Windshield Wipers and Washers

Headlight Washers

Canadian SH-AWD models only

132

HEADLIGHT WASHER SWITCH

2009 TL

Push down on the left lever to signal a left turn and up to signal a right turn. To signal a lane change, push lightly on the lever and hold it. The lever will return to the center when you release it or complete a turn.

Turning the switch to the position turns on the parking lights, taillights, instrument panel lights, side-marker lights, and rear license plate lights.

Turning the switch to the position turns on the headlights.

When the light switch is in either of these positions, the lights on indicator comes on as a reminder.

Turn Signal Off Parking and instrument panel AUTO Headlights on High beams Flash high beams Fog lights off Fog lights on

This indicator stays on if you leave the light switch on and turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0) position.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) Mode is the equivalent of LOCK (0) and ACCESSORY Mode is the equivalent of ACCESSORY (I). For more information, see pages

and .

If you leave the lights on with the key removed from the ignition switch, or with the power mode in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), you will hear a reminder chime when you open the drivers door.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

:

178 180

CONTINUED

Turn Signals and Headlights

Turn Signal

Headlights

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

133

2009 TL

The automatic lighting feature turns on the headlights and all other exterior lights when it senses low ambient light.

To turn on automatic lighting, turn the light switch to AUTO. The lights will come on automatically when the outside light level becomes low (at dusk, for example). The lights on indicator comes on as a reminder. The lights and indicator will turn off automatically when the system senses high ambient light.

Push the left lever forward until you hear a click. The blue high beam indicator will come on (see page ). Pull the lever back to return to the low beams.

To flash the high beams, pull the lever back lightly, then release it. The high beams will stay on as long as you hold the lever back.

The lights will remain on when you turn off the ignition switch. They will turn off automatically when you remove the key and open the drivers door. To turn them on again, either turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position or turn the light switch to the position.

Even with the automatic lighting feature turned on, we recommend that you turn on the lights manually when driving at night or in a dense fog, or when you enter dark areas such as long tunnels or parking facilities.

The lights will remain on when you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). They will turn off automatically when you open the drivers door and take the remote with you. To turn them on again, either set the power mode to ON or turn the light switch to the

position.

To change the AUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITY setting, see page

.

Do not leave the light switch in AUTO if you will not be driving the vehicle for an extended period (a week or more). You should also turn off the lights if you plan to leave the engine idling or off for a long time.

71

118

On all modelsOn models without keyless access system

On models with keyless access systemAUTO

High Beams

Headlights

134

2009 TL

The automatic lighting feature is controlled by a sensor located on top of the dashboard. Do not cover this sensor or spill liquids on it.

The automatic lighting off feature turns off the headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights within 15 seconds after you remove the key and close the drivers door, or on models with keyless access system, set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), take the remote with you, and close the drivers door.

If you remove the key (or the vehicle is in VEHICLE OFF mode on models with keyless access system), and the drivers door is opened and closed, the automatic lighting off feature activates with the headlight switch in the or position, or the lights turned on by setting the switch in the AUTO position.

To change the HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER setting, see page .

If you turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position with the headlight switch on, but do not open the door and get out, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (3 minutes, if the switch is in the AUTO position).

Your vehicle has the engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. For more information on selecting the power mode, see page .

117

On models with keyless access system

178

:

CONTINUED

Automatic Lighting Off Feature

Headlights Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

135

LIGHT SENSOR

2009 TL

If you see a CHECK DRL SYSTEM message on the multi- information display, there is a problem with the daytime running light system. Take your vehicle to a dealer to have it checked.

The headlights revert to normal operation when you turn them on with the switch.

The lights will turn on again when you unlock or open the drivers door. If you unlock the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights will go off. With the drivers door open, you will hear a lights on reminder chime.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) Mode is the equivalent of LOCK (0). For more information, see pages

and .

With the headlight switch off or in the position, the high beam headlights and the high beam indicator come on with reduced brightness when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position and release the parking brake. They remain on until you turn the ignition switch off, even if you set the parking brake.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

:

178 180 :

178 180

Headlights

Daytime Running Lights

136

2009 TL

Turn the fog lights on and off by turning the switch next to the headlight switch.

You can use the fog lights only when the headlights are on low beam.

With the light switch in the AUTO position, you can also use the fog lights when the headlights turn on automatically. They will go off when the headlights turn off.

Adjust the brightness of the instrument panel by pressing the or button with the ignition switch in the ON (II) position. Press the button to increase the brightness and the button to decrease it.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

:

180178

CONTINUED

Fog Lights Instrument Panel Brightness

Fog Lights, Instrument Panel Brightness Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

137

ADJUSTMENT BUTTONFOG LIGHT SWITCH

2009 TL

If your vehicle is equipped with the navigation system, the navigation system screen will also go to full brightness. This can be helpful when using the headlights during daylight hours.

To reduce glare at night, the instrument panel illumination dims when you turn the light switch to

or . To cancel the glare reduction function, set the brightness to the highest level, then press the button. You will hear a beep when it is canceled.

When the brightness reaches the maximum level, BRIGHTNESS MAXIMUM LEVEL appears on the display.

The level of brightness is shown on the multi-information display while you adjust it. It goes out 5 seconds after you finish adjusting.

Instrument Panel Brightness

138

U.S. model is shown.

2009 TL

Push the button between the center vents to turn on the hazard warning lights (four-way flashers). This causes all four outside turn signals and both indicators in the instrument panel to flash. Use the hazard warning lights if you need to park in a dangerous area near heavy traffic, or if your vehicle is disabled.

The rear window defogger clears fog, frost, and thin ice from the window. Push the defogger button to turn it on and off. The indicator in the button comes on to show the defogger is on. If you do not turn it off, the defogger will shut itself off within about 10 to 30 minutes according to the outside temperature. It also shuts off when you turn off the ignition switch, or set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) on

models with keyless access system. You have to turn it on again when you restart the vehicle.

Make sure the rear window is clear and you have good visibility before starting to drive.

The defogger and antenna wires on the inside of the rear window can be accidentally damaged. When cleaning the glass, always wipe side to side.

Pushing this button also turns the mirror heaters on or off. For more information, see page .163

Hazard Warning Button Rear Window Defogger

Hazard Warning Button, Rear Window Defogger Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

139

HAZARD WARNING BUTTON

U.S. model is shown.

2009 TL

Push the lever up to lock the steering wheel in that position.

Make any steering wheel adjustments before you start driving.

Push the lever under the steering column all the way down.

Move the steering wheel up or down, and in or out, so it points toward your chest, not toward your face. Make sure you can see the instrument panel gauges and indicators.

Make sure you have securely locked the steering wheel in place by trying to move it up, down, in, and out.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Steering Wheel Adjustments

140

LEVER

Adjusting the steering wheel position while driving may cause you to lose control of the vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel only when the vehicle is stopped.

2009 TL

You should have received a key number tag with your key. You will need this key number if you ever have to get a lost key replaced. Use only an Acura-approved key blank.

Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them.

Protect the key from direct sunlight, high temperature, and high humidity.

Keep the keys away from liquids. If they get wet, dry them immediately with a soft cloth.

These keys contain electronic circuits that are activated by the immobilizer system. They will not work to start the engine if the circuits are damaged.

The valet key does not contain a battery. Do not try to take it apart.The valet key works only in the

ignition and the drivers door lock. You can keep the trunk pass-through cover and the glove box locked when you leave your vehicle and the valet key at a parking facility.

The master key fits all the locks on your vehicle.

CONTINUED

On models without keyless access system

Keys and Locks Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

141

KEY NUMBER TAG

VALET KEY (GRAY)

MASTER KEY

2009 TL

Always make sure the key is fully extended when you insert it to the ignition switch. If the key is not fully extended the immobilizer system may not operate properly and prevent the engine from starting.

The master key can be retracted into the remote transmitter. To use the key, push the release button to release the key from the transmitter. The key should be fully extended. To retract the key, push the release button and at the same time push the key into the remote transmitter until it is securely latched.

The key may come in contact with your finger while being retracted or extended. Make sure your fingers do not touch the pivot of the key when retracting or extending it.

Each keyless access remote has the built-in key. This key is used to lock/ unlock the doors when the remote battery becomes weak and the power door lock/unlock operation is disabled. You cannot start the engine with this key.

The built-in key (see page ) fits all the locks on your vehicle.

191

On models with keyless access systemRetractable Master Key

Keys and Locks

142

Push

RELEASE BUTTON

KEY NUMBER TAGBUILT-IN KEYS

2009 TL

CONTINUED

You should have received a key number tag with your keys. You will need this key number if you ever have to get a lost key replaced. Use only Acura-approved key blanks.

The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from theft. If an improperly coded key or keyless access remote (or other device) is used, the engines fuel system is disabled.

When you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, or select the ON mode with the engine start/ stop button, the immobilizer system indicator should come on briefly, then go off. If the indicator starts to blink, it means the system does not recognize the coding of the key or keyless access remote.

On models without keyless access system, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position, remove the key, reinsert it, and turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position again.

On models with keyless access system, set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), then select the ON mode again.

The system may not recognize your keys or remotes coding if another immobilizer key or other metal object (i.e. key chain) is near the ignition switch or the keyless access remote when you insert the key or set the power mode to ON.

Your vehicle has the engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. See page for a comparison between conventional power switches and your engine start/stop button. For more information on selecting the power mode, see page .

: On models with keyless access system

178

180

Keys and Locks, Immobilizer System

Immobilizer System

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

143

2009 TL

If the system repeatedly does not recognize the coding of your key or keyless access remote, contact your dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this system or add other devices to it. Electrical problems could result that may make your vehicle inoperable.

If you have lost your key or keyless access remote and you cannot start the engine, contact your dealer.

As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Immobilizer System

144

Always take the ignition key or the keyless access remote with the built-in key with you whenever you leave the vehicle alone.

2009 TL

If the front wheels are turned, the anti-theft lock may make it difficult to turn the key. Firmly turn the steering wheel to the left or right as you turn the key.

You can operate the audio system and the accessory power sockets in this position.

This is the normal key position when driving. Several of the indicators on the instrument panel come on as a test when you turn the ignition switch from the ACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II) position.

You will hear a reminder beeper if you leave the key in the ignition switch in the LOCK (0) or the ACCESSORY (I) position and open the drivers door. Remove the key to turn off the beeper.

Use this position only to start the engine. The switch returns to the ON (II) position when you let go of the key.

You can insert or remove the key only in this position. To turn the key to the LOCK (0) position, the shift lever must be in Park, and you must push the key in slightly.

The ignition switch has four positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY (I), ON (II), and START (III).

You will also see a REMOVE KEY message on the multi-information display.

The shift lever must be in Park before you can remove the key from the ignition switch.

On models without keyless access system

ACCESSORY (I)

ON (II)

START (III)LOCK (0)

Ignition Switch Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

145

2009 TL

You can customize the door lock/ unlock settings (see page ).

You can open or close the windows and the moonroof by using the key in the drivers door (see page ).

To lock all doors, push the front of the master door lock switch on either front door, pull the lock tab rearward on the drivers door, or turn the key counterclockwise in the outside lock on the drivers door.

All doors can be locked from the outside by using the key in the drivers door. To unlock only the drivers door, insert the key, turn it clockwise, and release it. The remaining doors unlock when you turn the key a second time within a few seconds.

The built-in key can be used to lock/ unlock the doors when the remote battery becomes weak and the power door lock/unlock operation is

disabled. For more information, see page .

When the door is unlocked, you can see the red indicator on the lock tab above the inner door handle.

The lock tab on any passengers door locks and unlocks that door.

Pushing the rear of either master door lock switch will unlock all doors. Pushing forward the lock tab on the drivers door unlocks only that door.

120

197

191

On models with keyless access system

Door Locks

146

MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

Unlock

Lock

LOCK TAB

RED INDICATOR Unlock

Lock

2009 TL

If you forget and leave the key in the ignition switch, lockout prevention will not allow you to lock the drivers door. With any door open and the key in the ignition switch, locking with master door lock switch is disabled. If the drivers door is closed, the lock tab on the drivers door is not disabled. Pulling the drivers lock tab rearward will lock all doors. If you try to lock an open drivers door by pulling the lock tab rearward, the drivers door lock tab pops out and unlocks the drivers door.

The childproof door locks are designed to prevent children seated in the rear from accidentally opening the rear doors. Each rear door has a lock lever near the edge. With the lever in the LOCK position (lever is down), the door cannot be opened from the inside regardless of the position of the lock tab. To open the door, push the lock tab forward and use the outside door handle.

To lock any passengers door when getting out of the vehicle, pull the lock tab rearward and close the door.

To lock the drivers door, remove the key from the ignition switch, pull the lock tab rearward or push the front of the master switch, then close the door.

When you shift to P after driving, the drivers door unlocks.

When the vehicle speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h) or more, all the doors lock automatically.

Default setting

On models without keyless access system

On models without keyless access system

Door Locks

Lockout Prevention Childproof Door Locks

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

147

LEVER

Unlock

Lock

2009 TL

If the doors are unlocked, press the trunk release switch on the trunk lid.

If the doors are locked, press the trunk release switch on the trunk lid with the remote in keyless access operating range.

You can open the trunk in any of the following ways:

Press the trunk release button on the drivers door.

Press and hold the trunk release button on the remote transmitter or the keyless access remote.

To open the trunk from the outside, push the release switch, then lift up.

The built-in key can be used to lock/unlock the doors and trunk when the remote battery becomes weak and the power door lock/unlock operation is disabled. For more information, see page .

To unlock the trunk, turn the key twice to unlock the doors, push the rear of either master door lock switch, or push UNLOCK twice on the keyless access remote.

The trunk will lock when you lock the drivers door with the key , the keyless access remote, either master door lock switch, or the lock tab on the drivers door.

:

191

On models with keyless access system

On models with keyless access system

Trunk

148

TRUNK RELEASE SWITCH

TRUNK RELEASE BUTTON

2009 TL

If your vehicles battery goes dead or is disconnected, you can open the trunk from the rear seat by pulling the trunk release tab through the trunk pass-through.

Pull down the rear seat armrest. Pull on the tab at the top of the inner partition, and press on the button to fully release the cover. Reach in and locate the rubber tab, and pull it out.

Keep the trunk lid closed at all times while driving to avoid damaging it, and to prevent exhaust gas from getting into the interior. See

, page .

To close the trunk, use the inner handle to lower the lid, then press down on the back edge.

57

CONTINUED

On all models

Trunk

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

149

INNER HANDLE

BUTTON

COVER

TAB

INNER PARTITION

RUBBER TAB

2009 TL

To protect items in the trunk, you can disable the trunk release button on the drivers door by turning off the trunk main switch in the glove box, locking the glove box, and locking the trunk pass-through cover with the master key or the built-in key.

As a safety feature, your vehicle has a release lever on the trunk latch so the trunk can be opened from inside. To open the trunk, push the release lever in the direction pointed by an arrow.

Parents should decide if their children should be shown how to use this feature. For more information about child safety, see page .

If you need to give the key to someone else, give them the valet key.

To use the valet function, remove the built-in key from the remote by pressing the button, then give that remote to someone else as a valet key (see page ).

Your vehicle is equipped with the emergency fuel lid release in the trunk. Refer to page for how to access it.

192

598

41

On models without keyless access system

On models with keyless access system

Trunk

Emergency Trunk Opener

Emergency Fuel Lid Release

150

TRUNK RELEASE LEVER

TRUNK MAIN SWITCH

OFF

Vehicle with keyless access system is shown.

2009 TL

CONTINUED

Press this button once to unlock the drivers door or all the doors (depending on the keyless memory setting). Press it twice to unlock the other doors. Some exterior lights will flash twice each time you press the button.

Press this button once to lock all doors. Some exterior lights will flash. When you push LOCK twice within 5 seconds, you will hear a beep to verify that the doors are locked and the security system has set. You cannot lock the doors if any door is not fully closed or if the key is in the ignition switch.

If you do not open any door within 30 seconds, the doors automatically relock and the security system sets.

The keyless lock acknowledgment beep and flashing of the lights can be deactivated (see page ).

The door activated map lights come on when you press the UNLOCK button if the door activated position is selected by pressing the light control button (DOOR). If you do not open any door within 30 seconds (or whatever setting of the interior light dimming time is set to), the light(s) will fade out. If you relock the doors with the remote transmitter before 30 seconds have elapsed, the light(s) will go off immediately.

To change the lock/unlock setting and the relock timer setting, refer to the customized settings on page .

You can also open all power windows and the moonroof from outside the vehicle with the remote transmitter (see page ).

126

120

197

On models without keyless access system

Remote Transmitter

UNLOCK

LOCK

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

151

LOCK BUTTON

PANIC BUTTON

TRUNK BUTTON

LED

UNLOCK BUTTON

2009 TL

Be careful when removing this screw as the head of the screw can strip out.

Separate the keypad from the transmitter by pushing any button from outside.

Press this button for about 1 second to open the trunk.

Press this button for about 2 seconds to attract attention: the horn will sound, and the exterior lights will flash for about 30 seconds. To cancel panic mode, press any other button on the remote transmitter, or turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.

Avoid dropping or throwing the transmitter. Protect the transmitter from extreme temperature. Do not immerse the transmitter in any liquid. If you lose a transmitter, the replacement needs to be reprogrammed by your dealer.

If it takes several pushes on the button to lock or unlock the doors, replace the battery as soon as possible.

Battery type: CR1616

On models with keyless access system, see page for how to replace the battery on the keyless access remote.

To replace the battery:

Remove the screw at the base of the transmitter with a small Phillips-head screwdriver.

1. 2.

175

Remote Transmitter

TRUNK

PANIC

Replacing the Transmitter Battery

Remote Transmitter Care

152

NOTE:

KEYPADSCREW

2009 TL

Remove the old battery and note the polarity. Make sure the polarity of the new battery is the same ( side facing up), then insert it in the keypad.

Place a cloth on the edge of the keypad, and remove the upper half by carefully prying on the edge with a small flat-tip screwdriver or coin.

An improperly disposed of battery can hurt the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal.

Snap the two halves of the keypad, then install the parts in reverse order.

4.

5.

3.

As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Remote Transmitter Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

153

BATTERY

2009 TL

When you unlock the drivers door with your remote transmitter, each remote transmitter activates the customized settings related to that remote.

When you unlock and open the drivers door with the remote, the drivers seat (except power lumbar) and outside mirrors move to the positions stored in memory. An indicator on one of the driving position memory buttons on the drivers door also comes on.

You will also see the DRIVER 1 or DRIVER 2 message on the multi- information display, depending on which linked remote transmitter is used.

Driving position memory (see page ).

Customized settings (see page ).

Here are the settings activated with the remote:

The driving position memory activated (Driver 1, Driver 2) is shown on the back of each transmitter. Make sure you store your desired driving position in the memory that is activated by the transmitter you normally carry.

Audio system settings (see page ).

Climate control settings (see page ).

96

164

224

214

Remote Transmitter

Recalling a Memorized Driving Position

154

Driver 1 Driver 2

2009 TL

CONTINUED

See pages for important safety information and warnings about how to properly position the seats and seat- backs.

1513

The passenger seat has the same adjustments as the drivers seat but without any lumbar adjustment.

Raises or lowers the seat.

Moves the whole seat up and forward, or down and backward. The front of the seat also tilts up or down at the same time.

Increases or decreases the lumbar support. (Drivers seat only)

Adjusts the seat-back angle forward or backward.

The controls for the power adjustable front seats are on the outside edge of each seat bottom. You can adjust the seats with the ignition switch in any position. Make all seat adjustments before you start driving.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) Mode is the equivalent of LOCK (0), ACCESSORY Mode is the equivalent of ACCESSORY (I),

and ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages and

.

Moves the seat forward and backward.

Moves the front of the seat up or down.

:

180 178

Seats

Front Seat Power Adjustments

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

155

Drivers seat

2009 TL

See page for important safety information and a warning about improperly positioning head restraints.

15

Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints in all seating positions to help protect you and your passengers from whiplash and other injuries.

The drivers seat includes a memory feature. Two seat positions can be stored in separate memories. You can then select a memorized position by pushing the appropriate memory button. Refer to page for how to memorize and select the seat positions.

164

Seats

Head Restraints

156

Passengers seat

2009 TL

They are most effective when you adjust them so the center of the back of the occupants head rests against the center of the restraint.

The head restraints adjust for height. You need both hands to adjust the restraint. Do not attempt to adjust it while driving. To raise a front or rear center head restraint, pull upward. To lower the restraint, push the release button sideways, and push the restraint down.

CONTINUED

Adjusting the Head Restraint

Seats Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

157

Front

LEGS

SEAT- BACK

CUSHION

RELEASE BUTTON

Rear Center CUSHION

SEAT-BACK

RELEASE BUTTON

LEGS

2009 TL

To lower either rear outer head restraint for better visibility, press the tilt button on the side of the head restraint. It folds down backward. To raise the rear outer head restraint, pull up it on the rear by hand. Make sure the head restraint locks in position when you lower or raise it.

When reinstalling a head restraint, put the legs back in place. Then adjust it to the appropriate height while pressing the release button.

To remove a front or rear center head restraint for cleaning or repair, pull it up as far as it will go. Push the release button, then pull the restraint out of the seat-back.

Make sure the head restraint locks in position when you reinstall it.

To remove either rear outer head restraint, push the tilt button, then fold the head restraint backward. Push the release button, then pull the restraint out of the seat-back.

Seats

Removing the Head Restraint

158

Rear Outer

TILT BUTTON

Rear Outer TILT BUTTON

RELEASE BUTTON

Failure to reinstall the head restraints can result in severe injury during a crash.

Always replace the head restraints before driving.

2009 TL

The drivers and front passengers seats have active head restraints. If the vehicle is struck severely from the rear, the occupant properly secured with the seat belt will be pushed against the seat-back and the head restraint will automatically move forward.

This reduces the distance between the restraint and the occupants head. It also helps protect the occupants

against whiplash and injuries to the neck and upper spine.

After a collision, the activated restraint should return to its normal position.

For a head restraint system to work properly:

Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or from the restraint legs.

Do not place any object between an occupant and the seat-back.

Install each restraint in its proper location.

If the restraints do not return to their normal position, or in the event of a severe collision, have the vehicle inspected by an Acura dealer.

Only use genuine Acura replacement head restraints.

Active Head Restraints

Seats Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

159

2009 TL

The lid of the console compartment can be used as an armrest.

The rear seat armrest is in the center of the rear seat. Pivot it down to use it.

A beverage holder is located in the armrest.

To open the cover, pull down the rear seat armrest. Pull on the tab at the top of the inner partition, and press on the button to fully release the cover. To close the cover, swing it up, and push firmly on the top. Make sure it latches properly.

Trunk Pass-through CoverArmrest

Seats

160

Front Rear

TAB

INNER PARTITION COVER

BUTTON To lock

2009 TL

Make sure all items in the trunk and those extending through the pass- through are secured.

Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and adjusted for best visibility. Be sure to adjust the mirrors before you start driving.

The inside mirror can automatically darken to reduce glare. To turn on this feature, press the button on the bottom of the mirror. The AUTO indicator comes on as a reminder. When it is on, the mirror darkens when it senses the headlights of a vehicle behind you, then returns to normal visibility when the lights are gone. Press the button again to turn off this feature.

For security, this cover can be locked and unlocked only with the master key(the built-in key on models with keyless access system). To lock the cover, insert the key, and turn it clockwise.

Never drive with this cover open and the trunk lid open. See on page .57

CONTINUED

Mirrors

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Seats, Mirrors Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

161

AUTO BUTTON

SENSORINDICATOR

There is also a sensor on the back of the mirror. Items hung on the mirror may block this sensor and af f ect its perf ormance.

2009 TL

Both outside door mirrors have a reverse tilt feature. When in reverse, the selected mirror will tilt down slightly to improve your view as you parallel park. Shifting out of reverse will return the mirror to its original position.

To tilt the drivers mirror, place the selector switch in the left position.

To tilt the passengers mirror, place the switch in the right position.

To turn the feature off, place the switch in the center position.

Outside mirror positions can be stored in the driving position memory system (see page ).

When you finish, move the selector switch to the center (off) position. This turns the adjustment switch off to keep your settings.

Push the appropriate edge of the adjustment switch to move the mirror right, left, up, or down.

With the ignition switch in the ON (II) position, move the selector switch to the L (drivers side), or R (passengers side).

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

3.

1.

2.

164

:

178 180

Adjusting the Power Mirrors Reverse Tilt Door Mirror

Mirrors

162

ADJUSTMENT SWITCH

SELECTOR SWITCH

2009 TL

This heated mirror function has a timer (see page ).

The outside mirrors are heated to remove fog and frost. With the ignition switch in the ON (II) position, or the power mode ON, turn on the heaters by pressing the button. The indicator in the button comes on as a reminder. Press the button again to turn the heaters off. Pressing this button also turns the rear window defogger on and off.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

139

:

178 180

Mirrors

Power Mirror Heaters

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

163

HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

2009 TL

Store a driving position only when the vehicle is parked.

Your vehicle has a memory feature for the drivers seat and outside mirror positions.

Seat, except for power lumbar, and outside mirror positions can be stored in separate memories. You select a memorized position by pushing the appropriate button or using the appropriate remote transmitter or the keyless access remote (Driver 1 or Driver 2).

Adjust the seat to a comfortable position (see page ).

Adjust the outside mirrors for best visibility (see page ).

Press and release the SET button on the control panel. You will hear a beep. Immediately press and hold one of the memory buttons (1 or 2) until you hear two beeps. The indicator in the memory button will come on. The current positions of the drivers seat and outside mirrors are now stored.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. You cannot add a new driving position to the memory unless the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position. You can recall a memorized position with the ignition switch in any position.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

3.

1.

2.

162

155

:

179 180

Storing a Driving Position in Memory

Driving Position Memory System

164

MEMORY BUTTONS

SET BUTTON

2009 TL

Not press a memory button within 5 seconds.

Readjust the seat position.

Doing any of the following after pressing the SET button will cancel the storing procedure:

Readjust the outside mirror position.

To select a memorized position, do this:

Make sure the shift lever is in Park.

Press the desired memory button (1 or 2) until you hear a beep, then release the button.

Each memory button stores only one driving position. Storing a new position erases the previous setting stored in that buttons memory. If you want to add a new position while retaining the current one, use the other memory button.

Change the power mode out from ON.

Turn the ignition switch out from the ON (II) position.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

On models without keyless access system

On models with keyless access system

Driving Position Memory System

Selecting a Memorized Position

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

165

MEMORY BUTTONS

2009 TL

If desired, you can use the adjustment switches to change the positions of the seat or outside mirrors after they are in their memorized positions. If you change the memorized position, the indicator in the memory button will go out. To keep this driving position for later use, you must store it in the driving position memory.

To stop the systems automatic adjustment, do any of these actions:

Push any of the adjustment switches for the seat.

Shift out of Park.

Adjust the outside mirrors.

The system will move the seat and outside mirrors to the memorized positions. The indicator in the selected memory button will flash during movement. When the adjustments are complete, you will hear two beeps, and the indicator will remain on.

To change the MEMORY POSITION LINK setting, see page

.

Press any button on the drivers door: SET, memory button 1 or 2.

108

Driving Position Memory System

166

2009 TL

Always keep the remote and the built-in key away from any magnetic material.

You should have received a key number tag with your built-in key. You will need this key number if you ever have to get a lost key replaced. Use only Acura-approved key blanks.

Your vehicle has a keyless access system. This system allows you to operate the vehicle without an ignition key. When you carry the remote with you, you can lock/ unlock the door(s), unlock the trunk, and start the engine.

When the vehicle battery is dead. When the remote battery is dead.

A vehicle is being operated with a transmitter nearby.

The remote is covered by metal.

You carry a cell phone, a laptop computer, or other electrical device near the remote.

There is strong electrical current nearby.

The battery of the remote is weak. The system may not work if:

Each keyless access remote has the built-in key. This key is used to lock/ unlock the doors when the remote battery becomes weak and the power door lock/unlock operation is disabled. You cannot start the engine with this key.

Make sure the driver always carries the remote/built-in key set.

Protect the remote and the built-in key from direct sunlight, high temperature, and high humidity.

Do not drop the remote or the built-in key, and do not set heavy objects on them.

Keep the remote and the built-in key away from liquids. If they get wet, dry them immediately with a soft cloth.

The built-in keys do not contain batteries.

On models with navigation system

Keyless Access System Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

167

2009 TL

The following keys come with your vehicle. Refer to page for how to separate the keys.

This key is used to lock/unlock the doors, glove box, and trunk pass- through cover.

This remote is used to lock/unlock the doors and unlock the trunk. When you carry the remote, you can lock/unlock the doors, unlock the trunk, and start the engine.

Anyone can lock/unlock a door or open the trunk if the remote is within the operating range of the door or the trunk.

You can lock/unlock the doors within about a 32 inch (about 80 cm) radius from the outside door handle. You can open the trunk within about a 32 inch (about 80 cm) radius from the trunk release switch.

191

Keys

Keyless Access System

Built-in Key

Keyless Access Remote

168

BUILT-IN KEYS

OPERATING RANGE

KEYLESS ACCESS REMOTES

KEY NUMBER TAG

2009 TL

The remote may not work if: It is too close to the vehicle. It is above or below the vehicle, even when it is within its operating range.

The handle of each front door has a sensor. That sensor works with the remote so you can automatically unlock the door(s).

By default, only the drivers door unlocks when you grab its handle.

Each front door has a LOCK/ UNLOCK feature.

To change the DOOR UNLOCK MODE setting, see page .

To unlock the remaining doors and the trunk, press the remote or the rear of the master door lock switch on the drivers door.

All the doors unlock when you grab the handle of the front passengers door.

When you unlock the door(s), some exterior lights blink twice and the system beeps twice.

To change the KEYLESS ACCESS LIGHT FLASH setting, see page

.

To change the KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP setting, see page .

If you wear a glove while grabbing a front door handle, the door sensor may be slow to respond or may not respond by unlocking the doors.

111

112

113

CONTINUED

Keyless Access System

Unlocking the Door(s)

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

169

2009 TL

Before locking the doors, make sure the remote is not inside the vehicle.

When you press the door lock button on the front door, all the doors and the trunk will lock.

If you do not open any of the doors within 30 seconds, they will automatically relock.

The remote is not within the operating range.

The remote is too close to the vehicle.

When the doors are unlocked.

The vehicle battery is dead.

The remote battery is dead.

Each unlock sensor does not operate when:

If a remote is within operating range while you wash your vehicle or when it is raining heavily, the door sensors may respond by unlocking the doors.

Keyless Access System

Locking the Doors

170

DOOR LOCK BUTTON

2009 TL

When you lock the doors, some exterior lights blink and the system beeps once. If no exterior lights blink and/or no beeper sounds, check to see if the trunk or hood is open.

To change the KEYLESS ACCESS LIGHT FLASH setting, see page

.

To change the KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP setting, see page .

Within 2 seconds of pressing the door lock button to lock the doors or locking the doors with remote, pull the handle to make sure the doors are actually locked. The door unlock sensors will not operate for about 2 seconds after the doors are locked.

The door lock button does not work if:

The remote is not within the operating range.

If you open the drivers door, pull its lock tab rearward on the door, and shut it when the remote is inside the vehicle, the drivers door will unlock. Make sure you carry the remote with you when you lock the doors.Any door is open.

The power mode is not set to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

The remote is in the keyless access slot.

The remote is too close to the vehicle.

The remote battery is dead.

The vehicle battery is dead.

This function is also activated on the front passengers door. If you open the front passengers door, and shut it after pulling its lock tab rearward when the remote is inside the vehicle, all doors will unlock.

113

112

Keyless Access System

Door Lock Prevention

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

171

2009 TL

When you close the trunk with all doors locked, the trunk will lock.

When you unlock all the doors with the remote, built-in key or power door lock master switch, the trunk will unlock.

When the trunk is locked, you can open it in any of these ways:

Press the trunk release button inside the vehicle.

The remote is too close to the trunk lid.

The trunk cannot be locked if:

The remote is on the interior rear panel.

The remote is too close to the seat-back of the rear seat or the seat cushion.

Push the trunk release switch when carrying the remote (if the doors are locked).

Press the trunk button on the remote.

To close the trunk, use the inner handle to lower the lid, then press down on the back edge.

Locking and Unlocking the Trunk Opening and Closing the Trunk

Keyless Access System

172

TRUNK RELEASE SWITCH

INNER HANDLE

2009 TL

CONTINUED

Before closing the trunk, make sure the remote is not in the trunk.

If you close the trunk when the remote is in it, the system beeps, and the trunk reopens.

Keep the trunk lid closed at all times while driving to avoid damaging the lid, and to prevent exhaust gas from getting into the interior. See

on page .

Press this button once to lock all doors. Some exterior lights will flash. When you push the LOCK button twice within 5 seconds, you will hear a beep to verify that the doors are locked and the security system is set.

You cannot lock the doors if any door is not fully closed, if the remote is in the keyless access remote slot, or if the power mode is in any position except the VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

When you cannot set the security system because the trunk or hood is open, no exterior light blinks and/or no beeper sounds.

57

Keyless Access System

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Keyless Access Remote

LOCK

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

173

LED

PANIC BUTTON

TRUNK RELEASE BUTTON

LOCK BUTTON

UNLOCK BUTTON

2009 TL

Press this button once to unlock the drivers door. Press it twice to unlock the other doors. Some exterior lights will flash twice each time you press the button. The door activated map lights (if the door activated light switch is set) will come on when you press the UNLOCK button. If you do not open any door within 30 seconds, the map lights fade out. If you relock the doors with the remote before 30 seconds have elapsed, the lights will go off immediately.

Press this button for about 1 second to open the trunk. You cannot open the trunk with the exterior trunk release switch if the remote is in the keyless access remote slot, or the power mode is in any position except VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). You cannot open the trunk with the remote if the trunk main switch in the glove box is turned off.

Press this button for about 2 seconds to attract attention: the horn will sound and the exterior lights will flash for about 30 seconds. To cancel panic mode, press any other button on the remote.

To change the KEY AND REMOTE UNLOCK MODE setting, see page

.

To change the KEYLESS LOCK ACKNOWLEDGMENT setting, see page .

To change the SECURITY RELOCK TIMER setting, see page

.

If you unlock the doors with the remote, but do not open any doors within 30 seconds, the doors automatically relock and the security system sets.

To change the INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING TIME, see page .

125

116

127

126

UNLOCK TRUNK

PANIC

Keyless Access System

174

2009 TL

As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

An improperly disposed of battery can hurt the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal.

Battery type: CR2032 Replace the battery if necessary.

To replace the battery:

Replace the old battery with new battery. Place the battery so the side is facing up. Snap the two halves of the remote case back together.Remove the built-in key (see page

).

Remove the upper half by carefully prying on the edge with a coin.

1.

2.

3.

192

Replacing the Remote Battery

Keyless Access System Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

175

2009 TL

Here are the settings activated with the remote:

Driving position memory (see page ).

Audio system settings (see page ).

Climate control settings (see page ).

When you unlock the door with your remote, each remote activates the keyless memory settings related to that remote. The drivers ID (Driver 1 or Driver 2) is shown on the back of each remote.

Navigation system preferences (see the navigation system manual).

Avoid dropping or throwing the transmitter.

Protect the transmitter from extreme temperature.

Do not immerse the transmitter in any liquid.

If you lose a transmitter, the replacement needs to be reprogrammed by your dealer.

Keyless memory settings (see page ).

164

96

223

214

Keyless Memory Settings

Keyless Access System

Remote Care

176

DRIVERS ID

TM

2009 TL

The engine may not run, and some malfunctions may occur, if the remote is outside the vehicle.

The engine may not start if the remote is subjected to strong radio waves.

Also, the engine may not start if the remote is too close to the windows.

Keyless Access System

Engine Start/Stop Button Operating Range

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

177

Make sure you know where the remote is when you are inside the vehicle.

Remember that you can start the engine when the remote is inside the vehicle.

Make sure you always carry the remote with you.

2009 TL

This system uses the engine start/ stop button instead of an ignition switch to start and stop the engine. If you are carrying the keyless access remote, you can start the engine by pressing the engine start/stop button with the brake pedal depressed. You can also stop the engine by pushing this button when the vehicle is stopped.

The keyless access system has four power modes: VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), ACCESSORY, ON, and START.

Each time you press the engine start/stop button without pressing the brake pedal while carrying the keyless access remote, the power mode switches between VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), ACCESSORY, and ON.

To change the power mode without turning on the engine, press the engine start/stop button without pressing the brake pedal. The power mode will be changed as shown on the next page.

You can start the engine at any time by pressing the engine start/stop button, while pressing the brake pedal, with the shift lever in Park or neutral position.

Keyless Access System

Engine Start/Stop Button Operation

Switching the Power Modes Changing the Power Mode without Starting the Engine

178

2009 TL

How the mode is switched depends on the shift lever position (with or without the shift lever in Park).

With the shift lever in Park, the power mode changes from ON to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) when you push the engine start/stop button.

To change the mode from ON to ACCESSORY with the shift lever position in Park, press the engine start/stop button twice.

To change the mode from ACCESSORY to OFF, shift to Park, then press the engine start/stop button twice.

If the keyless access system main switch in the glove box is off, make sure to insert the keyless access remote into the keyless access slot to turn on your vehicles power mode. For more information, refer to page .187

Keyless Access System Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

179

NOTE:

ACCESSORY Indicator in the button comes on green. Some electrical components such as the audio system and accessory power sockets can be operated.

VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) Indicator in the button is off.

ON Indicator in the button remains green when the engine is not running. (If the engine is running,this indicator is off.) All electrical components can be used.

: Press the engine start/stop button.

: Press the engine start/stop button without the shift lever in P.

: Shift to Park, then press the engine start/stop button.

Do the following without pressing the brake pedal.

2009 TL

Engine is turned off and power is shut down. The steering wheel is locked. No electrical components can be used.

Indicator-Off Engine is turned off and power is shut down. The steering wheel is locked. No electrical components can be used.

Use this position to start the engine. The ignition switch returns to the ON (II) position when you release the key.

Engine is turned off. Some electrical components such as the audio system and accessory power sockets can be operated.

Indicator-Green Engine is turned off. Some electrical components such as the audio system and accessory power sockets can be operated.

Indicator- Green (engine is turned off) Off (engine is running)

All electrical components can be used.

Normal key position while driving. All electrical components can be used.

Indicator-Off The mode automatically returns to ON after the engine starts.

VEHICLE OFF (LOCK)

ACCESSORY ON START

Ignition Switch Position

Power Mode

LOCK (0) ON (II)ACCESSORY (I)

Without Keyless Access System

With Keyless Access System and Engine Start/Stop Button

START (III)

OFFGreen

Keyless Access System

Ignition Switch and Power Mode Comparison

180

2009 TL

You can start the engine in any power mode.

the multi- information display shows the INSERT KEYLESS REMOTE INTO SLOT message, then the TO START ENGINE: message will be shown after you insert the remote into the slot. Each time you press the engine start/stop button, the INSERT KEYLESS REMOTE INTO SLOT message is shown on the multi-information display if the remote is not in the slot.

After you unlock and open the drivers door, you will see the TO START ENGINE: message on the multi-information display. The TO TURN ACCESSORY ON: message will be shown after three seconds. The display switches between the TO START ENGINE: and TO TURN ACCESSORY ON: messages every three seconds.

To start the engine: Move the shift lever to Park (P).

Depress the brake pedal and press the engine start/stop button.

1.

2.

When the keyless access system main switch in the glove box is off,

CONTINUED

Keyless Access System

Starting GuidanceStarting the Engine

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

181

TO START ENGINE

TO TURN ACCESSORY ON

ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON

BRAKE PEDAL

2009 TL

If the steering wheel is locked, the engine cannot start. The multi- information display shows you the above message and the indicator in the engine start/stop button blinks. To unlock the steering wheel, apply force by turning it left and right while pressing the engine start/stop button at the same time.

After entering the vehicle, insert the keyless access remote into the slot to start the engine (see page ).

If the keyless access remote battery dies, you may have to use the built-in key to unlock/lock the vehicle. The built-in key is stored inside the keyless access remote (see page

).191

189

Keyless Access System

182

NOTE:

TO UNLOCK WHEEL

2009 TL

To turn the vehicle off when the vehicle is completely stopped, shift to Park (P), then press the engine start/stop button. The engine stops and the power mode switches from ON to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

You can only place the vehicle in the VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) mode if the transmission is in Park. You will see the SHIFT TO PARK message on the multi-information display with the power mode in ACCESSORY if you open the drivers door with the shift lever in a position other than P (Park).

After shifting into Park, you will see the TO TURN VEHICLE OFF: message on the multi-information display. Press the engine start/stop button twice with your foot off the brake pedal to change the power mode from ACCESSORY to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

CONTINUED

Keyless Access System

Stopping the Engine Operation Guidance

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

183

SHIFT TO PARK TO TURN VEHICLE OFF

2009 TL

The engine start/stop button may be used to stop the engine due to an emergency situation even while driving. If you must stop the engine, do either of the following operations:

Press the engine start/stop button twice with your foot off the brake pedal to change the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

Before leaving the vehicle, make sure it is off. You can verify if the power is off by checking the engine start/stop button LED indicator.

If you open the drivers door in the ACCESSORY mode, a beeper will sound. You will also see a TO TURN VEHICLE OFF: message on the multi-information display.

Press and hold the engine start/ stop button for three seconds. Firmly press the engine start/stop button three times.

Do not press the button while driving unless it is absolutely necessary for the engine to be switched off.

If you are driving, the power mode switches from ON to ACCESSORY or VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) whenever you perform either procedure. However, the steering wheel will NOT lock.

Before leaving the vehicle, make sure it is in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

If you cannot stop the engine by pressing the engine start/stop button once when the vehicle is stopped and the shift lever is in Park, do either emergency engine stop procedure. In this case, the power mode will change to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), however, the steering wheel may NOT lock.

Keyless Access System

Emergency Engine Stop

184

2009 TL

CONTINUED

If you take the keyless access remote out of the vehicle and close the door with the power mode ON, the inside and outside beepers sound and a KEYLESS REMOTE NOT DETECTED message will be displayed on the multi-information display.

The engine does not start if you push the engine start/stop button when the remote is outside the vehicle. Check where the remote is. Make sure that you carry the remote with you when you operate the engine start/stop button.

The displayed message goes away when you bring the remote back inside the vehicle.

If the engine is running and you take the remote out of the vehicle, it will continue to run. Once the power mode is changed to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), the engine will not restart until you bring back a remote into the vehicle.

Even when the remote is inside the vehicle, the beeper may sound when the location of the remote is not detected due to surrounding conditions. It is not a failure. Make sure that you carry the remote with you.

Keyless Access System

Keyless Remote Not Detected Beeper and Message

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

185

2009 TL

The battery in the remote normally last about 2 years. To ensure maximum battery life, do not store the remote close to electrical devices such as computers or TVs. When the multi-information display shows CHANGE KEYLESS REMOTE BATTERY, replace the battery as soon as possible (see page ).

If the remote battery becomes weak and the power door lock/unlock operation is disabled, you should insert the remote into the keyless access remote slot to set the power mode and start the engine. After inserting the remote to the slot, operate the engine start/stop button as previously described (see pages

and ). For more information on the keyless access slot, see page

.

Inserting the remote does not charge the remote battery. You should replace the battery as soon as possible.

The outside beeper sounds when the power mode is in ACCESSORY, and a door is opened, then closed.

175

178 181

189

Keyless Access System

Keyless Remote Low Battery

186

2009 TL

This switch is in the glove box. You can cancel the keyless access system features, which are locking/ unlocking the doors, unlocking the trunk, and starting the engine while carrying the keyless access remote. To cancel the system, turn the keyless access system main switch off by pushing it down.

Turning off the keyless access system will disable lockout prevention.

With the keyless access remote system main switch off, you should insert the keyless access remote into the keyless remote slot to start the engine. For more information, see page .

According to the message on the multi-information display, this indicator has two indications. A CHECK KEYLESS ACCESS SYSTEM message indicates a problem with the keyless access system. A CHECK KEYLESS STARTING SYSTEM message indicates a problem with the keyless starting system.

This indicator normally comes on for several seconds when you change the power mode to ON.

189

CONTINUED

Keyless Access System

Keyless Access Remote System Main Switch

Keyless Access System Indicator

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

187

NOTE:

OFF

MAIN SWITCH

2009 TL

Have your vehicle checked by your dealer if:

The keyless access system indicator comes on and stays on while you are driving.

The indicator comes on after the engine has started.

In this case, use the built-in key to lock/unlock the doors and insert the keyless access remote into the slot to start the engine (see page ).

Have your vehicle checked by your dealer if:

The multi-information display shows CHECK KEYLESS ACCESS SYSTEM.

The keyless access system indicator comes on and stays on while you are driving.

The indicator comes on and stays on in any power mode.

189

Check Keyless Access System Check Keyless Starting System

Keyless Access System

188

KEYLESS ACCESS SYSTEM INDICATOR

KEYLESS ACCESS SYSTEM INDICATOR

2009 TL

In this case, you should not shut off your engine until you are in a safe location or at your dealer, as your vehicle may not restart.

The multi-information display shows CHECK KEYLESS STARTING SYSTEM.

If the remote battery becomes weak and the power door lock/ unlock operation is disabled.

When the keyless access remote system main switch in the glove box is set to off.

In either case, you have to insert the keyless access remote into the keyless access remote slot to set the power mode and start the engine.

Always insert the keyless access remote fully into the slot. To remove it, place the vehicle in the VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) mode, then pull out the keyless access remote.

If the keyless access remote has been inserted into the slot, it will lock into place when the power is on. The slot will unlock when the power is turned off.

If the keyless access remote does not come out of the slot easily, try to push it in before pulling it out. Make sure the vehicle is in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) mode.

CONTINUED

Keyless Access System

Keyless Access Remote Slot

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

189

NOTE:

SLOT

KEYLESS ACCESS REMOTE

2009 TL

To avoid damaging the slot, do not insert any other objects into the slot or put a sticker on the keyless access remote.

Inserting the remote does not charge the remote battery. If necessary, you should replace the battery as soon as possible.

When you open the drivers door, and each time you press the engine start/stop button, you will see the INSERT KEYLESS REMOTE INTO SLOT message on the multi- information display in the following situations:

When the keyless access remote is not in the vehicle.

When the keyless access system main switch (see page ) is off.

If you turn off the vehicle and leave the remote in the keyless access remote slot, you will hear a reminder beeper, and one of the following messages will appear on the multi- information display.

187

Keyless Access System

Operation Guidance

190

2009 TL

CONTINUED

If the vehicle is left in the ACCESSORY mode, the TO TURN VEHICLE OFF message is shown on the multi-information display when you open the drivers door. If the vehicle is left in the VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) mode with the keyless access remote in the slot, the REMOVE KEYLESS REMOTE FROM SLOT message is shown on the multi-information display.

The shift lever must be in Park before you can press the engine start/stop button twice without pressing the brake pedal to set the vehicle into the VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) mode.

The built-in key can be used to lock/ unlock the doors and the trunk when the remote battery becomes weak and the power door lock/unlock operation is disabled.

Keyless Access System

Built-in key and Remote

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

191

2009 TL

To remove the built-in key, pull it out while pressing the release button. To reinstall the built-in key, push the key into the remote until it clicks.

To avoid damaging the remote and the built-in key, never pull on the built-in key unless you are pressing the release button.

The keyless access system uses an electric field to identify the remote.

If you use medical equipment such as a cardiac pacemaker, ask your doctor if the electric field used by the remote will affect it.

The trunk and glove box cannot be opened when you turn the trunk main switch off and lock the glove box and trunk pass-through cover with the built-in key. Then, the trunk cannot be opened by using the remote or the exterior trunk release switch.

Remove the built-in key from the remote by pressing the button, then give that remote to someone else as a valet key.

Valet Function

Keyless Access System

192

RELEASE BUTTON

BUILT-IN KEY

2009 TL

CONTINUED

Push the right side of the switch, HI, to rapidly heat up the seat. After the seat reaches a comfortable temperature, select LO by pushing the left side of the switch. This will keep the seat warm.

Both front seats are equipped with seat heaters. Because of the sensors for the side airbag cutoff system, there is no heater in the passengers seat-back.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

The ignition switch must be in the ON (II) position to use the heaters.

:

178 180

Seat Heaters Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

193

SEAT HEATER SWITCHES HEATERS

Passengers Seat

Drivers Seat

2009 TL

Follow these precautions whenever you use the seat heaters:

Use the HI setting only to heat the seats quickly, because it draws large amounts of current from the battery.

If the engine is left idling for an extended period, do not use the seat heaters even on the LO setting. It can weaken the battery, causing hard starting.

In the HI setting, the heater turns off when the seat gets warm, and turns back on after the seats temperature drops.

In the LO setting, the heater runs continuously. It does not cycle with temperature changes.

Seat Heaters

194

2009 TL

To open either front window fully, push the window switch firmly down to the second detent, then release it. The window automatically goes down all the way. To stop the window from going all the way down, pull back on the window switch briefly.

To close either front window fully, pull back the window switch firmly to the second detent, then release it. The window automatically goes all the way up. To stop the window from going all the way up, push down on the window switch briefly.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position to raise or lower any window. To open a window, push the switch down and hold it. Release the switch when you want the window to stop. Pull back on the switch and hold it to close the window.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

:

178 180

CONTINUED

AUTO

Power Windows Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

195

DRIVERS WINDOW SWITCH

MAIN SWITCH FRONT PASSENGERS WINDOW SWITCH

Closing a power window on someones hands or fingers can cause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers are away from the windows before closing them.

2009 TL

If either front window runs into any obstacle while it is closing automatically, it will reverse direction, and then stop. To close the window, remove the obstacle, then use the window switch again.

Auto reverse stops sensing when the window is almost closed. You should always check that all passengers and objects are away from the window before closing it.

Only on the drivers window, the auto reverse function is disabled when you continuously pull up the switch.

When you push the main switch in, the indicator comes on and the passengers windows cannot be raised or lowered. Use the main switch when you have children in the vehicle so they do not injure themselves by operating the windows unintentionally. To cancel this feature, push on the switch again. The switch will pop out and the indicator will go off.

The windows and the main switch will operate for up to 10 minutes after you turn off the ignition switch (set VEHICLE OFF mode on models with keyless access system). Opening either front door cancels this function.

Auto Reverse

Power Windows

196

NOTE:

2009 TL

CONTINUED

You can open all of the windows and the moonroof from outside with the remote transmitter.

Press the UNLOCK button once to unlock the drivers door.

You can open and close the windows and moonroof with the key in the drivers door lock.

To open: Insert the key in the drivers door lock.

Press the UNLOCK button a second time, and hold it. The remaining doors unlock, and all four windows and the moonroof start to open. To stop the windows and moonroof, release the button.

To open the windows and moonroof further, press the button again (within 10 seconds of step 1) and hold it. If the windows and the moonroof stop before the desired position, repeat steps 1 and 2.

You cannot close the windows or the moonroof with the remote transmitter.

1.

2.

3.

1.

Power Windows

Opening the Windows and Moonroof with the Remote Transmitter/Keyless Access Remote

Opening/Closing the Windows and Moonroof with the Key or the Built-in key

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

197

Close

Close

Open

Open

Vehicle without keyless access system

Vehicle with keyless access system

Vehicle without keyless access system

Vehicle with keyless access system

UNLOCK BUTTONUNLOCK BUTTON

BUILT-IN KEY

2009 TL

To close: Insert the key in the drivers door lock.

Turn the key counterclockwise, then release it.

Turn the key counterclockwise again, and hold it. All four windows and the moonroof start to close. To stop the windows and the moonroof, release the key.

To close the windows and the moonroof further, turn and hold the key again (within 10 seconds of step 2).

Turn the key clockwise, then release it.

Turn the key clockwise again, and hold it. All four windows and the moonroof start to open. To stop the windows and the moonroof, release the key.

To open the windows and the moonroof further, turn and hold the key again (within 10 seconds of step 2).

If the windows and the moonroof stop before the desired position, repeat steps 2 and 3.

1.

2.

3.

4.

2.

3.

4.

Power Windows

198

NOTE:

2009 TL

CONTINUED

To close the moonroof fully, firmly push the moonroof switch forward, then release it. The moonroof automatically closes all the way. To stop the moonroof from closing, push the switch briefly.

To open the moonroof fully, pull back the moonroof switch firmly, then release it. The moonroof automatically opens all the way. To stop the moonroof from opening, push the switch briefly.

The moonroof can be tilted up in the back for ventilation, or it can be slid back into the roof. Use the switch on the front ceiling to operate the moonroof. You must turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position to operate the moonroof.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

To open the moonroof, pull back on the switch and hold it. Release the switch when the moonroof reaches the desired position. To close the moonroof, push the switch forward and hold it. Release the switch to stop the operation.

To tilt up the moonroof, push on the center of the moonroof switch. To stop the moonroof from tilting up fully, push the switch briefly.

:

179 180

Moonroof

AUTO

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

199

MOONROOF SWITCH

Open

Tilt Close

Opening or closing the moonroof on someones hands or fingers can cause serious injury.

Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of the moonroof before opening or closing it.

2009 TL

To open or close the moonroof partially, lightly pull the switch back or push it forward and hold it. The moonroof will stop when you release the switch.

If the moonroof runs into any obstacle while it is closing automatically, it will reverse direction, and then stop. To close the moonroof, remove the obstacle, then use the moonroof switch again.

Auto reverse stops sensing when the moonroof is almost closed. You should always check that all passengers and objects are away from the moonroof before closing it.

You can open and close the moonroof for up to 10 minutes after you turn off the ignition switch, on models with keyless access system, set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). Opening either front door cancels this function.

You can use the remote transmitter/ keyless access remote or the key/ built-in key to operate the moonroof from the outside. Refer to page

for details.197

Moonroof

Auto Reverse

200

If you try to open the moonroof in below-f reezing temperatures, or when it is covered with snow or ice, you can damage the moonroof panel or its motor.

2009 TL

To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up fully. To release it, pull up slightly, push the button, and lower the lever. The parking brake indicator on the instrument panel should go out when the parking brake is fully released (see page ).

If you drive without releasing the parking brake, a beeper will sound, and you will also see a RELEASE PARKING BRAKE message on the multi-information display (see page

).

65

65

Parking Brake Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

201

PARKING BRAKE LEVER

Driving the vehicle with the parking brake applied can damage the rear brakes and hubs. A beeper will sound if the vehicle is driven with the parking brake on.

2009 TL

Interior Convenience Items

202

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

SIDE POCKET

SUN VISOR

VANITY MIRROR

SUNGLASSES HOLDER

REAR DOOR POCKET

USB ADAPTER CABLE

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET

GLOVE BOX

CENTER POCKET

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET

COAT HOOK

FRONT DOOR POCKET with BEVERAGE HOLDER

BEVERAGE HOLDER

CARGO HOOKS

BEVERAGE HOLDER in REAR SEAT ARMREST

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK

2009 TL

Open the front beverage holder by sliding its cover backward.

Be careful when you are using the beverage holders. A spilled liquid that is very hot can scald you or your passengers. Liquid can also spill from the door pocket beverage holders (if equipped) when you open or close the doors. Use only resealable containers in the door pockets.

Spilled liquids can damage the upholstery, carpeting, and electrical components in the interior.

To open the rear beverage holder, pull out the lid by the tab. To close it, push it down.

Beverage Holders

Interior Convenience Items Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

203

Front Rear

2009 TL

Your vehicle has two accessory power sockets. One is next to the shift lever. The other is in the console compartment.

To access the front accessory socket, slide the lid forward until it latches. To close it, push in on the lid to slide it backward.

To use an accessory power socket, the ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ACCESSORY Mode is the equivalent of ACCESSORY (I), and ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more

information, see pages and .

Each socket is intended to supply power for 12 volt DC accessories that are rated 120 watts or less (10 amps).

None of the sockets will power an automotive type cigarette lighter element.

Make sure to put the socket cover back in place to prevent any small foreign objects from getting into the socket.

:

180 178Accessory Power Sockets

Interior Convenience Items

204

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

Slide the lid forward.

Pull up the lid.

Front

2009 TL

To open the console compartment, push in on the lever and lift the armrest. To close, lower the armrest, and push it down until it latches.

Make sure to slide back the tray before opening the console compartment.

Open the glove box by pulling out the handle. Close it with a firm push. Lock or unlock the glove box with the master key or the built-in key on models with keyless access system.

The glove box light comes on only when the parking lights are on.

CONTINUED

Console CompartmentGlove Box

Interior Convenience Items Instrum

ents and

C ontrols

205

GLOVE BOX

To lock

An open glove box can cause serious injury to your passenger in a crash, even if the passenger is wearing the seat belt.

Always keep the glove box closed while driving.

2009 TL

To use a sun visor, pull it down. You can also use a sun visor at the side window. Remove the support rod from the clip, and swing the sun visor toward the side window. You can extend the sun visor further by pulling it back.

To use the vanity mirror on the back of the sun visor, pull up the cover.

The vanity mirror lights come on when you pull up the cover.

You can put small items in the sliding tray located in the console compartment lid. To use the tray, push it in to open it, then slide out fully. Make sure to slide back the tray firmly until you hear a click when not in use.

Interior Convenience Items

Sun VisorVanity Mirror

206

SUN VISOR

Slide

2009 TL

Do not use the sun visor extension feature over the rear view mirror.

Make sure to slide the sun visor back to its original position before flipping it back in place.

Make sure you put the sun visor back in place when you are getting into or out of the vehicle.

To open the sunglasses holder, push on the lid. It will unlatch and swing down. To close it, push it until it latches. Make sure the holder is closed while you are driving.

To open the center pocket, push on the lid. It will unlatch and swing up. To close it, push the lid down until it latches.

CONTINUED

Interior Convenience Items

Center Pocket Sunglasses Holder

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

207

Push

Push

2009 TL

Some larger styles of sunglasses may not fit in the holder.

You may also store small items in this holder. Make sure they are small enough to let the holder close and latch, and that they are not heavy enough to cause the holder to pop open while driving.

To use a coat hook, slide it out slightly, then pull it down.

Make sure the coat hook is pulled up when you are not using it. This hook is not designed for large or heavy items.

Interior Convenience Items

Coat Hook

208

COAT HOOK

2009 TL

Door (Door activated position):

OFF position:

After all doors are closed tightly, the lights dim slightly, then fade out in about 30 seconds.

To change the INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMING TIME setting, see page

.

With any door left open, the lights stay on about 15 minutes, then go out.

Your vehicle has the light control buttons on the front ceiling. With these buttons, you can select three positions: OFF, Door (door activated position), and ON. To select a position, press the appropriate button.

When you press the DOOR button, the green indicator in the button comes on as a reminder.

To turn off the setting, press the OFF button. On the door activated position, pressing the DOOR button again also turns off the setting.

The rear individual map lights cannot be turned on.

The front individual map lights can be turned on and off by pressing each map light button ( / ).

The individual map lights in the front and rear come on when any door is opened, when the remote transmitter (the keyless access remote on models with keyless access system) is used to unlock the doors. When the doors are closed, each light can be turned on and off by pushing the map light button ( / ).

116

CONTINUED

Interior Lights

Light Control Buttons

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

209

Front

OFF MAP LIGHT BUTTON

DOOR ACTIVATED

ON

Front

Rear

2009 TL

If any map light is left on when the ignition switch is turned off or the VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) mode is set, and all doors are closed, it will turn off when the vehicle is locked with the remote transmitter (the keyless access remote on models with keyless access system), or after 15 minutes.

The lights also come on when the key is removed from the ignition switch.

The lights also come on when the power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

All the individual map lights come on and stay on.

Turn on the front individual map lights by pushing each map light button ( / ). Push the button again to turn it off. When the door activated position is selected with the light control button, the rear map lights can be turned on by pushing each map light button ( / ). Push the button again to turn it off.

ON position:

On models without keyless access system

On models with keyless access system

Interior Lights

Individual Map Lights

210

Front

Rear

2009 TL

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

The courtesy light in each front door comes on when the door is opened, and goes out when the door is closed.

In addition to the courtesy light on the ceiling, the drivers ambient foot light comes on.

Your vehicle also has a courtesy light in the ignition switch. This light comes on when you open the drivers door. It fades out in about 30 seconds after the door is closed.The courtesy lights come on when

the parking lights are turned on. To adjust its brightness, press either of the instrument panel brightness control buttons ( or ) with the ignition switch in the ON (II) position.

:

178 180

On models without keyless access system

Interior Lights

Courtesy Lights

Instrum ents

and C

ontrols

211

COURTESY LIGHTS

2009 TL

Remove the keyless access remote from the keyless access remote slot.

Your vehicle has a keyless access remote slot light. The light comes on when you:

Open any door.

Set the vehicle mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

After all doors are closed tightly, the light dims slightly, then fades out in about 30 seconds (depending on the interior light dimming timer setting). The light turns off before 30 seconds have elapsed if you lock the drivers door.

Interior Lights

Keyless Access Remote Slot Light On models with Keyless Access System

212

LIGHTS

2009 TL

The standard audio system has many features. This section describes those features and how to use them.

The climate control system in your vehicle provides a comfortable driving environment in all weather conditions.

Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio system that requires a code number to enable it.

The security system helps to dis- courage vandalism and theft of your vehicle.

...............Climate Control System . 214 Using Automatic Climate

...................................Control . 216 Dual Temperature and Mode

...................................Control . 220

..........Climate Control Sensors . 222 ................................Audio System . 223

................................Audio System . 224 ..........Playing the AM/FM Radio . 225

................Playing the XM Radio . 233 .................................Playing Discs . 240

...Disc Changer Error Messages . 250 ..................Protecting Your Discs . 251

............................Playing an iPod . 254 .................iPod Error Messages . 262

Playing a USB Flash Memory ........................................Device . 263

USB Flash Memory Device ........................Error Messages . 271

............Bluetooth Audio System . 272

................................Audio System . 277 ..........Playing the AM/FM Radio . 278

................Playing the XM Radio . 292 ................................Playing a Disc . 300

.......Disc Player Error Messages . 312 ..................Protecting Your Discs . 313

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) ..........................................Audio . 316

............................Playing an iPod . 345

.................iPod Error Messages . 354 Playing a USB Flash Memory

........................................Device . 355 USB Flash Memory Device

........................Error Messages . 366 ............Bluetooth Audio System . 367 ............AM/FM Radio Reception . 372

................Remote Audio Controls . 374 ......................Auxiliary Input Jack . 375

.................Radio Theft Protection . 376 ..........................Setting the Clock . 377

............................Security System . 380 .........................................Compass . 382

...............................Cruise Control . 386 HomeLink Universal

................................Transceiver . 389 Bluetooth HandsFreeLink

(Models without navigation ..................................system) . 392

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation

..................................system) . 420 ....AcuraLink (U.S. models only) . 467 ...Rearview Camera and Monitor . 483

Models without navigation system

Models with navigation system

Features F

eatures

213

2009 TL

Climate Control System

214

AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON

RECIRCULATION BUTTON

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/ HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

PASSENGERS SIDE MODE CONTROL BUTTON

WINDSHIELD DEFROST BUTTON

ON/OFF BUTTON

SYNC BUTTON

DISPLAY PASSENGERS SIDE DISPLAYDRIVERS SIDE DISPLAY

FAN CONTROL BUTTONS

DRIVERS SIDE TEMPERATURE CONTROL SWITCH

PASSENGERS SIDE TEMPERATURE CONTROL SWITCH

Models without navigation system

DRIVERS SIDE AUTO BUTTON PASSENGERS SIDE AUTO BUTTON

U.S. model is shown.

DRIVERS SIDE MODE CONTROL BUTTON

2009 TL

Climate Control System F

eatures

215

AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON

RECIRCULATION BUTTON

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/ HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

PASSENGERS SIDE MODE CONTROL BUTTON

WINDSHIELD DEFROST BUTTON

ON/OFF BUTTON

SYNC BUTTON

PASSENGERS SIDE DISPLAY

FAN CONTROL BUTTONS

DRIVERS SIDE MODE CONTROL BUTTON

CENTER DISPLAY

DRIVERS SIDE DISPLAY

DRIVERS SIDE TEMPERATURE CONTROL SWITCH

PASSENGERS SIDE TEMPERATURE CONTROL SWITCH

DRIVERS SIDE AUTO BUTTON PASSENGERS SIDE AUTO BUTTON

Models with navigation system

U.S. model is shown.

2009 TL

On models with navigation system The climate control system can also be operated by voice control. See the Navigation section in your quick start guide for an overview of this system, and the navigation system manual for complete details.

The automatic climate control system in your vehicle picks the proper combination of air conditioning, heating, and ventilation to maintain the interior temperature you select, and to remove moisture from the air and make the interior dry. The system also adjusts the fan speed and airflow levels.

The system automatically selects the proper mix of conditioned and/or heated air that will, as quickly as possible, raise or lower the interior temperature to your preference. The system also dehumidify the interior.

The drivers side temperature and the passengers side temperature can be set separately. Push up the switch of the appropriate temperature control to increase the temperature of airflow. Push down the switch to decrease it. Each set temperature is shown in the display (in the center display on models with navigation system).Set the desired temperature with

the temperature control switch. You can set the drivers side temperature and the passengers side temperature separately.

Press the Drivers or Passengers AUTO button. You will see AUTO and the selected temperature on the appropriate side of the display (in the center display on models with navigation system).

When you unlock the doors with your remote transmitter (keyless access remote on models with navigation system), the drivers ID (Driver 1 or Driver 2) is detected, and the climate control settings are turned to the respective mode automatically with the ignition switch in the ON (II) position, or the power mode ON.

1.

2.

Using Automatic Climate ControlVoice Control System

Personalization Setting

Climate Control System

Temperature Control

216

2009 TL

When you set the temperature to its lower limit ( ) or its upper limit ( ), the system runs at full cooling or heating only. It does not regulate the interior temperature.

When you adjust a fan control, the fan is taken out of AUTO mode.

To keep stale air and mustiness from collecting, you should have the fan running at all times.

Keep the system completely off for short periods only.

To turn the system completely off, press the ON/OFF button.

Each time you press this button, the climate control system switches between on and off. Turning on the system with this button selects your last climate control selection.

You can also select the appropriate mode on the drivers side and the passengers side separately. To change a mode, press and release the appropriate side mode control button. This will take the mode control out of AUTO mode.

In AUTO mode, the vehicles interior temperature is independently regulated for the driver and front passenger according to each adjusted temperature. The system also regulates each temperature based on the information of the sun light sensor and the suns position

which is updated automatically by the navigations global positioning system (GPS). If one side of the vehicle is getting too much sun, the system lowers the temperature only on that side.

When you press this button, the indicator in the button comes on, and the passengers side temperature and mode control is synchronized to the drivers side set temperature and mode control. Changing the passengers side temperature or mode control makes the indicator go off and takes the system out of SYNC mode.On models with navigation system

Climate Control System

To Turn Everything Off

ON/OFF Button

SYNC Button F eatures

217

2009 TL

When the indicator in the button is on, air from the vehicles interior is sent through the system again. When the indicator is off, air is brought in from the outside of the vehicle (fresh air mode).

Switch to recirculation mode when driving through dusty or smoky conditions, then return to fresh air mode.

The system should be left in fresh air mode under almost all conditions. Keeping the system in recirculation mode, particularly with the A/C off, can cause the windows to fog up.

The outside air intakes for the climate control system are at the base of the windshield. Keep this area clear of leaves and other debris.

You can manually select various functions of the climate control system when it is in fully automatic mode. All other features remain automatically controlled. Making any manual selection causes the word AUTO in the display to go out. When you turn the A/C off, the

system cannot regulate the inside temperature if you set the temperature control below the outside temperature.

This button turns the air conditioning on and off. You will see A/C ON or A/C OFF in the display (in the center display on models with navigation system).

Press the button to increase the fan speed and airflow. Press the

button to decrease it.

Recirculation ButtonAir Conditioning (A/C) ButtonSemi-automatic Operation

Fan Control

Climate Control System

218

2009 TL

Pushing this button also turns the power mirror heaters on and off.

This button directs the main airflow to the windshield for faster defrosting. It also overrides any mode selection you may have made.

Air flows from the floor vents.

Airflow is divided between the vents in the dashboard and the floor vents.

Air flows from the center and corner vents in the dashboard.

This button turns the rear window defogger on and off (see page ).

The drivers side mode and the passengers side mode can be selected separately. Use the appropriate mode control button to select the vents the air flows from. Some air will flow from the dashboard vents in all modes.

Airflow is divided between the floor and corner vents and the defroster vents at the base of the windshield.

This mode can only be selected from the drivers side, however the passengers side controls can still change the temperature.

When you select , the system automatically switches to fresh air mode and turns on the A/C. For faster defrosting, the fan speed automatically increases. You can also increase airflow to the windshield by closing the center and corner vents on the dashboard. To close the vents, rotate the wheel on the side of each center and corner vent.

When you turn off by pressing the button again, the system returns to its former settings.

Select to help clear the rear window.

139

CONTINUED

Rear Window Defogger Button Windshield Defroster Button

Mode Controls

Climate Control System F

eatures

219

2009 TL

For your safety, make sure you have a clear view through all the windows before driving.

When the indicator in the button is on, the SYNC

indicator also comes on. The front passengers temperature cannot be set separately from the drivers.

The climate control system adjusts the interior humidity and selects the defroster mode automatically if you select the drivers side AUTO mode.

The drivers side and the passengers side temperature and mode can be controlled independently.

Your vehicle has two temperature control switches and two mode control buttons, one for the driver, and one for the front passenger.

Dual Temperature and Mode Control

Climate Control System

220

DRIVERS SIDE TEMPERATURE CONTROL SWITCH

SYNC BUTTON

PASSENGERS SIDE TEMPERATURE CONTROL SWITCH

U.S. model with navigation system is shown.

DRIVERS SIDE MODE CONTROL BUTTON PASSENGERS

SIDE MODE CONTROL BUTTON

2009 TL

When you set the temperature to its lower or upper limit, it is displayed as

or .

The selected temperatures and mode appear in the display (in the center display on models with navigation system). When the indicator in the SYNC button is on, you can adjust both sides to the same temperature and mode by pushing the drivers side temperature control switch up or down.

Synchronized Control

Climate Control System F

eatures

221

Passengers SideDrivers Side

REAR FLOOR AIR DUCTS

2009 TL

The climate control system has two sensors: a sunlight sensor on top of the dashboard, and a temperature and humidity sensor next to the steering column. Do not cover the sensors or spill any liquid on them.

The humidity sensor helps reduce window fogging and also monitors and adjusts cabin humidity by automatically changing the mode to Defrost.

The airflow from the rear vents can be adjusted when either AUTO mode (driver or passenger) is selected or the fan mode is in the

or position.

You can adjust the direction of the airflow by moving the tab on each vent up-and-down and side-to-side. You can also open or close the vents with the dial between them.

Climate Control System

Climate Control SensorsRear Ventilation

222

SUNLIGHT SENSOR

TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY SENSOR

2009 TL

An audio system is standard on all models. Read the appropriate pages (as shown below) to use your vehicles audio system.

For vehicles without navigation system, see pages through .

For vehicles with navigation system, see pages through .

224 276

277 371

Audio System F

eatures

223

Models Without navigation system Models With navigation system

2009 TL

Most audio system functions can be controlled by standard buttons, bars, and knobs. In addition, you can access some functions by using the selector knob on the audio system.

The knob turns left and right. Use it to scroll through lists, or to make selections or adjustments to a list or menu item on the display. When you make a selection, push the center of the selector (ENTER) to go to that selection.

When the audio system is in XM satellite radio mode or playing discs, pushing the selector (ENTER) knob switches the display between the normal display and the extended display. The extended display has three segments to display the detailed information.

To select any setting such as the clock or sound adjusting, press the SETUP button. To use any audio system function, the ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. You can select the item by turning the selector knob. To go back to the previous display, press the RETURN button.

Pressing the SETUP button again will also cancel the setup display mode.

When you unlock the doors with your remote transmitter and turn the audio system on with the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position, the drivers ID (Driver 1 or Driver 2) is detected, and the radio presets and sound level settings (see page ) are turned to the respective memorized mode automatically.

231

Selector Knob SETUP Display

Personalization Setting

Audio System (Models without navigation system)

224

RETURN BUTTON

SELECTOR KNOB

SETUP BUTTON

2009 TL

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

225

RETURN BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

SKIP BAR

A.SEL (AUTO SELECT) BUTTON

VOL/ (VOLUME/POWER) KNOB

SELECTOR KNOB

TITLE BUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS AM/FM BUTTON

CATEGORY BAR

DISPLAY

(SOUND) BUTTON SETUP BUTTON

2009 TL

The ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. Turn the system on by pushing the VOL/ (power/volume) knob or the AM/FM button. Adjust the volume by turning the VOL/

knob.

The band and frequency that the radio was last tuned to are displayed. To change bands, press the AM/FM button. On the FM band, ST will be displayed if the station is broadcasting in stereo. Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.

On the AM band, AM noise reduction turns on automatically.

You can use any of five methods to find radio stations on the selected band: tune, skip, scan, the preset buttons, and auto select.

On the FM band, you can also use the features provided by the radio data system (RDS). For more information on the RDS, see page

.

Use the selector knob to tune the radio to a desired frequency. Turn the knob right to tune to a higher frequency, or left to tune to a lower frequency.

The skip function searches up and down from the current frequency to find a station with a strong signal. To activate it, press and hold the or side of the SKIP bar until you hear a beep, then release it.

The scan function samples all stations with strong signals on the selected band. To activate it, press the SCAN button, then release it. You will see SCAN in the display. The system will scan for a station with a strong signal. When it finds one, it will stop and play that station for about 10 seconds.

If you do nothing, the system will scan for the next strong station and play it for 10 seconds. When it plays a station that you want to listen to, press the SCAN button again.

228

To Play the Radio To Select a Station

TUNE

SKIP

SCAN

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system)

226

2009 TL

Each preset button can store one frequency on AM and two frequencies on FM.

If you are traveling far from home and can no longer receive your preset stations, you can use the auto select feature to find stations in the local area.

You will see a 0 displayed after pressing a preset button if auto select cannot find a strong station for that preset button.

If you do not like the stations auto select has stored, you can store other frequencies on the preset buttons as previously described.

, press the A. SEL (auto select) button. This restores the presets you originally set.

For information on AM/FM radio frequencies and reception, see page

.

Select the desired band, AM or FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store six stations each.

Use the tune, skip, scan, or RDS function to tune the radio to a desired station.

Pick a preset button, and hold it until you hear a beep.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a total of six stations on AM and twelve stations on FM.

Press the A. SEL button. A-SEL flashes in the display, and the system goes into scan mode for several seconds. It stores the frequencies of six AM and twelve FM stations in the preset buttons.

1.

2.

3.

4.

372

To turn off auto select

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system)

Preset AUTO SELECT

F eatures

227

2009 TL

On the FM band, you can select a favorite station and display the program service name according to the information provided by the radio data system (RDS) if the station has the RDS information available.

The RDS information display function shows the name of the RDS station you are listening to. With the audio system on and the FM band selected, you can turn this function on or off.

To switch the function between on and off, press and release the TITLE button. With the system on, you will see the RDS INFO ON message on the display. If the station you are listening to is an RDS station, the displayed frequency switches to the station name.

If the station you are listening to is not an RDS station, the display continues to show the frequency with the RDS information display function on.

When you turn off this function by pressing the TITLE button, the display shows RDS NAME OFF.

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system)

Radio Data System (RDS)

RDS INFO Display

228

RDS INFO DISPLAY ON

2009 TL

On the FM band selected, you can select the program category provided by the RDS. Press either side ( or ) of the CATEGORY bar to display and select an RDS category. The principal RDS categories are shown as follows:

ROCK: Rock, classic rock and soft rock music

COUNTRY: Country music SOFT: Adult hits and soft music TOP 40: Top 40 hits OLDIES: Nostalgia music and oldies R & B: Rhythm and blues, and soft rhythm and blues RELIGION: Religious music and religious talk CLASSIC: Classical music JAZZ: Jazz INFO: News, information, sports, talk, foreign language, personality, public, college, and weather TRAFFIC: Traffic information

Press either side of the CATEGORY bar to select an RDS category. The display shows the selected RDS category name for about 10 seconds. You can use the search or scan function to find radio stations in the selected RDS category. If you do nothing while the RDS category name is displayed, the selected category is canceled.

This function searches up and down a frequency for the strongest signal from the frequencies that carry the selected RDS category information. This can help you to find a station in your favorite category. To activate it, press and release either side ( or ) of the SKIP bar. You will see the selected RDS category name blinking while searching it. When the system finds a station, the selected RDS category name will be displayed again for about 5 seconds.

If the system does not find a station, NOTHING will be blinking for about 5 seconds, then the system goes back to the last selected station.

ALL: All RDS category stations

CONTINUED

Radio Data System (RDS) Category RDS Program Search

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

229

RDS CATEGORY

2009 TL

The scan function samples all stations with strong signals on the selected RDS category. To activate it, press and release the SCAN button. You will see SCAN in the display. The system will scan for a station with a strong signal in the selected RDS category. You will also see the selected RDS category name blinking while searching it. When it finds one, it will stop and play that station for about 10 seconds.

If you do nothing, the system will scan for the next strong station and play it for 10 seconds. When it plays a station that you want to listen to, press the SCAN button again.

If the system does not find a station, NOTHING will be blinking for about 5 seconds, then the system goes back to the last selected station.

You can use the RDS program search or scan function even if the RDS information display function is off. In this case, the display shows a frequency in place of a RDS name.

RDS Program SCAN

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system)

230

2009 TL

Adjusts the bass.

Adjusts the treble.

Adjusts the front-to-back strength of the sound.

Adjusts the side-to- side strength of the sound.

Dolby PL (ProLogic) II signal processing creates multi-channel surround sound from 2 channel stereo audio sources. Dolby ProLogic II can only activate when listening to DISC (CD-DA, MP3/WMA), XM radio, and AUX. When ProLogic II is active, PL II is shown in the audio display.Press the SETUP button to display

the sound settings. Turn the selector knob to select an appropriate setting: BASS, TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE, SUBW (subwoofer), CENTER, Dolby PL (Prologic) II, and SVC (speed-sensitive volume compensation). Press the selector (ENTER) knob to enter the setting, then turn the selector knob to adjust the setting.

Adjusts the strength of sound from the subwoofer speaker.

Adjusts the strength of sound from the center speaker.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, ProLogic, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

CONTINUED

BASS

TREBLE

FADER

BALANCE

Adjusting the Sound

Dolby PL (ProLogic) II

SUBW

CENTER

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

231

Selector knob adjustable direction is shown.

FADER is selectable. SUBWOOFER is selectable.

2009 TL

The SVC mode controls the volume based on vehicle speed. The faster you go, the louder the audio volume becomes. As you slow down, the audio volume decreases.

The SVC has four modes; SVC OFF, SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVC HIGH. Turn the selector knob to adjust the setting to your liking. If you feel the sound is too loud, choose low. If you feel the sound is too quiet, choose high.

This function is set to MID as the default setting when the vehicle leaves the factory.

You can use the instrument panel brightness control buttons ( or ) to adjust the illumination of the audio system (see page ). The audio system illuminates when the parking lights are on, even if the radio is turned off.

Adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle speed.

Each mode is shown in the display as it changes. Turn the selector knob to adjust the setting to your liking.

When the level reaches the center, you will see C in the display.

To return to normal play, push the RETURN or SETUP button after you stop adjusting a mode.

137

Except SVC adjustment

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models without navigation system)

Audio System LightingSVC Speed-sensitive Volume Compensation (SVC)

232

2009 TL

CONTINUED

Playing the XM Radio (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

233

SCAN BUTTON

SKIP BAR

VOL/ (VOLUME/POWER) KNOB

TITLE BUTTON

CATEGORY BAR

DISPLAY

SELECTOR KNOB

XM RADIO BUTTON

SETUP BUTTONRETURN BUTTON

2009 TL

To listen to XM Radio, turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position, and press the

button. The last channel you listened to will show in the display. Adjust the volume by turning the VOL/ knob.

Your vehicle is capable of receiving XM Radio anywhere in the United States, and Canada, except Hawaii and Alaska. XM is a registered trademark of XM Satellite Radio , Inc.

XM Radio receives signals from two satellites to produce clear, high- quality digital reception. It offers many channels in several categories. Along with a large selection of different types of music, XM Radio allows you to view channel and category selections in the display.

To switch between channel mode and category mode, press and hold the TITLE button until the mode changes.

In the channel mode, you can select all of the available channels. In the category mode, such as Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc., you can select all of the channels within that category.

Each time you press and release the TITLE button, the display changes in the following sequence: name, title, and category.

You can also change the mode from the menu items. Press the SETUP button to display the menu items, then turn the selector knob to select MODE/CATEGORY or MODE/ CHANNEL and press the selector knob (ENTER). Each time you press and release the selector knob (ENTER), the display changes between CHANNEL and CATEGORY. To enter the setting, press the TITLE button.

You may experience periods when XM Radio does not transmit the artists name and song title information. If this happens, there is nothing wrong with your system.

Operating the XM Radio

MODE

Playing the XM Radio (Models without navigation system)

234

2009 TL

The SCAN function gives you a sampling of all channels while in the channel mode. In the category mode, only the stations within that category are scanned. To activate scan, press the SCAN button. The system plays each channel in numerical order for a few seconds, then selects the next channel. When you hear a channel you want to continue listening to, press the button again.

You can also select a channel or category from the list by using the selector knob. Push the selector knob (ENTER) to switch the display to the list displayed with three segments, then turn the knob to select a channel or category. Press the selector knob (ENTER) to set your selection.

Press either side of the CATEGORY bar to select another category.

Turn the selector knob to change channel selections. Turn the knob right for higher numbered channels and left for lower numbered channels. In the category mode, you can only select channels within that category.

CONTINUED

SCAN

CATEGORY ( or )TUNE

Playing the XM Radio (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

235

Channel list is shown.

2009 TL

You can store up to 12 preset channels using the six preset buttons. Each button stores one channel from the XM1 band and one channel from the XM2 band.

To store a channel: Press the button. Either XM1 or XM2 will show in the display.

Use the selector knob, or the CATEGORY bar or SCAN button to tune to a desired channel.

In category mode, only channels within that category can be selected. In channel mode, all channels can be selected.

Pick the preset button you want for that channel. Press and hold the button until you hear a beep.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the first six channels.

Once a channel is stored, simply press and release the proper preset button to tune to it.

Press the button again. The other XM band will show. Store the next six channels using steps 2 and 3.

The selected channel number does not exist, or is not part of your subscription, or this channel has no artist or title information at this time.

The signal is currently too weak. Move the vehicle to an area away from tall buildings, and with an unobstructed view of the southern horizon.

The encryption code is being updated. Wait until the encryption code is fully updated. Channels 0 and 1 should still work normally.

The selected channel has no artist or title information at this time.

There is a problem with the XM antenna. Please consult your dealer.

XM is loading the audio or program information.

The channel currently selected is no longer broadcasting.

3.

4.

5.

2.

1.

Preset

XM Radio Display Messages - - - -

NO SIGNAL

UPDATING

NO INFO

ANTENNA

LOADING

OFF AIR

Playing the XM Radio (Models without navigation system)

236

2009 TL

The XM satellites are in orbit over the equator; therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause satellite reception interruptions. To help compensate for this, ground-based repeaters are placed in major metropolitan areas.

Satellite signals are more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and mountains the farther north you travel from the equator. Carrying large items on a roof rack can also block the signal.

Depending on where you drive, you may experience reception problems. Interference can be caused by any of these conditions:

Driving on the north side of an east/west mountain road. Driving on the north side of a large commercial truck on an east/west road. Driving in tunnels.

Driving on a road beside a vertical wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south of you. Driving on the lower level of a multi-tiered road.

When DPLII is turned on (see page ), sound coming from the rear

speakers may be distorted due to the compression of the music being broadcast. Turn DPLII off if this happens.

231

CONTINUED

Playing the XM Radio (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

237

Signal may be blocked by mountains or large obstacles to the south.

Signal weaker in these areas.

SATELLITE

GROUND REPEATER

2009 TL

If you decide to purchase XM radio service, contact XM Radio at

, or at 1-800-852-9696. In Canada, contact

, or call 1-877-438- 9677. You will need to give them your radio I.D. number and your credit card number. To get your radio I.D. number, press the

button, then turn the selector knob until CH 000 appears in the display. Your I.D. will appear in the display.

After youve registered with XM Radio, keep your audio system in the XM Radio mode while you wait for activation. This should take about 30 minutes.

Driving on a single lane road alongside dense trees taller than 50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.

If your XM Radio service has expired or you purchased your vehicle from a previous owner, you can listen to a sampling of the broadcasts available on XM Radio. With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II) position, press the

button. A variety of music types and styles will play.

There may be other geographic situations that could affect XM Radio reception.

www.xmradio.com

www.xmradio.ca

As required by the FCC: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

Playing the XM Radio (Models without navigation system)

Receiving XM Radio Service

238

2009 TL

While waiting for activation, make sure your vehicle remains in an open area with good reception. Once your audio system is activated, CATEGORY or CHANNEL will appear in the display, and youll be able to listen to XM radio broadcasts. XM Radio will continue to send an activation signal to your vehicle for at least 12 hours from the activation request. If the service has not been activated after 36 hours, contact XM Radio.

Playing the XM Radio (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

239

2009 TL

Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)

240

RETURN BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

SKIP BAR

VOL/ (VOLUME/POWER) KNOB

SELECTOR KNOB

PRESET BUTTONS

CATEGORY BAR

TITLE BUTTON

AUX BUTTON

DISC EJECT BUTTON

DISC SLOT

DISC LOAD BUTTON

CD BUTTON

SETUP BUTTON

MP3/WMA INDICATOR

2009 TL

CONTINUED

You operate the disc changer with the same controls used for the radio. To select the disc changer, press the CD button. You will see CD in the display. The disc and track numbers, and the elapsed time are shown in the display. You can also select the displayed information with the TITLE button (see page ). The system will continuously play a disc until you change modes.

The specifications for compatible MP3 files are:

Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1), 16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2) Bitrate: 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/ 160/192/224/256/320 kbps (MPEG1), 8/16/24/32/40/48/56/ 64/80/96/112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2) Compatible with variable bitrate and multi-session. Maximum layers (including ROOT): 8 layers

To load or play discs, the ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.

This audio system can also play CD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed in MP3 or WMA format. When playing a disc in MP3, you will see MP3 in the display. In WMA format, WMA will appear in the display. The disc, folder and track numbers are displayed. You can select up to 255 folders or tracks.

A disc compressed in AAC format cannot be played in this audio system.

Video CDs and DVDs do not work in this unit.

243

To Play a Disc

Playing Discs (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

241

Do not use discs with adhesive labels. The label can curl up and cause the disc to jam in the unit.

2009 TL

The specifications for compatible WMA files are:

Compatible with variable bitrate and multi-session Maximum layers (including ROOT): 8 layers

If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc is protected by digital rights management (DRM), the audio unit displays FORMAT, and then skips to the next file.

Your vehicles in-dash disc changer holds up to six discs.

To load more than one disc, press the LOAD button until you hear a beep and see LOAD in the display. To load only one disc, press and release the LOAD button.

The disc number for an empty position begins blinking.

Insert the disc into the disc slot when the green disc load indicator comes on. Insert it only about halfway; the drive will pull it in the rest of the way. You will see BUSY in the display while the disc load indicator turns red and blinks as the disc is loaded.

When the disc load indicator turns green and LOAD appears in the display again, insert the next disc in the slot. Do not try to insert a disc until LOAD appears. You could damage the audio unit.

Repeat this until all six positions are loaded. If you are not loading all six positions, the system begins playing the last disc loaded.

You can also load a disc into an empty position while a disc is playing by pressing the appropriate preset button. The system stops playing the current disc and starts the loading sequence. It then plays the disc just loaded.

Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHz Bitrate: 48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps

You cannot load and play 3-inch (8-cm) discs in this unit.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Loading Discs

Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)

242

NOTE:

2009 TL

Each time you press the TITLE button, the display shows you the text data on a disc, if the disc was recorded with text data.

The display shows up to 16 characters of selected text data (the folder name, file name, etc.).

When a new folder, file, or track is selected.

When you change the audio mode to play a disc with text data or in MP3 or WMA.

When you insert a disc, and the system begins to play.

You will also see some text data under these conditions:

When playing a CD-DA with text data, the album and track name are shown in the display. With a disc in MP3 or WMA, the display shows the folder and file name.

When you turn on the audio system next time, the system keeps your selection with the TITLE button.

When you press and release the TITLE button while a disc without text data is playing, you will see NO INFO on the display.

With the folder name, you will see the FOLDER indicator in the display. The TRACK indicator is shown with the file or track name.

You can see the album, artist, and track name in the display. If a disc is recorded in MP3 or WMA, you can see the folder and file name, and the artist, album, and track tag.

If you select name off, the text display is turned off.

If the text data has more than 16 characters, you will see the first 16 characters and the indicator in the display. Press and hold the TITLE button until the next 16 characters are shown. You can see up to 32 characters of the text data.

If you press and hold the TITLE button again, the display shows the first 16 characters again.

If any letter is not available, it is replaced with . (dot) in the display. When the disc has no text data, you will see NO INFO on the display.

Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)

Text Data Display Function

F eatures

243

2009 TL

Use the SKIP bar while a disc is playing to select passages and change tracks (files in MP3 or WMA mode).

In MP3 or WMA mode, use the CATEGORY bar to select folders in the disc and use either side of the SKIP bar to change files.

To select a different disc, use the appropriate preset buttons (1 through 6). If you select an empty position, the system will go into the loading sequence (see page ).

In MP3 or WMA mode, you can also select a folder or track/file from the list by using the selector knob. Push the selector knob (ENTER) to switch the display to the list displayed with three segments, then turn the knob to select a folder. Press the selector knob (ENTER) to change the display to the track/file list, then turn the same knob to select a track/file. Press the selector knob (ENTER) to set your selection.

Each time you press and release the side of the SKIP bar, the player skips forward to the beginning of the next track (file in MP3 or WMA mode). Press and release the side of the bar to skip backward to the beginning of the current track. Press it again to skip to the beginning of the previous track.

To move rapidly within a track or file, press and hold either side ( or

) of the SKIP bar.

242

Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)

To Change or Select Tracks/Files SKIP

244

Folder Selection

Track Selection Press ENTER.

2009 TL

In MP3 or WMA mode To

select a different folder, press either side ( or ) of the CATEGORY bar to move to the beginning of the next folder. Press the side to skip to the next folder, and press the side to skip to the beginning of the previous folder.

You can select any type of repeat, random and scan modes by using the SETUP button and the selector knob. Push the SETUP button to display the menu items, then turn the selector knob to select PLAY MODE. Press the selector knob (ENTER) to set the selection.

Turn the selector knob to select an appropriate repeat, random or scan mode, then press the selector knob (ENTER) to set your selection.

CONTINUED

FOLDER SELECTION

Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)

To Select Repeat, Random or Scan Mode:

F eatures

245

MENU ITEMS

2009 TL

Pressing either side of the SKIP bar also turns off the repeat feature.

To cancel the selected repeat, random, or scan mode, press the SETUP button to show PLAY MODE, then press the selector knob (ENTER). When you see NORMAL PLAY, press ENTER again.

To continuously replay a track (file in MP3 or WMA mode), select REPEAT ONE TRK from the menu items. You will see REPEAT in the display. Select normal play to turn it off.

This feature, when activated, replays all the files on the selected folder in the order they are compressed in MP3 or WMA. To activate folder repeat mode, select REPEAT ONE FLD from the menu items. You will see F-REPEAT in the display. The system continuously replays the current folder. Select normal play to turn it off. Selecting a different folder with the CATEGORY bar also turns off the repeat feature.

This feature continuously replays the current disc. To activate disc repeat, select REPEAT DISC from the menu items. You will see D-REPEAT in the display. Select normal play to turn it off.

This feature, when activated, plays the files within the current folder in random order, rather than in the order they are compressed in MP3 or WMA. To activate folder random play, select RANDOM IN FLD from the menu items. You will see F-RANDOM in the display. The system will then select and play files randomly. This continues until you deactivate folder random play by selecting normal play, or you select a different folder with the CATEGORY bar.

In MP3 or WMA mode

In MP3 or WMA mode

Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)

REPEAT ONE TRK

REPEAT ONE FLD

REPEAT DISC

RANDOM IN FLD

246

PLAY MODE ITEMS

2009 TL

You can also select the folder scan feature from the menu items with the selector knob (see page ).

You can also select the scan feature from the menu items with the selector knob (see page ).

This feature plays the tracks within a disc (the files in MP3 or WMA mode) in random order. To activate random play, select RANDOM IN DISC from the menu items. You will see RANDOM in the display. Select normal play to return to normal play.

The SCAN function samples all the tracks on the disc in the order they are recorded on the disc (all files in the selected folder in MP3 or WMA mode). To activate the scan feature, press and release the SCAN button. You will see SCAN in the display. You will get a 10 second sampling of each track/file in the disc/folder. Press and hold the SCAN button to get out of scan mode and play the last track sampled.

This feature, when activated, samples the first file in each folder on the disc in the order they are recorded. To activate the folder scan feature, press and release the SCAN button repeatedly. You will see F-SCAN in the display. The system will then play the first file in the main folders for about 10 seconds. If you do nothing, the system will then play the following first files for 10 seconds each. When it plays a file that you want to continue listening to, press and hold the SCAN button.245

245

CONTINUED

In MP3 or WMA mode

Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)

RANDOM IN DISC SCAN TRK SCAN FLD

F eatures

247

2009 TL

When the first track in the last disc, or the first file in the last main folder in the last disc begins to play, the disc scan mode will be canceled. Pressing either side of the SKIP bar or selecting a different folder with the CATEGORY bar also turns off the scan feature.

Each time you press and release the SCAN button, the mode changes from scan, disc scan, then to normal play.

Each time you press and release the SCAN button, the mode changes from file scan, folder scan, disc scan, then to normal play.

Pressing either side of the SKIP bar, or selecting a different disc (using the preset buttons) or folder (using the CATEGORY bar) turns off the SCAN or F-SCAN feature.

You can also select the disc scan feature from the menu items with the selector knob (see page ).

This feature, when activated, samples the first track on each disc in order (the first file in the main folder on each disc in MP3 or WMA mode). To activate the disc scan feature, press and release the SCAN button repeatedly until D-SCAN shows in the display. The system will then play the first track/ file in the first main folder on the first disc for about 10 seconds. If you do nothing, the system will then play the following first track/file for 10 seconds each. When it plays a track/ file that you want to continue listening to, press and hold the SCAN button again.

245

In MP3 or WMA mode

Playing Discs (Models without navigation system)

SCAN DISC

248

2009 TL

Press the eject button ( ) to remove the disc. If you eject the disc, but do not remove it from the slot, the system will automatically reload the disc after 10 seconds and begin playing.

If you turn the system off while a disc is playing, either with the VOL/

knob or by turning off the ignition switch, the disc will stay in the drive. When you turn the system back on, the disc will begin playing where it left off.

To remove the disc currently in play, press the eject button. When a disc is removed from a slot, the system automatically begins the load sequence so you can load another disc in that position. If you do not remove the disc from the changer within 10 seconds, the disc will reload into the slot. Then the system returns to the previous mode (AM, FM, or XM Radio).

For information on how to handle and protect compact discs, see page

.

To remove a different disc from the changer, first select it with the appropriate preset button. When that disc begins playing, press the eject button. Continue pressing the eject button to remove all the discs from the changer.

You can also eject discs when the ignition switch is off. The disc that was last selected is ejected first.

To play the radio when a disc is playing, press the AM/FM or

button. Press the AUX button to switch to an appropriate audio unit (if it is connected to the auxiliary input jack or the USB adapter cable). Press the CD button again to switch back to the disc changer.

You can also eject the disc when the ignition switch is off.

To eject all discs, press and hold the eject button until the first disc begins to eject.

251

To Stop Playing a Disc

Protecting Discs

Removing Discs from the In-dash Disc Changer

Playing Discs (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

249

2009 TL

The chart on the right explains the error messages you may see in the display while playing a disc.

If you see an error message in the display while playing a disc, press the eject button. After ejecting the disc, check it for damage or deformation. If there is no damage, insert the disc again. For additional information on damaged discs, see page .

The audio system will try to play the disc. If there is still a problem, the error message will reappear. Press the eject button, and pull out the disc. Insert a different disc. If the new disc plays, there is a problem with the first disc. If the error message cycle repeats and you cannot clear it, take your vehicle to a dealer.

Cause SolutionError Message

252

High Temperature

Track/File format not supported

Mechanical Error

Servo Error

Disc Error

Will disappear when the temperature returns to normal. Current track will be skipped. The next supported track or file plays automatically. Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc(s). Check the disc for serious damage, signs of deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt (see page 252). Insert the disc again. If the code does not disappear, or the disc(s) cannot be removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to force the disc out of the player.

Check the disc for serious damage, signs of deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt (see page 252).

Disc Changer Error Messages (Models without navigation system)

250

HEAT ERROR

UNSUPPORTED

BAD DISC PLEASE CHECK

OWNERS MANUAL PUSH

EJECT MECH ERROR

CHECK DISC LOAD BAD DISC

PLEASE CHECK OWNERS MANUAL

CHECK DISC EJECT

2009 TL

When a disc is not being played, store it in its case to protect it from dust and other contamination. To prevent warpage, keep discs out of direct sunlight and extreme heat.

A new disc may be rough on the inner and outer edges. The small plastic pieces causing this roughness can flake off and fall on the recording surface of the disc, causing skipping or other problems. Remove these pieces by rubbing the inner and outer edges with the side of a pencil or pen.

Handle a disc by its edges; never touch either surface. Do not place stabilizer rings or labels on the disc. These, along with contamination from finger prints, liquids, and felt- tip pens, can cause the disc to not play properly, or possibly jam in the drive.

Never try to insert foreign objects in the disc changer.

To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth. Wipe across the disc from the center to the outside edge.

When using CD-R or CD-RW discs, use only high quality discs labeled for audio use.

When recording a CD-R or CD-RW, the recording must be closed for it to be used by the disc changer.

Handle your discs properly to prevent damage and skipping.

Play only standard, round, 5-inch (12 cm) discs. Smaller or odd- shaped discs may jam in the drive or cause other problems.

General Information Protecting Discs

Protecting Your Discs (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

251

Do not use discs with adhesive labels. The label can curl up and cause the disc to jam in the unit.

2009 TL

The in-dash disc player/changer has a sophisticated and delicate mechanism. If you insert a damaged disc as indicated in this section, it may become stuck inside and damage the audio unit.

Examples of these discs are shown to the right:

Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and excessively thick discs

Damaged discs Poor quality discs

1.

2. 3.

Additional Information on Recommended Discs

Protecting Your Discs (Models without navigation system)

252

WarpedChipped/ Cracked

Bubbled/ Wrinkled

With Label/ Sticker

Sealed With Plastic Ring

Using Printer Label Kit

Burrs

2009 TL

Small, irregular shaped discs Discs with scratches, dirty discs

CD-R or CD-RW may not play due to the recording conditions.

Scratches and fingerprints on the discs may cause the sound to skip.

Recommended discs are printed with the following logo.

Audio unit may not play the following formats.

This audio unit cannot play a Dual- disc .

4. 5.

Protecting Your Discs (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

253

Fingerprints, scratches, etc.

3-inch (8-cm) CD Triangle Shape

Arrow ShapeCan Shape

2009 TL

Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)

254

SKIP BAR

VOL/ (VOLUME/POWER) KNOB

SELECTOR KNOB

TITLE BUTTON

AUX BUTTON

CD BUTTON

iPod INDICATOR

SETUP BUTTONRETURN BUTTON

USB INDICATOR

2009 TL

This audio system can select and play the audio files on the iPod with the same controls used for the disc player. To play an iPod, connect it to the USB adapter cable in the console compartment by using your dock connector, then press the AUX button. The ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. The iPod will also be charged with the ignition switch in these positions.

The audio system reads and plays playable sound files on the iPod. The system cannot operate an iPod as a mass storage device. The system will only play songs stored on the iPod with iTunes.

iPod and iTunes are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc.

iPods compatible with your audio system using the USB adapter cable are:

Use only compatible iPods with the latest software. iPods that are not compatible will not work in this audio unit.

Use the latest firmware.:

CONTINUED

Model iPod 5th and 6th generations iPod classic iPod nano iPod nano 2nd generation iPod nano 3rd generation iPod touch iPhone

Firmware Ver. 1.2 or more

Ver. 1.0 or more Ver. 1.2 or more Ver. 1.1.2 or more

Ver. 1.0 or more

Ver. 1.1.1 or more Ver. 1.1.1 or more

Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)

To Play an iPod

F eatures

255

2009 TL

Install the dock connector to the USB adapter cable securely.

Connect your dock connector to the iPod correctly and securely.

Pull out the USB connector from the holder.

Do not connect your iPod using a hub.

Do not keep the iPod in the vehicle. Direct sunlight and high heat will damage it.

Do not use an extension cable between the USB adapter cable equipped with your vehicle and your dock connector.

We recommend backing up your data before playing it. 1. 2.

3.

Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)

Connecting an iPod

256

NOTE:

DOCK CONNECTOR

USB ADAPTER CABLEUSB ADAPTER CABLE

USB CONNECTOR

2009 TL

Each time you press the TITLE button the display mode switches between the album name, the song name, the artist name, or name off (which turns off the text display).

If the audio system still does not recognize the iPod, the iPod may need to be reset. Follow the instructions that came with your iPod, or you can find reset instructions online at

If the iPod indicator does not appear in the audio display, check the connections, and try to reconnect the iPod a few times.

It may take a few minutes for the Acura logo to display on the iPod. If the display does not change, this function is not supported on your iPod model or firmware.

The display shows up to 16 characters (including spaces) of the selected data. If the text data has more than 16 characters, you will see the first 16 characters and the

indicator in the display. Press and hold the TITLE button until the next 16 characters are shown.When the iPod is connected and the

iPod mode is selected on the audio display, the USB and iPod indicators are shown in the display. After loading, you will see the Acura logo on the iPod. That means you can only operate your iPod using the vehicles audio unit.

:

www.apple.com/ ipod.

CONTINUED

Text Data Display Function

Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

257

Sample Display

OK to disconnect.

2009 TL

Use the SKIP bar while an iPod is playing to select passages and change files.

Each time you press and release the side of the SKIP bar, the system skips forward to the beginning of the next file. Press and release the side of the bar, to skip backward to the beginning of the current file. Press it again to skip to the beginning of the previous file.

To move rapidly within a file, press and hold either side ( or ) of the SKIP bar.

Turning the selector knob to the right or the left also changes the file.

You can also select a file from any list on the iPod menu: playlists, artists, albums and songs, by using the selector knob. Push the selector knob (ENTER) to switch the display to an iPod menu, then turn the selector knob to select a desired list. Press ENTER to set your selection.

The display shows items on the selected list. Turn the selector knob to select an item, then press ENTER to set your selection.

If you select ALL, all available files on the selected list are played.

To Change or Select Files To Select a File from iPod Menu

SKIP

Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)

258

Push ENTER.

2009 TL

Pressing the RETURN button goes back to the previous display and pressing the SETUP button cancels this setting mode.

You can select any type of repeat and shuffle mode by using the SETUP button and the selector knob. Press the SETUP button to display the menu items, then turn the selector knob to select PLAY MODE. Press ENTER to set the selection.

Turn the selector knob to select a play mode: normal play, shuffle off, shuffle all, shuffle album, repeat off, or repeat one track, then press ENTER to set your selection.

To cancel the selected mode, press the SETUP button and turn the selector knob to show PLAY MODE, then press ENTER. When you see NORMAL PLAY, press ENTER again.

CONTINUED

To Select Repeat or Shuffle Mode:

Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

259

PLAY MODE ITEMS

MENU ITEMS

2009 TL

This feature plays all available files in a selected list (playlists, artists, albums or songs) in random order. You will see SHUFFLE in the display. Select the normal play mode or SHUFFLE OFF to turn off this feature.

This feature plays all available albums in a selected list (playlists, artists, albums or songs) in random order. The files in each album are played in the recorded order. You will see ALB SHUF in the display. Select the normal play mode or SHUFFLE OFF to turn off this feature.

Pressing either side of the SKIP bar or turning the selector knob changes a file while keeping the shuffle function.

Available operating functions vary on models or versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicles audio system.

Pressing either side of the SKIP bar or turning the selector knob changes the file while keeping the repeat feature.

This feature continuously plays a file. You will see REPEAT in the display. Select normal play or REPEAT OFF to turn it off.

This feature turns off the repeat mode.

This feature turns off either of the shuffle modes (SHUFFLE ALL and SHUFFLE ALBUM).

SHUFFLE ALL

SHUFFLE ALBUM

REPEAT ONE TRK

REPEAT OFF

SHUFFLE OFF

Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system)

260

NOTE:

2009 TL

You can disconnect the iPod at any time when you see OK to disconnect message in the iPod display. Always make sure you see OK to disconnect message in the iPod display before you disconnect it. Make sure to follow the iPods instructions on how to disconnect the dock connector from the USB adapter cable.

If you see an error message in the display, see page .

The displayed message may vary on models or versions. On some models, there is no message to disconnect.

If you reconnect the same iPod, the system may begin playing where it left off, depending on what mode the iPod is in when it is reconnected.

To play the radio, press the AM/FM, or button. Press the CD button to switch to the disc mode (if a disc is loaded). Press the AUX button to switch the audio mode between the Bluetooth audio and iPod.

You can also press the MODE button on the steering wheel to change modes.

:

262

Disconnecting an iPodTo Stop Playing Your iPod iPod Error Messages

Playing an iPod (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

261

2009 TL

If you see an error message on the audio display while playing an iPod, find the solution in the chart to the right. If you cannot clear the error message, take your vehicle to your dealer.

SolutionError Message

The system cannot read the file(s). Check the files in the iPod. There is a possibility that the files have been damaged. Appears when an unsupported iPod is inserted.

iPod Error Messages (Models without navigation system)

262

FILE ERROR

MEDIA ERROR

2009 TL

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

263

RETURN BUTTON

SKIP BAR

VOL/ (VOLUME/POWER) KNOB

SELECTOR KNOB

TITLE BUTTON

AUX BUTTON

CD BUTTON

USB INDICATOR

CATEGORY BAR

SETUP BUTTON

FILE TYPE INDICATOR

2009 TL

This audio system can select and play the audio files on a USB flash memory device with the same controls used for the disc player. To play a USB flash memory device, connect it to the USB adapter cable in the console compartment, then press the AUX button. The ignition switch must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.

Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard drive as the device or your files may be damaged.

Do not connect your USB flash memory device using a hub.

Do not use an extension cable to the USB adapter cable equipped with your vehicle.

Do not keep a USB flash memory device in the vehicle. Direct sunlight and high heat will damage it.

We recommend backing up your data before playing a USB flash memory device.

Some USB flash memory devices (such as devices with security lock- out features, etc.) will not work in this audio unit.

The recommended USB flash memory devices are 256 Mbyte or higher. Some digital audio players may be compatible as well.

Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this audio unit.

The audio system reads and plays the audio files on the USB flash memory device in MP3, WMA or AAC formats. Depending on the format, the display shows MP3, WMA or AAC when a USB flash memory device is playing. The USB flash memory device limit is up to 700 folders or up to 65535 files.

:

To Play a USB Flash Memory Device

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)

264

NOTE:

2009 TL

Depending on the type and number of files, it may take some time before they begin to play.

Depending on the software the files were made with, it may not be possible to play some files, or display some text data.

The order of files in USB playback may be different from the order of files displayed in PC or other devices etc. Files are played in the order stored in USB flash memory device.

The specifications for compatible MP3 files are:

Bitrate: 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/ 160/192/224/256/320/VBR kbps (MPEG1) 8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/

112/128/144/160/VBR kbps (MPEG2) Supported standards: MPEG1 Audio Layer3 MPEG2 Audio Layer3 Partition: Top partition only Maximum layers: 8

Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1) 16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)

The specifications for compatible WMA files are:

Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHz Bitrate: 48 320/VBR kbps (Max 384) Supported standards: WMA version 7/8/9 Partition: Top partition only Maximum layers: 8

The specifications for compatible AAC files are:

Sampling frequency: 8/11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/ 44.1/48 kHz Bitrate: 8 320 kbps

Supported standards: MPEG4/AAC LC MPEG2/AAC LC Partition: Top partition only Maximum layers: 8

Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC format may not be supported. If an unsupported file is found, the audio unit displays UNSUPPORTED, then skips to the next file.

In WMA or AAC format, DRM (digital rights management) files cannot be played. If the system finds a DRM file, the audio unit displays UNPLAYABLE FILE, and then skips to the next file.

CONTINUED

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

265

2009 TL

Connect the USB flash memory device to the USB adapter cable correctly and securely.

When the USB flash memory device is connected, the USB indicator is shown in the display.

Each time you press the TITLE button, the display mode shows you in sequence, the folder name, the file name, the artist name, the album name, the song name, or name off (which turns off the text display).

Pull out the USB connector from the holder.

The display shows up to 16 characters (including spaces) of the selected data. If the text data has more than 16 characters, you will see the first 16 characters and the

indicator in the display. Press and hold the TITLE button until the next 16 characters are shown.1. 2.

Connecting a USB Flash Memory Device

Text Data Display Function

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)

266

USB ADAPTER CABLE USB ADAPTER CABLE

USB CONNECTOR

2009 TL

Use the SKIP bar while a USB flash memory device is playing to select passages and change files.

Each time you press and release the side of the SKIP bar, the system skips forward to the beginning of the next file. Press and release the side of the bar, to skip backward to the beginning of the current file. Press it again to skip to the beginning of the previous file.

To move rapidly within a file, press and hold either side ( or ) of the SKIP bar.

Turning the selector knob to the right or the left also changes the file.

You can also select a folder or file from the list by using the selector knob. Push the selector knob (ENTER) to switch the display to the folder list, then turn the selector knob to select a folder. Press ENTER to change the display to the file list, then turn the same knob to select a file. Press ENTER to set your selection.

To select a different folder, press and release either side of the CATEGORY bar. Press the side to skip to the next folder, and press the side to skip to the beginning of the previous folder.

CONTINUED

To Change or Select Files To Select a File from Folder and File Lists

SKIP

Folder Selection

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

267

Folder Selection

Track Selection Press ENTER.

2009 TL

Turn the selector knob to select an appropriate repeat, random or scan mode, then press the selector knob (ENTER) to set your selection.

Pressing the RETURN button goes back to the previous display and pressing the SETUP button cancels this setting mode.

You can select any type of repeat, random and scan modes by using the SETUP button and the selector knob. Push the SETUP button to display the menu items, then turn the selector knob to select PLAY MODE. Press the selector knob (ENTER) to set the selection.

To cancel the selected mode, press the SETUP button and turn the selector knob to show PLAY MODE, then press ENTER. When you see NORMAL PLAY, press ENTER again.

To Select Repeat, Random or Scan Mode:

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)

268

MENU ITEMS

2009 TL

This

feature continuously plays a file. Select normal play to turn it off. Pressing either side of the SKIP bar also turns off this feature.

This function samples all files in the selected folder in the order they are stored. To activate the scan feature, press and release the SCAN button. You will see SCAN in the display. You will get a 10 second sampling of each file in the folder. Press and hold the SCAN button to get out of the scan mode and play the last file sampled.

You can also select the scan feature from the menu items with the selector knob (see page ).

This feature replays all the files on the selected folder in the order they are stored. Select normal play to turn it off. Pressing either side of the CATEGORY bar also turns off this feature.

This feature plays the files in the selected folder in random order. You will see F-RANDOM in the display. Select normal play to turn it off.

This feature plays all the files in random order. You will see RANDOM in the display. Select normal play to turn it off.

268

CONTINUED

REPEAT ONE TRK

SCAN TRKREPEAT ONE FLD

RANDOM IN FLD

RANDOM IN DISC

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

269

PLAY MODE ITEMS

2009 TL

If you see an error message in the display, see page .

Select normal play to turn either scan feature off. Pressing either side of the CATEGORY or SKIP bar also turns off the feature.

This function samples the first file in each folder in the order they are stored. To activate the folder scan feature, press and release the SCAN button repeatedly. You will see F-SCAN in the display. You will get a 10 second sampling of the first file in each folder. Press and hold the SCAN button to get out of the folder scan mode and play the last file sampled.

You can also select the folder scan feature from the menu items with the selector knob (see page ).

You can disconnect the USB flash memory device at any time even if the USB mode is selected on the audio system. Make sure to follow the USB flash memory devices instructions when you remove it.

If you reconnect the same USB flash memory device, the system will begin playing where it left off.

You can also press the MODE button on the steering wheel to change modes.

To change modes, press the AM/ FM or button. Press the CD button to switch to the disc mode (if a disc is loaded). Press the AUX button to switch the audio mode between the USB or Bluetooth audio.

268

271

USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages

To Stop Playing a USB Flash Memory Device

SCAN FLD

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)

Disconnecting a USB Flash Memory Device

270

2009 TL

If you see an error message on the audio display while playing a USB flash memory device, find the solution in the chart to the right. If you cannot clear the error message, take your vehicle to your dealer.

SolutionError Message

The system cannot read the file(s). Check the files in the USB flash memory device. There is a possibility that the files have been damaged. Appears when the unsupported USB flash memory device is inserted.

USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

271

FILE ERROR

MEDIA ERROR

2009 TL

Bluetooth Audio System (Models without navigation system)

272

SKIP BAR

SELECTOR KNOB

TITLE BUTTON

AUX BUTTON

SETUP BUTTON

2009 TL

Your vehicle is equipped with a Bluetooth audio system, which allows you to listen to streaming audio from your Bluetooth audio compatible phone. This function is only available on Bluetooth Audio Compatible phones that are paired and linked to the vehicles Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) system (see page ).

Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming audio capabilities are compatible with the system. You can find an approved phone by visiting

, or by calling the HandsFreeLink consumer support at 1-888-528-7876. In Canada, visit , or call 1-888-9-ACURA-9.

In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data device functions while driving.

Make sure that your phone is paired and linked to the HFL. Press the AUX button with the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. The audio display shows the Bluetooth Audio message and mark. Until the phone is recognized, you will see NO CONNECT on the display. This message will go off when the phone is recognized, then the system begins to play.

If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system, there will be delay before the system begins to play.

After a device is linked, press the TITLE button to confirm the device name. The name of the device will appear on the audio display.

To begin to play the audio files, you may need to operate your phone. If so, follow the phone makers operating instructions.

If an iPod, USB flash memory device, or audio unit connected to the auxiliary input jack was selected at the last mode, you will see iPod, USB, or AUX in the audio display. Push the AUX button again to play audio files from your Bluetooth Audio phone.

:

392

www.acura.com/handsfreelink

www.acura.ca

CONTINUED

To Play Bluetooth Audio Files

Bluetooth Audio System (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

273

NOTE:

2009 TL

In the following conditions, the display shows NO CONNECT message.

The phone is not linked to HFL.

Press the side of the SKIP bar to skip forward to the next file, and press the side to skip backward to the beginning of the current file. Push the side again to skip to the previous file.

Turning the selector knob to the right or left also changes a file.

The resume/pause mode can stop playing a file temporarily. Press the SETUP button to display the audio settings.

Turn the selector to select RESUME/PAUSE mode, then press ENTER to set your selection. Repeat to resume play.

The pause function may not be available on some phone devices.

The phone is not turned on. The phone is not in the vehicle. Another HFL compatible phone, which is not compatible for Bluetooth Audio, is already connected.

Bluetooth Audio System (Models without navigation system)

To skip a file

To pause or resume a file

274

NOTE:

2009 TL

After ending the call, press the HFL Back button to go back to the Bluetooth Audio mode.

If you receive a call while the system is in the pause mode, the mode will be canceled and Bluetooth Audio will continue to play.Press the SETUP button to display

the audio settings. Turn the selector to select a desired sound mode, then press ENTER to set your selection. Turn the selector to your liking (see page for more sound setting information).

Select any other audio mode by pressing a button: AM/FM, or CD (if a disc is loaded), on the audio control panel, or press the mode button on the steering wheel to select another audio mode. If an iPod or USB flash memory device is connected to the USB adapter cable, or audio unit is connected to AUX jack, pressing the AUX button also changes the mode.

Switching to another mode pauses the music playing from your phone.

If you receive a call when the Bluetooth Audio is playing, press the HFL Talk button on the steering wheel. The display switches to the HFL mode (see page ).

231

394

CONTINUED

To change sound settings To switch to HFL mode To turn off the Bluetooth Audio mode

Bluetooth Audio System (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

275

2009 TL

As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Bluetooth Audio System (Models without navigation system)

276

2009 TL

Most audio system functions can still be controlled by standard buttons, dials, and knobs, but some functions can only be accessed using the interface dial. The interface dial has two parts, a dial and a selector.

The dial turns left and right. Use it to make selections or adjustments to a list or menu on the screen.

The selector can be pushed left, right, up, down, and in. Use the selector to scroll through lists, to select menus, and to highlight menu items. When you make a selection, push the center of the selector (ENTER) to go to that selection.

The audio system can also be operated by voice control. See the Navigation section in your quick start guide for an overview of this system, and the navigation system manual for complete details.

When you unlock the doors with your remote and turn the audio system on, the drivers ID (Driver 1 or Driver 2) is detected, and the radio presets and sound level settings (see page ) are turned to the respective memorized mode automatically.

288

Interface Dial Voice Control System

Personalization Setting

Audio System (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

277

SELECTOR ENTER

DIAL

2009 TL

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)

278

INTERFACE DIAL

VOL/ (VOLUME/POWER) KNOB

TITLE BUTTON

AM/FM BUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

CATEGORY BAR

TUNE BAR

AUDIO BUTTON

(SOUND) BUTTON

NAVIGATION SCREEN

CENTER DISPLAY

SKIP BAR

SCAN/A.SEL (SCAN/ AUTO SELECT) BAR

2009 TL

CONTINUED

The power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON. Press the AUDIO button to view the audio control display. Turn the system on by pressing the VOL/ knob or the AM/FM button. Adjust the volume by turning the VOL/ knob.

Your vehicle has the engine start/ stop button instead of an ignition switch. For more information to select the power mode, see page .

The band and frequency that the radio was last tuned to are shown on the display. To change bands, press the AM/FM button. You can also change bands by pushing the interface selector up. Each time you push it up, the band will change to FM1, FM2 or AM. On the FM bands, STEREO will be shown on the navigation screen and ST on the center display, if the station is broadcasting in stereo. Stereo reproduction on AM is not available. On the AM band, AM noise reduction turns on automatically.

You can use any of five methods to find radio stations on the selected band: tune, skip (seek), scan, the preset buttons, and auto select. On the FM band, you can also use the features provided by the radio data system (RDS). For more information on the RDS, see page

.

178

282

To Play the AM/FM Radio To Select a Station

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

279

BAND

STEREO INDICATOR

2009 TL

Use the TUNE bar to tune the radio to a desired frequency. Press the side of the bar to tune to a higher frequency, or the

side to tune to a lower frequency. To tune with the interface dial, push the interface selector down, and turn the interface dial to select Tune. Then press ENTER on the interface selector, and turn the interface dial to the desired frequency. To exit the TUNE mode, press ENTER on the

interface selector, then push the interface selector up to go back.

The skip (seek) function searches up and down from the current frequency to find a station with a strong signal. To activate it, press either side ( or

) of the SKIP bar, then release it.

The SCAN function samples all stations with strong signals on the selected band. To activate it, press the SCAN side of the SCAN A.SEL bar, then release it.

To scan with the interface dial, push the interface selector down, and turn the interface dial to select Scan, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)

TUNE

SKIP (SEEK)

SCAN

280

TUNE

SCAN

2009 TL

You will see SCAN on the screen. The system will scan for a station with a strong signal. When it finds one, it will stop and play that station for about 10 seconds. If you do nothing, the system will then scan for the next strong station and play it for 10 seconds. When it plays a station that you want to listen to, press the SCAN side of the bar again.

Each preset button or preset icon can store one frequency on AM and two frequencies on FM.

Select the desired band, AM or FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store six stations each.

Use the tune, skip (seek), scan, or RDS function to tune the radio to a desired station.

Press the preset button, and hold it until you hear a beep. You can also store frequencies with the interface dial. Select the preset icon you want to store the frequency on, then press ENTER on the interface selector, and hold it until you hear a beep.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a total of six stations on AM and twelve stations on FM.

If you are traveling far from home and can no longer receive your preset stations, you can use the auto select feature to find strong signal stations in the local area.

1.

2.

3.

4.

To store a preset memory location:

CONTINUED

Preset

AUTO SELECT

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

281

A.SEL INDICATOR

A.SEL

2009 TL

Push the interface selector down to display the AUDIO MENU. Turn the interface dial to select A.SEL, then press ENTER on the interface selector. Turn the interface dial to select ON, then press ENTER on the interface selector. You will see A.SEL on the center display and the audio control display (if selected), and the system goes into auto select mode for several seconds.

You can also press the A.SEL side of the SCAN/A.SEL bar. You will see A.SEL on the center display or the screen, and the system goes into auto select mode for several seconds.

You will see 0 displayed if auto select cannot find a strong station for every preset button (icon).

The system stores the frequencies of six AM and twelve FM stations in the preset buttons (icons).

If you do not like the stations auto select has stored, you can store other frequencies on the preset buttons (icons) as previously described.

select A.Sel on the audio menu again and turn the interface dial to select A.SEL OFF, or press the A.SEL side of the bar again. This restores the presets you originally set.

For information on AM/FM radio frequencies and reception, see page

.

The RDS INFO display function shows the name of the station you are listening to. With the audio system on and the FM band selected, you can turn this function on or off.

On the FM band, you can select a favorite station and display the program service name according to the information provided by the radio data system (RDS) if the station has the RDS information available.

372

To cancel auto select,

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)

RDS INFO Display

Radio Data System (RDS)

282

2009 TL

If the station you are listening to is not an RDS station, the audio screen and the center display continue to show the frequency.

To switch the RDS INFO display function on and off, press and release the TITLE button. With the system on, you will see the RDS INFO ON message on the center display. If the station you are listening to is an RDS station, the displayed frequency switches to the station name.

When you turn off this function by pressing the TITLE button, the center display shows RDS INFO OFF.

On the FM band selected, you can select the program type provided by the RDS. Press the AUDIO button to display the radio information on the screen. Push down the interface selector, then turn the interface dial to select RDS search. Press ENTER to set your selection. The principal RDS categories are shown as follows:

If the station you are listening to is an RDS station, the audio screen will always display the RDS information.

CONTINUED

Radio Data System (RDS) Category

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

283

NOTE:RDS INFO MESSAGE

RDS SEARCH

2009 TL

ALL: All RDS category stations COUNTRY: Country music. TOP 40: Top 40 hits ROCK: Rock, classic rock and soft rock music OLDIES: Nostalgia music and oldies JAZZ: Jazz SOFT: Adult hits and soft music R & B: Rhythm and blues, and soft rhythm and blues CLASSIC: Classical music RELIGION: Religious music and religious talk INFO: News, information, sports, talk, foreign language, personality, public, college, and weather TRAFFIC: Traffic information

Turn the interface dial to select an RDS category. You can use the search or scan function to find radio stations on the selected RDS category by pressing the interface selector to the left or the right. Press ENTER to set your selection. If you do nothing while the RDS category is selected, the selected category is canceled.

You can also select an RDS category with the CATEGORY bar. Press either side ( or ) of the CATEGORY bar to display an RDS category in the center display. Select a category by pressing either side of the bar.

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)

284

RDS CATEGORY

RDS CATEGORY

2009 TL

This function searches up and down for strong signal frequencies that carries the selected RDS category information. This can help you to find a station in your favorite category. To activate it, press and release either side ( or ) of the SKIP bar. You will also see the selected RDS category name blinking in the center display while searching it.

To activate RDS category search with the interface dial, push the AUDIO button to display the FM radio information on the screen. Push the interface selector down, and turn the interface dial to select RDS search. Press ENTER on the interface selector. The screen shows you the RDS category list.

While the RDS category is selected, move the interface selector to the left or right to select SEEK up, SEEK down, or SCAN in the upper right corner of the screen. When you press and release ENTER to select the RDS category, RDS category search (SEEK up/down) starts.

If the system does not find a station, NOTHING will blink for about 5 seconds on the center display, then NOTHING will blink for about 5 seconds on the navigation screen and the system will go back to the last selected station.

Turn the interface dial to the desired RDS category.

CONTINUED

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)

RDS Category Search

F eatures

285

SEEK is selected.

SEEK/SCAN ICON (RDS Search mode)

RDS CATEGORY LIST

2009 TL

To activate RDS category scan with the interface dial, push the AUDIO button to display the FM radio information on the screen. Push the interface selector down, and turn the interface dial to select RDS search on the audio menu. Press ENTER on the interface selector. The screen shows you the RDS category list.

If you do nothing, the system will scan for the next strong station and play it for 10 seconds. When it plays a station that you want to listen to, press the SCAN side of the SCAN/ A.SEL bar again.

If the system does not find a station, NOTHING will blink for about 5 seconds on the center display, then NOTHING will blink for about 5 seconds on the navigation screen and the system will go back to the last selected station.

The scan function samples all stations with strong signals on the selected RDS category one by one. To activate it, press and release the SCAN side of the SCAN/A.SEL bar. You will see SCAN in the center display. The system will scan for a station with a strong signal in the selected RDS category. You will also see the selected RDS category name blinking in the center display while scanning it. When the system finds one, it will stop and play that station for about 10 seconds.

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)

RDS Category SCAN

286

RDS CATEGORY LIST

SEEK/SCAN ICON (RDS Search mode)

SCAN is selected.

2009 TL

While the RDS category is selected, move the interface selector to the left or the right to select SCAN. When you press and release ENTER to select the RDS category, RDS program SCAN starts.

To activate radio text display, use the interface dial. Push the interface selector down, and turn the interface dial to select Read Radio Text. Press ENTER on the interface selector to enter the setting.

This function displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station.

If the selected RDS station has the radio text information, you will see the text indicator on the screen.

Turn the interface dial to the desired RDS category.

CONTINUED

Radio Text Display

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

287

TEXT INDICATOR

READ RADIO TEXT

2009 TL

To adjust the sound, press the AUDIO button, push the interface selector down, and turn the interface dial to Sound Setup. Then press ENTER on the interface selector.

Select the mode you want to adjust by turning the interface dial.

BASS, TREBLE, FADER, and BALANCE are each adjustable. You can also adjust the strength of the sound coming from the center and subwoofer speakers. In addition, you can set the Dolby PL (ProLogic) II and Speed-sensitive volume compensation (SVC).

These adjustments can be made with the (Sound) button or the interface dial.

The display shows up to 64 characters on the selected RDS station.

Adjusting the Sound

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)

288

SOUND SETUP

2009 TL

These modes adjust the strength of the sound coming from each speaker. Fader adjusts the front-to-back strength, while balance adjusts the side-to-side strength. To adjust fader and balance, select FADER or BALANCE, then press ENTER on the interface selector. The current setting is shown on the screen. Turn the interface dial or VOL/ knob to the desired level, and enter your selection by pressing ENTER on the interface selector. To equalize the fader or balance, turn the interface dial or VOL/ knob until the marks on the sound grid come to the center of the adjustment bar.

The system will return to the audio playing mode in the center display about 10 seconds after you stop adjusting a mode.

Turn the VOL/ knob or interface knob to adjust the setting to your liking. You can check the level on the navigation screen or on the center display. When the level reaches the center, you will see C in the center display.

You can also adjust the sound by pushing the (Sound) button repeatedly. Each mode is shown in the center display as you push the button.

If you do not make an adjustment within 10 seconds, you will need to select the mode again.

To adjust bass and treble, select BASS or TREBLE, and press ENTER on the interface selector. The current setting is shown on the display. Turn the interface dial or VOL/ knob to the desired level, and enter your selection by pressing ENTER on the interface selector.

If the fader adjustment is set to F9 (maximum front level), the subwoofer is turned off.

CONTINUED

FADER/BALANCE

BASS/TREBLE

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

289

2009 TL

The SVC mode controls the volume based on vehicle speed. The faster you go, the louder the audio volume becomes. As you slow down, the audio volume decreases.

Adjusts the strength of sound from the center speaker.

To adjust the strength of the sound from the subwoofer speaker, select it and press ENTER on the interface selector. Turn the interface dial to the desired level, and enter your selection by pressing ENTER on the interface selector.

Dolby PL (ProLogic) II signal processing creates multi-channel surround sound from 2 channel stereo audio sources. Dolby ProLogic II can only activate when listening to DISC (CD-DA, MP3, WMA, AAC), XM radio, AUX (USB, iPod , AUX, Bluetooth Audio), and HDD Audio. When ProLogic II is available, PL II is shown in the audio display.

When ProLogic II is not available in the selected audio source, DPL2 N/ A is shown on the center display.

The SVC has four modes: OFF, LOW, MID, and HIGH. The default setting is MID. To change the SVC mode, select SVC, then press ENTER on the interface selector. The current setting is shown on the screen. Turn the interface dial to the desired level, and enter your selection by pressing ENTER on the interface selector. If you feel the sound is too loud, choose low. If you feel the sound is too quiet, choose high.

Speed-sensitive Volume Compensation (SVC)

CENTER

SUBWOOFER

Dolby PL (ProLogic) II

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)

290

2009 TL

To set this feature on or off, select Dolby PL II, and press ENTER on the interface selector. Rotate the interface dial to ON or OFF, and press ENTER.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, ProLogic, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

In some audio playing modes (XM, AUX), when DPLII is on, the music coming from the rear speakers may sound distorted. This is due to compression of the music, and it does not indicate a problem with the setting.

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

291

NOTE:

2009 TL

Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)

292

CATEGORY BAR

TUNE BAR

AUDIO BUTTON

INTERFACE DIAL

PRESET BUTTONS

(SOUND) BUTTON

NAVIGATION SCREEN

CENTER DISPLAY

SKIP BAR

SCAN/A.SEL (SCAN/ AUTO SELECT) BAR

XM RADIO BUTTON

TITLE BUTTON

VOL/ (VOLUME/POWER) KNOB

2009 TL

XM radio receives signals from two satellites to produce clear, high- quality digital reception. It offers many channels in several categories. Along with a large selection of different types of music, XM radio also allows you to view channel and category selections in the audio display.

Your vehicle is capable of receiving XM Radio anywhere in the United States and Canada, except Hawaii, Alaska, and Puerto Rico. XM is a registered trademark of XM Satellite Radio , Inc.

To listen to XM radio, set the power mode to ACCESSORY or ON. Push the button to select the XM radio. The last channel you listened to will show in the audio screen (if selected) and the center display. Adjust the volume by turning the VOL/ knob.

Your vehicle has the engine start/ stop button instead of an ignition switch. For more information to select the power mode, see page .

Each time you push the interface selector up, the band will change to XM1 or XM2. Push the AUDIO button to display XM information on the screen. You can operate the XM radio system with the interface dial.

178

CONTINUED

Operating the XM Radio

Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

293

2009 TL

Each time you press and release the TITLE button, the center display changes in the following sequence: NAME (artist name), TITLE (music title), and CHANNEL NAME (channel name).

On the screen, you will see the selected CHANNEL (number), CATEGORY, NAME (artist name), and TITLE (music title).

You may experience periods when XM Radio does not transmit the artists name and song title information. If this happens, there is nothing wrong with your system.

To switch between the category mode and channel mode, push the interface selector down to display AUDIO MENU, then turn the interface dial to select Mode, and press ENTER on the interface selector.

Turn the interface dial to select CH or CAT, then press ENTER on the interface selector. Move the interface selector up to go back.

You can also switch the mode by pressing the TITLE button for 3 seconds.

In the category mode, such as Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc., you can navigate through all of the channels within that category. In the channel mode, you can select all of the available channels.

Press either side of the TUNE bar to change channel selections. Press the side of the bar for higher numbered channels and the side for lower numbered channels. You can also change channels with the interface selector, push down the interface

selector to select AUDIO MENU, then turn the interface dial to choose Tune and press ENTER on the interface selector. Turn the interface dial to the appropriate direction. In the category mode, you can only select channels within that category.

Push down the interface selector to select AUDIO MENU, then turn the interface dial to select Channel List and press ENTER on the selector. Turn the interface dial to select a channel, then press ENTER to set your selection.

Press either side of the bar to select another category.

Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)

MODE

TUNE

CHANNEL LIST

CATEGORY ( or )

294

2009 TL

The scan function gives you a sampling of all channels while in the channel mode. In the category mode, only the channels within that category are scanned. To activate SCAN, press the SCAN side of the SCAN/A.SEL bar. You will see SCAN on the screen and center display.

The system plays each channel in numerical order for a few seconds, then selects the next channel. When you hear a channel you want to continue listening to, press the SCAN side of the bar to cancel.

This function samples all channels. Push down the interface selector to select AUDIO MENU, then turn the interface dial to select Channel Scan and press ENTER on the interface selector.

Press the button. Either XM1 or XM2 will be shown on the display.

To store a channel:

You can store up to 12 preset channels using the six preset buttons. Each button stores one channel from the XM1 band and one channel from the XM2 band.

This function samples the stations in the selected category. Push down the interface selector to select AUDIO MENU, then turn the interface dial to select Category Scan and press ENTER on the interface selector.

1.

CONTINUED

SCAN

CHANNEL SCAN

PresetCATEGORY SCAN

Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

295

2009 TL

The signal is currently too weak. Move the vehicle to an area away from tall buildings, and with an unobstructed view of the southern horizon.

The selected channel number does not exist, or is not part of your subscription, or this channel has no artist or title information at this time.

There is a problem with the XM antenna. Please consult your dealer.

The encryption code is being updated. Wait until the encryption code is fully updated. Channels 0 and 1 should still work normally.

XM is loading the audio or program information.

The channel currently selected is no longer broadcasting.

Once a channel is stored, press and release the proper preset button to tune to it.

Press the button or scroll up again. The other XM band will be shown. Store the next six channels using steps 2 and 3.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the first six channels.

Pick the preset button you want for that channel. Press and hold the preset button until you hear a beep. You can also pick the number with the interface dial. Select your desired number and press and hold ENTER on the interface selector.

In category mode, only channels within that category can be selected. In channel mode, all channels can be selected.

Use the tune, list, or scan function to tune to a desired channel.

5.

3.

4.

2.

Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)

NO SIGNAL

- - - -

CHECK ANTENNAUPDATING

LOADING

OFF AIR XM Radio Display Messages

296

2009 TL

The XM satellites are in orbit over the equator; therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause satellite reception interruptions. To help compensate for this, ground-based repeaters are placed in major metropolitan areas. Satellite signals are more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and mountains the farther north you travel from the equator.

Depending on where you drive, you may experience reception problems. Interference can be caused by any of these conditions:

Driving on the north side of an east/west mountain road.

Driving on the north side of a large commercial truck on an east/west road.

Driving in tunnels. Driving on a single lane road alongside dense trees taller than 50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.

Driving on the lower level of a multi-tiered road.

Driving on a road beside a vertical wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south of you.

There may be other geographic situations that could affect XM Radio reception.

As required by the FCC: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

CONTINUED

Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

297

GROUND REPEATER

Signal may be blocked by mountains or large obstacles to the south.

Signal weaker in these areas.

SATELLITE

2009 TL

To replay and see the stored file, press the AUDIO button to select the audio display on the navigation screen.

Push down the interface selector to display the audio menu. Turn the interface dial to select Note, then press ENTER.

This function stores the sound content played on the selected XM satellite radio station with the channel, category, name, and title information.

To activate this function, press and hold the button for about 2 seconds while a song or passage which you want to store is playing. You can record for up to 10 seconds. To stop recording, press the AM/ FM button or button.

Turn the selector dial to select a sound file, then press ENTER. The display shows the category, name and title information of the selected file.

Once you store the recorded sound file, you can replay it and confirm the information. The system can store up to 30 sound files. If you continue to store more files, the oldest one will be deleted each time you add new file.

U.S. models only Note Function

Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)

298

SOUND FILE RECORDED DATE

NOTE ICON

2009 TL

To delete all files, push the interface selector to the left to select DELETE ALL, then press ENTER on the interface selector. To delete one file, select the file you want to delete and push the interface selector to the right, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

If your XM Radio service has expired or you purchased your vehicle from a previous owner, you can listen to a sampling of the broadcasts available on XM Radio. With the power mode in ACCESSORY or ON, press the

button. A variety of music types and styles will play.

Your vehicle has the engine start/ stop button instead of an ignition switch. For more information to select the power mode, see page .

If you decide to purchase XM radio service, contact XM Radio at

, or at 1-800-852-9696. In Canada, contact

, or call 1-877-438- 9677. You will need to give them your radio I.D. number and your credit card number. To get your radio I.D. number, press and release the side of the TUNE bar until 0 appears in the display. Your I.D.

will appear in the display.

After you have registered with XM Radio, keep your audio system in the satellite radio mode while you wait for activation. This should take about 30 minutes.

While waiting for activation, make sure your vehicle remains in an open area with good reception. Once your audio system is activated, CAT (category) or CH (channel) will appear in the center display, and youll be able to listen to XM Radio broadcasts. XM Radio will continue to send an activation signal to your vehicle for at least 12 hours from the activation request. If the service has not been activated after 36 hours, contact XM Radio.

178

www.xmradio.com

www.xmradio.ca

Playing the XM Radio (Models with navigation system)

Receiving XM Radio Service

F eatures

299

2009 TL

Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)

300

CATEGORY BAR SKIP BAR

AUDIO BUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

EJECT BUTTON

INTERFACE DIAL

CENTER DISPLAY

NAVIGATION SCREEN

VOL/ (VOLUME/POWER) KNOB

DISC BUTTON

SCAN/A.SEL (SCAN/ AUTO SELECT) BAR

DISC SLOT

TITLE BUTTON

2009 TL

The disc packages or jackets should have one of these marks.

The disc player can also play MP3, WMA, or AAC format that saved on CD-R/RW or DVD-R/RW (see page

).

If a file on WMA or AAC disc is protected by digital rights management (DRM), the audio system skips to the next file.

DVD-A discs not meeting DVD verification standards may not be playable.

Video CDs and DVD-V format discs will not work in this unit.

Some CD-DA and CD-ROM mixed discs are not playable.

Your vehicles audio system has an internal disc player. To operate the disc player, the power mode must be in the ACCESSORY or ON.

Your vehicle has the engine start/ stop button instead of an ignition switch. For more information on selecting the power mode, see page

.

CD (CD-DA, CD-TEXT) CD-R/CD-RW (MP3, WMA, AAC) DVD-A DVD-R/DVD-RW (MP3, WMA, AAC)

The CD player can play these disc formats:

306

178

CONTINUED

Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

301

NOTE:

2009 TL

You cannot load and play 3-inch (8-cm) discs in this system.

It is possible to select up to 999 files for inclusion in CD-Rs and CD-RWs, and up to 3,500 files for inclusion in DVD-Rs and DVD-RWs.

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and DTS Digital Surround are registered trademarks and the DTS logos and Symbol are trademarks of DTS, Inc.

1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Insert a disc about halfway into the disc slot. The drive will pull the disc in the rest of the way to play it. You operate the disc player with the same controls used for the radio. The number of the current track is shown in the display. When playing a disc in MP3, WMA or AAC, the numbers of the current folder and file are shown. The system will continuously play a disc until you change modes.

For information on how to handle and protect compact discs, see page

.313

To Load a Disc

Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)

302

Do not use discs with adhesive labels. The label can curl up and cause the disc to jam in the unit.

2009 TL

Select the disc player by pressing the DISC button. The system will begin playing the last selected track in the disc. You will see the current track position highlighted.

Title information will be displayed by a list when the information is found in the Gracenote Album Info (Gracenote Media Database) on the built-in hard disk drive. When you play a CD recorded with text data, you will see the genre, artist name, album and track name on the screen. When you play MP3/WMA/AAC discs, you will see the genre, artist name, album name and track name on the screen. If the disc was not recorded with this information, it will not be displayed.

Each time you press the TITLE button, the center display changes from artist name to album name, to track name and then to normal display that shows the track number and the elapsed time. When playing a disc in MP3/WMA/AAC, the display mode changes from folder name, to file name, to artist tag, to album tag, to track tag, and then to normal display.

Each time you press and release the side of the skip bar, the player

skips forward to the beginning of the next track. Press and release the

side of the skip bar to skip backward to the beginning of the current track. Press the side again to skip to the previous track. To move rapidly within a track, press and hold either side of the skip bar.

When you insert a CD for the first time, the system automatically starts recording to the hard disc. For information on recording from music CDs, see page .319

To Play a Disc To Change Tracks

Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

303

2009 TL

You can also choose a track directly from a track list. If there are no track names, you will see No Title displayed. Turn the interface dial to select the desired track, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

To replay the current track continuously, push the interface selector down while playing a disc. Turn the interface dial to select Repeat on the AUDIO MENU, and press ENTER on the interface selector. Turn the interface dial to select Repeat icon, and press ENTER on the interface selector.

To turn this feature off, turn the interface dial to select OFF icon, and press ENTER on the interface selector.

To Choose a Track Track Repeat

Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)

304

TRACK LIST

TRACK REPEAT INDICATOR

REPEAT OFF ICON

TRACK REPEAT ICON

2009 TL

This feature plays the tracks within a disc in random order. When playing MP3, WMA or AAC format discs, all the tracks within the disc are played in random order, regardless of the configuration of the folder.

Push the interface selector down while playing a disc. Turn the interface dial to select Random on the AUDIO MENU, and press ENTER on the interface selector.

The scan function samples all tracks on the disc in the order they are recorded on the disc.

To activate scan, press the SCAN side of the SCAN/A.SEL bar, or push the interface selector down while playing a disc. Turn the interface dial to select Scan on the AUDIO MENU, and press ENTER on the interface selector.

To turn this feature off, turn the interface dial to select OFF icon, and press ENTER on the interface selector.

Turn the interface dial to select the track random icon, and press ENTER on the interface selector.

CONTINUED

Random Play Track Scan

Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

305

TRACK RANDOM INDICATOR

SCAN ICONTRACK RANDOM ICON

RANDOM OFF ICON

2009 TL

This audio system plays CD-ROM, CD-R/RW, DVD-ROM, and DVD-R/RW compressed in MP3, WMA, or AAC formats. You can select up to 255 folders or tracks.

To take the system out of disc mode, press the AM/FM button, the

button, or the HDD/AUX button. To return to disc mode, press the DISC button.

Turn the interface dial to select the Scan icon, and press ENTER on the interface selector. You will hear a 10- second sampling of each track on the disc. When you return to disc mode, the disc will begin playing from where it left off.

To turn this feature off, press the SCAN button again, or turn the interface dial to select the OFF icon, and press ENTER on the interface selector. The system begins to play the last track sampled.

If you turn the system off while a disc is playing, either with the VOL/

knob or the engine start/stop button, the disc will stay in the drive. When you turn the system back on, the disc will begin playing where it left off.

The specifications for compatible MP3 files are:

Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1) 16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2) 8/11.025/12 kHz (MPEG2.5)

Your vehicle has the engine start/ stop button instead of an ignition switch. For more information to turn the power mode off, see page .

: Including Root folder

178

Maximum folders

255

255

Maximum layers

8

8

Maximum Files

999

3500

Playing an MP3/WMA/AAC DiscTo Stop Playing a Disc

Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)

306

Disc

CD-ROM CD-R CD-RW DVD-ROM DVD-R DVD-RW

2009 TL

The specifications for compatible WMA files are:

Bitrate: 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/ 160/192/224/256/320 kbps (MPEG1) 8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/ 112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2) 8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/ 112/128/144/160 kbps (MPEG2.5) Compatible with variable bitrate and multi-session. Maximum layers: 255 layers

While playing an MP3/WMA/AAC disc, you can select a folder within the disc by pressing either side of the category bar. Each time you press either side of the bar, the folder title and its first files information appear on the center display and on the navigation screen in hierarchical order of the folders which contain files within the disc.

Sampling frequency: 8/11.025/16/22.05/32/44.1/48 kHz Bitrate: 5/6/8/10/12/16/20/22/32/48/ 64/80/96/128/160/192/256/ 320 kbps Compatible with variable bitrate and multi-session

Maximum layers: 255 layers

The specifications for compatible AAC files are:

Bitrate: 8/16/20/24/28/32/40/48/56/64/ 80/96/112/128/160/192/224/ 256/320 kbps Compatible with multi-session. Maximum layers: 255 layers

Sampling frequency: 8/11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/ 44.1/48 kHz

Combining a low sampling frequency with a low bitrate may result in extremely degraded sound quality.

To play an MP3/WMA/AAC disc, use the disc controls previously described, along with the following information.

CONTINUED

Changing the Folders

Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

307

NOTE:

2009 TL

Changing and Selecting the Folders/ Files

Using the interface selector, you can see the list of all the folders within a disc. While playing an MP3/WMA/ AAC disc, push the interface selector up. The folder list in the currently playing disc will appear on the screen.

This feature, when activated, replays all files on the selected folder in the order they are compressed. To activate folder repeat play, push the interface selector down while playing a disc. Turn the interface dial to select Repeat on the AUDIO MENU, and press ENTER on the interface selector. Turn the interface dial to select the folder repeat icon, and press ENTER on the interface selector.

If the root folder has some additional folders in the lower layer, they will be listed on the screen.

Select a desired folder by turning the interface dial, then press ENTER. The display returns to normal play, and the first track in the selected folder begins to play.

To change a file, turn the interface dial to select a desired file, then press ENTER.

Folder Repeat

Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)

308

FOLDER LIST

REPEAT OFF ICON

FOLDER REPEAT ICON TRACK LIST

FOLDER REPEAT INDICATOR

2009 TL

To turn this feature off, turn the interface dial to select OFF icon, and press ENTER on the interface selector.

This feature, when activated, plays all files in the current folder in random order. To activate folder random play, push the interface selector down while playing a disc. Turn the interface dial to select Random on the AUDIO MENU, and press ENTER on the interface selector. Turn the interface dial to select the folder random icon, and press ENTER on the interface selector.

To turn this feature off, turn the interface dial to select OFF icon, and press ENTER on the interface selector.

Folder Random

Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

309

FOLDER RANDOM INDICATOR

FOLDER RANDOM ICON

2009 TL

This feature samples all files in the selected folder in the order they are stored. To activate this feature, press the SCAN side of the SCAN/A.SEL bar. You can also select the SCAN icon with the interface dial. Push the selector down, turn the dial to select Scan on the AUDIO MENU, then press ENTER. Turn the dial to select the scan icon, then press ENTER. The system begins to play a file for about 10 seconds, and continues to

sample the remaining files. This feature, when activated, samples the first file of each folder for 10 seconds. To scan a folder, press the SCAN side of the SCAN/ A.SEL bar. Or, push the interface selector down while playing a disc. Turn the interface dial to select Scan on the AUDIO MENU, and press ENTER on the interface selector. Turn the interface dial to select the folder scan icon, and press ENTER on the interface selector.

To turn this feature off, press the SCAN side of the bar again, or select OFF icon by turning the dial, then press ENTER.

Folder ScanFile Scan

Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)

310

FILE SCAN ICON

FOLDER SCAN ICON

SCAN OFF ICON

2009 TL

The system plays the first file in the first folder for about 10 seconds. If you do nothing, the system will then play the first files in the next folders for 10 seconds. After playing the first file of the last folder, the system plays normally.

To turn this feature off, turn the interface dial to select OFF icon, and press ENTER on the interface selector. The last track sampled begins to play.

When playing MP3, WMA or AAC format disc, each time you press the SCAN side of the SCAN/A.SEL bar, the system changes in the following sequence: Scan Scan first track in folder OFF Scan.

To remove the disc, press the eject ( ) button.

Use the disc controls previously described.

If you do not remove the disc from the slot, the system will reload the disc after 10 seconds. The disc starts playing automatically.

Removing Discs from the Disc Player

Playing a DVD-A Disc

Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

311

NOTE:

2009 TL

The chart on the right explains the error messages you may see in the center display while playing a disc.

If you see an error message in the center display while playing a disc, press the eject button. After ejecting the disc, check it for damage or deformation. If there is no damage, insert the disc again. For additional information on damaged discs, see page .

The audio system will try to play the disc. If there is still a problem, the error message will reappear. Press the eject button, and pull out the disc. Insert a different disc. If the new disc plays, there is a problem with the first disc. If the error message cycle repeats and you cannot clear it, take your vehicle to a dealer.

CauseError Message

Solution

314

Servo Error

Mechanical Error

FOUCS Error Disc violates copyright Disc not supported Load Error

Track/File format not supported High Temperature

Press the eject button and pull out the disc. Check the disc for serious damage, signs of deformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt (see page 314 ). Insert the disc again. If the code does not disappear, or the disc cannot be removed, consult your dealer. Do not try to force the disc out of the player.

Current track will be skipped. The next supported track or file plays automatically. Will disappear when the temperature returns to normal.

Disc Player Error Messages (Models with navigation system)

312

BAD DISC PLEASE CHECK

OWNERS MANUAL BAD DISC

PLEASE CHECK OWNERS MANUAL

PUSH EJECT MECH ERROR CHECK DISC

CHECK DISC LOAD

UNPLAYABLE FILE

HEAT ERROR

2009 TL

When using CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R or DVD-RW discs, use only high quality discs labeled for audio use.

Play only standard, round, 5-inch (12 cm) discs. Smaller or odd- shaped discs may jam in the drive or cause other problems.

Handle your discs properly to prevent damage and skipping.

When recording a CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R or DVD-RW the recording must be closed for it to be used by the disc player.

When using DVD-R/RW discs, they should meet DVD verification standards.

When a disc is not being played, store it in its case to protect it from dust and other contamination. To prevent warpage, keep discs out of direct sunlight and extreme heat.

To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth. Wipe across the disc from the center to the outside edge.

A new disc may be rough on the inner and outer edges. The small plastic pieces causing this roughness can flake off and fall on the recording surface of the disc, causing skipping or other problems. Remove these pieces by rubbing the inner and outer edges with the side of a pencil or pen.

Never try to insert foreign objects in the disc player.

Handle a disc by its edges; never touch either surface. Do not place stabilizer rings or labels on the disc. These, along with contamination from finger prints, liquids, and felt- tip pens, can cause the disc to not play properly, or possibly jam in the drive.

General Information

Protecting Discs

Protecting Your Discs (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

313

Do not use discs with adhesive labels. The label can curl up and cause the disc to jam in the unit.

2009 TL

Examples of these discs are shown to the right:

Bubbled, wrinkled, labeled, and excessively thick discs

Damaged discs Poor quality discs

The in-dash disc player has a sophisticated and delicate mechanism. If you insert a damaged disc as indicated in this section, it may become stuck inside and damage the audio unit.

1.

2. 3.

Additional Information on Recommended Discs

Protecting Your Discs (Models with navigation system)

314

Sealed

Warped BurrsChipped/ Cracked

Bubbled/ Wrinkled

With Label/ Sticker

Using Printer Label Kit

With Plastic Ring

2009 TL

Small, irregular shaped discs Discs with scratches, dirty discs Recommended discs are printed with the following logo.

Audio unit may not play the following formats.

This audio unit cannot play a Dual- disc .

CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R or DVD-RW may not play due to the recording conditions.

Scratches and fingerprints on the discs may cause the sound to skip.

4. 5.

Protecting Your Discs (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

315

Fingerprints, scratches, etc.

3-inch (8-cm) CD Triangle Shape

Arrow ShapeCan Shape

2009 TL

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)

316

TITLE BUTTON

AUDIO BUTTON

NAVIGATION SCREEN

INTERFACE DIAL

HDD/AUX BUTTON

CENTER DISPLAY

SKIP BARCATEGORY BAR

VOL/ (VOLUME/POWER) KNOB

SCAN/A.SEL (SCAN/ AUTO SELECT) BAR

2009 TL

Recording function from following media is not supported. CD-DA which prohibits the copy by SCMS CD-DA with copy control SACD (Super Audio CD) DTS-CD DVD-A CD-R/RW DVD-R/RW Copy controlled CDs (Playback cannot be guaranteed) DTS-CDs (Only enabled for playback)

The Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio function can record tracks from music CDs to the navigation systems hard disc. This function also allows for various playing methods, such as playing recorded tracks on an artist- by-artist or genre-by-genre basis. For example, you can play the tracks that you want to listen to in any order that you like for each playlist.

Music data recorded on HDD can only be used for personal enjoyment.

Data is recorded using ultra- efficient compression technology, therefore, sound quality may vary slightly from the original.

Title information will be displayed when the information is found in the Gracenote Album Info (Gracenote Media Database) on the built-in hard disk drive. See page .

If the HDD is ever replaced, all data will be lost and stored music will not be recovered.

Only recordings from a standard CD-DA (44.1 kHz, 16 bit stereo PCM digital sound data) to HDD are supported.

Digital music files, such as MP3, WMA, AAC etc., in CD-R, DVD-R and USB flash memory devices cannot be copied to HDD. Likewise, digital music files recorded to HDD cannot be copied to CD-R, DVD-R and USB devices.

342

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

317

NOTE:

2009 TL

Songs that have been recorded on the HDD are categorized in groups for easy searching.

There are six categories: Album record date: Album titles are arranged by date of recording. Album: Album names are arranged in alphabetical order. Artist: Artist names are arranged in alphabetical order.

Playlist: Any of six playlists that are arranged by the user

Genre: Songs are arranged by genre.

Track: Track titles are arranged in alphabetical order. For more information of how to search a music, see page .

The HDD has six playlist folders for user customizing. Each playlist can be edited by the user, and will store up to 999 songs. For more information of how to edit the user playlist, see page .

Playlists are track lists in a certain playback group.

This playlist is automatically generated when the music CD is recorded. The maximum number of original playlists that can be stored to the HDD is 999, with 99 songs on each playlist. Each album name on the music CD is counted as a playlist.

329

325

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)

Track Search MethodsUser PlaylistPlaylists

Original Playlist

318

2009 TL

If you play a music CD that has not yet been recorded on the HDD, the system will automatically begin recording to the HDD once the disc is loaded. To turn this feature off, see page .

The icons show the recording conditions for each track: Rec icon: Now recording Rec ready icon: Next to be recorded Rec done icon: Recording finished

Please note that there will be no compensation offered in the case of unsuccessful recording of audio data or the loss of audio data due to any cause whatsoever.

Skip up/down, forward/rewind, repeat, random and scan functions are not available during recording.

Tracks from music CDs are recorded at four times the playback speed. You can listen to tracks as they are being recorded.

If you stop the engine or the power system is turned off while recording a CD, there may be pauses between songs when you play back from the HDD.

During recording, operation of this product may be slower.

320

CONTINUED

Recording a Music CD to HDD Audio

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

319

NOTE:REC DONE ICON

REC READY ICON

REC ICON

2009 TL

You can listen to tracks from other playlists that have already been recorded while recording. Press the HDD/AUX button and switch over to HDD Audio.

With the factory settings, all of the songs on a music CD are automatically recorded.

Recording settings cannot be changed during recording.

If the number of songs in the playlist exceeds 999, the oldest song will be overwritten each time you add a new song.

In order to suspend recording, push the interface selector down, select Cancel Rec to HDD, and press ENTER on the interface selector.

To change the setting to manual mode, push the interface selector down on the HDD screen. Turn the interface dial to select HDD Setup and press ENTER. Turn the interface dial to select Ripping, and press ENTER on the interface selector.

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)

To Cancel Recording a Music CD to HDD

Changing the Recording Settings Recording All of the Tracks on a Music CD Manually

320

HDD SETUP

2009 TL

Turn the dial to select Ripping and press ENTER on the interface selector.

To change the setting to automatically record all of the tracks on a music CD, move the interface selector down on the HDD Audio screen. Turn the interface dial to select HDD Setup, and press ENTER on the interface selector.

Turn the interface selector to select Ripping, and press ENTER on the interface selector.

Turn the interface dial to select AUTO, and press ENTER on the interface selector.To record the music CD, push the

HDD/AUX button, then push the interface selector down to display the audio menu. Turn the interface dial to select Rec to HDD, and then press ENTER on the interface selector.

Turn the interface dial to select MANUAL and press ENTER on the interface selector.

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)

Recording All of the Tracks on a Music CD Automatically

F eatures

321

RIPPING ICON REC TO HDD ICON

2009 TL

To play tracks on HDD, push the HDD/AUX button until the HDD Audio screen appears. Playback will start automatically with the track previously selected.

To select tracks, press on the Category bar or the Skip bar.

To fast forward, press and hold the side of the SKIP bar. To

rewind, press and hold the side of the SKIP bar.Category Bar

The next playlist is selected. If you press during the last playlist, the first playlist is selected. The previous playlist is selected. If you press during the first playlist, the last playlist is selected.

Skip Bar Returns to the beginning of the song that is being played. Otherwise, the previous track is selected. If you press this bar during the first song, the last song is selected. The next song is selected. If you press this bar during the last song, the first song is selected.

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)

Playing Tracks on HDD Playing the Selected Track Fast Forwarding and Rewinding

322

2009 TL

To replay the current track continuously, push the interface selector down during track playback.

Turn the interface dial to select Repeat on the HDD AUDIO MENU, and press ENTER on the interface selector. Turn the interface dial to select the repeat icon, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

To turn this feature off, turn the interface dial to select the OFF icon, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

This function plays the tracks on the HDD in random order. To activate random play, push the interface selector down during track playback. Turn the interface dial to select Random on the HDD AUDIO MENU. Press ENTER on the interface selector.

CONTINUED

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)

Repeat Playback Random Playback

F eatures

323

REPEAT ICON

REPEAT OFF ICON RANDOM OFF ICON

RANDOM ICON

2009 TL

Turn the interface dial to select the track random icon, and press ENTER on the interface selector.

To turn this feature off, turn the interface dial to select the OFF icon, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

This function samples all the tracks on the HDD in the order that they were recorded.

To activate scan, push the interface selector down during track playback. Turn the interface dial to select Scan on the HDD AUDIO MENU, and press ENTER on the interface selector.

Turn the interface dial to select the scan icon. Press ENTER on the interface selector. You will hear a 10- second sampling of each track on the HDD.

To turn this feature off, turn the interface dial to select the OFF icon. Press ENTER on the interface selector to play the last track sampled.

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)

Scan Playback

324

SCAN ICON

SCAN OFF ICON

2009 TL

While playing music in the HDD playback screen, push the interface selector up to select MUSIC SEARCH. You can search a track by album, artist, track, playlist, genre, or album record date, or you can shuffle all tracks.

Shuffles the playback of all tracks that have been recorded on HDD.

To shuffle all tracks, push the interface selector up to display the Search music by screen, and then push the interface selector down. Shuffled playback begins.

Push the interface selector up to display the Search music by screen, and turn the interface dial to select Album. Press ENTER on the selector, and the album list will be displayed in alphabetical order.

If you push the interface selector right or left, you can change the alphabet tag.

CONTINUED

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)

Searching the Music

SHUFFLE ALL TRACKS

Searching Music by Album

F eatures

325

Push the selector down.

ALPHABET TAG

2009 TL

The first track on the selected album begins to play.

Turn the interface dial to select the album you want to listen to, then press ENTER on the selector.

Push the interface selector up to display the Search music by screen, and turn the interface dial to select Artist. Press ENTER on the interface selector, and the artist list will be displayed in alphabetical order.

Turn the interface dial to select the artist you want to listen to, and press ENTER on the interface selector.

If you push the interface selector right or left, you can change the alphabet tag.

The first track on the selected artist begins to play.

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)

Searching Music by Artist

326

2009 TL

CONTINUED

Push the interface selector up to display the Search music by screen, and turn the interface dial to select Track. Press ENTER on the interface selector, and the track list will be displayed in alphabetical order.

Turn the interface dial to select a track you want to listen to, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

If you push the interface selector right or left, you can change the alphabet tag.

The selected track begins to play.

Push the interface selector up to display the Search music by screen, and turn the interface dial to select Playlist. Press ENTER on the interface selector then the playlist will be displayed.

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)

Searching Music by Track Searching Music by Playlists

F eatures

327

2009 TL

Push the interface selector up to display the Search music by screen, and turn the interface dial to select Genre. Press ENTER on the interface selector, and the genre list will be displayed.

Turn the interface dial to select the genre you want to listen to, and then press ENTER on the interface selector.

Turn the interface dial to select the playlist you want to listen to, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

The first track on the selected playlist begins to play.

The first track on the selected genre begins to play.

Searching Music by Genre

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)

328

2009 TL

Push the interface selector up to display the Search music by screen, and turn the interface dial to select Album Record Date. Press ENTER on the interface selector. The album list will be displayed.

Turn the interface dial to select the album you want to listen to, then press ENTER on the selector.

The first track on the selected album begins to play.

The HDD has two types of the playlists: original playlist and user playlist. On the original playlist, the music CD is recorded automatically when it is played. In addition, you can create up to six user playlists on the HDD. In each playlist, you can store a desired music data from the original playlists or music CDs.

After storing the data, you can change some items: order of tracks on the user playlist, name of the playlist, track title, artist name, and music genre. You can also add a track to the playlist, and delete the track or the album from the playlist.

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)

Searching Music by Album Record Date

Customizing Original/User Playlist

F eatures

329

RECORDED DATE

2009 TL

Turn the interface dial and select Edit Playlist, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

Turn the interface dial to select Edit Order, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

Turn the interface dial to select the track to be moved, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

On the HDD audio screen, push up the interface selector to select MUSIC SEARCH. Select Playlist by turning the interface dial, then press ENTER.

Turn the interface dial to select the playlist, then press ENTER.

Push the interface selector down to display the AUDIO MENU for the playlist.

1. 2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Changing the Order of Tracks Within the User Playlist

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)

330

2009 TL

Turn the interface dial to select where the track is to be moved, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

Push the interface selector down to return to the Playback screen of the User Playlist.

Select a desired playlist to change the user playlist name, or a desired album to change the original playlist name (album name). Refer to the Music Search function on page for how to select a playlist or an album. Push the interface selector down to display AUDIO MENU for a selected playlist or album.

Turn the interface dial and select Edit Playlist (or Edit Album to edit Original Playlist), then press ENTER on the interface selector.

Turn the interface dial to select Edit Playlist Name (or Edit Album Name to edit Original Playlist), then press ENTER on the interface selector.

On the Edit Album Name screen, turn the interface dial to select Edit Album, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

1.

2.

3.

7.

8.

4.

325

CONTINUED

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)

Changing the Name of the Original Playlist or User Playlist

F eatures

331

To change user playlist name

To change original playlist name

2009 TL

After inputting the name, push the interface selector down to select OK.

The confirmation screen is displayed. Confirm that the new name is correct, and then push the interface selector down to select OK. You will be returned to the Edit Album or Edit Playlist screen for the Original Playlist or User Playlist.

On the Enter an album name screen, input the new Original Playlist name or User Playlist name.

Select a desired playlist, then turn the interface dial to select the track of which you want to change the name, then press ENTER on the interface selector. Refer to the Music Search function on page

for how to select a playlist.

The OPTIONS icon will appear in the selected track. Press ENTER on the interface selector.

Select a letter by turning the interface dial, then press ENTER.

Push the selector down to select OK. The screen returns to the playlist.5.

6.

7.

1.

2.

8.

325

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)

Changing the Track Titles

332

OPTIONS ICON

2009 TL

The track options box is displayed. Select Edit Track Info, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

On the Edit Track screen, turn the interface dial and select Edit Track Name, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

On the Edit Track Name screen, turn the interface dial and select Edit Track, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

Input the new track name on the Enter a track name screen.

After inputting the name, push the selector down to select OK.

After selecting the track for which you want to change the track title, you can also push the interface selector down to display the AUDIO MENU, and then select Edit Track. The subsequent procedure is the same as step 4.

The confirmation screen is displayed. Confirm that the new track name is correct, and then push the interface selector down to select OK. You will be returned to the Edit screen of the Original Playlist or User Playlist.

Push the selector down to select OK. The screen returns to the playlist.

4.

3.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

333

NOTE:

2009 TL

Select a desired playlist to change the user playlist artist name or a desired album to change the original playlist artist name. Refer to the Music Search function on page for how to select a playlist or an album. Push the interface selector down to display AUDIO MENU for a selected playlist or album.

Turn the interface dial and select Edit Album (or Edit Playlist if you want to edit User Playlist), then press ENTER on the interface selector.

Turn the interface dial to select Edit Album Name (or Edit Playlist Name), then press ENTER on the interface selector in Edit Album (or Edit Playlist) screen.

On the Edit Album Name screen, turn the interface dial to select Edit Artist, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

On the Enter an artist name screen input the new artist name.

After inputting the name, push the interface selector down to select OK.

The confirmation screen is displayed. Choose if you would like to apply the new name to both the album artist and/or the track artist. Select Yes or No by turning the dial, then press ENTER.

4.

5.

6.

1.

2.

3.

7.

325

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)

Changing the Artist Name of the Original Playlist or User Playlist

334

2009 TL

On the Edit Track Name screen, turn the interface dial and select Edit Artist, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

Input the new track name on the Enter an artist name screen.

After selecting the track for which you want to change the artists name, you can also push the interface selector down to display the AUDIO MENU, and then select Edit Track. The subsequent procedure is the same as step 4.

The OPTIONS icon will appear in the selected track. Press ENTER on the interface selector.

The track options box is displayed. Select Edit Track Info, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

On the Edit Track screen, turn the interface dial and select Edit Track Name, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

Confirm that the new name is correct, and then push the interface selector down to select OK. You will be returned to the Edit Album Name screen.

Push the selector down to select OK. The screen returns to the playlist.

Select a desired playlist to change the artist name. Refer to the Music Search function on page

for how to select a playlist. Rotate the interface dial to select the currently playing track.

After inputting the name, push the selector down to select OK. You will be returned to the Edit Track Name screen.

Push the selector down to select OK. The screen returns to the playlist.

4.

5.

6.

7.

2.

3.

1. 8.

8.

9.

325

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)

Changing the Artist Name of the Track

F eatures

335

NOTE:

2009 TL

Select a desired playlist to change the user playlist music genre, or a desired album to change the original playlist music genre. Refer to the Music Search function on page for how to select a playlist or an album. Push the interface selector down to display AUDIO MENU for a selected playlist or album.

Turn the interface dial to select Edit Album Name (or Edit Playlist Name), then press ENTER on the interface selector in Edit Album (or Edit Playlist) screen.

Turn the interface dial and select Edit Album (or Edit Playlist if you want to edit User Playlist), then press ENTER on the interface selector.

On the Edit Album Name screen, turn the interface dial and select Edit Genre, and then press ENTER on the interface selector.

Turn the interface dial on the Select a genre screen to select the Original Playlist or User Playlist that you want to change the genre and then press ENTER on the interface selector. You will be returned to the Edit Album Name screen.

Push the selector down to select OK. The screen returns to the playlist.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

325

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)

Changing the Musical Genre

336

2009 TL

Select the track with the interface dial from the playback screen while it is playing. Press ENTER on the interface selector.

The OPTIONS icon will appear in the selected track. Press ENTER on the interface selector.

Select OK to confirm you want to delete the track. You will be returned to the Playback screen for the Original Playlist or User Playlist.

The track options box is displayed. Select Delete and press ENTER on the interface selector.

When you delete a track from the Original Playlist, the track is also deleted from the User Playlist in which the deleted track was stored.

Even if all the tracks are deleted from the User Playlist, the data folder for that playlist cannot be deleted, and their names (playlist and artist) are left. You can store tracks again on that playlist.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)

Deleting a Track

F eatures

337

NOTE:

2009 TL

On the HDD playback screen of the album in which you want to delete, push the interface selector down to display AUDIO MENU.

Turn the interface dial and select Edit Album (or Edit Playlist if you want to edit User Playlist), then press ENTER on the interface selector.

On the Edit Album (or Edit Playlist) screen, turn the interface dial and select Delete Album (or Delete Playlist), then press ENTER on the interface selector.

The delete box is displayed. Select OK and then press ENTER on the interface selector. You will be returned to the Playback screen for the Original Playlist or User Playlist.

When you delete the Original Playlist, any tracks stored in a User Playlist are also deleted.

Even if all the tracks are deleted from the User Playlist, the data folder for that playlist cannot be deleted, and their names (playlist and artist) are left. You can store tracks again on that playlist.

While playing back an Original Playlist or User Playlist that you want to add to a different User Playlist, push the interface selector down to display AUDIO MENU.

Turn the interface dial and select Edit Album (or Edit Playlist if you want to edit an User Playlist), and then press ENTER on the interface selector.

4.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)

Deleting an Album Adding a Track or Album to the User Playlist

338

NOTE:

2009 TL

On the Edit Album (or Edit Playlist) screen, turn the interface dial and select Add to Playlist, and then press ENTER on the interface selector.

On the Playlist screen, turn the interface dial and select a desired User Playlist, then press ENTER on the interface selector. You will be returned to the Playback screen for the Original Playlist or User Playlist.

While a track is playing on an Original Playlist or User Playlist Playback screen, turn the interface dial and select the track that you want to add to a User Playlist, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

The track options box is displayed. Select Add to Playlist, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

On the Playlist screen, turn the interface dial and select the Playlist to which the song is to be added, then press ENTER on the interface selector. You will be returned to the Playback screen for the Original Playlist.

When adding from and to the same User Playlist, the same tracks will be stored twice.

When adding from and to the same User Playlist, the same tracks will be stored twice.

4.

1.

2.

3.3.

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)

Adding a Track to a User Playlist

F eatures

339

NOTE:

NOTE:

2009 TL

You can update the Gracenote Album Info (Gracenote Media Database) that is included with the navigation system.

Consult your dealer, or visit (in U.S.), or

(in Canada), to acquire updated files.

Insert the update disc into the disc slot, or connect the USB flash memory device that includes the update.

You can check the HDD Audio capacity and remaining space as well as the Gracenote Music Recognition Service (CDDB) version included with the navigation system on the HDD Setup screen.

Push the interface selector down to display AUDIO MENU.

Turn the interface dial and select Get Album Info, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

On the Select an Album screen, turn the interface dial and select the title information for the Original Playlist, then press ENTER on the interface selector. You will be returned to the Audio Menu screen.

1.

1.

2.

3. www.acura.com www.acura.ca

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)

Updating Gracenote Album Info (Gracenote Media Database)

Checking HDD Audio CapacityAcquiring Title Information

340

NOTE:

MAXIMUM CAPACITY

VERSION

REMAINING CAPACITY

2009 TL

Turn the interface dial and select Update Gracenote Info, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

Turn the dial to select USB or DISC on the Update Gracenote Album info screen, then press ENTER on the selector.

Turn the dial to select Yes on the confirmation screen, and the update will start.

Turn the interface dial to select OK on the confirmation screen.

Push the interface selector down to select AUDIO MENU in the HDD playback screen or CD playback screen.

Turn the interface dial to select HDD Setup, then press ENTER on the interface selector.

After updating is complete, press ENTER on the confirmation screen.

Once you perform an update any information you edited before will be overwritten.

Any music, data, calendar entries, etc. that have been stored on the HDD can be deleted.

Press the INFO button, rotate the interface dial to select , and press ENTER.

Move the interface selector to the right to navigate to the

screen.

On the tab, rotate the interface dial to select

, and press ENTER.

Select the item you wish to delete.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)

Clearing the HDD

Set up

Set up (Other)

Set up (Other) Clear

Personal Data

F eatures

341

NOTE:

2009 TL

Gracenote is an internet-based music recognition service that allows artist, album, and track information from CDs and MP3 files to display on the HDD. Gracenote users are allowed 4 free updates a year. More information about Gracenote, its features, and downloads are available at (in U.S.) or (in Canada).

CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright 2000 2008 Gracenote.

Music recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote . Gracenote is the industry standard in music recognition technology and related content delivery. For more information, please visit http://www. gracenote.com/.

When music is recorded to the HDD from a CD, information such as the recording artist and track name are retrieved from the Gracenote Database and displayed (when available). Gracenote may not contain information for all albums.

A pop-up screen verifying whether the deletion is to be continued or not will be displayed. Select Yes to delete, or No to cancel.

A second confirmation will appear. Select Yes to delete, or No to cancel.

If you select , the system will automatically restart after deletion.

When you are finished deleting the data, press the interface selector down to select .

5.

6.

7. www.acura.com

www.acura.ca

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)

Gracenote Music Recognition Service (CDDB)

Music on HDD

Done

342

NOTE:

2009 TL

CONTINUED

Version 20061005

You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to any third party.

YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.

You agree that your non-exclusive license to use the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your license terminates, you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers.

This application or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California (Gracenote). The software from Gracenote (the Gracenote Software) enables this application to perform disc and/or file identification and obtain music- related information, including name, artist, track, and title information (Gracenote Data) from online servers or embedded databases (collectively, Gracenote Servers) and to perform other functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End-User functions or this application or device. You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for your own personal non-commercial use only.

Gracenote Software, copyright 2000 2008 Gracenote. This product and

service may practice one or more of the following U.S. Patents: 5,987,525; 6,061,680; 6,154,773,

6,161,132, 6,230,192, 6,230,207, 6,240,459, 6,330,593, and other

patents issued or pending. Some services supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: 6,304,523.

Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and logotype, and the Powered by Gracenote logo are trademarks of Gracenote.

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)

Gracenote End User License Agreement

F eatures

343

2009 TL

GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON- INFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES.

Gracenote 2008

Gracenote makes no representations or warranties, express or implied, regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from the Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any cause that Gracenote deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are error-free or that functioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted.

Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new enhanced or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the future and is free to discontinue its services at any time.

Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote Servers, including all ownership rights. Under no circumstances will Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information that you provide. You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights under this Agreement against you directly in its own name.

The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow the Gracenote service to count queries without knowing anything about who you are. For more information, see the web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote service.

The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are licensed to you AS IS.

Playing Hard Disc Drive (HDD) Audio (Models with navigation system)

344

2009 TL

Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

345

SKIP BAR

CENTER DISPLAY

NAVIGATION SCREEN

VOL/ (VOLUME/POWER) KNOB

INTERFACE DIAL

HDD/AUX BUTTON

CANCEL BUTTON

AUDIO BUTTON

2009 TL

The audio system reads and plays sound files to be playable on the iPod. The system cannot operate an iPod as a mass storage device. The system will only play songs stored on the iPod with iTunes.

iPod and iTunes are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc.

This audio system can select and play the audio files on the iPod with the same controls used for the in- dash disc player. To play an iPod, connect it to the USB adapter cable in the console compartment by using your dock connector, then press the HDD/AUX button. The power mode must be ACCESSORY or ON. The iPod will also be charged with the power mode in these settings.

Your vehicle has the engine start/ stop button instead of an ignition switch. For more information to select the power mode, see page .

You can select the AUX mode by using the navigation system voice control buttons, but cannot operate the play mode functions.

iPods that are compatible with your audio system are listed below.

Use the latest firmware.

Use only compatible iPods with the latest firmware. iPods that are not compatible will not work in this audio unit.

:

178

Firmware Ver. 1.2 or more Ver. 1.0 or more Ver. 1.2 or more Ver. 1.1.2 or more

Ver. 1.0 or more

Ver. 1.1.1 or more Ver. 1.1.1 or more

Model iPod 5G iPod classic iPod nano iPod nano 2nd generation iPod nano 3rd generation iPod touch iPhone

To Play an iPod

Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)

Voice Control System

346

2009 TL

CONTINUED

Connect your dock connector to the iPod correctly and securely.

Install the dock connector to the USB adapter cable securely.

Unclip the USB connector by pulling it up, and pull out the USB adapter cable in the console compartment.

Do not connect your iPod using a hub.

Do not keep the iPod and dock connector cable in the vehicle. Direct sunlight and high heat will damage it.

Do not use an extension cable between the USB adapter cable equipped with your vehicle and your dock connector.

We recommend backing up your data before playing it.

1. 2.

3.

Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)

Connecting an iPod

F eatures

347

NOTE:

DOCK CONNECTOR

USB ADAPTER CABLEUSB ADAPTER CABLE

USB CONNECTOR

2009 TL

When the iPod is connected and the iPod mode is selected on the audio system, the iPod indicator is shown in the center display. If you selected the audio control display by pressing the AUDIO button, you will see the iPod icon on the screen. After loading, you will see the Acura logo on the iPod. That means you can only operate your iPod using the vehicles audio unit.

It may take a few minutes for the Acura logo to display on the iPod. If the display does not change, this function is not supported on your iPod model or firmware.

If the iPod indicator does not appear in the audio display, check the connections, and try to reconnect the iPod a few times.

If the audio system still does not recognize the iPod, the iPod may need to be reset. Follow the instructions that came with your iPod, or you can find reset instructions online at

The current file number and total of the selected playable files are displayed in the center display. Pressing the AUDIO button displays the artist, album and track (file) names on the navigation screen.

:

www.apple.com/ ipod.

Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)

348

Sample Display

OK to disconnect.

2009 TL

Use the SKIP bar while an iPod is playing to select passages and change files.

Each time you press and release the side of the SKIP bar, the system skips forward to the beginning of the next track. Press and release the side of the bar to skip backward to the beginning of the current track. Press it again to skip to the beginning of the previous track.

To move rapidly within playing track, press and hold either side ( or

) of the SKIP bar.

You can also select a track from any category on the list: playlists, artists, albums and songs, by using the interface dial.

Push the interface selector up to display the Music Search screen. Turn the interface dial to select a desired search method.

Press ENTER on the interface selector to display the items on that list, then turn the interface dial to make a selection. Press ENTER to set your selection.

CONTINUED

Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)

To Change or Select Files

SKIP

F eatures

349

2009 TL

If you select ALL on the artists list, the albums list is displayed.

The track order that appears at this time varies depending on the iPod model and firmware.

If you select ALL on the albums list, all the tracks become available for selection.

Press the AUDIO button to go back to the normal audio playing display. Pressing the CANCEL button goes back to the previous screen, and pressing the MAP button cancels the audio control display on the screen.

This feature continuously plays a file.

Press the AUDIO button to display the audio control screen, then push the interface selector down to display AUDIO MENU.

Turn the interface dial, select Repeat, and press ENTER on the interface selector.

1.

2.

Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)

REPEAT

350

2009 TL

Turn the interface dial, select Shuffle and press ENTER on the interface selector.

Turn the interface dial, select the Shuffle icon and press ENTER on the interface selector.

Shuffle playback will begin. To cancel this function, turn the interface dial and select the Shuffle OFF icon, and then press ENTER on the interface selector.

Turn the interface dial, select the Repeat icon and press ENTER on the interface selector. Playback of the track that is currently being played will be repeated.

To cancel this function, turn the interface dial and select the Repeat OFF icon, and then press ENTER on the interface selector.

This feature shuffles playback of tracks contained within the iPod. This function can be established at the same time that Repeat Playback is set up.

On the iPod screen, push the interface selector down to display AUDIO MENU.

2.

3.

3.

1.

CONTINUED

Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)

SHUFFLE

F eatures

351

SHUFFLE ICON

2009 TL

Turn the interface dial, select Shuffle and press ENTER on the interface selector.

Turn the interface dial, select the Album Shuffle icon and press ENTER on the interface selector. Shuffle playback of the album will begin.

To cancel this function, turn the interface dial and select the Shuffle OFF icon, and then press ENTER on the interface selector.

Available operating functions vary on models or versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicles audio system.

Shuffles playback of all available albums, which are selected by the desired list: playlists, artists, albums or songs. This function can be selected at the same time that Repeat Playback is setup.

On the iPod screen, push the interface selector down to display AUDIO MENU.

To play the radio, press the AM/FM, or button. Press the DISC button to switch to the disc mode. Press the HDD/AUX button to switch the audio mode between HDD Audio, USB and Bluetooth Audio.

You can disconnect the iPod at any time when you see OK to disconnect message in the iPod display. Always make sure you see OK to disconnect message in the iPod display before you disconnect it. Make sure to follow the iPods instructions on how to disconnect the dock connector from the USB adapter cable.

2.

1.

3.

Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)

To Stop Playing Your iPod

ALBUM SHUFFLE

Disconnecting an iPod

352

NOTE:

ALBUM SHUFFLE ICON

2009 TL

The displayed message may vary on models or versions. On some models, there is no message to disconnect.

When you disconnect the iPod while it is playing, the center display and the audio screen (if selected) show USB NO DATA.

If you reconnect the same iPod, the system may begin playing where it left off, depending on what mode the iPod is in when it is reconnected.

If you see an error message in the center display, see page .

:

354

Playing an iPod (Models with navigation system)

iPod Error Messages

F eatures

353

When you connect your iPod to the navigation system, the most recent settings (Shuf f le, Repeat, etc.) will be carried over.

2009 TL

If you see an error message in the center display while playing an iPod, find the solution in the chart to the right. If you cannot clear the error message, take your vehicle to your dealer.

SolutionError Message

Appears when an unsupported iPod is inserted. Appears when the iPod cannot be authenticated. Appears when there are no files in the iPod.

iPod Error Messages (Models with navigation system)

354

UNSUPORTED Ver. CONNECT RETRY

NO SONG

2009 TL

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

355

SKIP BAR

CENTER DISPLAY

NAVIGATION SCREEN

HDD/ AUX BUTTON

CATEGORY BAR

INTERFACE DIAL

VOL/ (VOLUME/POWER) KNOB

AUDIO BUTTON SCAN/A.SEL (SCAN/ AUTO SELECT) BAR

2009 TL

The audio system reads and plays the audio files on the USB flash memory device in MP3, WMA or AAC formats. The USB flash memory device limit is up to 700 folders or up to 15000 files.

The recommended USB flash memory devices are 256 Mbyte or higher. Some digital audio players may be compatible as well.

Some USB flash memory devices (such as devices with security lock- out features, etc.) will not work in this audio unit.

Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard drive as it or your files may be damaged. Do not connect your USB flash memory device using a hub. Do not use an extension cable to the USB adapter cable equipped with your vehicle.

Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this audio unit.

This audio system can select and play the audio files on a USB flash memory device with the same controls used for the disc player. To play a USB flash memory device, connect it to the USB adapter cable in the console compartment, then press the HDD/AUX button until you see AUX in the display. The power mode must be ACCESSORY or ON.

Your vehicle has the engine start/ stop button instead of an ignition switch. For more information to select the power mode, see page .

Depending on the software the files were made with, it may not be possible to play some files, or display some text data.

Depending on the type and number of files, it may take some time before they begin to play.

We recommend backing up your data before playing a USB flash memory device.

Do not keep a USB flash memory device in the vehicle. Direct sunlight and high heat will damage it.

:

178

To Play a USB Flash Memory Device

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)

356

NOTE:

2009 TL

The specifications for compatible MP3 files are:

Bitrate: 8 320 kHz Supported standards: MPEG1 Audio Layer3 MPEG2 Audio Layer3 MPEG2.5 Audio Layer3 Partition: Top partition only

The specifications for compatible WMA files are:

Sampling frequency: 48 kHz

Sampling frequency: 8/11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/ 44.1/48 kbps (MPEG1) 16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48/64/88.2/ 96 kbps (MPEG2) 32/44.1/48/64/88.2/96/128/ 176.4/192 kbps (MPEG2.5)

Bitrate: 48 20 kbps

The specifications for compatible AAC files are:

Bitrate: 16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/ 112/128/144/160/192/224/256 kbps Partition: Top partition only

Some versions of MP3, WMA, or AAC format may not be supported. If an unsupported file is found, the audio unit displays UNSUPPORTED, then skips to the next file.

Sampling frequency: 8/11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/ 44.1/48 kHz

The order of files in USB playback may be different from the order of files displayed in PC or other devices etc. Files are played in the order stored in USB flash memory device.

You can select the AUX mode by using the voice control buttons, but cannot operate the play mode functions.

CONTINUED

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)

Voice Control System F eatures

357

2009 TL

Connect the USB flash memory device to the USB adapter cable correctly and securely.

In WMA or AAC format, DRM (digital rights management) files cannot be played. If the system finds a DRM file, the audio unit displays UNPLAYABLE FILE, and then skips to the next file.

Unclip the USB connector by pulling it up, and pull out the USB adapter cable in the console compartment.

1. 2.

Connecting a USB Flash Memory Device

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)

358

USB ADAPTER CABLE

USB CONNECTOR

USB ADAPTER CABLE

Combining a low sampling f requency with a low bitrate may result in extremely degraded sound quality.

2009 TL

To move rapidly within a file, press and hold either side ( or ) of the SKIP bar.

To select a different folder, press and release either side of the CATEGORY bar. Press the side to skip to the next folder, and press the side to skip to the beginning of the previous folder.

You can also select a folder or file from the list by using the interface dial. Press the AUDIO button to show the audio display on the navigation screen. Use the interface dial to highlight the file, then press ENTER to set your selection.

When the USB device is connected and the USB mode is selected on the audio system, the USB indicator is shown in the center display. It also shows the folder and file numbers. Pressing the AUDIO button displays the USB indicator, the folder and file names, and the elapsed time in the navigation screen.

Use the SKIP bar while a USB flash memory device is playing to select passages and change files.

Each time you press and release the side of the SKIP bar, the system skips forward to the beginning of the next file. Press and release the side of the bar, to skip backward to the beginning of the current file. Press it twice to skip to the beginning of the previous file.

CONTINUED

To Select a File from Folder and File Lists

To Change or Select Files

Folder Selection

SKIP

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

359

2009 TL

To go back to the normal playing display, press the AUDIO button. Pressing the CANCEL button goes back to the previous screen and pressing the MAP button cancels the audio mode display.

Push the interface selector down to display the AUDIO MENU.

You can select any type of repeat, random or scan mode on the audio menu screen. This function repeats playback of the

track.Push the selector up to display the folder list screen, then turn the interface dial to select a folder. Press ENTER to set your selection.

If you have more than one layer of folders (folders within folders), you can also see each folder on the screen.

Move the interface selector up to select BACK to show the USB screen, or press the CANCEL button to return to the previous screen.

On the USB main screen, push the interface selector down to display AUDIO MENU.

Turn the interface dial to select Repeat and press ENTER on the interface selector.

1.

2.

To Select Repeat, Random or Scan Mode:

TRACK REPEAT

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)

360

REPEAT OFF ICON

TRACK REPEAT ICON

2009 TL

Turn the interface knob, select the Track Repeat icon and press ENTER on the interface selector. Playback of the track that is currently being played will be repeated.

To cancel this function, turn the interface dial and select the Repeat OFF icon, and then press ENTER on the interface selector.

Pressing either side of the SKIP bar also cancels this function.

This function replays all the tracks in a folder in the order that they were stored.

On the USB main screen, push the interface selector down to display AUDIO MENU.

Turn the interface dial to select Repeat and press ENTER on the interface selector.

Turn the interface dial, select the Folder Repeat icon and press ENTER on the interface selector. Playback of the folder that is currently being played will be repeated.

To cancel this function, turn the interface dial and select the Repeat OFF icon, and then press ENTER on the interface selector.

3. 3.

1.

2.

FOLDER REPEAT

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

361

FOLDER REPEAT ICON

2009 TL

This function plays all the tracks on the USB flash memory device in randam order.

On the USB main screen, push the interface selector down to display AUDIO MENU.

Turn the interface dial, select Random and press ENTER on the interface selector.

Turn the interface dial, select the Track Random icon and press ENTER on the interface selector. The tracks are played in random order.

To cancel this function, turn the interface dial and select the Random OFF icon, and then press ENTER on the interface selector.

This function plays all of the tracks in the current folder in random order.

On the USB main screen, push the interface selector down to display AUDIO MENU.

Turn the interface dial, select Random and press ENTER on the interface selector.

1.

2. 2.

1.

3.TRACK RANDOM FOLDER RANDOM

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)

362

TRACK RANDOM ICON

RANDOM OFF ICON

FOLDER RANDOM ICON

2009 TL

Turn the interface dial, select the Folder Random icon and press ENTER on the interface selector. The files are played in random order.

To cancel this function, turn the interface dial and select the Random OFF icon, and then press ENTER on the interface selector.

This function samples all the tracks in the current folder in the order that they were recorded.

On the USB main screen, push the interface selector down to display AUDIO MENU.

Turn the interface dial, select the Scan icon and press ENTER on the interface selector.

Turn the interface dial, select Track Scan icon and press ENTER on the interface selector. Each track or file is sampled for 10 seconds. When all the tracks in the folder have been scanned, regular playback is resumed.

To cancel this function, turn the interface dial and select the Scan OFF icon, and then press ENTER on the interface selector to play the last track sampled.

3. 3.

1.

2.

TRACK SCAN

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

363

TRACK SCAN ICON

SCAN OFF ICON

2009 TL

This function samples the first file in each folder within the USB flash memory device.

If you reconnect the same USB flash memory device, the system will begin playing where it left off.

On the USB main screen, push the interface selector down to display AUDIO MENU.

Turn the interface dial, select the Scan icon and press ENTER on the interface selector.

Turn the interface dial, select Folder Scan icon and press ENTER on the interface selector.

The first file of the first folder is sampled for 10 seconds. If no other operations are carried out, the first files of the remaining folders are played for 10 seconds. After the first file of the last folder is played back, regular playback is resumed.

To cancel this function, turn the interface dial and select the Scan OFF icon, and then press ENTER on the interface selector.

To play the radio, press the AM/FM, or XM button. Press the DISC button to switch to the disc mode. Press the HDD/AUX button to switch the mode between the HDD Audio, USB, and Bluetooth Audio.

1.

2.

3. To Stop Playing a USB Flash Memory Device

FOLDER SCAN

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)

364

FOLDER SCAN ICON

2009 TL

You can disconnect the USB flash memory device at any time even if the USB mode is selected on the audio system. Always follow the USB flash memory devices instructions when you remove it.

When you disconnect the USB flash memory device while it is playing, the center display and the audio screen (if selected) show NO DATA.

If you see an error message in the center display, see page .366

Disconnecting a USB Flash Memory Device

USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

365

2009 TL

If you see an error message in the center display while playing a USB flash memory device, find the solution in the chart to the right. If you cannot clear the error message, take your vehicle to your dealer.

Error Message Solution

The system cannot read the file(s). Check the files in the USB flash memory device. There is a possibility that the files have been damaged. Appears when the unsupported USB flash memory device is inserted. Appears when the file is copyright protectd, such as DRM. Appears when there are no playable files in the USB flash memory device.

USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages (Models with navigation system)

366

FILE ERROR

UNSUPORTED UNPLAYABLE FILE

NO SONG

2009 TL

CONTINUED

Bluetooth Audio System (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

367

INTERFACE DIAL

TITLE BUTTON

SKIP BAR

CENTER DISPLAY

NAVIGATION SCREEN

AUDIO BUTTON

HDD/AUX BUTTON

2009 TL

Make sure that your phone is paired and linked to the HFL.

Your vehicle is equipped with a Bluetooth audio system, which allows you to listen to streaming audio from your Bluetooth audio compatible phone. This function is only available on Bluetooth Audio Compatible phones that are paired and linked to the vehicles Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) system (see page ).

Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming audio capabilities are compatible with the system. You can find an approved phone by visiting

, or by calling the HandsFreeLink consumer support at 1-888-528-7876. In Canada, visit , or call 1-888-9-ACURA-9.

In some states it may be illegal to perform some data device functions while driving.

Your vehicle has the engine start/ stop button instead of an ignition switch. For more information to select the power mode, see page .

To begin to play the audio files, you may need to operate your phone. If so, follow the phone makers operating instructions.

Press the HDD/AUX button with the power mode ACCESSORY or ON. When the phone is recognized, you will see the Bluetooth Audio

message and icon on the center display and the audio control display on the navigation screen (if selected), and the system begins to play.

If an iPod or USB flash memory device or audio unit connected to the auxiliary input jack was selected at the last mode, you will see iPod, USB or AUX in the center display and the audio control display on the navigation screen (if selected). Push the HDD/AUX button again to play audio files from your Bluetooth Audio phone.

:

178 426

www.acura.com/handsfreelink

www.acura.ca

To Play Bluetooth Audio Files

Bluetooth Audio System (Models with navigation system)

368

NOTE:

2009 TL

CONTINUED

Once a device is linked, the name of the device will appear on the screen. Pressing the TITLE button switches the center display between the Bluetooth Audio and the device name.

If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system, there will be delay before the system begins to play.

If your Bluetooth Audio compatible phone does not operate as described, make sure it is an Acura approved phone. To find out if your phone is approved, go to

(in Canada, ), or call the HandsFreeLink

consumer support at 1-888-528-7876.

You can select the AUX mode by using the voice control buttons, but cannot operate the play mode functions.

Press the side of the SKIP bar to skip forward to the next file, and press the side to skip backward to the beginning of the current file. Push the side again to skip to the previous file.

In the following conditions, the display shows NO CONNECT message after pressing the TITLE button.

The phone is not linked to HFL.

The phone is not turned on.

The phone is not in the vehicle.

Another HFL compatible phone, which is not compatible for Bluetooth Audio, is already connected.

www.acura.com/ handsfreelink www.acura. ca

Bluetooth Audio System (Models with navigation system)

Voice Control System

To skip a file

F eatures

369

2009 TL

The resume/pause mode can stop playing a file temporarily.

Turn the interface dial to switch the setting between the resume/pause mode and the sound setup mode. Select Resume/Pause, then press ENTER to set your selection. Each time you press ENTER, the system switches between the resume mode and pause mode.

The pause function may not be available on some phone devices.

Press the AUDIO button to display the audio control display. Turn the dial to switch the setting between the resume/pause mode and the sound setup mode. Select Sound Setup, then press ENTER to set your selection.

To pause or resume a file To change sound settings

Bluetooth Audio System (Models with navigation system)

370

NOTE:

2009 TL

Turn the dial to select a sound setup mode, then press ENTER to set your selection. See page for more sound setting information.

Select any other audio mode by pressing a button; AM/FM, or DISC on the audio control panel, or press the MODE button on the steering wheel to select another audio mode.

Switching to another mode pauses the music playing from your phone.

If you receive a call when the Bluetooth Audio is playing, press the PICK-UP button on the steering wheel. The screen and the center display switch to the HFL mode (see page ).

After ending the call, press the HANG-UP button to go back to the Bluetooth Audio mode.

424

288

As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

To turn off the Bluetooth Audio mode

To switch to HFL mode

Bluetooth Audio System (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

371

2009 TL

Those bands cover these frequen- cies:

AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHz FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz

A radio stations signal gets weaker as you get farther away from its transmitter. If you are listening to an AM station, you will notice the sound volume becoming weaker, and the station drifting in and out. If you are listening to an FM station, you will see the stereo indicator flickering off and on as the signal weakens. Eventually, the stereo indicator will go off and the sound will fade completely as you get out of range of the stations signal.

Driving very near the transmitter of a station that is broadcasting on a frequency close to the frequency of the station you are listening to can also affect your radios reception. You may temporarily hear both stations, or hear only the station you are close to.

Your vehicles radio can receive the complete AM and FM bands.

How well your vehicles radio receives stations is dependent on many factors, such as the distance from the stations transmitter, nearby large objects, and atmospheric conditions.

Radio stations on the AM band are assigned frequencies at least 10 kHz apart (530, 540, 550). Stations on the FM band are assigned frequencies at least 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

Stations must use these exact frequencies. It is fairly common for stations to round-off the frequency in their advertising, so your radio could display a frequency of 100.9 even though the announcer may identify the station as FM101.

Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

AM/FM Radio Reception

372

2009 TL

Radio signals, especially on the FM band, are deflected by large objects such as buildings and hills. Your radio then receives both the direct signal from the stations transmitter, and the deflected signal. This causes the sound to distort or flutter. This is a main cause of poor radio reception in city driving.

Radio reception can be affected by atmospheric conditions such as thunderstorms, high humidity, and even sunspots. You may be able to receive a distant radio station one day and not receive it the next day because of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passing vehicles and stationary sources can cause temporary reception problems.

As required by the FCC: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

AM/FM Radio Reception F

eatures

373

2009 TL

Three controls for the audio system are mounted in the steering wheel hub. These let you control basic functions without removing your hand from the wheel.

The VOL button adjusts the volume up ( ) or down ( ). Press the top or bottom of the button, hold it until the desired volume is reached, then release it.

The MODE button changes the mode. Pressing the button repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM, XM radio, disc (if a disc is loaded), HDD (on models with navigation system), Bluetooth Audio (if paired), AUX (if an appropriate audio unit is connected).

If an iPod or a USB flash memory device is plugged into the system, you can also select AUX.

If you are listening to the radio, use the CH button to change stations. Each time you press the top ( ) of the button, the system goes to the next preset station on the band you are listening to. Press the bottom ( ) to go back to the previous preset station. If you press and hold the CH button ( ) or ( ), the system goes into the skip (seek) mode. It stops when it finds a station with a strong signal.

To activate the seek function, press and hold the top ( ) or bottom ( ) of the CH button until you hear a beep. The system searches up or down from the current frequency to find a station with a strong signal.

If you are playing a disc, the system skips to the beginning of the next track (file in MP3 or WMA format) each time you press the top ( ) of the CH button. Press the bottom ( ) to return to the beginning of the current track/file. Press it twice to return to the previous track/file.

Remote Audio Controls

374

MODE BUTTON

VOL BUTTON CH BUTTON

2009 TL

You will see the track/file number and the elapsed time. If the disc has text data or is compressed in MP3 or WMA, you can also see any other information (track title, file name, folder name, etc.).

In MP3 or WMA mode, you can use the seek function to select folders. Press and hold the top ( ) of the CH button until you hear a beep, to skip forward to the first file of the next folder. Press the bottom ( ) to skip backward to the previous folder.

The auxiliary input jack is inside the console compartment. The system will accept auxiliary input from standard audio accessories using a 1/8 inch stereo miniplug.

If you are playing a USB flash memory device or iPod with the USB adapter cable, press and release the top ( ) of the CH button to skip forward to the beginning of the next file. Press the bottom ( ) to skip backward to the beginning to the current file. Press it twice to return to the previous file.

When playing a USB flash memory device, you can also use the seek function to skip the folder. To activate this, press and hold either side of the CH button until you hear a beep.

If you are playing a conventional CD (without the text data and not compressed in MP3 or WMA), you can use the skip function to select discs. Press and hold the top ( ) of the CH button until you hear a beep, to skip forward to the next disc. Press and hold the bottom ( ) to skip backward to the previous disc.

When a compatible audio unit is connected to the jack, press the HDD/AUX button (AUX button on models without navigation system) to select it.

On models without navigation system

Auxiliary Input Jack

Remote Audio Controls, Auxiliary Input Jack F

eatures

375

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK

2009 TL

Your vehicles audio system may disable itself if it is disconnected from electrical power for any reason. To make it work again, you must enter a specific five-digit code with the preset buttons. Because there are hundreds of number combinations possible from the five digits, making the system work without knowing the exact code is nearly impossible.

You should have received a radio code card that lists your audio systems code and serial numbers. It is best to store this card in a safe place at home. In addition, you should write the audio systems serial number in this owners manual.

If you lose the card, you must obtain the code number from your dealer. To do this, you will need the audio systems serial number.

If you make a mistake entering the code, do not start over; complete the five-digit sequence, then enter the correct code. You have ten tries to enter the correct code. If you are unsuccessful in ten attempts, you must then leave the system on for 1 hour before trying again.

The system will retain your AM and FM presets even if power is disconnected.

If you have a My Acura account, you can retrieve the anti-theft code online.

If your vehicles battery is discon- nected or goes dead, the audio system will disable itself. If this happens, you will see ENTER CODE in the frequency display (on the center display on models with navigation system) the next time you turn on the system. Use the preset buttons to enter the five-digit code. The code is on the radio code card included in your owners manual kit. When it is entered correctly, the radio will start playing.

Radio Theft Protection

376

NOTE:

2009 TL

To set the time, press the CLOCK button until you hear a beep. The displayed time begins to blink.

Change the hours by pressing the H (hour) button until the numbers advance to the desired time. Change the minutes by pressing the M (minute) button until the numbers advance to the desired time.

Press the CLOCK button again to enter the set time.

You can quickly set the time to the nearest hour. If the displayed time is before the half hour, press and hold the CLOCK button, then press the R (reset) button to set the time back to the previous hour. If the displayed time is after the half hour, the same procedure sets the time forward to the beginning of the next hour.

The navigation system receives signals from the global positioning system (GPS), and the displayed time is updated automatically by the GPS. Refer to the navigation system manual for how to adjust the time.

1:06 would RESET to 1:00. 1:52 would RESET to 2:00.

For example: On models with navigation system

On models without navigation system

CONTINUED

Setting the Clock F

eatures

377

On models without navigation system

CLOCK BUTTON

RESET BUTTON (PRESET 6)

HOUR BUTTON (PRESET 4)

MINUTE BUTTON (PRESET 5)

U.S. model is shown.

2009 TL

You can also adjust the clock and switch the clock display between 24- hours and 12-hours in the menu mode.

To adjust the clock setting:

You can adjust the clock setting with the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.

Press and release the SETUP button. The display shows you the menu items.

Turn the selector knob to select CLOCK ADJUST.

Press the selector knob (ENTER) to enter your selection. The display changes to the clock adjusting display.

Turn the selector knob to select the item which you want to adjust. Turning the selector knob will change the selected item between the clock display setting, hours, minutes, and SET. The selected item is indicated with in the display.

1.

2.

3.

4.

On models without navigation system

Setting the Clock

Adjusting the Clock with SETUP Button

378

2009 TL

Turn the selector knob to change the setting between 12H and 24H.

Press the selector knob (ENTER) to enter your selection. The display will return to the clock adjusting display.

To set the time, turn the selector knob and select the hours or the minutes, then press the knob to enter your selection. The display changes to the setting display.

Turn the selector knob to count the numbers up or down.

Press the selector knob (ENTER) to enter your selection. The display will return to the clock adjusting display.

While setting the clock, pressing the RETURN button will go back to the previous display. Pressing the SETUP button again will cancel this setting mode.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

CONTINUED

Setting the Clock F

eatures

379

MINUTE SETTING

2009 TL

The security system helps to protect your vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn sounds and a combination of headlights, parking lights, side marker lights and taillights flash if someone attempts to break into your vehicle or remove the audio unit. This alarm continues for 2 minutes, then the system resets. To reset an activated system before the 2 minutes have elapsed, unlock the drivers door with the key or use the remote transmitter/keyless access remote.

You can also turn off an activated system by grabbing either front door handle while carrying the keyless access remote to unlock the door.

To enter the clock setting, turn the selector knob to select SET, then press the knob. The display will return to the menu item display.

Press either the RETURN or SETUP button to go back to the normal display.

The security system automatically sets 15 seconds after you lock the doors, hood, and trunk. For the system to activate, you must lock the doors from the outside with the key, drivers lock tab, master door lock switch, or remote transmitter (keyless access remote on models with keyless access system). The security system indicator on the instrument panel starts blinking immediately to show you the system is setting itself.

11.

10.

On models with keyless access system

Setting the Clock, Security System

Security System

380

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

2009 TL

You can also set the security system by pressing the lock button on either front door handle while carrying the keyless access remote.

Once the security system is set, opening any door (without using the key or the remote transmitter/ keyless access remote), the hood, or the trunk will cause the system to alarm. It also alarms if the audio unit is removed from the dashboard or the wiring is cut.

With the system set, you can still open the trunk with the remote transmitter/keyless access remote without triggering the alarm. The alarm will sound if the trunk is opened with the trunk release button on the drivers door, the trunk release handle behind the trunk pass-through cover, or the emergency trunk opener.

Use the remote transmitter/ keyless access remote to quickly check that the hood, the trunk, and all doors are closed. Push the lock button twice within 5 seconds. There should be an audible confirmation beep.

The security system will not set if the hood, trunk, or any door is not fully closed. If the system will not set, check the door and trunk open monitor on the multi-information display (see page ) to see if the doors and trunk are fully closed. Since it is not part of the monitor display, manually check the hood.

Do not attempt to alter this system or add other devices to it.

11

On models with keyless access system

Security System F

eatures

381

NOTE:

2009 TL

Compass operation can be affected by driving near power lines or stations, across bridges, through tunnels, over railroad crossings, past large vehicles, or driving near large objects that can cause a magnetic disturbance. It can also be affected by accessories such as antennas and roof racks that are mounted by magnets.

When you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, the compass is self-calibrating, then the compass display is shown in the display.

The compass may need to be manually calibrated after exposure to a strong magnetic field. If the compass seems to be continually showing the wrong direction and is not self-calibrating, or the compass display is blinking with the CAL indicator on, do the following.

Do this procedure in an open area, away from buildings, power lines, and other vehicles.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.

Press and hold the SETUP button for about 5 seconds. The display shows you the compass setting menu items.

1.

2.

On models without navigation system Compass Operation

Compass Calibration

Compass

382

NOTE:

COMPASS SETTING MENU ITEMS

U.S. model is shown.

COMPASS

2009 TL

Turn the selector knob to select CALIBRATION.

Press the selector knob (ENTER) to enter your selection. The display shows you PUSH CAL START.

While setting the compass, pressing the RETURN button will go back to the previous display. Pressing the SETUP button will cancel the compass setting mode.

When the calibration is successfully completed, the CAL indicator goes off and the compass display will stop blinking and show an actual heading.

The audio system is not related to the compass system. Even if the compass system is calibrating, the display returns to the normal display which you last selected.

Press the selector knob (ENTER). The compass display is blinking and the CAL indicator is shown.

Drive the vehicle slowly in two complete circles.

3. 4.

5.

6.

Compass F

eatures

383

2009 TL

Once the correct zone is displayed, press the selector knob. The display then returns to normal.

Find the zone for your area on the map (see page ). If the correct zone is not shown, turn the selector knob to cycle the zone lists up or down.

In most areas, there is a variation between magnetic north and true north. Zone selection is required so the compass can compensate for this variation. To check and select the zone, do this:

Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.

If necessary, press the RETURN button to return to the previous display. Pressing the SETUP button will cancel the compass setting mode.

Press and hold the SETUP button for about 5 seconds. The display shows you the compass setting menu items.

Turn the selector knob to select ZONE. Press the selector knob (ENTER) to enter your selection. The display shows you the currently selected zone number.

4. 5.

2.

3.

1.

385

Compass

Compass Zone Selection

384

ZONE NUMBER

2009 TL

The audio system is not related to the compass system. Even if the compass system is in the zone setting mode, the display returns to the normal display which you last selected.

Compass F

eatures

385

Zone Map

2009 TL

Cruise control allows you to maintain a set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. It should be used for cruising on straight, open highways. It is not recommended for city driving, winding roads, slippery roads, heavy rain, or bad weather.

When climbing a steep hill, the automatic transmission may downshift to hold the set speed.

Push in the CRUISE button on the steering wheel. The CRUISE MAIN indicator on the instrument panel will come on.

Press and release the SET/ DECEL button on the steering wheel. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator on the instrument panel comes on to show the system is now activated.

Cruise control may not hold the set speed when you are going up and down hills. If your vehicle speed increases going down a hill, use the brakes to slow down. This will cancel the cruise control. To resume the set speed, press the RES/ACCEL button. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator on the instrument panel will come back on.

The cruise control system can be left on, even when it is not in use.

Accelerate to the desired cruising speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

1.

2.

3.Using the Cruise Control

Cruise Control

386

RES/ACCEL BUTTON

SET/DECEL BUTTON

CRUISE BUTTON

CANCEL BUTTON

Improper use of the cruise control can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control only when traveling on open highways in good weather.

2009 TL

You can increase the set cruising speed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the RES/ACCEL button. When you reach the desired cruising speed, release the button.

You can decrease the set cruising speed in any of these ways:

To increase the speed in very small amounts, tap the RES/ ACCEL button. Each time you do this, your vehicle speeds up about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Push on the accelerator pedal. Accelerate to the desired cruising speed, then press the SET/ DECEL button.

Even with cruise control turned on, you can still use the accelerator pedal to speed up for passing. After completing the pass, take your foot off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle will return to the set cruising speed.

Resting your foot on the brake pedal causes cruise control to cancel.

Tap the brake pedal lightly with your foot. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator on the instrument panel goes out. When the vehicle slows to the desired speed, press the SET/DECEL button.

To slow down in very small amounts, tap the SET/DECEL button. Each time you do this, your vehicle will slow down about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Press and hold the SET/DECEL button. Release the button when you reach the desired speed.

If you need to decrease your speed quickly, use the brakes as you normally would.

Changing the Set Speed

Cruise Control F

eatures

387

NOTE:

2009 TL

Push the CANCEL button on the steering wheel.

You can cancel cruise control in any of these ways:

Push the CRUISE button on the steering wheel.

Pressing the CRUISE button turns the system completely off and erases the previous cruising speed.

When you push the CANCEL button, or tap the brake pedal, the system remembers the previously set cruising speed. To return to that speed, accelerate to above 25 mph (40 km/h) and then press and release the RES/ACCEL button. The CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes on, and the vehicle accelerates to the same cruising speed as before.

Tap the brake pedal.

Resuming the Set SpeedCanceling Cruise Control

Cruise Control

388

CANCEL BUTTON

CRUISE BUTTON

2009 TL

CONTINUED

The HomeLink Universal Transceiver built into your vehicle can be programmed to operate up to three remote controlled devices around your home, such as garage doors, lighting, or home security systems.

Before programming your HomeLink to operate a garage door opener, confirm that the opener has an external entrapment protection system, such as an electronic eye, or other safety and reverse stop features.

If your garage door was manufactured before April 1, 1982, you may not be able to program HomeLink to operate it. These units do not have safety features that cause the motor to stop and reverse it if an obstacle is detected during closing, increasing the risk of injury. Do not use HomeLink with any

garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features.

Units manufactured between April 1, 1982 and January 1, 1993 may be equipped with safety stop and reverse features. If your unit does not have an external entrapment protection system, an easy test to confirm the function and performance of the safety stop and reverse feature is to lay a 2 4 under the closing door. The door should stop and reverse upon contacting the piece of wood. As an additional safety feature, garage door openers manufactured after January 1, 1993 are required to have external entrapment protection systems, such as an electronic eye, which detect an object obstructing the door.

Refer to the safety information that came with your garage door opener

to test that the safety features are functioning properly. If you do not have this information, contact the manufacturer of the equipment. Before programming HomeLink to a garage door or gate opener, make sure that people and objects are out of the way of the device to prevent potential injury or damage. When programming a garage door opener, park just outside the garage.

If you just received your vehicle and have not trained any of the buttons in HomeLink before, you should erase any previously learned codes before training the first button. To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons on the HomeLink transceiver for about 20 seconds, until the red indicator flashes. Release the buttons, then proceed to step 1.

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

General Safety Information

Important Safety Precautions

Training HomeLink Before you begin

F eatures

389

2009 TL

If you are training the second or third buttons, go directly to step 1.

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

390

2009 TL

HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.

As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

HomeLink Universal Transceiver F

eatures

391

2009 TL

HFL recognizes simple voice commands, such as phone numbers and names. It uses these commands to automatically dial, receive, and store numbers. For more information on voice control, see Using Voice Control on page .

Here are the main features of HFL. Instructions for using HFL begin on page .

Your vehicle is equipped with Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL). HFL uses Bluetooth technology to link your cell phone to your vehicle. With HFL, you can place and receive calls through your vehicles audio system, without the distraction of handling your cell phone. To use this feature, you need a Bluetooth- compatible cell phone with the Hands Free Profile. For more information, and a list of compatible cell phones, visit

, or call 1-888-528-7876. In Canada, visit , or call 1-888-9-ACURA-9. HFL is available in English on U.S. models, and in both English and French on Canadian models. To change the language, see page .

The Bluetooth name and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd. is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

To use HFL, your phone must have approved Bluetooth capability along with the Hands Free Profile. This type of phone is available through many phone makers and cellular carriers. You can also find an approved phone by visiting

, or by calling the HandsFreeLink consumer support at 1-888-528-7876. In Canada, visit , or call 1-888-9-ACURA-9.

Bluetooth is the wireless technology that links your phone to HFL. HFL uses a Class 2 Bluetooth, which means the maximum range between your phone and vehicle is 30 feet (10 meters).

418

396

407

www.acura.com/ handsfreelink

www.acura.ca

On models without navigation system

www.acura.com/handsfreelink

www.acura.ca

Voice Control

Bluetooth Wireless Technology

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)

392

2009 TL

With a linked phone, HFL allows you to send and receive calls in your vehicle without holding the phone.

HFL can store up to 50 names and phone numbers in its phonebook. With a linked phone, you can then automatically dial any name or number in the phonebook.

The HFL system has a help function to provide instructions for pairing a phone, and give hints on how to operate HFL properly. If your response or command is not correct, or the system cannot recognize a command, the HFL system will give you an appropriate command or play the help prompt.

You can also store the desired number to the HFL phonebook directly from your cell phone using the receive contact function in HFL.

For more information on how to store the number, see page . To make a call, see page .

The HFL microphone is on the ceiling, in front of the map lights.

When HFL is in use, the sound comes through the vehicles front audio system speakers. If the audio system is in use while operating either of the HFL buttons or making a call, HFL overrides the audio system. To change the volume level, use the audio system volume knob or the steering wheel volume controls.

415 407

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)

Incoming/Outgoing Calls

Help Assistance

Phonebook

Microphone

Audio System

F eatures

393

2009 TL

To operate HFL, use the HFL Talk and Back buttons on the left side of the steering wheel.

The HFL buttons are used as follows:

HFL Talk: This button is used before you give a command, and to answer incoming calls.

Press and release the button, then wait for a beep before giving a command.

HFL Back: This button is used to end a call, go back to the previous voice control command, and to cancel an operation. When you are operating HFL, or

when you manually select HFL on the multi-information display, you will see this information on the screen:

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)

HFL Buttons Multi-Information Display

394

HFL BACK BUTTON ROAM STATUS PHONE DIALING

SIGNAL STRENGTH

HFL MODE

BATTERY LEVEL STATUS

HFL TALK BUTTON

2009 TL

HFL is operated by the HFL Talk and Back buttons on the left side of the steering wheel. The next few pages provide instructions for all basic features of HFL.

Signal Strength Indicates the network signal strength of the current phone. Five bars equals full strength.

ROAM Status Indicates your phone is roaming.

Battery Level Status Indicates the power currently remaining in your phones battery. Five bars equals full battery strength.

HFL Mode Indicates when you are dialing and receiving calls. Also displays which menu option has been selected.

Phone Dialing Indicates the number you entered or the number of the incoming call.

Some phones do not send this information to HFL.

You can also see the signal strength and ROAM status on the audio display.

You will see HANDS FREE LINK and the indicator on the audio display when you operate HFL.

:

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)

How to Use HFL

All phones may not operate identically, and some may cause inconsistent operation of HFL.

F eatures

395

NOTE:

ROAM STATUS

SIGNAL STRENGTH

2009 TL

Here are some guidelines for using voice control:

Adjust the airflow from both the dashboard and side vents so they do not blow against the microphone on the ceiling.

Close the windows and the moonroof.

To enter a command, press and release the HFL Talk button. After the beep, say your command in a clear, natural tone.

When voice commands are used, the fan speed will be automatically adjusted to low. However, for better voice recognition, lowering the fan speed may be necessary.

If the microphone picks up voices other than yours, the system may not interpret your voice commands correctly.

If HFL does not recognize a command, its response is Pardon. If it doesnt recognize the command it plays an appropriate Help prompt. Response time may vary depending on the voice command.

To hear a list of available options at any time, press the HFL Talk button, wait for the beep, and say Hands free help or Help.

When you are at the main menu, you can hear general HFL information such as pairing or setting up the system. Press the HFL Talk button, wait for the beep, and say Tutorial.

Many commands can be spoken together. For example, you can say, Dial 123-456-7891.

To enter a string of numbers in a Call or Dial command, you can say them all at once, or you can separate them in blocks of 3, 4, 7, 10, and 11.

To skip a voice prompt, press the HFL Talk button while HFL is speaking. HFL will then begin listening for your next command.

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)

Using Voice Control

396

2009 TL

To go back one step in a command process, say Go back, or press the HFL Back button. If nothing is said while HFL is listening for a command, HFL will time out and stop its voice recognition, then prompt you with available options or help information. The next time you press the HFL Talk button, HFL begins listening from the point at which it timed out.

To end a command sequence at any time, press and hold the HFL Back button, or press and release the HFL Talk button, wait for the beep, and say Cancel. The next time you press the HFL Talk button, HFL begins from the main menu.

When you finish a command sequence, HFL returns to idle. For example, when you store the name Eric, the HFL system response is Eric has been stored. The next time you press the HFL Talk button, HFL begins from the main menu.

Your Bluetooth compatible phone with HandsFree Profile must be paired to HFL before you can make and receive hands-free calls. To confirm that your phone is Bluetooth compatible, visit

, or call (888) 528-7876. In Canada, visit , or call (888) 9-ACURA-9. Your phone retailer should also be able to confirm if your phone is Bluetooth compatible.

Up to six phones can be paired to HFL.

For pairing, your phone must be in its discovery mode (searching for a Bluetooth related device).

HFL does not allow you to pair your phone if the vehicle is moving.

CONTINUED

www.acura.com/ handsfreelink

www.acura.ca

Pairing Your Phone

NOTE:

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

397

2009 TL

If after three minutes your phone is not ready to pair or a phone is not found, the system will time out and return to idle.

Park your vehicle. With your phone on and the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position, press and release the Talk button. HFL prompts Welcome to Bluetooth HandsFreeLink. This system enables hands-free usage of a mobile phone. Before using this system, a phone needs to be paired or connected with HandsFreeLink. Would you like to pair a phone now? Press the Bluetooth HandsFreeLink Talk button, and after the beep, say Yes, to begin the pairing process, or No, to continue.

Your phones battery may drain faster when it is paired to HFL.

The following procedure works for most phones. If you cannot pair your phone to HFL with this procedure, refer to your phones operating manual, visit

, call the HandsFreeLink consumer support at (888) 528-7876, or call your phone retailer. In Canada, visit , or call (888) 9- ACURA-9.

During the pairing process, turn off any previously paired phones before pairing a new phone.

Each time a phone is paired with HFL, the system selects a pairing code randomly or sequentially. You can switch this setting between random mode and fixed mode. To select a pairing code setting between Random and Fixed, refer to page .

1.

403

To pair your first phone, follow the prompts on the HFL system:

www.acura. com/handsfreelink

www.acura.ca

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)

398

2009 TL

Follow the prompts on your phone to get it into its discovery mode. The phone will search for HFL. When it comes up, select HandsFreeLink from the list of options displayed on your phone.

When asked by the phone, enter the four-digit code from step 3 into your phone. HFL responds HandsFreeLink has connected to a new phone. A name is needed to identify this phone. Press the Talk button and say a name. For example, Johns phone.

Steps 4 and 5 show a common way to get your phone into its discovery mode (searching for a Bluetooth related device). If these steps do not work on your phone, refer to the phones operating manual.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, if you say No, HFL responds Would you like to hear the Bluetooth HandsFreeLink tutorial now? Press the Talk button and after the beep, say yes to begin the tutorial, or say No to exit HandsFreeLink.

If you say Yes, HFL will begin the tutorial. Follow the prompts on HFL.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Yes. HFL responds Entering phone set up: pair menu. The pairing process requires operation of your Bluetooth phone. For safety, only perform this function while the vehicle is stopped. HFL responds For proper system function a compatible Bluetooth phone is required. Please visit the HandsFreeLink website, listed in the owners manual, for a list of approved phones and other system information. HandsFreeLink is waiting to pair with a Bluetooth phone. From your phone, search for Bluetooth devices and select HandsFreeLink. HFL responds When prompted by your mobile phone, enter the pairing code: 1234 .

Go to Step 4.

3.

4.

5.

2.

: For example

CONTINUED

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

399

NOTE:

2009 TL

To rename a paired phone, do this:To pair another phone, do this: Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Phone setup. HFL responds Phone setup options are pair, edit, delete, list, status, next phone, and set pairing code. Press the Talk button and say a command.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Edit. HFL responds Which phone would like to edit? Press the Talk button, and say a name, or say List, to hear the names of the paired phones

With your phone on and the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position, press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Phone setup. HFL responds Phone setup options are pair, edit, delete, list, status, next phone, and set pairing code. Press the Talk button and say a command.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Pair.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say the name you want to use. For example, say Johns phone. HFL responds Johns phone has been successfully paired. HFL responds Would you like to hear the Bluetooth HandsFreeLink tutorial now? Press the Talk button and after the beep, say Yes to begin the tutorial, or say No to exit HandsFreeLink.

If you press and release the Talk button and say Yes, HFL begins Tutorial. If you say No, HFL returns to idle.

With only one paired phone, for example, Johns phone , HFL responds What is the new name for Johns phone ? Then go to step 4.

Repeat steps 2 through 6 on page .

2.

3.

1.

2.

1. 6.

399

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)

400

2009 TL

To delete a paired phone, do this: Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Phone setup. HFL responds Phone setup options are pair, edit, delete, list, status, next phone, and set pairing code. Press the Talk button and say a command.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say the name of the phone you want to rename. For example, say Johns phone. HFL responds What is the new name for Johns phone? Press the Talk button and say a name.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say the new name of the phone. For example, say Lisas phone. HFL responds The name has been changed.

With only one paired phone, for example, Johns phone , HFL responds Would you like to delete

Johns phone ? Then go to step 4.

HFL responds Which phone would like to delete? Press the Talk button and say a name, or say list, to hear the names of the paired phone.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Delete.

Go back or Cancel does not delete the phone.

HFL responds The phone has been deleted.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, if you say Continue.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say the name of the phone you want to delete. For example, say Johns phone. HFL responds Would you like to delete Johns phone? Press the Talk button and say Yes or No.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Yes. HFL responds Preparing to delete Johns phone. Press the Talk button and say Continue; otherwise say Go Back or Cancel.

1.

4.

5.

2.

3.

4.

3.

CONTINUED

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

401

2009 TL

To change from the currently linked phone to another paired phone, do this:

To find out the status of the phone being used, do this:

To list all paired phones, do this:

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Phone setup. HFL responds Phone setup options are pair, edit, delete, list, status, next phone, and set pairing code. Press the Talk button and say a command.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Phone setup. HFL responds Phone setup options are pair, edit, delete, list, status, next phone, and set pairing code. Press the Talk button and say a command.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say List. HFL responds by listing the name of each paired phone. When all phones paired to the system have been read, HFL responds The entire list has been read.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Status. For example, HFL responds Johns phone is linked. Battery strength is three bars. Signal strength is five bars, and the phone is roaming.

Some Phones may not send the status information to the HFL system.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Next phone. HFL responds Searching for the next phone. The system then disconnects the linked phone and searches for another paired phone. If the system finds it, for example, HFL responds Pauls phone is linked.

If no other phones are found or paired, the first phone remains linked. For example, HFL responds No other paired phones were found/have been paired. Returning to Johns phone .

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Phone setup. HFL responds Phone setup options are pair, edit, delete, list, status, next phone, and set pairing code. Press the Talk button and say a command.

2.

1. 1.

2.

1.

2.

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)

402

2009 TL

When you pair your phone to HFL, the HFL system will automatically select a pairing code at random or in order. You can customize this setting mode between Random and Fixed. If you select the fixed mode, the HFL system will select a pairing code sequentially.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Set Pairing Code. HFL responds Each time a phone is paired with HandsFreeLink, a pairing code is used for security. This code can be randomly generated by HandsFreeLink, or fixed, which is needed for some Bluetooth devices with a preset pairing code. Would you like to set the pairing code as Random or Fixed?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, to select the fixed mode, say Fixed. HFL responds What is the four digit number you would like to set as the pairing code? Press the Talk button and say the number.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say a desired four- digit number. For example, say 1000. HFL responds 1000. Is this correct? Press the Talk button and say Yes or No.

HFL responds Phone setup options are pair, edit, delete, list, status, next phone, and set pairing code. Press the Talk button and say a command.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Phone setup.

If the number is not correct, say No. HFL goes back to step 3.

HFL responds HandsFreeLink will use this code when pairing to a Bluetooth device.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, if the number is correct, say Yes.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

To change the setting mode, do this:

Setting a Pairing Code

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

403

2009 TL

You can select or change some settings for the HFL system. Here are the settings you can select or change. To do this, make sure your vehicle is parked safely, with your phone on and the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.

You can set a four-digit security passcode to lock the HFL system for security purposes.

If you forget your passcode, you cannot activate HFL. Consult your dealer to cancel the passcode. You can also select a System Clear command to reset HFL (see page ).

You can change the security passcode.

The incoming notification can be set to a ring tone, a prompt, or no notification. The default setting is a prompt.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say System setup. HFL responds System setup options are security, change passcode, call notification, auto transfer, and clear. Press the Talk button and say a command.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Security. HFL responds Security is disabled. Would you like to enable security? Press the Talk button and say Yes or No.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Yes. HFL responds What is the four- digit number you would like to set as your security passcode? Press the Talk button and say the number.

If you say No, HFL returns to idle.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say the four-digit passcode you want to use. For example, say 1, 2, 3, 4. HFL responds 1, 2, 3, 4. Is this correct? Press the Talk button and say Yes or No.

3.

1.

2.

4.

417

To set a security passcode, do this:

Setting Up the System

Setting a security passcode

Changing a security passcode

Selecting the incoming notif ication

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)

404

2009 TL

HFL responds Security is on. Each time the vehicle is turned on, the passcode will be required to use the system. If you forget this passcode, you must either go to the dealer to have it reset, or clear the entire system using the System Clear command.

Once a passcode is set, HFL will prompt you for your passcode each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON (II) position and you press the Talk button. You will only be asked for the passcode once per ignition cycle.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, HFL prompts The system is locked. What is the four- digit passcode?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say your four-digit passcode. For example, say 1, 2, 3, 4.

If the passcode is correct, HFL responds System is unlocked.

If the passcode is not correct, please try again according to the HFLs guidance.

You can also select a System Clear command to reset HFL (see page

).

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say System setup. HFL responds System setup options are security, change passcode, call notification, auto transfer, and clear. Press the Talk button and say a command.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Change passcode. HFL responds What is the four digit number you would like to set as your security passcode? Press the Talk button and say the number.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say your four digit passcode, for example, say 1, 2, 3, 4.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Yes. 1.

2.

3.

5.

1.

2.

3. 417

To enter your passcode, do this; To change your security passcode, do this:

CONTINUED

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

405

2009 TL

HFL responds 1, 2, 3, 4. Is this correct? Press the Talk button and say Yes or No.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say System setup. HFL responds System setup options are security, change passcode, call notification, auto transfer, and clear. Press the Talk button and say a command.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Call notification. HFL responds: Would you like the incoming call notification to be a ring tone, a prompt, or off?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, for example, say Ring tone. HFL responds A ring tone will be used. You will hear a ring tone through the audio speakers to announce an incoming call.

If you say, Prompt. HFL responds An incoming call prompt will be used. You will hear a You have an incoming call. prompt when receiving an incoming call.

If you say, Off, no audible notification of an incoming call will be selected. During an incoming call, there is no ring tone or prompt playback. The audio system will still mute, and the HFL message or the HFL notification screen will be displayed.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Yes. HFL responds Security passcode has been changed.

2.

1.

5.

3.

4. To set the incoming notification, do this:

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)

406

2009 TL

You can make calls using any phone number, or by using a name in the HFL phonebook. You can also redial the last number called. During a call, HFL allows you to talk up to 30 minutes after you remove the key from the ignition switch. Continuing a call without running the engine may discharge and weaken the vehicles battery.

With your phone on and the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position, press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Call or Dial. HFL responds What name or number would you like to call/ dial? Press the Talk button and say a name, a number, or say list to hear the phonebook entries.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say the number you want to call. For example, say 123 456 7891. HFL responds 123 456 7891. Press the Talk button and continue to add numbers, or say Call or Dial to place a call.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Call or Dial.

HFL responds Calling or Dialing. Once connected, you will hear the person you called through the audio speakers. To change the volume, use the audio system volume knob or the steering wheel volume controls.

To end the call, press the Back button.

1.

2.

4.

3.To make a call using a phone number, do this:

CONTINUED

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)

Making a Call

F eatures

407

2009 TL

To make a call using a name in the HFL phonebook, do this:

To redial the last number called by the phone, do this:

With your phone on and the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position, press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Call or Dial. HFL responds What name or number would you like to call/ dial? Press the Talk button and say a name, a number, or say list to hear the phonebook entries.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say the name you want to call. For example, say John. HFL responds Would you like to call John? Press the Talk button and say Yes or No.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Yes. HFL responds Calling or Dialing. Once connected, you will hear the person you called through the audio speakers. To change the volume, use the audio system volume knob or the steering wheel volume controls.

To end the call, press the Back button.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Redial. HFL responds Redialing. Once connected, you will hear the person you called through the audio speakers. To change the volume, use the audio system volume knob or the steering wheel volume controls.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)

408

2009 TL

HFL allows you to send numbers or names during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-driven phone system. You can also program account numbers into the HFL phonebook for easy retrieval during menu-driven calls.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Send. HFL responds What name or number would you like to send?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say the number you want to send. For example, say 1, 2, 3. HFL responds 1, 2, 3. Press the Talk button and continue to add numbers or say send.

To send a pound ( ), say pound. To send a star (*), say star.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Send. The dial tones will be sent, and the call will continue.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Send. HFL responds What name or number would you like to send?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say the name you want to send. For example, say Account number. HFL responds Would you like to send account number? Press the Talk button and say Yes or No.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Yes. The dial tones will be sent, and the call will continue.

2.

3.

1.

2.

1.

3.

To send a number during a call, do this: To send a name during a call, do this:

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)

Sending Numbers or Names During a Call

F eatures

409

NOTE:

2009 TL

If you receive a call when you are not on the phone, HFL interrupts the audio system (if it is on), and plays the incoming call notification, if activated. To answer the call, press the Talk button and begin speaking. If you dont want to answer the call, press the Back button.

If your phone has call waiting, and you receive a call when you are on the phone, press and release the Talk button to answer it. When you do this, the original call is placed on hold. To return to the original call, press the Talk button again. If you dont want to answer the new call, disregard it, and continue with your original call. If you want to hang up the original call and answer the new call, press the Back button.

You can transfer a call from HFL to your phone, or from your phone to HFL.

To transfer a call from HFL to your phone, or from your phone to HFL, do this: Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Transfer. The audio switches between HFL and the phone.

This function allows you to transfer a call automatically to the HFL system. If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, a call will be transferred automatically to the HFL system when you turn the ignition switch to the ACCESSORY (I) position.

With this function activated, you can also make a call by dialing with the number keys on the phone which has been paired to the HFL system.

The automatic transferring function can be set to on or off.

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)

Receiving a Call Transferring a Call Automatic Transferring

410

2009 TL

To activate this function, do this: Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say System setup. HFL responds System setup options are security, change passcode, call notification, auto transfer, and clear. Press the Talk button and say a command.

If this feature is set to off, HFL responds Auto transfer is disabled. Calls dialed on the phone do not automatically transfer to Bluetooth HandsFreeLink. Would you like to enable Auto Transfer? Press the Talk button and say Yes or No.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Auto transfer.

If the setting changes from on to off, HFL responds Auto transfer is disabled. Use the Transfer command at the HandsFree main menu to manually transfer calls dialed on the phone.

If this feature is set to on, HFL responds Auto-transfer is enabled. Calls dialed on the phone will be automatically transferred to Bluetooth HandsFreeLink. Would you like to disable Auto Transfer? Press the Talk button and say Yes or No.

Never try to dial from your phone directly if the vehicle is moving.

To end the call, press the Back button.

If the setting changes from off to on, press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Yes. HFL responds Auto transfer is enabled.

When you make a call directly from the phone with the auto transfer on, make sure to stop your vehicle safely.

1.

2. 3.

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

411

NOTE:

2009 TL

During a call, you can mute or unmute your voice to the person you are talking to.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Mute. HFL responds Mute is active.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Mute. HFL responds Mute is canceled.

The HFL phonebook can store up to 50 names with their associated numbers. These can be any types of numbers. For example, you can store a phone number and use it to make a call, or you can store an account number and use it during a call to a menu-driven phone system.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Phonebook. HFL responds Phonebook options are store, edit, delete, receive contact, and list. Press the Talk button and say a command.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Store. HFL responds What name would you like to store? Press the Talk button and say a name.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say the name you would like to store. For example, say John Smith . HFL responds What is the number for John Smith ? Press the Talk button and say the number. You can also say an account number instead of John Smith .

HFL responds 123 456 7891. Press the Talk button and continue to add numbers or say Enter.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say the number. For example, say 123 456 7891.

1.

2.

3.

4.

To mute your voice, do this:

To unmute your voice, do this: To add a name, do this:

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)

Muting a Call Setting Up the Phonebook

412

2009 TL

CONTINUED

Avoid using duplicate name entries.

Avoid using home as a name entry.

HFL will be able to better recognize multisyllabic name entries (Peter instead of Pete), or a longer name (John Smith instead of John).

Use a consistent, even tone and reduce background noise when storing names, as the HFL voice recognition can be sensitive.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Enter. HFL responds John Smith has been stored.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Phonebook. HFL responds Phonebook options are store, edit, delete, receive contact, and list. Press the Talk button and say a command.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Edit. HFL responds What name would you like to edit? Press the Talk button and say a name or say list to hear the phonebook entries.

If only one number is stored, HFL responds What is the new number for Eric? Then go to step 4.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say the name you would like to edit. For example, say Eric. HFL responds What is the new number for Eric? Press the Talk button and say the number.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say the new number for Eric. For example, say 987 654 3219. HFL responds 987 654 3219. Press the Talk button and continue to add numbers or say enter.

HFL responds The number has been changed.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Enter.

2.

1.

5. 5.

3.

4.

To edit the number of a name, do this:

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)

NOTE:

F eatures

413

2009 TL

To delete a name, do this: To list all names in the phonebook, do this:Press and release the Talk button.

After the beep, say Phonebook. HFL responds Phonebook options are store, edit, delete, receive contact, and list. Press the Talk button and say a command.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Delete. HFL responds What name would you like to delete? Press the Talk button and say a name or say list to hear the phonebook entries.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say the name you would like to delete. For example, say Eric. HFL responds Would you like to delete Eric? Press the Talk button and say Yes or No.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Yes. HFL responds The name has been deleted.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Phonebook. HFL responds Phonebook options are store, edit, delete, receive contact, and list. Press the Talk button and say a command.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say List.

HFL responds by listing the names in the phonebook in the order which they were stored. After all names are listed, HFL responds The entire list has been read.

1.

4.

2.

1.

2.

3.

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)

414

2009 TL

CONTINUED

You can store the desired number to the HFL phonebook directly from your cell phone.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Phonebook. HFL responds Phonebook options are store, edit, delete, receive contact, and list. Press the Talk button and say a command.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say List. HFL responds by listing the names in the phonebook. When it says the name you want to call, for example, Eric , press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Call. HFL responds Would you like to call Eric ? Press the Talk button and say Yes or No.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Yes. HFL responds Calling.

Once connected, you will hear the person you called through the audio speakers. To change the volume, use the audio system volume knob or the steering wheel volume controls.

Your phone may not have this capability. Visit

or call the HandsFreeLink consumer support at 1-888-528-7876. In Canada, visit

, or call 1-888-9-ACURA- 9. You can see your phones owners manual for information.

1.

2.

3.To call a name from the phonebook list, do this:

www.acura.com/ handsfreelink

www.acura.ca

Storing a Phone Number Directly from Your Phone

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

415

NOTE:

2009 TL

With your phone on and the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position, press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Phonebook. HFL responds Phonebook options are store, edit, delete, receive contact, and list. Press the Talk button and say a command.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Receive contact. HFL responds The receive process requires operation of your Bluetooth device. For safety, only perform this function while the vehicle is stopped. HandsFreeLink is now waiting to receive a contact from a Bluetooth device.

Select a desired number from the list on your phone, and send it via Bluetooth (steps will vary for phone types, follow your phones operating manual). HFL responds, for example 2 phone numbers have been received for this contact. What name would you like to store for the mobile number

1234567891 ? Press the Talk button and say a name or say Discard, to discard this number.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say the name you would like to store. For example, say Neil at work. HFL responds Neil at work will be stored. Is this correct? Press the Talk button and say Yes or No.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Yes. HFL responds Neil at work has been stored. Would you like HandsFreeLink to receive another contact? Press the Talk button and say Yes or No.

Go to step 6.

If you say No, HFL returns to idle.

If you want to continue to store any other numbers, press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Yes. HFL responds HandsFreeLink is now waiting to receive a contact from a Bluetooth device.

Go back to step 3.

2.

4.

1. 3. 5.

6.

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)

416

2009 TL

To clear the system, do this: Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Yes. HFL responds Preparing to clear the system, which may take up to two minutes to complete. To proceed, press the Talk button and say Continue, otherwise say Go Back or Cancel.

After saying Continue, HFL responds Please wait while the system is cleared. HFL responds The system has been cleared.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say System setup. HFL responds System setup options are security, change passcode, call notification, auto transfer, and clear. Press the Talk button and say a command.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Clear. HFL responds This process will clear all paired phones, clear all entries in the phonebook, clear the security passcode, and restore the defaults in the system setup. Is this what you would like to do? Press the Talk button and say yes or no.

This operation clears the HFL of your passcode, your paired phones, and all names in the HFL phonebook. Clearing is recommended before you sell your vehicle.

2. 4.

1. 3.Clearing the System

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

417

2009 TL

Canadian models only

All paired phones missing a French name tag are recorded, the HFL system returns to idle.

This process will also be required if there are paired phones without English tags when changing from French to English. HFL responds For the system to identify phones that were paired while in another language, the phone names need to be re-recorded.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Oui or Yes. If there are no paired phones without French name tags, HFL responds Veuillez attendre que le systme change de langue. Please wait while the language is changed. HFL responds La langue a t change.

To change language, say a command with the current selected language. The following example is changing the language from English to French.

If there are paired phones without French name tags, the following prompts will continue.

Example for changing name tags: HFL responds Quel est le nom Franais pour Pauls phone ? Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Tlphone de Paul.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Change language. HFL responds English or French?

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say French. HFL responds Vous avez selectionn Franais. Les noms enregistres en mode Anglais ne seron pas accessible en mode Franais. Voulez-vous continuer? You have selected French. Name tags that were stored while in English mode will not be accessible in French mode. Would you like to continue? Press the Talk button and say Yes or No.

If there are paired phones without French name tags, HFL responds La langue a t change. Pour que le systme identifie les tlphones qui ont t jumels dans une autre langue, les noms des tlphones doivent etre r- enregistrs.

2.

4.

1.

3.Changing Language

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system)

418

NOTE:

2009 TL

Canadian models only To select a language quickly, do the following.

As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say Anglais. HFL responds You have selected English. Name tags that were stored while in French mode will not be accessible in English mode. Would you like to continue? Press the Talk button and say Yes or No.

For example, to change from French to English.

If you want to continue, follow steps 3 and 4 on page .

1.

418

Quick Language Selection

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models without navigation system) F

eatures

419

2009 TL

Your vehicle is equipped with Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL). HFL uses Bluetooth technology to link your cell phone to your vehicle. With HFL, you can place and receive calls through your vehicles navigation system, without the distraction of handling your cell phone.

Bluetooth is the wireless technology that links your phone to HFL. HFL uses a Class 2 Bluetooth, which means the maximum range between your phone and vehicle is 30 feet (10 meters).

With a linked phone, HFL allows you to send and receive calls in your vehicle without holding the phone.To use this feature, you need a

Bluetooth compatible cell phone with the HandsFree Profile. For more information, and a list of compatible cell phones, visit

, or call HandsFreeLink customer support at (888) 528-7876. In Canada, visit

, or call (888) 9-ACURA- 9. HFL is available in English, French, and Spanish.

HFL recognizes simple voice commands, such as phone numbers and names. It uses these commands to automatically dial, receive, and store numbers. Voice commands help to operate HFL on the navigation screen. For more information on voice control, see Using Voice Control on page .

The Bluetooth name and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd. is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

Here are the main features of HFL. Instructions for using HFL begin on page .421

424

www.acura.com/ handsfreelink

www.acura.ca

Voice Control

Incoming/Outgoing Calls

Bluetooth Wireless Technology

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)

420

2009 TL

Your vehicles HFL system allows you to import your cellular phonebook to HFL. Using the navigation system, you can make a call directly and store a desired number in HFL from the list shown on the navigation display. For more information on how to import the phonebook, see page . To make a call, see page .

Your phone may not have phonebook import function. Visit

, or call HandsFreeLink consumer support at (888) 528-7876. In Canada, visit

, or call (888) 9-ACURA- 9. You can also see your phones owners manual for information.

The HFL microphone is on the ceiling, in front of the map lights. The microphone is shared with the navigation system.

HFL is operable by interaction with the navigation screen with the Interface Dial, the HFL buttons on the steering wheel, or by voice.

When HFL is in use, the sound comes through the vehicles front audio system speakers. If the audio system is in use while operating either of the HFL buttons or making a call, HFL overrides the audio system. To change the volume level, use the audio system volume knob or the steering wheel volume controls.

455 433

www.acura.com/handsfreelink

www.acura.ca

How to Use HFLPhonebook Microphone

Audio System All phones may not operate identically, and some may cause inconsistent operation of HFL.

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

421

NOTE:

NOTE:

2009 TL

HFL system functions can be accessed using the interface dial. The interface dial has two parts, a dial and a selector.

The selector can be pushed left, right, up, down, and in. Use the selector to scroll through lists, to select menus, and to highlight menu items. When you make a selection, push the center of the selector (ENTER) to go to that selection.

The CANCEL button clears the current screen and returns to the previous display.

If you receive a call and you are on the Cellular Phone screen, the following screen is displayed:

The dial turns left and right. Use it to make selections from a list or menu on the screen.

The INFO button takes you to the information menu, where you can select the Cellular Phone screen. You can also press the PICK-UP button on the steering wheel to go directly to the Cellular Phone screen.

If this is not displayed, press the INFO button, select Cellular Phone, then press ENTER to display the Cellular Phone screen. You can also press the PICK-UP button on the steering wheel to go directly to the Cellular Phone screen.

Interface Dial HFL Display

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)

422

ENTERSELECTOR

INFO BUTTONCANCEL BUTTON

CALLER NAME PHONE DIALING

ROAM STATUS

BLUETOOTH INDICATOR

DIAL

BATTERY LEVEL STATUS

SIGNAL STRENGTH

2009 TL

ROAM Status Indicates your phone is roaming.

Battery Level Status Indicates the power currently remaining in your phones battery. Five bars equals full battery strength.

Signal Strength Indicates the network signal strength of the current phone. Five bars equals full strength.

Caller name/Phone dialing Indicates the number you dialed or received, and a caller or receiver name. Only the number will be displayed if the caller or receivers information has not been stored in the phonebook.

Some phones do not send this information to HFL.

indicator will be displayed on the navigation display and center display if your phone is linked to the HFL system.

When you receive a phone call, a pop-up will interrupt the display as shown. This pop-up shows a caller name and the phone number that

has been stored in the phonebook (see page ). While the system searches for information from the stored data, Now acquiring call information will be displayed. If the caller chooses to hide the number when making a call, No Caller ID will be displayed instead.

When you are operating HFL, or dialing or receiving calls with the audio system in use, you will see the above screen.

You can also see the signal strength and ROAM status on the center display.

:

455

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)

Incoming Call Display

F eatures

423

U.S. model is shown.

2009 TL

To operate HFL, use the Pick-Up and Hang-Up buttons on the left side of the steering wheel.

Here are some guidelines for using voice control:

Adjust the airflow from both the dashboard and side vents so they do not blow against the microphone on the ceiling.

Close the windows and the moonroof.

HANG-UP Button: This button is used to end a call.

PICK-UP Button: This button is used to answer incoming calls or to make outgoing calls. You can also go directly to the Cellular Phone screen by pressing this button.

BACK Button: This button has the same function as the CANCEL button. When you press and release it, the current voice command is canceled and the display returns to the previous screen.

The HFL buttons are used as follows:

TALK Button: This button activates the voice control system and is used for all voice commands. Press and release it, wait for a beep, and give a voice command.

If you use the voice commands to operate HFL, also use the TALK and BACK buttons.

When voice commands are used, the fan speed will be automatically adjusted to low. However, for better voice recognition, lowering the fan speed may be necessary.

To enter a command, press and release the Talk button. After the beep, say your command in a clear, natural tone.

HFL Buttons Using Voice Control

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)

424

BACK BUTTON

HANG-UP BUTTON

TALK BUTTON

PICK-UP BUTTON

2009 TL

You can change the voice guidance and system language to English, French, or Spanish. The language you select will be also used for the navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual for details.

If the microphone picks up voices other than yours, the system may not interpret your voice commands correctly.

If HFL does not recognize a command, its response is Pardon. If it doesnt recognize the command it plays an appropriate Help prompt. Response time may vary depending on the voice command.

To enter a string of numbers in a Call or Dial command, you can say them all at once, or you can separate them.

To skip a voice prompt, press the Talk button while HFL is speaking. HFL will then wait for your next command.

To hear a list of available options at any time, press the Talk button, wait for the beep, and say Help.

Changing Language

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

425

2009 TL

Your Bluetooth compatible phone with HandsFree Profile must be paired to HFL before you can make and receive hands-free calls. To confirm that your phone is Bluetooth compatible, visit

, or call (888) 528-7876. In Canada, visit , or call (888) 9-ACURA-9. Your phone retailer should also be able to confirm if your phone is Bluetooth compatible.

The following procedure works for most phones. If you cannot pair your phone to HFL with this procedure, refer to your phones operating manual, visit

, call the HandsFreeLink consumer support at (888) 528-7876, or call your phone retailer. In Canada, visit , or call (888) 9- ACURA-9.

Park the vehicle. With your phone on and the vehicles power mode in ACCESSORY or ON, press the INFO button, rotate the interface dial to select Cellular Phone, and push ENTER, or press the Talk button and say Cellular Phone. HFL responds Which cellular phone item would you like to select?

HFL does not allow you to pair your phone if the vehicle is moving.

During the pairing process, turn off any previously paired phones before pairing a new phone. Your phones battery may drain faster when it is paired to HFL. HFL operates best if your phone is set to automatically recognize the system (Discovery mode). If after 3 minutes your phone is not ready to pair or a phone is not found, the system will time out and start the pairing process from the beginning.

Up to six phones can be paired to HFL.

For more information on how to select the power mode, see page

.

1.

178

www.acura.com/ handsfreelink

www.acura.ca

www.acura. com/handsfreelink

www.acura.ca

Pairing Your Phone

NOTE:

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)

426

2009 TL

CONTINUED

Move the interface selector down. The Phone setup screen appears. Rotate the dial to select Setup Bluetooth Phone, and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say Phone setup. HFL responds Please select the phone setup item. Press the Talk button and say Setup Bluetooth Phone. HFL responds Please select a Bluetooth Phone item to setup.

When a screen message appears that provides a pass-key, enter the pass-key on your cell phone when prompted in its discovery mode.

Make sure your phone is in Discovery mode at this point. Rotate the dial to select Pair phone and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say Pair phone.

To get your phone into its discovery mode, refer to the phones operation manual.

4.3.2.

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

427

Example

2009 TL

The navigation system can manage up to six phones. If you attempt to pair a seventh phone, a screen message will appear, prompting you to delete one of your existing phones.

The notification is displayed. If OK, press ENTER. Then the message Now your phone is ready for hands-free calls appears. If you want to pair two or more phones, repeat steps 2 4.

If you want to cancel the pairing process at this point, press ENTER to select Cancel, or press the Talk button and say Cancel.

When the pass-key is transferred to HFL, it recognizes and pairs your cell phone. HFL automatically attempts to connect to your cell phone that has just been paired.

5.

6.

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)

428

NOTE:

NOTE:

2009 TL

Rotate the dial to select Pass-key and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say Pass-key. HFL responds Would you like to setup a random or fixed Pass- key?

Select the Cellular Phone screen, then move the interface selector down. Rotate the dial to select Setup Bluetooth Phone and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say Setup Bluetooth Phone. HFL responds Please select a Bluetooth Phone item to setup.

Rotate the interface dial to select Yes and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say Yes. The display changes to the deleting procedure. To delete a phone, see page . When the phone is deleted, you can pair the seventh (now sixth) phone to the system.

HFL uses a Bluetooth pass-key to pair a cellular phone. By default, the system generates and uses a random pass-key for any Bluetooth connection. You can change this setting to the fixed pass-key. Do the following.

1. 2.

431

CONTINUED

Specifying the Bluetooth Pass-key

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

429

2009 TL

Rotate the dial to select either Fixed or Random and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say Fixed or Random.

The navigation system generates and uses a random pass-key for subsequent phone pairing.

HFL returns to the Setup Bluetooth phone screen.

Specify a 4-digit number in the pass- key entry screen and move the interface selector down. The specified number will be generated and used for subsequent phone pairing.

HFL responds Please say your 4- digit pass-key.

Refer to the navigation system manual for information on how to enter numbers.

3.

When selecting Random

When selecting Fixed

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)

430

Example

2009 TL

To delete a paired phone

If you would like to delete a phone, do the following.

Select the Cellular Phone screen, then move the interface selector down. Rotate the dial to select Setup Bluetooth Phone and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say Setup Bluetooth Phone. HFL responds Please select a Bluetooth Phone item to setup.

Rotate the dial to select Delete a phone and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say Delete a phone. HFL responds Please select the number of the phone to delete from the list.

Rotate the dial to select the phone you want to delete from the list, and press ENTER. Move the interface selector down for OK. You can also press the Talk button and say the list number of the phone you want to delete, then say OK.

1.

2. 3.

CONTINUED

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

431

The list number 1 is selected.

LIST NUMBER

2009 TL

You can change to another phone when there are multiple paired phones.

Activate the Discovery mode of the Bluetooth-compatible phone you would like to link.

Press the INFO button, rotate the dial to select Cellular Phone, and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say Cellular Phone. HFL responds Which cellular phone item would you like to select?

The above screen is displayed. Rotate the dial to select Yes and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say Yes.

4.

1.

2.

To change from the currently linked phone to another paired phone

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)

432

2009 TL

Move the interface selector down to select the Phone setup screen, or press the Talk button and say Phone setup. HFL responds Please select the phone setup item. Rotate the dial to select Search for next phone and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say Search for next phone.

HFL attempts to connect with another paired phone, and the message Searching for a Bluetooth phone appears.

If the above screen is displayed, pairing has finished.

You can make calls using any phone number or by using a name in the HFL phonebook. You can also redial from an incoming or outgoing number. During a call, HFL allows you to talk up to 30 minutes after you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). Continuing a call without running the engine may discharge and weaken the vehicles battery.

For more information on how to select the power mode, see page .

3. 178

CONTINUED

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)

Making a Call

F eatures

433

2009 TL

Rotate the dial to select Dial and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say Dial. HFL responds Please say the cellular phone number continuously.

Rotate the dial and press ENTER to select each number, or press the Talk button and say the entire number as a continuous string. For example, say 123-456-7890. If the wrong number is displayed on the screen, press the Talk button again and say Delete or Clear. All digits will be cleared.

With your phone on and the power mode in ACCESSORY or ON, press the INFO button.

For more information on how to select the power mode, see page

.

Rotate the dial to select Cellular Phone and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say Cellular Phone. HFL responds Which cellular phone item would you like to select?

2.

3. 4.

1.

178

To make a call by dialing a number, do this:

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)

434

Example

2009 TL

HFL Calling display appears, notifying you that the system is dialing the entered phone number. Once connected, you will hear the person you called through the audio speakers. To change the volume, use the audio system volume knob or the steering wheel volume controls.

To end the call, rotate the dial to select Hang-up and press ENTER, or press the Hang-Up button on the steering wheel.

To delete a number with the interface dial, move the selector to the left and release it. To delete all the numbers in one go, move the selector to the left and hold it.

To enter a pound ( ), say pound. To enter a star (*), say star.

On the screen, move the interface selector to the right to select a pound or star.

When you have finished, press the Pick-Up button on the steering wheel or move the interface selector down to make the call, or press the Talk button and say Dial. HFL responds Dialing.

5. 6.

7.

CONTINUED

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

435

NOTE:

Example

2009 TL

To make a call using a name in the HFL phonebook, do this:

With your phone on and the power mode in ACCESSORY or ON, press the INFO button.

Rotate the dial to select Phone Book and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say Phone Book. If a phonebook has already been imported, HFL responds Please select the number of the phonebook from the list. If a phonebook has not been imported, HFL will attempt to import it from your phone (see page ).

Rotate the dial to select a contact name and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say the list number of the name you want to select. HFL responds Please select the number of the phone number from the list.

For more information on how to select the power mode, see page

.

Rotate the dial to select Cellular Phone and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say Cellular Phone. HFL responds Which cellular phone item would you like to select?

2.

3. 4.

1.

455

178

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)

436

The list number 1 is selected.

LIST NUMBER

2009 TL

Select the persons phone number from the Select a number to call screen, or press the Talk button and say the list number of the phone number you want to select.

On the Select a name screen, move the interface selector down to select Search Phone Book, or press the Talk button and say Search Phone Book. HFL responds Please spell a keyword one letter at a time. Use the interface dial to enter the keyword. After the keyword for the name is entered, move the interface selector down to return to the Select a name screen.

Press the Pick-Up button on the steering wheel or press ENTER to make the call, or press the Talk button and say Dial. HFL responds Dialing.

HFL Calling display appears, notifying you that the system is dialing the entered phone number. Once connected, you will hear the person you called through the audio speakers. To change the volume, use the audio system volume knob or the steering wheel volume controls.

To end the call, rotate the dial to select Hang-up and press ENTER, or press the Hang-Up button on the steering wheel.

5.

6.

7.

8.

CONTINUED

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

437

NOTE:

LIST NUMBER SELECTED NAME

2009 TL

To make a call using the Call History, do this: The HFL stores the last 30 incoming, the last 30 outgoing, and the last 30 missed calls, including the party name or phone number and call date.

Rotate the dial to select Call History and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say Call History. HFL responds Please select the number of the call from the history list.

If you have made multiple calls to the same number, only the last call to that number will be recorded. For incoming calls, the call log also records missed calls.

Press the INFO button, rotate the dial to select Cellular Phone, and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say Cellular Phone. HFL responds Which cellular phone item would you like to select?

Move the interface selector sideways to switch between All, Dial, Received, or Missed call lists, or press the Talk button and say All, Dial, Received, or Missed call. HFL responds for Dial Please select the number of the dialed call from the history list, and for Received Please select the number of the received call from the history list.

1. 2. 3.

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)

438

NOTE:

HISTORY LIST

2009 TL

To end the call, rotate the dial to select Hang-up and press ENTER, or press the Hang-Up button on the steering wheel.

You can delete all call history when you move the interface selector down when All is selected on the call history screen, or press the Talk button and say Delete all.

Rotate the dial to scroll through each list and select the party name or phone number by pressing ENTER, or press the Talk button and say the list number of the call record you want to select.

Press the Pick-Up button on the steering wheel, or press ENTER to make the call.

HFL Calling display appears, notifying you that the system is dialing the entered phone number. Once connected, you will hear the person you called through the audio speakers. To change the volume, use the audio system volume knob or the steering wheel volume controls.

When the confirmation screen is displayed, rotate the dial to select Yes and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say Yes.

5.

6.

7.4.

CONTINUED

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

439

NOTE:

2009 TL

If you want to select a registered Speed Dial phone number other than the four entries viewable on the Cellular Phone screen, select More Speed Dial and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say More Speed Dial. HFL responds Please select the number of the Speed Dial from the list.

Rotate the dial to select a desired name with a speed dial phone icon and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say Call and then the voice tag you stored for the number you want to call.

Refer to page for setting.

Press the INFO button, rotate the dial to select Cellular Phone, and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say Cellular Phone. HFL responds Which cellular phone item would you like to select?

2. 3.

1.

443

To make a call using a Speed Dial, do this:

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)

440

SPEED DIAL PHONE ICON

VOICE TAG ICON

SPEED DIAL LIST ICON

2009 TL

If you receive a call when you are not on the phone, the HFL incoming call screen appears. To answer the call, press the Pick-Up button on the steering wheel and begin speaking. If you dont want to answer the call, press the Hang-Up button.

If your phone has Call Waiting and you receive a call when you are on the phone, press and release the Pick-Up button to answer it. When you do this, the original call is placed on hold. To return to the original call, press the Pick-Up button again. If you dont want to answer the new call, disregard it and continue with your original call. If you want to hang up the original call and answer the new call, press the Hang-Up button.

When you select a No entry field, HFL prompts you to enter a phone number from your phonebook or call history. See Editing the Speed-Dial Numbers for details (page ).

HFL starts dialing the selected number. HFL Calling screen is displayed. Once connected, you will hear the person you called through the audio speakers. To change the volume, use the audio system volume knob or the steering wheel volume controls.

To end the call, rotate the dial to select Hang-up and press ENTER, or press the Hang-Up button on the steering wheel.

Rotate the dial to select a list number and press ENTER, or, if the number has a voice tag (voice tag icon is shown), press the Talk button and say Call and then the voice tag you stored.

5.

6.

4.

443

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)

Receiving a Call

F eatures

441

NOTE:

VOICE TAG ICON

LIST NUMBER

2009 TL

During a call, you can transfer the call from HFL to your phone, or from your phone to HFL.

When you are on the Calling screen, rotate the dial to select Transfer and press ENTER. The call switches from HFL to the phone.

When you are on the call and the Calling screen is displayed, rotate the dial to select Transfer and press ENTER. The call switches from your phone to HFL.

During a call, you can mute or unmute your voice to the person you are talking to.

When you are on the Calling screen, rotate the dial to select Mute and press ENTER. HFL responds Mute is active.

To transfer a call from HFL to your phone, do this:

To transfer a call from your phone to HFL, do this:

To mute your voice, do this:

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)

Transferring a Call Muting a Call

442

2009 TL

Speed Dial allows you to store up to 20 phone numbers, four of which are accessible on the Cellular Phone screen for quick access. They can be chosen and copied from your phonebook and call history. You can also clear and change a Speed Dial number.

When you are on the Calling screen, rotate the dial to select Mute and press ENTER. HFL responds Mute is canceled.

You can store Speed Dial numbers in both the Phone Setup screen and the Cellular Phone screen.

You can store a maximum of 20 numbers in Phone Setup.

To unmute your voice, do this:

Storing the Speed Dial Number in the Phone Setup Screen

Storing the Speed Dial Numbers

CONTINUED

Editing the Speed Dial Numbers

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

443

SPEED DIAL NUMBER

2009 TL

Rotate the dial to select Store Speed Dial and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say Store Speed Dial. HFL responds Please select the number to register from the list.

Select Cellular Phone screen, then move the interface selector down. Rotate the dial to select Edit Speed Dial and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say Edit speed dial after the beep. HFL responds Please select a method to edit.

Rotate the dial to select a speed dial number and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say the list number of Speed Dial you want to store. HFL responds Would you like to register the Speed Dial from Phonebook or Call history?

2. 3.1.

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)

444

LIST NUMBER

SPEED DIAL NUMBER

2009 TL

The call history only records dialed, received, or missed phone numbers from HFL, not the phone.

Rotate the dial to select Phonebook or Call history and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say Phonebook or Call history. HFL responds Please select the number of the name from the list when Phonebook is selected, and Please select the number of the call from the history list when Call history is selected.

When Phonebook is selected, rotate the dial to select a name from the list, or press the Talk button and say the list number of the phone number you want to store. HFL responds Please select the number of the phone number from the list.

When Call history is selected, rotate the dial to select a phone number or contact name from a list of dialed numbers or received calls, or press the Talk button and say a list number of the contact you want to store.

5.4.

CONTINUED

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

445

NOTE:

LIST NUMBER

LIST NUMBER

2009 TL

When storage of the Speed Dial number is completed, the following screen is displayed.

If you want to record a Voice Tag for the selected speed dial number, rotate the dial to select Yes and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say Yes. See page

.

If any Speed Dial number is set up in Phone Setup, numbers 1 through 4 are displayed in the Cellular Phone screen. If there is a blank, No entry is displayed. You can store a Speed Dial number directly from the Cellular Phone screen.

Rotate the dial to select a blank (No Entry) in the Cellular Phone screen and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say the list number of the Speed Dial you want to store. HFL responds Would you like to register the speed dial from the Phonebook or Call history?

6.

1.

450

Storing the Speed Dial Number in the Cellular Phone Screen

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)

446

2009 TL

Rotate the dial to select Phonebook or Call history and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say Phonebook or Call history. HFL responds Please select the number of the name from the list when Phonebook is selected, and Please select the number of the call from the history list when Call history is selected.

When Phonebook is selected, rotate the dial to select a name from the list, or press the Talk button and say the list number of the phone number you want to store. HFL responds Please select the number of the phone number from the list.

The call history only records dialed, received, or missed phone numbers from HFL, not the phone.

When Call history is selected, rotate the dial to select a phone number or contact name from a list of your dialed numbers or received calls, or press the Talk button and say the number of the name or number you want to store.

2. 3.

CONTINUED

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

447

NOTE:

LIST NUMBER

LIST NUMBER

2009 TL

Deleting Speed Dial Numbers Press the INFO button, rotate the dial to select Cellular Phone, and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say Cellular Phone. HFL responds Which cellular phone item would you like to select?

When storage of the Speed Dial number is completed, the following screen is displayed.

If you want to record a Voice Tag to the stored Speed Dial number, rotate the dial to select Yes and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say Yes. See page .

1. 4.

450

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)

448

2009 TL

Move the interface selector down to select Phone Setup, or press the Talk button and say Phone Setup. Rotate the dial to select Edit Speed Dial and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say Edit Speed Dial. HFL responds Please select a method to edit.

Rotate the dial to select Delete Speed Dial and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say Delete Speed Dial. HFL responds Please select the number from the list to delete.

Rotate the dial to select the entry you want to delete from the list. Press ENTER, and move the interface selector down for OK. You can also press the Talk button, say the list number to delete, and say OK.

2. 3. 4.

CONTINUED

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

449

LIST NUMBER

2009 TL

Storing a Voice Tag Press the INFO button, rotate the dial to select Cellular Phone, and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say Cellular Phone. HFL responds Which cellular phone item would you like to select?

The selected entry will be highlighted and a trash icon will appear next to it. Move the interface selector down, or press the Talk button and say OK to delete the entry.

Move the interface selector down to select Phone Setup, or press the Talk button and say Phone Setup. Rotate the dial to select Edit Speed Dial and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say Edit Speed Dial. HFL responds Please select a method to edit.

5.

1.

2.

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)

450

TRASH ICON

2009 TL

CONTINUED

Rotate the dial to select the entry you want to store a voice tag for, press ENTER, and move the interface selector down for OK. You can also press the Talk button, say the list number of the entry you want to store a voice tag for, and say OK.

Rotate the dial to select Store Voice Tag and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say Store Voice Tag. HFL responds Please select the number of the speed dial to register the voice tag.

The above message will appear. Press the Talk button on the steering wheel and say the voice tag name (for example, Mike)

3. 4. 5.

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

451

ENTRY

LIST NUMBER

2009 TL

HFL will say Do you want to store Voice tag Mike for this number? Rotate the dial to select Yes or No and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say Yes. When you select Yes, the voice tag is stored. You will see the voice tag icon on the Speed Dial entry.

The system will return to step 5 if the voice tag name is not recognized.

If the voice tag name or similar- sounding one is already stored, the message This voice tag already exists. Please say a different name will be displayed.

When the system can recognize the voice tag, the following screen is displayed.

Avoid using duplicate name entries.

Avoid using home as a name entry.

HFL will be able to better recognize multisyllabic name entries (Peter instead of Pete), or a longer name (John Smith instead of John).

Use a consistent, even tone and reduce background noise when storing names, as the HFL voice recognition can be sensitive.

6.

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)

NOTE:

452

NOTE:

2009 TL

Using a Voice Tag Deleting a Voice Tag Press the INFO button, rotate the dial to select Cellular Phone, and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say Cellular Phone. HFL responds Which cellular phone item would you like to select?

Press the Talk button, and say Call and the Voice Tag right after it.

HFL starts dialing the phone number associated with the Voice Tag. HFL Calling screen is displayed. Once connected, you will hear the person you called through the audio speakers.

To end the call, rotate the dial to select Hang-up and press ENTER, or press the Hang-Up button on the steering wheel.

Move the interface selector down to select Phone Setup, or press the Talk button and say Phone Setup. Rotate the dial to select Edit Speed Dial and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say Edit Speed Dial. HFL responds Please select a method to edit.

Press the INFO button, rotate the dial to select Cellular Phone, and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say Cellular Phone. HFL responds Which cellular phone item would you like to select?

2.

1.

3.

4.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

453

2009 TL

Rotate the dial to select the entry that you want to delete the voice tag for and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say the list number of entry to delete.

The selected entry will be highlighted. Move the interface selector down, or press the Talk button and say OK to delete the entrys voice tag.

Rotate the dial to select Delete Voice Tag and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say Delete Voice Tag. HFL responds Please select the number of the voice tag to delete.

5.3. 4.

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)

454

VOICE TAG ICON

LIST NUMBER SELECTED ENTRY

2009 TL

HFL can store up to six phones, with one phonebook for each. The Phonebook allows you to store up to 1,000 names and 10,000 phone numbers. The maximum names and numbers to be stored varies on the data size of each saved item. Once they are stored, you can then automatically dial any name or number in the phonebook.

Your phone may not have this capability. Visit

or call the HandsFreeLink consumer support at 1-888-528-7876. In Canada, visit , or call 1-888-9-ACURA-9. You can see your phones owners manual for information.

Press the INFO button, rotate the dial to select Cellular Phone, and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say Cellular Phone. HFL responds Which cellular phone item would you like to select?

Pair your phone to HFL (see page ).

Once HFL starts importing from the phone, it does not accept phone-related operations until the process is finished.

For safety purposes, only perform this function while the vehicle is stopped.

Hands-free calls are more convenient if you import the phonebook from your phone to HFL.

Move the interface selector down to select the Phone setup screen,

or press the Talk button and say Phone setup. HFL responds Please select the phone setup item.

Rotate the dial to select Import Cellular Phonebook and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say Import Cellular Phonebook. HFL responds Would you like to import Cellular Phonebook?

2.

3.

4.

1. 426www.acura.

com/handsfreelink

www.acura.ca

To Import the Cellular Phonebook

CONTINUED

Setting Up the Cellular Phone Book

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

455

NOTE:

NOTE:

2009 TL

If you are playing Bluetooth Audio, the above screen is displayed. If you want to stop Bluetooth Audio and continue to import the Cellular Phonebook, rotate the dial to select Yes and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say Yes.

The Phonebook data is being imported when the above screen is displayed.

If the import is successful, you will see the above screen. Press ENTER to select OK, and the screen will return to the Cellular Phone.

After returning to the Cellular Phone screen, rotate the dial to select Phonebook and press ENTER. Make sure the phonebook was imported successfully.

5.

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)

456

NOTE:

NOTE:

2009 TL

HFL stores up to 10,000 phone numbers for each paired phone. If you try to import a phonebook with more than 10,000 numbers, or phonebook with no numbers at all, a screen message will notify you that data cannot be imported.

Up to three category icons are displayed in the right side of the list. These category icons indicate how many numbers are stored for the person. If a name has more than three category icons, is displayed. The following category icons will appear:

You may not be able to store the maximum number of names and numbers in some cases.

When you update information in your cell phones phonebook, you will need to repeat the import process.

- - -

CONTINUED

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

457

NOTE:

Home

Mobile

Work

Pager

Fax

Car

Preference

Other

2009 TL

To Delete the Imported Phonebook Press the INFO button, rotate the dial to select Cellular Phone, and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say Cellular Phone. HFL responds Which cellular phone item would you like to select?

Rotate the dial to select Delete Cellular Phonebook and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say Delete Cellular Phonebook. HFL responds This will delete the imported Phonebook for the currently selected phone. Would you like to continue?

Rotate the dial to select Yes and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say Yes.

Move the interface selector down to select the Phone setup screen, or press the Talk button and say Phone setup. HFL responds Please select the phone setup item.

1.

2.

3. 4.

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)

458

2009 TL

When the imported phonebook is deleted, the above screen is displayed.

HFL can store up to six users. Each user has their own Phonebook, Speed Dial, and Call history. You can rename and delete a user name in the Edit User screen. You can also set a 4-digit PIN (password) to protect user information.

Only the phonebook for the selected user will be deleted.

Press the INFO button, rotate the dial to select Cellular Phone, and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say Cellular Phone. HFL responds Which cellular phone item would you like to select?

Move the interface selector down to select the Phone setup screen, or press the Talk button and say Phone setup. HFL responds Please select the phone setup item.

5.

1.

2.

Store a user name

CONTINUED

Setting the User

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

459

2009 TL

Rotate the dial to select Edit User and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say Edit User. HFL responds Please select an edit user item.

Rotate the dial to select Name and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say Name. HFL responds Please select the number of user name to edit from the list.

Rotate the dial to select the phone that you want to create a user name for, press ENTER, and move the interface selector down for OK. You can also press the Talk button, say the list number of the phone you want to create a user name for and say OK.

5.3. 4.

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)

460

LIST NUMBER

2009 TL

Rotate the dial and press ENTER to select the letters. After the new name is entered, move the interface selector down to create the user name.

Rotate the dial to select Edit User and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say Edit User. HFL responds Please select an edit user item.

Press the INFO button, rotate the dial to select Cellular Phone, and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say Cellular Phone. HFL responds Which cellular phone item would you like to select?

Move the interface selector down to select the Phone setup screen, or press the Talk button and say Phone setup. HFL responds Please select the phone setup item.

6.

1.

2.

3.

Delete a user name

CONTINUED

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

461

2009 TL

Rotate the dial to select Delete and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say Delete. HFL responds Please select the number of user name to edit from the list.

Rotate the dial to select the entry that you want to delete the user name for and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say the list number of the entry to delete.

The selected entry will be highlighted. Move the interface selector down, or press the Talk button and say OK, to delete the name.

If you delete the user name, the user name will be No name.

5.4. 6.

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)

462

NOTE:

ENTRYLIST NUMBER SELECTED ENTRY

2009 TL

Rotate the dial to select Edit User and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say Edit User. HFL responds Please select an edit user item.

Rotate the dial to select PIN and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say PIN. HFL responds Please select the number of user to setup from the list.

Press the INFO button, rotate the dial to select Cellular Phone, and press ENTER, or press the Talk button and say Cellular Phone. HFL responds Which cellular phone item would you like to select?

Move the interface selector down to select the Phone setup screen, or press the Talk button and say Phone setup. HFL responds Please select the phone setup item.

2.

3. 4.

1.

To add, change, or remove a PIN (password) from any user

CONTINUED

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

463

2009 TL

Rotate the dial to select the user that you want to set a PIN for, press ENTER, and move the interface selector down for OK. You can also press the Talk button, say the list number of the user you want to set a PIN for, and say the number, then OK. HFL responds Please say your 4-digit PIN.

If the user you selected has already set a PIN, the Enter password screen will be displayed. Enter the PIN which is already set.

You will need to re-enter the same 4 digits for confirmation. Move the interface selector down when you are done.

Rotate the dial and press ENTER to select 4 digits to set as the PIN. Move the interface selector down when you are done.

5.

6.

7.

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)

464

NOTE: LIST NUMBER

2009 TL

If you choose not to use a PIN, move the interface selector down in step 6 to select DO NOT USE PIN without entering the 4- digit password.

You can change a user in the Cellular Phone screen. To select a user, move the interface selector right or left.

If you switch to a user with a PIN, the Speed Dial list on the right side of the screen will not appear until the PIN is entered. When you select Call history, Phone Book, Dial, or More Speed Dial, the Enter PIN screen will be displayed. Enter the password.

Changing a User

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system) F

eatures

465

NOTE:

SPEED DIAL LIST

USER

2009 TL

As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

U.S. models only

While you are listening to the Bluetooth audio, pause the system to operate HFL.

In addition, you cannot use HFL while using AcuraLink.

HFL Limitations

Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (Models with navigation system)

466

2009 TL

Most AcuraLink functions are controlled by the interface dial. The interface dial has two parts, a knob and a selector.

The knob turns left and right. Use it to make selections or adjustments to a list or menu on the screen.

The selector can be pushed left, right, up, down, and in. Use the selector to scroll through lists, to select menus, and to highlight menu items. When you make a selection, push the center of the selector (ENTER) to go to that selection.

AcuraLink enhances your ownership experience by providing a direct communication link between your vehicle and the Acura Server. Working through the XM radio satellite, AcuraLink works in conjunction with the navigation system, Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL), and audio system in your vehicle. It displays and receives several kinds of messages, including:

Operating tips and information on your vehicles features.

Important recall and safety information.

Maintenance information to keep your vehicle in top condition.

Diagnostic information to provide information about any problems with your vehicle.

Interface Dial

AcuraLink (U.S. models only)

On models with navigation system

F eatures

467

SELECTOR

CANCEL BUTTON

INTERFACE DIAL

ENTER

KNOB

2009 TL

A list of all messages will be shown. New messages will be at the top. Select the message you want to read by pressing ENTER.

To view previously read messages:

Press the INFO button. The information screen will be shown.

A red exclamation will be marked on an envelope icon with an important message.

If you have new messages, an envelope icon appears in the lower left hand part of the navigation screen.

To open a message: Press ENTER on the interface selector, then select New Message from the navigation system map menu.

Reading Messages

AcuraLink (U.S. models only)

468

2009 TL

Unread messages have a closed envelope icon next to them. The icon disappears when it has already been read.

Only Diagnostic Info messages appear on the navigation screen while driving. They indicate if your vehicle has a problem that may need immediate attention (see page

).

After purchasing your vehicle, messages may not appear immediately. Your dealer has to register the vehicle identification before you can receive messages. This can take several days to process.

Select Messages, then select a message category by pressing ENTER. Select the message you want to read and press ENTER.

When you open a message, you can read a summary of it, and then choose one of several options. If an option is not available for a message, that option will not be highlighted.

478

CONTINUED

Message Options

AcuraLink (U.S. models only) F

eatures

469

NOTE:

2009 TL

Select this option to delete the current message.

Select this option to hear a voice read the entire message. This gives you more information than the screen can display at one time. When you select the Voice option, it changes to a Stop Reading option. Select the option again to stop the voice.

Select this option to call a phone number embedded in the message. When you select , the Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL) dials the number for you.

Select this option to get more information about the current diagnostic message. To use this option, your cellphone must be paired with the HFL. In addition, the paired phone must have a compatible data service and be set up with the AcuraLink system to make a data connection. Access the handsfreelink.com website to find out which data services are currently compatible with AcuraLink.

To set your AcuraLink preferences (the types of messages you want to receive, if any), visit the My Acura website at , and choose what you would like to receive. If you do not have internet access, call Acura Client Services at (800) 382-2238; they can set your message preferences for you.

To make a call, your Bluetooth compatible phone must be paired to the vehicles HandsFreeLink system, powered on, and located within the vehicle (see page ).

Select this option to find the nearest Acura dealer using the navigation system.

Select this option to call the Acura dealer you purchased your vehicle from. AcuraLink also directs you to this dealer so you can schedule a maintenance appointment or receive information about a message. If your assigned servicing dealer changes, AcuraLink will reset to call that dealer.

426

www.owners.acura.com

Delete

Voice

Call

Call

Diagnostic Info

Message Preferences

Find Nearest Dealer

Call Your Dealer

AcuraLink (U.S. models only)

470

2009 TL

Diagnostic info and recall/ campaign messages can only be deleted by your dealer. To delete a single message:

Press the INFO button to bring up the Information screen.

Scroll to the Messages option, then select it by pressing ENTER on the interface selector.

Select the message category that contains the message you want to delete.

Use the interface knob to scroll up or down to the message title you want to delete, and select it by pressing ENTER on the interface selector.

Scroll to Delete with the interface knob, and select it by pressing ENTER on the interface selector.

To delete all messages:

The Delete All Messages command does not apply to Diagnostic Info and Recall messages. They can only be deleted by your dealer.

Press the SETUP button to view the setup screen.

Use the interface knob to scroll to the AcuraLink/Messages option, and select it by pressing ENTER on the interface selector.

Scroll to the Delete Messages option, and select it by pressing ENTER on the interface selector.

Scroll to the category with the messages you want to delete, and select the category by pressing ENTER on the interface selector.

Select Other by pushing the interface selector to the right.

Deleting Messages

AcuraLink (U.S. models only) F

eatures

471

NOTE: NOTE:

2009 TL

There are six message categories in AcuraLink: Quick Tips, Feature Guide, Maintenance Minder, Recalls/Campaigns, Diagnostic Info, and Scheduled Dealer Appointment. The system can store up to 255 messages.

During the first 90 days of ownership, one of up to 17 different messages appears each day. These messages help you to use and understand the features of your vehicle.

Message categories can be added, revised, or deleted through broadcast messages from Acura.

These messages, based on updated vehicle information and comments from other TL owners, supplement your Owners Manual and Quick Start Guide. They provide you with relevant information for a safe and enjoyable ownership experience. For additional information, call Acura Client Services directly through the HFL.

Feature GuideQuick TipsMessage Categories

AcuraLink (U.S. models only)

472

2009 TL

These messages provide detailed information about the service needed for your vehicle. When a maintenance message appears on the multi-information display, a list of needed maintenance items is provided through an AcuraLink message. These messages tell you the exact maintenance needed, helping you to avoid unnecessary maintenance costs.

You can use the following message options:

Make an appointment from the schedule at the dealer.

Reschedule the appointment with the dealer.

Call your dealer for an appointment.

Find the nearest dealer.

You can make an appointment with your dealer through the AcuraLink when you receive a maintenance minder message.

To use the automated appointment function, you should visit the My Acura website at

, register some required settings, and complete the Phone-Data Connection set-up (see page ). Your Bluetooth compatible phone should also be paired and linked to your vehicles Bluetooth HFL (see page ).

481

426

www.owners.acura.com

CONTINUED

Maintenance Minder Automated Appointment

AcuraLink (U.S. models only) F

eatures

473

2009 TL

The system will automatically connect to the Acura server, then show you an appropriate appointment date and time on the navigation screen. If you accept this appointment, select Confirm Appointment, then press ENTER.

When you see the maintenance minder message on the multi- information display, you will also receive a message in the navigation screen. Select AcuraLink/ Messages on the Setup screen, then press ENTER.

Select the received message, then press ENTER. You will see the message as shown. To make an appointment, select Schedule Dealer Appt. then press ENTER.

AcuraLink (U.S. models only)

474

2009 TL

CONTINUED

You will see the screen to reschedule as shown. To make an appointment, select Reschedule Appointment, then press ENTER.

The system will automatically connect to the Acura server, then show you a new appointment date and time on the navigation screen. If you accept this appointment, select Confirm Appointment, then press ENTER.

The confirmation message will be displayed on the screen. Make sure to confirm the appointment date, time and dealer. If it is OK, press ENTER.

If you want to change or reschedule the appointment date, select Cancel, then press ENTER.

Select AcuraLink/Messages on the Setup screen, then press ENTER. Select Scheduled Dealer Appointment, then press ENTER.

AcuraLink (U.S. models only)

To reschedule the appointment: Scheduled Dealer Appointment

F eatures

475

2009 TL

The system will request you to confirm the cancel on the navigation screen. To cancel the appointment, select YES, then press ENTER. If you select NO, the screen goes back to the previous message display.

The system will automatically connect to the Acura server, then show you the confirmation on the navigation screen. If you accept the cancel, press ENTER.

Select AcuraLink/Messages on the Setup screen, then press ENTER. Select the appointment message then press ENTER. You will see the screen to cancel as shown. To cancel the appointment, select Cancel Appointment, then press ENTER.

To cancel the appointment:

AcuraLink (U.S. models only)

476

2009 TL

CONTINUED

If you select the cancel appointment, you cannot try to reschedule the appointment. If you want to change or reschedule the appointment date, call your dealer directly with the HFL.

Using automated appointment, your registered dealer through My Acura is automatically selected. If you want to select another dealer, such as in case of an emergency, find the nearest dealer and call the dealer directly with the HFL.

When a maintenance appointment is due soon, you will also receive an appointment reminder message.

If your vehicle is affected by a recall or other important safety information, a letter will be mailed to you about the issue and how to fix it. If you dont get your vehicle fixed, you will also receive a reminder message through AcuraLink. You can then use the message options to call your dealer for an appointment or to find the nearest dealer.

Recall/Campaigns

AcuraLink (U.S. models only) F

eatures

477

2009 TL

When any indicator comes on or a message is displayed on the MID, AcuraLink immediately notifies you with the message, An indicator is on. AcuraLink can help you decide what to do.

When an indicator comes on or a message is displayed on the Multi- Information Display (MID), AcuraLink can provide information about the cause of the indicator or message and the recommended action to address it. This helps you handle the problem as it occurs, preventing or limiting costly repairs.

The AcuraLink system cannot determine some mechanical problems (such as squeaks or rattles) that are not triggered by the diagnostic indicator monitors.

For more information on the instrument panel indicators, see page

.

For this reason, it is important that we retain your current phone number. Please update your information using My Acura at

If you do not want the information right away, select the Check Later option.

64

www.owners.acura.com.

Diagnostic Info

AcuraLink (U.S. models only)

478

2009 TL

If you want the information now, select the Check Now option. (If the navigation screen is not active, you must select OK from the navigation disclaimer screen before you can check the information.)

Depending on the severity of the problem, the message will let you know if you should see your dealer immediately or if you can wait until a later date.

You can then use the message options to call your dealer for an appointment or to find the nearest dealer.

When viewing a diagnostic info message through the INFO menu, you can use the Diagnostic Info option to connect to the Acura server and retrieve the latest information regarding the problem.

There may not be any additional information, depending on the time elapsed since the previous time you retrieved the information from the Acura server.

When you make an appointment through My Acuras online Schedule Service Appointment, you can be reminded in advance about that appointment through AcuraLink.

If you need to reschedule or cancel the appointment, see page .475

CONTINUED

AcuraLink (U.S. models only)

Reminder Message

F eatures

479

NOTE:

2009 TL

Select this option to delete all stored messages within a category, except for diagnostic info and recall campaign messages. These messages can only be deleted by a certified technician after the recall is done or the problem is corrected, or through a broadcast message from Acura.

Turning the Automated Appointment preference off will disable appointment notifications in the vehicle based on appointments created or changed at My Acuras online scheduling website.

Appointments can still be created, rescheduled, and canceled from the vehicle; however the appointment information stored in the vehicle will not be updated. Any changes to those appointments should be made from the My Acura website.

To access the following functions, press the SETUP option, push the interface selector to the right to select Other, then rotate the interface knob to select AcuraLink/ Messages.

Delete Messages

AcuraLink/Message Screen

AcuraLink (U.S. models only)

480

2009 TL

For the Phone Data Connection button to be active, you need a Bluetooth compatible and enabled cellphone paired to the Bluetooth HandsFreeLink (HFL). To complete the data connection setup, the paired phone must have a compatible data service.

Select this option to begin the process required to connect to Acura. This is used to access the most recent diagnostic information when a problem occurs.

Select ON if you want to be notified of new messages (envelope icon appears on the navigation screen). Select OFF if you do not want to be notified of new messages (envelope icon does not appear on the screen). Messages can still be accessed using the INFO menu. If you would like to stop receiving messages, visit the My Acura website at

to change your messaging preferences.

Select ON to have the system automatically read each message to you. Select OFF to manually select the Voice option when you want a message read to you.

www.owners. acura.com

CONTINUED

Phone-Data ConnectionNew Message Notification

Auto Reading

AcuraLink (U.S. models only) F

eatures

481

NOTE:

2009 TL

The default setting is prompt. When a diagnostic info message appears, and you select the Check Now option, the system will prompt you before connecting to the Acura server. If you do not wish to connect at that time, select No at the prompt, and you will see the information from the onboard database. The Auto setting will remove the prompt when you select the Check Now option and will automatically connect to the Acura server. This setting only applies when you have a Bluetooth enabled phone that is paired with the HFL and you have completed the Phone-Data Connection setup.

To find more information on Bluetooth compatible and enabled cell phones, visit

or call the HandsFreeLink consumer support at 1-888-528-7876. In Canada, visit , or call 1-888-9- ACURA-9.

www.acura.com/handsfreelink

www.acura.ca

As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

Connect to the Acura Server

AcuraLink (U.S. models only)

482

2009 TL

For the best picture, always keep the rearview camera clean, and do not cover the camera lens. To avoid scratching the lens when you clean it, use a moist, soft cloth.

Whenever you shift to reverse (R) with your vehicle in the ON mode, the rearview is shown on the navigation system screen.

Since the rearview camera display area is limited, you should always back up slowly and carefully, and look behind you for obstacles.

You can adjust the brightness of the rearview camera image by turning the interface dial.

Parking guidelines are also included on the screen.

If the engine has just been started, it may take a short time for them to display.

On models with navigation system

Rearview Camera and Monitor F

eatures

483

REARVIEW CAMERA

The camera brightness cannot be adjusted by voice control.

2009 TL

484

2009 TL

Before you begin driving your vehicle, you should know what gasoline to use and how to check the levels of important fluids. You also need to know how to properly store luggage or packages. The information in this section will help you. If you plan to add any accessories to your vehicle, please read the information in this section first.

.............................Break-in Period . 486 .................Fuel Recommendation . 486

.........Service Station Procedures . 487 ....................................Refueling . 487

.....Tighten Fuel Cap Message . 488 Opening and Closing the

.......................................Hood . 489 ...................................Oil Check . 490

.............Engine Coolant Check . 491 ...............................Fuel Economy . 492

...Accessories and Modifications . 495 .............................Carrying Cargo . 497

Before Driving B

efore D

riving

485

2009 TL

Help assure your vehicles future reliability and performance by paying extra attention to how you drive during the first 600 miles (1,000 km). During this period:

You should also follow these recommendations with an overhauled or exchanged engine, or when the brakes are replaced.

Do not change the oil until the multi-information display indicates it is needed.

Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km).

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid acceleration.

Your vehicle is designed to operate on premium unleaded gasoline with a pump octane of 91 or higher. If this octane grade is unavailable, regular unleaded gasoline with a pump octane of 87 or higher may be used temporarily. The use of regular unleaded gasoline can cause metallic knocking noises in the engine and will result in decreased engine performance. The long-term use of regular-grade gasoline can lead to engine damage.

In addition, in order to maintain good performance, fuel economy, and emissions control, we strongly recommend, in areas where it is available, the use of gasoline that does NOT contain manganese-based fuel additives such as MMT.

Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely affect performance, and cause the malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on. If this happens, contact your dealer for service.

We recommend using quality gasolines containing detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and engine deposits.

Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation

Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation

486

2009 TL

CONTINUED

For further important fuel-related information, please refer to your

.

If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try another service station, or switch to another brand of gasoline.

Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such as ethanol or MTBE. Your vehicle is designed to operate on oxygenated gasoline containing up to 10% ethanol by volume and up to 15% MTBE by volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol.

Park with the drivers side closest to the service station pump.

Open the fuel fill door by pressing the button in the drivers door (to open the fuel fill door manually, see page ).

1.

2.

598

Service Station Procedures

Refueling

Quick Start Guide

B efore

D riving

487

Push

Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. You can be burned or seriously injured when handling fuel.

Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks, and flame away. Handle fuel only outdoors. Wipe up spills immediately.

2009 TL

Remove the fuel fill cap slowly. You may hear a hissing sound as pressure inside the tank escapes. Place the cap in the holder on the fuel fill door.

Stop filling the tank after the fuel nozzle automatically clicks off. Do not try to top off the tank. This leaves some room in the fuel tank for the fuel to expand with temperature changes.

even though the tank is not full, there may be a problem with your vehicles fuel vapor recovery system. The system helps keep fuel vapor from going into the atmosphere. Try filling at another pump. If this does not fix the problem, consult your dealer.

Screw the fuel fill cap back on until it clicks at least once. If you do not properly tighten the cap, you will see a TIGHTEN FUEL CAP message on the multi- information display. If the system still detects an evaporative system leak after retightening the cap, the malfunction indicator lamp may come on (see page ).

Push the fuel fill door closed until it latches.

Your vehicles on board diagnostic system will detect a loose or missing fuel fill cap as an evaporative system leak. The first time a leak is detected a TIGHTEN FUEL CAP message appears on the multi-information display.

3.

4.

5.

6.

596

If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off

Service Station Procedures

Tighten Fuel Cap Message

488

TETHER

FUEL FILL CAP

HOLDER

2009 TL

Turn the engine off, and confirm the fuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosen it, then retighten it until it clicks at least once. The message should go off after several days of normal driving once you tighten or replace the fuel fill cap. To scroll to another message, press the INFO button.

If the system still detects a leak in your vehicles evaporative emissions system, the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fill cap was not already tightened, turn the engine off, and check or retighten the fuel fill cap until it clicks at least once. The MIL should go off after several days of normal driving once the cap is tightened or replaced. If the MIL does not go off, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer. For more information, see page .

Park the vehicle, and set the parking brake. Pull the hood release handle located under the lower left corner of the dashboard. The hood will pop up slightly.

Put your fingers between the front edge of the hood and the front grille to locate the hood latch handle. Push this handle up until it releases the hood. Lift the hood.

The TIGHTEN FUEL CAP message will appear each time you restart the engine until the system turns the message off.

1.

2.

596

CONTINUED

Service Station Procedure

Opening and Closing the Hood

B efore

D riving

489

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

2009 TL

Lift the hood up most of the way. The hydraulic supports will lift it up the rest of the way and hold it up.

To close the hood, lower it to about a foot (30 cm) above the fender, then press down firmly with your hands. Make sure the hood is securely latched.

Park the vehicle on a level surface.

Insert the dipstick all the way back into its hole.

Wipe off the dipstick with a clean cloth or paper towel.

Remove the dipstick (orange loop).

Wait a few minutes after turning the engine off before you check the oil.

If the hood latch handle moves stiffly, or if you can open the hood without lifting the handle, the mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated.

3. 1.

3.

2.

Service Station Procedures

Oil Check

490

LATCH

DIPSTICK

2009 TL

Remove the dipstick again, and check the level. It should be between the upper and lower marks.

If it is near or below the lower mark, see on page .

See page for the engine coolant location.

Look at the coolant level in the radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is between the MAX and MIN lines. If it is below the MIN line, see

on page for information on adding the proper coolant.

Refer to on page for information

about checking other items on your vehicle.

To access the radiator reserve tank, remove the right-side engine compartment cover (see page ).

4.

547

545

550

543

546

Service Station Procedures

Adding Engine Oil

Engine Coolant Check

Adding Engine Coolant

Owners Maintenance Checks B

efore D

riving

491

RESERVE TANK MAX

MIN

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

2009 TL

Fuel economy is not a fixed number. It varies based on driving conditions, driving habits and vehicle condition. Therefore, it is not possible for one set of estimates to predict fuel economy precisely for all drivers in all environments.

Provides an estimated annual fuel cost, based on 15,000 miles (20,000 km) per year multiplied by the cost per gallon (based on EPA fuel cost data) divided by the combined fuel economy.

For more information on fuel economy ratings and factors that affect fuel economy, visit

(Canada: Visit )

Represents urban driving in a vehicle in light traffic. A range of miles per gallon achieved is also provided.

The EPA fuel economy estimates shown in the example to the right are a useful tool for comparison when buying a vehicle. EPA estimates include:

Represents a combination of city and highway driving. The scale represents the range of combined fuel economy for other vehicles in the class.

Represents a mixture of rural and interstate driving, in a warmed-up vehicle, typical of longer trips in free-flowing traffic. A range of miles per gallon

achieved is also provided.

www. fueleconomy.gov www. vehicles.gc.ca

Actual Mileage and EPA Fuel Economy Estimates Comparison.

Estimated Annual Fuel Cost

City MPG Combined Fuel Economy

Highway MPG

Fuel Economy

492

Combined Fuel Economy

(Sample U.S. EPA label shown)

Estimated Annual Fuel Cost

City MPG Highway MPG

2009 TL

Aggressive driving (hard acceleration and braking) Excessive idling, accelerating and braking in stop-and-go traffic Cold engine operation (engines are more efficient when warmed up) Driving with a heavy load or the air conditioner running Improperly inflated tires

The following factors can lower your vehicles fuel economy:

A properly maintained vehicle maximizes fuel economy. Poor maintenance can significantly reduce fuel economy. Always maintain your vehicle according to the maintenance messages displayed on the information display (see

on page ). For example:

Rapid acceleration, abrupt cornering, and hard braking increase fuel consumption.

Aerodynamic drag has a big effect on fuel economy at speeds above 45 mph (75 km/h). Reduce your speed and you reduce the drag. Trailers, car top carriers, roof racks and bike racks are also big contributors to increased drag.

If your vehicle has a manual transmission, you can boost your fuel economy by up shifting as early as possible.

Idling results in 0 miles per gallon (0 kms per liter).

It puts a heavier load on the engine, increasing fuel consumption.

In particular, a build-up of snow or mud on your vehicles underside adds weight and rolling resistance. Frequent cleaning helps your fuel economy.

An underinflated tire increases rolling resistance, which reduces fuel economy.

543 CONTINUED

Fuel Economy Factors Use the recommended viscosity motor oil, displaying the API Certif ication Seal (see page

).

Improving Fuel Economy

Owners Maintenance Checks

Drive moderately

Observe the speed limit

Always drive in the highest gear possible

Avoid excessive idling

Avoid carrying excess weight in your vehicle

Keep your vehicle clean

Maintain proper tire inflation

547

Vehicle Maintenance

Drive Efficiently

Fuel Economy B

efore D

riving

493

2009 TL

Fill the fuel tank until the nozzle automatically clicks off. Reset trip counter to zero. Record the total gallons (liters) needed to refill. Follow one of the simple calculations above.

The A/C puts an extra load on the engine which makes it use more fuel. Use the fresh-air ventilation when possible.

Combine several short trips into one. A warmed-up engine is more fuel efficient than a cold one.

Direct calculation is the recommended source of information about your actual fuel economy. Using frequency of fill-ups or taking fuel gauge readings are NOT accurate measures of fuel economy. Fuel economy may improve over the first several thousand miles.

1) 2) 3) 4)

Checking Your Fuel Economy

Measuring Techniques

Minimize the use of the air conditioning system

Plan and combine trips

Calculating Fuel Economy

Fuel Economy

494

Miles per Gallon

100 Kilometers

Gallons of fuel

Miles driven

Liter L per 100 km

2009 TL

Modifying your vehicle, or installing some non-Acura accessories, can make it unsafe. Before you make any modifications or add any accessories, be sure to read the following information.

Your dealer has Acura accessories that allow you to personalize your vehicle. These accessories have been designed and approved for your vehicle, and are covered by warranty.

Before installing any accessory: Make sure the accessory does not obscure any lights, or interfere with proper vehicle operation or performance.

Although non-Acura accessories may fit on your vehicle, they may not meet factory specifications, and could adversely affect your vehicles handling and stability.

Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact your dealer for assistance. If possible, have your dealer inspect the final installation.

Do not install accessories on the side pillars or across the rear windows. Accessories installed in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the side curtain airbags.

Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits (see page ) or interfere with proper operation of your vehicle.

When properly installed, cellular phones, alarms, two-way radios, and low-powered audio systems should not interfere with your vehicles computer controlled systems, such as your airbags, anti-lock brakes, and tire pressure monitoring system.

599 Accessories

Accessories and Modifications B

efore D

riving

495

Improper accessories or modifications can affect your vehicles handling, stability, and performance, and cause a crash in which you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in this owners manual regarding accessories and modifications.

2009 TL

Some examples are:

Larger or smaller wheels and tires can interfere with the operation of your vehicles anti-lock brakes and other systems.

Removing parts from your vehicle, or replacing components with non- Acura components could seriously affect your vehicles handling, stability, and reliability.

Lowering your vehicle with a non-Acura suspension kit that significantly reduces ground clearance can allow the undercarriage to hit speed bumps or other raised objects, which could cause the airbags to deploy.

Raising your vehicle with a non- Acura suspension kit can affect the handling and stability.

Modifying your steering wheel or any other part of your vehicles safety features can make the systems ineffective.

If you plan to modify your vehicle, consult your dealer.

Non-Acura wheels, can cause excessive stress on suspension components and may not be compatible with the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS).

Modifying Your Vehicle

Accessories and Modifications

496

2009 TL

Your vehicle has several convenient storage areas:

Glove box Door and seat-back pockets

Trunk Console compartment Center and side pockets

In addition, the trunk pass-through allows you to carry longer items. However, carrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicles handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe. Before carrying any type of cargo, be sure to read the following pages.

Carrying Cargo B

efore D

riving

497

TRUNK

SEAT-BACK POCKETS

CENTER POCKET

GLOVE BOX

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

DOOR POCKETS

SIDE POCKET

2009 TL

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit

Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs. on your vehicles placard.

Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the XXX amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400 750 (5 150) = 650 lbs.)

Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

The maximum load for your vehicle is 850 lbs (385 kg) for U.S. models and 395 kg for Canadian models.

This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and accessories, and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer.

Label Example

See Tire And Loading Information label attached to the drivers doorjamb.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

Load Limits

Carrying Cargo

498

Overloading or improper loading can affect handling and stability and cause a crash in which you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and other loading guidelines in this manual.

2009 TL

In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the drivers doorjamb.

Store or secure all items that could be thrown around and hurt someone during a crash.

Do not put any items on top of the trunk panel. They can block your view and be thrown around the vehicle during a crash.

Example 1

Example 2

Example 3

CONTINUED

Carrying Cargo in the Passenger Compartment

Carrying Cargo B

efore D

riving

499

Max Load (850 lbs) Cargo Weight (550 lbs)

Max Load (850 lbs)

Max Load (850 lbs)

Cargo Weight (250 lbs)

Cargo Weight (100 lbs)

Passenger Weight (150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs)

Passenger Weight (150 lbs x 4 = 600 lbs)

Passenger Weight (150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs)

2009 TL

Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll underneath and interfere with the proper operation of the seats, the sensors under the seats, or the drivers ability to operate the pedals.

Also, keep all cargo below the bottom of the windows. If it is higher, it could interfere with the proper operation of the side curtain airbags.

Keep the glove box closed while driving. If it is open, a passenger could injure their knees during a crash or sudden stop.

Cargo hook buttons in the trunk can be used to install a net for securing items.

The cargo net can be used to help hold down items stored in the trunk.

Distribute cargo evenly on the floor of the trunk, placing the heaviest items on the bottom and as far forward as possible.

If you carry large items that prevent you from closing the trunk lid, exhaust gas can enter the passenger area. To avoid the possibility of

, follow the instructions on page .57

If equipped Cargo Nets

Carrying Cargo in the Trunk Cargo Hook Buttons

carbon monoxide poisoning

Carrying Cargo

500

CARGO HOOK BUTTON

2009 TL

This section gives you tips on starting the engine under various conditions, and how to operate the automatic transmission. It also includes important information on parking your vehicle, the braking system, the Super Handling-All Wheel Drive (SH-AWD ) system, vehicle stability assist (VSA ), aka electronic stability control (ESC), system and the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS).

........................Preparing to Drive . 502 Starting the Engine

(Models without Keyless .....................Access System) . 503

Starting the Engine (Models with Keyless

.....................Access System) . 505 ..............Automatic Transmission . 507

Driving with the Paddle .......................................Shifters . 512

Super Handling-All Wheel ...Drive (SH-AWD ) System . 517

...........................................Parking . 519 .............................Braking System . 520

...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 521 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ),

aka Electronic Stability ........Control (ESC), System . 523

Tire Pressure Monitoring ........................System (TPMS) . 526

...........................Towing a Trailer . 531 ...................Towing Your Vehicle . 531

Driving D

riving

501

TM

TM

2009 TL

Make sure all windows, mirrors, and outside lights are clean and unobstructed. Remove frost, snow, or ice.

Check the seat adjustment (see page ).

Check the adjustment of the inside and outside mirrors (see page ).

Check the steering wheel adjustment (see page ).

Make sure the doors are securely closed and locked.

Fasten your seat belt. Check that your passengers have fastened their seat belts (see page ).

When you start the engine, check the gauges and indicators in the instrument panel, and the messages on the multi-information display (see pages , and

).

You should do these checks and adjustments before you drive your vehicle:

Check that the hood is fully closed.

Check that the trunk is fully closed.

Visually check the tires. If a tire looks low, use a gauge to check its pressure.

Check that any items you may be carrying are stored properly or fastened down securely.

3.

2.

1. 7.

8.

9.

4.

5.

6. 155

63 75 77

16

161

140

10.

11.

Preparing to Drive

502

2009 TL

Your vehicles starting system has an auto control mode. When you turn the ignition switch to the START (III) position, this feature keeps the engines starter motor running until the engine starts. Follow these instructions to start the engine:

If the engine does not start within 15 seconds, or starts but stalls right away, repeat step 4 with the accelerator pedal pressed halfway down. If the engine starts, release pressure on the accelerator pedal so the engine does not race.

If the engine fails to start, press the accelerator pedal all the way down, and hold it there while starting to clear flooding. If the engine still does not start, return to step 5.

Without touching the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition switch to the START (III) position, then release the ignition switch. You do not need to hold the ignition switch in the START (III) position to start the engine. Depending on the outside temperature, the starter motor runs for about 6 to 9

seconds until the engine starts.

Make sure the shift lever is in Park. Press on the brake pedal.

In cold weather, turn off all electrical accessories to reduce the drain on the battery.

Apply the parking brake. If the engine does not start, wait at least 10 seconds before trying again.

If you hold the ignition switch in the START (III) position for more than 7 seconds, the starter motor, depending on the outside temperature, runs for about 10 to 25 seconds until the engine starts.

6.1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Starting the Engine (Models without Keyless Access System) D

riving

503

The engine is harder to start in cold weather. Also, the thinner air f ound at altitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400 meters) adds to this problem.

The immobilizer system protects your vehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly coded key (or other device) is used, the engines f uel system is disabled. For more inf ormation, see page .143

2009 TL

If there is a problem with the starting system, you will see a CHECK STARTING SYSTEM message on the multi-information display when the ignition switch is turned to the ON (II) position. You will also see this message when the auto control mode of the starting system has a problem.

If this message is on, the ignition switch has to be held in the START (III) position manually until the engine starts. The ignition switch can be held in that position up to 15 seconds.

Even though you may be able to start the engine manually without the auto control mode of the starting system, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

Check Starting System Message

Starting the Engine (Models without Keyless Access System)

504

2009 TL

Your vehicles starting system has an auto control mode. When you have your keyless access remote and push the engine start/stop button while depressing the brake pedal, this feature keeps the engines starter motor running until the engine starts. Follow these instructions to start the engine:

Make sure the shift lever is in Park. Press on the brake pedal.

In cold weather, turn off all electrical accessories to reduce the drain on the battery.

Apply the parking brake.

If the engine does not start, wait at least 10 seconds before trying again.

If you hold the engine start/stop button for more than 7 seconds, the starter motor, depending on the outside temperature, runs for about 10 to 25 seconds until the engine starts.

Without touching the accelerator pedal, push and release the engine start/stop button. You do not need to hold the engine start/stop button to start the engine. Depending on the outside temperature, the starter motor runs for about 6 to 9 seconds until the engine starts.

The keyless access remote system main switch is off.

The keyless access remote battery becomes weak or dead.

If the engine fails to start, press the accelerator pedal all the way down, and hold it there while starting to clear flooding. If the engine still does not start, return to step 5.

If the engine does not start within 15 seconds, or starts but stalls right away, repeat step 4 with the accelerator pedal pressed halfway down. If the engine starts, release pressure on the accelerator pedal so the engine does not race.

In either of the following cases, you should insert the keyless access remote into the keyless remote slot. For more information, see pages

and .

6.

1.

2.

3.

5.

4.

186 187

CONTINUED

Starting the Engine (Models with Keyless Access System) D

riving

505

The immobilizer system protects your vehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly coded keyless access remote (or other device) is used, the engines f uel system is disabled. For more inf ormation, see page .143

2009 TL

If there is a problem with the starting system, you will see a CHECK STARTING SYSTEM message on the multi-information display with the power mode ON.

You will also see this message when the auto control mode of the starting system has a problem.

If this message is on, you should press and hold the engine start/stop button until the engine starts. The engine start/stop button can be pressed up to 15 seconds.

Even though you may be able to start the engine manually without the auto control mode of the starting system, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

Your vehicle has the engine start/ stop button instead of an ignition switch to select the power mode. For more information, see page .

If you cannot start the engine using the normal engine start procedure, do the following:

Set the parking brake.

Put the shift lever into Park.

Press the engine start/stop button to turn on the ACCESSORY mode.

Press and hold the engine start/ stop button for about 15 seconds while pressing the brake pedal.

Do not follow this procedure unless it is a case of emergency. Even if you can start the engine using this method, the system may have a malfunction. Contact your dealer as soon as possible.

178

1.

2.

3.

4.

Starting the Engine (Models with Keyless Access System)

Check Starting System Message

Emergency Engine Start

506

The engine is harder to start in cold weather. Also, the thinner air f ound at altitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400 meters) adds to this problem.

2009 TL

CONTINUED

These indicators between the tachometer and speedometer show which position the shift lever is in.

Using a paddle shift mode, the gear position indicator shows you the selected gear number (see page

).

The D indicator comes on for a few seconds when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position. If it flashes while driving (in any shift position), it indicates a possible problem in the transmission.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on along with the D indicator, there is a problem with the automatic transmission control system. Avoid rapid acceleration and have the transmission checked by your dealer as soon as possible.

When the D indicator warns of a possible problem with the transmission, you will see a CHECK TRANSMISSION message on the multi-information display.

512

:

180178

Shift Lever Position Indicators

Automatic Transmission D

riving

507

GEAR POSITION INDICATOR on PADDLE SHIFT MODE

2009 TL

This position mechani- cally locks the transmission. Use Park whenever you are turning off or starting the engine. To shift out of Park, you must press on the brake pedal and have your foot off the accelerator pedal. Press the release button on the front of the shift lever to move it.

To shift from Park to any position, press firmly on the brake pedal, and press the release button on the front of the shift lever, then move the lever. You cannot shift out of Park when the ignition switch is in the LOCK (0) or ACCESSORY (I) position.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) Mode is the equivalent of LOCK (0) and ACCESSORY Mode is the equivalent of ACCESSORY (I). For more information, see pages

and .178 180

: Do this: Press the brake pedal and press the shift lever release button. Press the shift lever release button.

Move the shift lever.

To shift from:

P to R

R to P N to R D to S S to D D to N N to D R to N

Shifting

Park (P)

Automatic Transmission

508

RELEASE BUTTON

2009 TL

If you have done all of the above and still cannot move the lever out of Park, see on page .

Press the brake pedal and press the release button on the front of the shift lever to shift from Park to reverse. To shift from reverse to neutral, come to a complete stop, and then shift. Press the release button before shifting into reverse from neutral.

Use neutral if you need to restart a stalled engine, or if it is necessary to stop briefly with the engine idling. Shift to the Park position if you need to leave your vehicle for any reason. Press on the brake pedal when you are moving the shift lever from neutral to another gear.

Use this position for your normal driving. The transmission automatically selects a suitable gear (1 through 5) for your speed and acceleration. You may notice the transmission shifting up at higher engine speeds when the engine is cold. This helps the engine warm up faster.

You must also press the release button to shift into Park. To avoid transmission damage, come to a complete stop before shifting into Park.

The shift lever must be in Park before you can remove the key from the ignition switch.

The shift lever must be in Park before you change the power mode from ON to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK).

510

CONTINUED

On models with keyless access system

On models without keyless access system

Automatic Transmission

Shift Lock Release

Reverse (R)

Neutral (N)

Drive (D)

D riving

509

2009 TL

To shift into the S position, press the release button on the front of the shift lever, and move the lever to S. This position is similar to D, except only gears from first to fourth are selected. The S position keeps the transmission from cycling between fourth and fifth gears in stop-and-go driving.

With the shift lever in D or S, you can also use the paddle shifters to shift the transmission up or down. With the paddle shifters, you can operate the transmission much like a manual transmission without a clutch pedal. For more information on driving with the paddle shifters, see page .

If you exceed the maximum speed for the gear you are in, the engine speed will enter into the tachometers red zone. If this occurs, you may feel the engine cut in and out. This is caused by a limiter in the engines computer controls. The engine will run normally when you reduce the rpm below the red zone.

This allows you to move the shift lever out of Park if the normal method of pushing on the brake pedal and pressing the release button does not work.

Set the parking brake.

Remove the key from the ignition switch.

Remove the built-in key from the keyless access remote (see page

).

1.

2.

514 192

On models without keyless access system

On models with keyless access system

S Position (S) Shift Lock ReleaseEngine Speed Limiter

Automatic Transmission

510

2009 TL

Put a cloth on the edge of the shift lock release slot cover. Use a small flat-tipped screwdriver or metal fingernail file to carefully pry up the edge of the cover and remove it from the slot.

Insert a key or built-in key in the shift lock release slot.

Push down on the key or built-in key while you press the release button on the shift lever and move the shift lever out of Park to neutral.

Remove the key or built-in key from the shift lock release slot, then reinstall the cover. Make sure the notch on the cover is on the rear side. Press the brake pedal, and restart the engine.

If you need to use the shift lock release, it means your vehicle is developing a problem. Have it checked by your dealer.

3.

6.

5.

4.

Automatic Transmission D

riving

511

COVER

SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT

Vehicle without keyless access system is shown.

2009 TL

When you are driving in D position, you can shift the transmission up or down manually with the paddle shifters.

Each time you pull (right), the transmission shifts to a higher gear. Pull (left) to downshift. You will see the selected gear number on the instrument panel.

To shift up or down, use the (right) or (left) paddle shifter on each side of the steering wheel.

Downshifting with the paddle shifter allows you to increase the engine braking when going down steep or long hills, and provides more power when climbing uphills. You can upshift the transmission manually to reduce the rpm. Driving in the higher gear helps fuel economy.

When you pull either paddle shifter, the gear position indicator shows you the selected gear number.

Using the Paddle Shifters in D position (D-Paddle Shift Mode)

Driving with the Paddle Shifters

512

GEAR POSITION INDICATOR

2009 TL

The transmission control system monitors the accelerator pedal use and your driving conditions. When you press the accelerator pedal as in normal driving, the system judges that you are driving at a constant cruising speed without using the paddle shifters. Under these conditions, D-paddle shift mode is canceled, and the transmission automatically returns to drive mode (D).

You upshift before the engine speed rises above the lower limit of the higher gear.

You pull both paddle shifters at the same time.

If there is a problem in the transmission while you are driving with the paddle shifters, the D indicator flashes, the D-paddle shift mode is canceled, and the transmission returns to drive mode (D).

Each time you pull either paddle shifter, the transmission shifts one gear up or down. If you want to shift up or down more than two gears, pull the paddle shifter twice, pause, and then pull it again.

The automatic transmission will not allow you to shift up or down if:

You downshift before the engine speed falls below the upper limit of the lower gear.

If you try to do this, the gear position indicator will flash the number of the lower gear several times, then return to a higher gear.

Hold the paddle shifter for 2 seconds to return to drive mode (D).

When the transmission returns to drive mode (D), the displayed gear number disappears.

The transmission remains in the selected gear if you do not accelerate.

The transmission downshifts to first gear and returns to drive mode (D) when the vehicle comes to a complete stop or the vehicle speed is about 9 mph (15 km/h).

Driving with the Paddle Shifters D

riving

513

2009 TL

When you move the shift lever from D to S position and pull either paddle shifter, the gear position indicator displays M along with the selected gear number.

To upshift, pull the (right) paddle shifter. To downshift, pull the (left) paddle shifter.

When you accelerate from a stop, the transmission starts in first gear, and you must manually upshift between first and fifth gears. Make sure you upshift before the engine speed reaches the tachometers red zone.

With the shift lever in S position, you can manually shift up or down with the paddle shifters. The transmission goes into the sequential shift mode and holds the selected gear.

To enter the sequential shift mode, press the release button on the front of the shift lever, move the lever to the S position, then pull either paddle shifter. To return to drive mode (D), move the shift lever to the D position. While you are driving in the sequential shift mode, the transmission will not automatically return to drive mode (D).

Using the Paddle Shifters in S position (Sequential Shift Mode)

Driving with the Paddle Shifters

514

M INDICATOR

GEAR POSITION INDICATOR

2009 TL

The automatic transmission will not allow you to shift up or down if:

If the vehicle speed decreases below the redline of the selected lower gear while the indicator is flashing, the transmission downshifts, and the indicator displays the selected gear.

You upshift before the engine speed rises above the lower limit of the higher gear.

You pull both paddle shifters at the same time.

You downshift before the engine speed falls below the upper limit of the lower gear.

If you try to do this, the gear position indicator will flash the number of the lower gear several times, then return to a higher gear.

Downshifting with the paddle shifter allows you to increase the engine braking when going down steep or long hills, and provides more power when climbing uphills. You can upshift the transmission manually to reduce the rpm. Driving in the higher gear helps fuel economy.

The transmission also shifts automatically as the vehicle comes to a complete stop. It downshifts to first gear when the vehicle speed reaches 9 mph (15 km/h) or less.

The transmission remains in the selected gear (5, 4, 3, 2, or 1). There is no automatic downshift when you push the accelerator pedal to the floor.

When you are driving in 4th or 5th gear, the transmission downshifts to the lower gear under the following conditions:

The vehicle slows down to a certain speed.

You press the brake pedal.

CONTINUED

Driving with the Paddle Shifters D

riving

515

2009 TL

Here are the speed ranges for upshifting and downshifting.

Speed range

under 130 mph (209 km/h)

under 94 mph (150 km/h)

under 63 mph (100 km/h)

under 37 mph (59 km/h)

Speed range

over 0 mph (0 km/h)

over 9 mph (15 km/h)

over 17 mph (28 km/h)

over 38 mph (60 km/h)

When you are in sequential shift mode, and the vehicle is stopped, pull the (right) paddle shifter to shift to second gear. You will see M2 in the display. Starting in second gear helps to reduce wheelspin in deep snow or on a slippery surface.

To Shift form

1 2

2 3

3 4

4 5

To Shift from

5 4

4 3

3 2

2 1

Driving with the Paddle Shifters

Starting in Second Gear

516

2009 TL

The SH-AWD torque distribution monitor on the multi-information display shows you the amount of torque being sent to the wheels. Each wheel right front (RF), left front (LF), right rear (RR), and left rear (LR) has its own torque indicator.

Each torque indicator is displayed as a bar graph divided into 5 segments. The number of segments represents the amount of torque distributed to each wheel.

When there is only a slight change in torque distribution while driving, such as cruising on level roads at the same speed, the torque distribution monitor may stop displaying the amount of torque. This is not a system problem. The monitor will show the amount if the system senses any change in torque distribution.

While the SH-AWD system helps to enhance the vehicles driving stability in all situations, it is still your responsibility to drive and corner at reasonable speeds and to leave a sufficient margin of safety.

The super handling-all wheel drive (SH-AWD) system is a full time all- wheel-drive system that automatically controls and transfers varying amounts of engine torque to all wheels independently, according to the driving conditions.

If equipped

CONTINUED

SH-AWD Torque Distribution Monitor

Super Handling-All Wheel Drive (SH-AWD ) System D

riving

517

TORQUE INDICATOR

TORQUE INDICATOR

U.S. model is shown.

TM

2009 TL

If the SH-AWD indicator on the instrument panel stays on, and the CHECK SH-AWD SYSTEM message also appears on the multi- information display, there is problem with the SH-AWD system.

Your vehicle still has normal front- wheel drive with vehicle stability assist (VSA), but does not have the advantages of SH-AWD. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

If the SH-AWD indicator blinks while driving, it indicates the differential temperature is too high. You will also see an SH-AWD DIFF TEMP. HIGH message on the multi- information display. If this happens, pull to the side of the road when it is safe, shift to Park, and let the engine idle until the indicator goes out. If the indicator does not go out, take your vehicle to a dealer to have it

checked.

Super Handling-All Wheel Drive (SH-AWD ) System

518

TM

2009 TL

Always use the parking brake when you park your vehicle. Make sure the parking brake is set firmly, or your vehicle may roll if it is parked on an incline.

If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, set the parking brake before you put the transmission in Park. This keeps the vehicle from moving and putting pressure on the parking mechanism in the transmission.

Make sure the moonroof and the windows are closed.

Turn off the lights.

Place any packages, valuables, etc., in the trunk or take them with you.

Lock the doors.

If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn the front wheels away from the curb.

Never park over dry leaves, tall grass, or other flammable materials. The hot three way catalytic converter could cause these materials to catch on fire.

Check the indicator on the instrument panel to verify that the security system is set.

If the vehicle is facing downhill, turn the front wheels toward the curb.

Make sure the parking brake is fully released before driving away. Driving with the parking brake partially set can overheat or damage the rear brakes.

If you are unable to stop the engine normally while in the Park position, see

on page .184

On models with keyless access system

Parking Tips

Emergency Engine Stop

Parking D

riving

519

NOTE:

2009 TL

Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. A power assist helps reduce the effort needed on the brake pedal. The emergency brake assist system increases the stopping force when you depress the brake pedal hard in an emergency situation. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering control when braking very hard.

Resting your foot on the pedal keeps the brakes applied lightly, builds up heat, reduces their effectiveness and reduces brake pad life. In addition, fuel economy can be reduced. It also keeps your brake lights on all the time, confusing drivers behind you.

Constant application of the brakes when going down a long hill builds up heat and reduces their effective- ness. Use the engine to assist the brakes by taking your foot off the accelerator and downshifting to a lower gear.

Check your brakes after driving through deep water. Apply the brakes moderately to see if they feel normal. If not, apply them gently and frequently until they do. Be extra cautious and alert in your driving.

The hydraulic system that operates the brakes has two separate circuits. Each circuit works diagonally across the vehicle (the left-front brake is connected with the right-rear brake, etc.). If one circuit should develop a problem, you will still have braking at two wheels.

If the brake pads need replacing, you will hear a distinctive, metallic screeching sound when you apply the brake pedal. If you do not have the brake pads replaced, they will screech all the time. It is normal for the brakes to occasionally squeal or squeak when you apply them.

All four brakes have audible brake wear indicators.

Brake Wear Indicators

Braking System Design

Braking System

520

2009 TL

The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than a person can do it.

The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading.

Let the ABS work for you by always keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as stomp and steer.

If this indicator comes on, the anti- lock function of the braking system has shut down. The brakes still work like a conventional system, but without anti-lock. You should have your dealer inspect your vehicle as soon as possible.

You will feel a pulsation in the brake pedal when the ABS activates, and you may hear some noise. This is normal: it is the ABS rapidly pumping the brakes. On dry pavement, you will need to press on the brake pedal very hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel the ABS activate immediately if you are trying to stop on snow or ice.

If the ABS indicator comes on while driving, test the brakes as shown on page .

When the ABS indicator comes on, you will also see a CHECK ABS SYSTEM message on the multi- information display.

597

You should never pump the brake pedal.

CONTINUED

ABS Indicator

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) D

riving

521

2009 TL

If the ABS indicator and the brake system indicator come on together, and the parking brake is fully released, the EBD system may also be shut down.

Test your brakes as instructed on page . If the brakes feel normal, drive slowly and have your vehicle repaired by your dealer as soon as possible. Avoid sudden hard braking which could cause the rear wheels to lock up and possibly lead to a loss of control.

The VSA indicator will come on along with the ABS indicator.

such as trying to take a corner too fast or making a sudden lane change. Always drive at a safe speed for the road and weather conditions.

Always steer moderately when you are braking hard. Severe or sharp steering wheel movement can still cause your vehicle to veer into oncoming traffic or off the road.

on loose or uneven surfaces, such as gravel or snow, than a vehicle without anti- lock.

It only helps with the steering control during braking.

597

Important Safety Reminders

ABS will not prevent a skid that results from changing direction abruptly,

ABS cannot prevent a loss of stability.

A vehicle with ABS may require a longer distance to stopABS does not reduce the time or

distance it takes to stop the vehicle.

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

522

2009 TL

The vehicle stability assist (VSA) system helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less than desired. It also assists you in maintaining traction while accelerating on loose or slippery road surfaces. It does this by regulating the engines output, and by selectively applying the brakes.

When VSA activates, you may notice that the engine does not respond to the accelerator in the same way it does at other times. There may also be some noise from the VSA hydraulic system. You will also see the VSA activation indicator blink.

The VSA system cannot enhance the vehicles driving stability in all situations and does not control your vehicles entire braking system. It is still your responsibility to drive and corner at reasonable speeds and to leave a sufficient margin of safety.

When VSA activates, you will see the VSA activation indicator blink.

If this indicator comes on while driving, pull to the side of the road when it is safe, and turn off the engine. Reset the system by restarting the engine. If the VSA system indicator stays on or comes back on while driving, have the VSA system inspected by your dealer.

If the indicator does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON (II) position, there may be a problem with the VSA system. Have your dealer inspect your vehicle as soon as possible.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead

of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

When the VSA system indicator comes on, you will also see a CHECK VSA SYSTEM message on the multi-information display.

The main function of the VSA system is generally known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The system also includes a traction control function.

With the VSA system indicator on, you may not be able to stop the engine even if you park the vehicle safely. To stop the engine, see

on page .

: 184

178 180

CONTINUED

On models with keyless access system

VSA Activation Indicator

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System Indicator

Emergency Engine Stop

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System D

riving

523

NOTE:

2009 TL

VSA is turned on every time you start the engine, even if you turned it off the last time you drove the vehicle.

In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier to free it with the VSA temporarily switched off. When the VSA system is off, the traction control system is also off. You should only attempt to free your vehicle with the VSA off if you are not able to free it when the VSA is on.

Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to switch the VSA on again. We do not recommend driving your vehicle with the VSA and traction control systems switched off.

This switch is under the drivers side vent. To turn the VSA system on and off, press and hold it until you hear a beep.

When VSA is off, the VSA activation indicator comes on as a reminder. Press and hold the switch again. It turns the system back on.

If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on (see page ), or the multi-information display shows a CHECK TPMS SYSTEM message with the indicator flashing (see page ), the VSA system automatically turns on even if the VSA system is turned off with the VSA OFF switch. In this case, you cannot turn the VSA system off by pressing the VSA OFF switch again.

Without VSA, your vehicle will have normal braking and cornering ability, but it will not have VSA traction and stability enhancement.

526

529

VSA OFF Switch

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

524

VSA OFF SWITCH

2009 TL

If you install winter tires, make sure they are the same size as those that were originally supplied with your vehicle. Exercise the same caution during winter driving as you would if your vehicle was not equipped with VSA.

Driving with varying tire or wheel sizes may cause the VSA to malfunction. When replacing tires, make sure they are of the same size and type as your original tires (see page ).

Hill start assist may not prevent your vehicle from rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope.

This feature starts operating a few seconds after you are in any drive gear position (when faced uphill) or in reverse (when faced downhill). This feature requires that the vehicle has come to a complete stop before it can work.

Your vehicle is equipped with a hill start assist feature to help prevent the vehicle from rolling on steep inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.575

On models with SH-AWD VSA and Tire Sizes Hill Start Assist

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System D

riving

525

2009 TL

Your vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that turns on every time you start the engine and monitors the pressure in your tires while driving.

If you think you can safely drive a short distance to a service station, proceed slowly to the station, then inflate the tire to the recommended pressure shown on the drivers doorjamb.

If the tire is flat, or if the tire pressure is too low to continue driving, replace the tire with the compact spare tire (see page ).

Driving on a significantly under- inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicles handling and stopping ability.

Because tire pressure varies by temperature and other conditions, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on unexpectedly.

When the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator is on, one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicles tire information placard.

Each tire has its own pressure sensor. If the air pressure of a tire becomes significantly low, the sensor in that tire immediately sends a signal that causes the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator in the instrument panel to come on. If this happens, you will see which tire is losing pressure on the multi- information display along with a CHECK TIRE PRESSURE message.

It is possible that the pressures shown on the multi-information display and the pressures you manually measure are slightly different.

If the difference is significant or you cannot make the low tire pressure/ TPMS indicator and message on the multi-information display go out after inflating the tires to the specified values, have your dealer check the system as soon as possible.

583

Low Tire Pressure/ TPMS Indicator

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

526

2009 TL

Although your tire pressure is monitored, you must manually check the tire pressures monthly.

Each tire, including the spare, should be checked monthly when the vehicle is cold, and set to the recommended inflation pressure as specified on the vehicle placard and in the owners manual (see page

).

For example, if you check and fill your tires in a warm area, then drive in extremely cold weather, the tire pressure will be lower than measured and could be underinflated and cause the low tire pressure/ TPMS indicator to come on. Or, if you check and adjust your tire pressure in cooler conditions, and drive into extremely hot conditions, the tire may become overinflated. However, the low tire pressure/ TPMS indicator will not come on if the tires are overinflated.

Refer to page for tire inflation guidelines.

If there is a problem with the TPMS, this indicator begins to flash. It stops flashing after approximately 1 minute, then stays on. You will also see a CHECK TPMS SYSTEM message on the multi-information display (see page ).

To select the tire pressure monitor, press the INFO button several times with the ignition switch in the ON (II) position or with the power mode ON.

You will see the above display on the multi-information display when each tire pressure is normal.

568

570

529 CONTINUED

Tire Pressure Monitor

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) D

riving

527

U.S. model

2009 TL

Each tire pressure is shown in PSI (U.S. models) or in kPa (Canadian models).

If any of the tires has low pressure, the tire pressure monitor also shows the above message and each tire pressure to warn you about the low tire pressure when you select the display by pressing the INFO button several times.

Each tire has its own pressure sensor. If the air pressure of a tire becomes significantly low, the sensor in that tire immediately sends a signal that causes the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator in the instrument panel to come on. If this happens, you will see which tire is losing pressure on the multi- information display along with a CHECK TIRE PRESSURE message.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

:

180178

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

528

Canadian model U.S. model Canadian model

2009 TL

If there is a problem with the TPMS, the tire pressure monitor shows a TPMS ERROR message and the tire pressure readings are not displayed. If this happens, you will first see a system warning message CHECK TPMS SYSTEM on the multi-information display.

If there is a problem with the TPMS, you will see the above message on the multi-information display.

Also, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator begins to flash, then stays on (see page ).

If you see this message, the system is off and is not monitoring the tire pressures. Have the system checked by your dealer as soon as possible.

If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on, or the multi- information display shows a CHECK TPMS SYSTEM message, the VSA system automatically turns on even when the VSA system is turned off by pressing the VSA OFF switch (see page ). If this happens, you cannot turn the VSA system off by pressing the VSA OFF switch again.

When you restart the vehicle with the compact spare tire, the TPMS system message will also be displayed on the multi-information display after several miles (kilometers) driving.

526

524

TPMS System Failure

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) D

riving

529

U.S. model Canadian model

2009 TL

Never use a puncture-repairing agent in a flat tire. If used, you will have to replace the tire pressure sensor. Have the flat tire repaired by your dealer as soon as possible.

This indicator and the warning message on the multi-information display will go off, after several miles (kilometers) driving, when the spare tire is replaced with the specified regular tire equipped with the tire pressure monitor sensor.

Each wheel is equipped with a tire pressure sensor mounted inside the tire behind the valve stem. You must use TPMS specific wheels. It is recommended that you always have your tires serviced by your dealer or a qualified technician.

If you have a flat tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator and tire monitor indicator will come on. Replace the indicated flat tire with the compact spare tire (see page

).

After the flat tire is replaced with the spare tire, the low tire pressure/ TPMS indicator stays on while driving. After several miles (kilometers) driving, this indicator begins to flash, then stays on again. You will also see a CHECK TPMS SYSTEM message on the multi- information display. This is normal; the system cannot monitor the spare tire pressure. Manually check the spare tire pressure to be sure it is correct.

If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator and the low tire position on the low tire pressure monitor do not go out after inflating the tires to the specified values, have your dealer check the system as soon as possible.

583

Changing a Tire with TPMS

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

530

2009 TL

As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Industry Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Your vehicle is not designed to tow a trailer. Attempting to do so can void your warranties.

Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motor home. If your vehicle needs to be towed in an emergency, see page .606

Towing a Trailer Towing Your Vehicle

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), Towing a Trailer, Towing Your Vehicle D

riving

531

2009 TL

532

2009 TL

This section explains why it is important to keep your vehicle well maintained and how to follow basic maintenance safety precautions.

If you have the skills and tools to perform more complex maintenance tasks on your vehicle, you may want to purchase the service manual. See page for information on how to obtain a copy, or see your dealer.

This section also includes instructions on how to read the maintenance minder messages on the multi-information display, and instructions for simple maintenance tasks you may want to take care of yourself.

......................Maintenance Safety . 534 ....................Maintenance Minder . 535

..............................Fluid Locations . 545 ......Engine Compartment Covers . 546

........................Adding Engine Oil . 547 .........Changing the Oil and Filter . 548

..............................Engine Coolant . 550 ....................Windshield Washers . 552

....Automatic Transmission Fluid . 553 ....................................Brake Fluid . 555

.............................................Lights . 556 ................Cleaning the Seat Belts . 564

.....................................Floor Mats . 565 ..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 566

.................................Wiper Blades . 566 ...............................................Tires . 568

...................Checking the Battery . 577 .............................Vehicle Storage . 578633

Maintenance M

aintenance

533

2009 TL

To eliminate potential hazards, read the instructions before you begin, and make sure you have the tools and skills required.

Make sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and the engine is off.

To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not gasoline.

To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames away from the battery and all fuel-related parts.

Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the battery or compressed air.

All service items not detailed in this section should be performed by a certified technician or other qualified mechanic.

Be sure there is adequate ventilation whenever you operate the engine.

Let the engine and exhaust system cool

down before touching any parts.

Do not run the engine unless instructed to do so.

Some of the most important safety precautions are given here. However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in performing maintenance. Only you can decide whether or not you should perform a given task.

Maintenance Safety

Important Safety Precautions

Potential Vehicle Hazards Carbon Monoxide poison from engine exhaust.

Burns from hot parts.

Injury from moving parts.

534

Failure to properly follow maintenance instructions and precautions can cause you to be seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the procedures and precautions in this owners manual.

Improperly maintaining this vehicle, or failing to correct a problem before driving can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspection and maintenance recommendations in this owners manual.

2009 TL

CONTINUED

Your vehicle displays engine oil life and maintenance service items on the multi-information display to show you when you should have your dealer perform engine oil replacement and indicated maintenance service.

Based on the engine operating conditions and accumulated engine revolutions, the onboard computer in your vehicle calculates the remaining engine oil life and displays it as a percentage.

To see the current engine oil life displayed on the multi-information display, turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, and press the SEL/RESET button on the steering wheel repeatedly until the engine oil life is displayed.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

:

180178

Maintenance Minder

Engine Oil Life Indicator

M aintenance

535

REMAINING ENGINE OIL LIFE

U.S. model is shown.

2009 TL

Pressing either INFO button ( / ) switches the display from the message to another display. Once you switch the display, this message will go off.

Along with the message, the system message indicator comes on (see page ).

When the remaining engine oil life is 15 to 6 percent, the multi-information display shows a SERVICE DUE SOON message along with the maintenance item code(s) indicating the main and sub items required at the time of the oil change. Refer to page for a complete list of the maintenance main items and sub items.

The remaining engine oil life is shown on the multi-information display according to this table:

The message appears on the multi- information display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .544

72

:

178 180

Calculated Engine Oil Life (%)

100 % 91 % 90 % 81 % 80 % 71 % 70 % 61 % 60 % 51 % 50 % 41 % 40 % 31 % 30 % 21 % 20 % 16 % 15 % 11 % 10 % 6 % 5 % 1 %

0 %

Displayed Engine Oil Life (%)

100 % 90 % 80 % 70 % 60 % 50 % 40 % 30 % 20 % 15 % 10 % 5 % 0 %

Maintenance Minder

536

MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM CODE (S)

MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM CODE

2009 TL

CONTINUED

When the remaining oil life is 5 to 1 percent, the multi-information display shows a SERVICE DUE NOW message with the same maintenance items SERVICE DUE SOON was displayed with. When you see this message, have the indicated maintenance performed as soon as possible.

Press the SEL/RESET button on the steering wheel repeatedly to select the engine oil life information. Along with the OIL LIFE message, you will see the percentage of the remaining engine oil life and the maintenance item codes on the multi-information display.

This message reminds you that your vehicle will soon be due for scheduled maintenance.

Maintenance Minder M

aintenance

537

REMAINING ENGINE OIL LIFE

MAIN ITEM (S) SUB ITEM (S) MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM CODE

MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM CODE (S)

2009 TL

Pressing either INFO button ( / ) switches the display from the message to another display. Once you switch the display, this message will go off.

Press the SEL/RESET button on the steering wheel repeatedly to select the engine oil life. The message SERVICE, along with 5%, and the maintenance item code are displayed on the multi-information display when the calculated engine oil life is 1 to 5 percent (see page ).

If the indicated maintenance service is not done and the remaining engine oil life reaches 0%, the multi- information display will show the message SERVICE PAST DUE and the maintenance item code(s). This message is displayed when the total distance traveled is less than 10 miles (for U.S. models) or 10 km (for Canadian models) after the engine oil life became 0%.

536

Maintenance Minder

538

2009 TL

CONTINUED

Press the SEL/RESET button on the steering wheel repeatedly to select the engine oil life. The message SERVICE, along with 0%, and the maintenance item code are displayed on the multi-information display when the calculated engine oil life is 0 to 1 percent.

These messages will come on every time you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.

If the indicated required service is not done and the remaining engine oil life becomes 0%, the multi- information display will show a SERVICE PAST DUE message, the total distance traveled after the remaining oil life became 0%, and the maintenance item code(s).

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

Pressing either INFO button ( / ) switches the display from the message to another display. To see the message again, press either INFO button repeatedly.

Immediately have the service performed, and make sure to reset the display as described on page .

:

178 180

541

Maintenance Minder M

aintenance

539

U.S.

CANADA

TOTAL PAST DUE DISTANCE TRAVELED

MAINTENANCE CODES

2009 TL

This message is displayed again when you drive over 10 miles (for U.S. models) or 10 km (for Canadian models) after seeing the 0% message.

Immediately have the service performed, and make sure to reset the display as described on page .

Pressing either INFO button ( / ) switches the display from the message to another display. To see the message again, press either INFO button repeatedly.

All maintenance items shown on the multi-information display are in code. For an explanation of these maintenance codes, see page .

When you press the SEL/RESET button to select the engine oil life, the message SERVICE, along with the maintenance item code(s) and the total negative distance traveled after the oil life became 0%, will be displayed on the multi-information display.

544

541

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance Main Items and Sub Items

540

U.S.

CANADA

MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM

MAINTENANCE SUB ITEMS

MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM

MAINTENANCE SUB ITEMS

TOTAL PAST DUE DISTANCE TRAVELED

2009 TL

CONTINUED

Select RESET by pressing the INFO ( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button to reset the engine oil life display. The maintenance item code(s) will disappear, and the engine oil life will reset to 100. If you want to cancel the oil life reset mode, select CANCEL.

Your dealer will reset the display after completing the required maintenance service. You will see OIL LIFE 100% on the display the next time you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

If maintenance service is done by someone other than your dealer, reset the maintenance minder as follows:

Press and hold the SEL/RESET button on the steering wheel for more than 10 seconds. The remaining engine oil life reset mode will be shown on the multi- information display.

If the engine oil life is not displayed, press the SEL/RESET button on the steering wheel repeatedly.

3.

1.

2.

4.

:

:

178 180

178 180

Maintenance Minder

Resetting the Engine Oil Life Display

M aintenance

541

2009 TL

U.S. Vehicles:

According to state and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on the items marked with will not void your emissions warranties. However, all maintenance services should be performed in accordance with the intervals indicated by the multi- information display.

Your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best and can provide competent, efficient service. However, service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in effect. Maintenance may be done by any qualified service facility or person who is skilled in this type of automotive service. Keep all receipts as proof of completion, and have the person who does the work fill out your Maintenance Journal or Canadian Maintenance Log. Check your warranty booklet for more information.

We recommend using Acura parts and fluids whenever you have maintenance done. These are manufactured to the same high- quality standards as the original components, so you can be confident of their performance and durability.

If you have the required service done but do not reset the display, or reset the display without doing the service, the system will not show the proper maintenance intervals. This can lead to serious mechanical problems because you will no longer have an accurate record of when maintenance is needed.

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance, replacement, or repair of emissions control devices and systems may be done by any automotive repair establishment or individual using parts that are certif ied to EPA standards.

Important Maintenance Precautions

542

2009 TL

You should check the following items at the specified intervals. If you are unsure of how to perform any check, turn to the appropriate page listed.

Lights Check the operation of the headlights, parking lights, taillights, high-mount brake light, and license plate lights monthly. See page .

Engine oil level Check every time you fill the fuel tank. See page .

Engine coolant level Check the radiator reserve tank every time you fill the fuel tank. See page .

Automatic transmission Check the fluid level monthly. See page

.

Brakes Check the fluid level monthly. See page .

Tires Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects. See page

.

491

556

490

553

555

568 CONTINUED

Maintenance Minder

Owners Maintenance Checks

M aintenance

543

2009 TL

Maintenance Minder

544

:

If the message SERVICE DUE NOW does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty on page .

Independent of the maintenance messages on the multi-information display, replace the brake fluid every 3 years. Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km). Adjust the valves during service 3 if they are noisy.

NOTE:

2 :

542

1 :

SH-AWD only

Maintenance Main Items Replace engine oil Replace engine oil and oil filter Inspect front and rear brakes Check parking brake adjustment Inspect these items:

Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots Suspension components Driveshaft boots Brake hoses and line (including ABS) All fluid levels and condition of fluids Exhaust system Fuel lines and connections

Maintenance Sub Items Rotate tires Replace air cleaner element

If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

Replace dust and pollen filter If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and from diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

Inspect drive belt Replace transmission fluid Replace transmission and transfer fluid Replace spark plugs Replace timing belt and inspect water pump

If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over 110F, 43C), or in very low temperatures (under

20F, 29C), replace every 60,000 miles (U.S.)/ 100,000 km (Canada).

Inspect valve clearance Replace engine coolant Replace rear differential fluid

Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds results in higher level of mechanical (shear) stress to fluid. This requires differential fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the maintenance minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the differential fluid changed at 7,500 miles (12,000 km), then every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

A B

Symbol Symbol

3

4

5

1 2

6

1

1

2

2

M a in

te n a n ce

M in

d e r

2009 TL

Fluid Locations M

aintenance

545

RADIATOR CAP

BRAKE FLUID (Black cap)

WASHER FLUID (Black cap)

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID DIPSTICK (Yellow loop)

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK (Orange loop)

ENGINE COOLANT RESERVOR

2009 TL

The component parts in the engine compartment are protected by several covers. You may need to remove the covers when you perform some simple maintenance work.

All of the covers can be removed simply by pulling them straight up.

When reinstalling the covers, make sure the pins and tabs are in their proper positions.

Remove the right and left engine compartment covers by sliding them apart.

After replacing the right engine compartment cover, make sure the washer fluid cap is firmly in place.

Pull the bulkhead cover straight up to remove. When removing the cover, make sure to move the bulkhead cover slightly to the left so that the hood latch handle does not get in the way.

1.

2.

3.

Engine Compartment Covers

546

LEFT ENGINE COMPARTMENT COVER

RIGHT ENGINE COMPARTMENT COVER

BULKHEAD COVER

2009 TL

Oil is a major contributor to your engines performance and longevity. Always use a premium-grade 5W-20 detergent oil displaying the API Certification Seal. This seal indicates the oil is energy conserving, and that it meets the American Petroleum Institutes latest requirements.

Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap on top of the valve cover. Pour in the oil slowly and carefully so you do not spill. Clean up any spills immediately. Spilled oil could damage components in the engine compartment. Install the engine oil fill cap, and tighten it securely. Wait a few minutes, and recheck the oil level (see page ). Do not fill above the upper mark; you could damage the engine.

Acura Motor Oil is the preferred 5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It is highly recommended that you use Acura Motor Oil in your vehicle for optimum engine protection. Make sure the API Certification Seal says For Gasoline Engines.

490

CONTINUED

Recommended Engine Oil

Adding Engine Oil M

aintenance

547

API CERTIFICATION SEAL

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

2009 TL

Always change the oil and filter according to the maintenance messages shown on the multi- information display. The oil and filter collect contaminants that can damage your engine if they are not removed regularly.

Changing the oil and filter requires special tools and access from underneath the vehicle. The vehicle should be raised on a service station- type hydraulic lift for this service. Unless you have the knowledge and proper equipment, you should have this maintenance done by a skilled technician.

You may use a synthetic motor oil if it meets the same requirements given for a conventional motor oil: it displays the API Certification Seal and it is the proper weight. You must follow the oil and filter change intervals shown on the multi- information display.

Your vehicle does not require any oil additives. Additives may adversely affect the engine or transmission performance and durability.

The oil viscosity or weight is provided on the containers label. 5W-20 oil is formulated for year- round protection of your vehicle to improve cold weather starting and fuel economy.

Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Oil and Filter

Changing the Oil and FilterSynthetic Oil

Engine Oil Additives

548

Ambient Temperature

2009 TL

Install a new oil filter according to the instructions that come with it. Make sure to clean off any dirt and dust on the connecting surface of a new oil filter.

Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then reinstall the drain bolt. Tighten the drain bolt to:

Refill the engine with the recommended oil.

Engine oil change capacity (including filter):

Remove the oil filter, and let the remaining oil drain. A special wrench (available from your dealer) is required.

Make sure the oil filter gasket is not stuck to the engine block. If it is, remove it before installing a new oil filter.

Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature, then shut it off.

Open the hood, and remove the engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil drain bolt and washer from the bottom of the engine. Drain the oil into an appropriate container.

3.

5.

6.

4.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Changing the Oil and Filter M

aintenance

549

OIL FILTER

DRAIN BOLT WASHER

29 lbfft (39 Nm , 4.0 kgfm)

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

2009 TL

Always use Honda Long-life Anti- freeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolant is pre-mixed with 50 percent antifreeze and 50 percent distilled water. Never add straight antifreeze or plain water.

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may use another major-brand non-silicate coolant as a temporary replacement. Make sure it is a high-quality coolant recommended for aluminum engines. Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result in corrosion, causing the cooling system to malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as possible.

Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. The oil pressure indicator should go out within 5 seconds. If it does not, turn off the engine and check your work.

Let the engine run for several minutes, then check the drain bolt and oil filter for leaks.

Turn off the engine, let it sit for several minutes, then check the oil level on the dipstick. If necessary, add more oil.

If the coolant level in the reserve tank is at or below the MIN line, add coolant to bring it up to the MAX line. Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

To access the radiator reserve tank, remove the right-side engine compartment cover (see page ).

7.

8.

9.

546

Changing the Oil and Filter, Engine Coolant

Adding Engine Coolant

550

RESERVE TANK

MINMAX

Improper disposal of engine oil can be harmf ul to the environment. If you change your own oil, please dispose of the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed container, and take it to a recycling center. Do not discard it in a trash bin or dump it on the ground.

2009 TL

The coolant level should be up to the base of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low.

Remove all engine compartment covers (see page ).

When the radiator and engine are cool, relieve any pressure in the cooling system by turning the radiator cap counterclockwise, without pressing down.

Remove the radiator cap by pushing down and turning counterclockwise.

If the reserve tank is completely empty, you should also check the coolant level in the radiator.

Pour the coolant slowly and carefully so you do not spill any. Clean up any spill immediately; it could damage components in the engine compartment.

Put the radiator cap back on and tighten it.

Pour coolant into the reserve tank. Fill it to halfway between the MAX and MIN marks. Put the cap back on the reserve tank.

Do not add any rust inhibitors or other additives to your vehicles cooling system. They may not be compatible with the coolant or engine components.

1.

2.

4.

5.

3.

6.

546

Engine Coolant M

aintenance

551

RADIATOR CAP

Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap.

2009 TL

Fill the reservoir with a good-quality windshield washer fluid. This increases the cleaning capability and prevents freezing in cold weather.

When you refill the reservoir, clean the edges of the windshield wiper blades with windshield washer fluid on a clean cloth. This will help to condition the blade edges.

Check the fluid level in the windshield washer reservoir at least monthly during normal use.

To check washer fluid level, cover the reservoir cap center hole with your finger while lifting the cap and the attached measuring tube. The washer fluid level in the tube will indicate the washer fluid level in the reservoir.

If the washer fluid is low, a LOW WASHER FLUID message appears on the multi-information display.

On U.S. models

On Canadian models

Windshield Washers

552

Do not use engine antif reeze or a vinegar/water solution in the windshield washer reservoir. Antif reeze can damage your vehicles paint, while a vinegar/water solution can damage the windshield washer pump. Use only commercially-available windshield washer f luid.

2009 TL

CONTINUED

The transmission should be drained and refilled with new fluid when this service is shown on a maintenance message in the multi-information display.

Check the fluid level with the engine at normal operating temperature.

Insert the dipstick all the way into the transmission securely as shown in the illustration.

Remove the dipstick and check the fluid level. It should be between the upper and lower marks.

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) from the transmission, and wipe it with a clean cloth.

Park the vehicle on level ground. Start the engine, let it run until the radiator fan comes on, then shut off the engine. For accurate results, wait about 60 seconds (but no longer than 90 seconds) before doing step 2.

1.

2. 3.

4.

Automatic Transmission Fluid M

aintenance

553

UPPER MARK LOWER MARK

DIPSTICK

2009 TL

If the level is below the lower mark, add fluid into the filler hole to bring it to the level between the upper and lower marks.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill any. Clean up any spill immediately; it could damage components in the engine compartment.

Always use Acura ATF-Z1 (automatic transmission fluid).

Insert the dipstick all the way back into the transmission securely as shown in the illustration.

Make sure the rubber cap on the dipstick fits in the dipstick guide and that you push the dipstick in all the way.

The transmission should be drained and refilled with new fluid when this service is shown on a maintenance message in the multi- information display.

If you are not sure how to check and add fluid, contact your dealer.

5. 6.

Automatic Transmission Fluid

554

Using transmission f luid other than Acura ATF-Z1 may cause deterioration in transmission operation and durability, and could result in damage to the transmission. Damage resulting f rom the use of transmission f luid other than Acura ATF-Z1 is not covered by the Acura new vehicle warranty.

Use only Acura ATF-Z1 (Automatic Transmission Fluid). Do not mix with other transmission f luids.

2009 TL

Using any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of the system. Have the brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your vehicles braking system and can cause extensive damage.

Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir monthly after removing the left engine compartment cover (see page ).

Always use Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not available, you should use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed container, as a temporary replacement.

Replace the brake fluid when this service is indicated on a maintenance message in the multi-information display.

You will also see a LOW BRAKE FLUID message on the multi- information display.

The fluid level should be between the MIN and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir. If the level is at or below the MIN mark, your brake system needs attention. Have the brake system inspected for leaks or worn brake pads.

You need remove the left engine compartment cover to check the fluid level (see page ).546

546

Brake System

Brake Fluid M

aintenance

555

MAX

MIN

2009 TL

The headlights were properly aimed when your vehicle was new. If you regularly carry heavy items in the trunk, readjustment may be required. Adjustments should be done by your dealer or another qualified technician.

Your vehicle has halogen high beam headlight bulbs which are also used for the daytime running light. Handle it by its base and protect the glass from contact with your skin or hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.

Open the hood.

Remove all engine compartment covers (see page ).

If you are replacing the bulb on the drivers side, remove the three holding clips with a flat-tipped screwdriver. Then remove the upper part of the air intake duct by pulling it straight up.

The low beam headlight bulbs are a type of high voltage discharge tube. High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the light switch off and the key removed (or the vehicle is in VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) mode on models with keyless access system). Because of this, you should not attempt to examine or change a low beam headlight bulb yourself. If a low beam headlight bulb fails, take the vehicle to your dealer to have it replaced.

1.

2. 546

Headlight Aiming

Low Beam Headlight Bulb Replacement

Replacing a High Beam Headlight/Daytime Running Light Bulb

Lights

556

HOLDING CLIP

Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to overheat and shatter.

2009 TL

Push the electrical connector back onto the bulb. Make sure it is on all the way.

Turn on the lights to test the new bulb.

(Drivers side) Install the upper part of the air intake duct.

Remove the electrical connector from the bulb by pushing on the tab and pulling the connector down.

Remove the bulb by turning it one- quarter turn counterclockwise.

Insert the new bulb into the hole, and turn it one-quarter turn clockwise to lock it in place.

Install the engine coolant reserve tank.

(Passengers side)

Install the all engine compartment covers.

To change a bulb on the passengers side, remove the engine coolant reserve tank by pulling it out of its stay.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

3.

9.

10.

Lights M

aintenance

557

RESERVE TANK BULB

CONNECTORSTAY

2009 TL

Start the engine. If you are replacing a drivers side bulb, turn the steering wheel all the way to the right. If you are replacing a passengers side bulb, turn the steering wheel to the left. Turn off the engine.

Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to remove the holding clips from the edge of the inner fender cover, and pull the inner fender cover back.

Remove the two undercover bolts and the holding clip with a flat- tipped screwdriver.

3.2.

1.

Replacing the Front Side Marker Light Bulb

Lights

558

BOLTS HOLDING CLIP

SPOILER

HOLDING CLIP

2009 TL

CONTINUED

Remove the socket from the headlight assembly by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Start the engine. If you are replacing a drivers side bulb, turn the steering wheel all the way to the right. If you are replacing a passengers side bulb, turn the steering wheel to the left. Turn off the engine.

Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out of its socket.

Install the new bulb in the socket by pushing it straight in the socket until it bottoms.

Insert the socket into the headlight assembly. Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.

Test the lights to make sure the new bulb is working.

Set the spoiler and inner fender cover in the original position. Install the bolts and holding clips, and lock them in place by pushing on their center.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

1.

9.

Lights

Replacing a Front Turn Signal/ Parking Light Bulb

M aintenance

559

SOCKETBULB

2009 TL

Remove the socket from the light assembly by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Remove the bulb from the socket by pushing it in and turning it counterclockwise until it unlocks.

Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to remove the three holding clips from the inner fender.

Use a 10 mm wrench to remove the two mounting bolts and remove the holding clip with a flat- tipped screwdriver.

Pull down the under cover from the bumper carefully.

3.2. 4.

5.

Lights

560

HOLDING CLIP SOCKETBULBCOVER

HOLDING CLIP

SPOILER

BOLTS

2009 TL

CONTINUED

Install the new bulb in the socket. Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.

Insert the socket into the light assembly. Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.

Test the lights to make sure the new bulb is working.

Your vehicle uses halogen light bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle it by its plastic case, and protect the glass from contact with your skin or hard objects. If you touch the glass, clean it with denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.

Start the engine. If you are replacing a drivers side bulb, turn the steering wheel all the way to the right. If you are replacing a passengers side bulb, turn the steering wheel to the left. Turn off the engine.

Push the under cover in place and set the spoiler and inner fender cover in the original position. Install the bolts and holding clips, and lock them in place by pushing on their center.

Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to remove the three holding clips from the inner fender.

6.

7.

8.

9.

2.

1.

Lights

Replacing a Front Fog Light Bulb

M aintenance

561

HOLDING CLIPCOVER

Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch on the glass can cause the bulb to overheat and shatter.

2009 TL

Remove the electrical connector from the bulb by pushing on the tab and pulling the connector down.

Remove the bulb by turning it about one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Insert the new bulb into the hole, and turn it one-quarter turn clockwise to lock it in place.

Push the electrical connector back onto the bulb. Make sure it is on all the way.

Turn on the fog lights to test the new bulb.

Use a 10 mm wrench to remove the two mounting bolts and remove the holding clip with a flat- tipped screwdriver.

Pull down the under cover from the bumper carefully.

Push the under cover in place and set the spoiler and inner fender cover in the original position. Install the bolts and holding clips, and lock them in place by pushing on their center.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

3.

9.

Lights

562

BULB

HOLDING CLIP

SPOILER CONNECTOR

BOLTS

2009 TL

CONTINUED

Remove the three stud bolts with a socket or wrench.

Open the trunk. Remove the screw in the center of the holding clip on the side of the trunk lining. Pull the lining back.

Pull the taillight assembly straight back out of the body.

1. 2. 3.

Lights

Replacing Rear Bulbs

M aintenance

563

SCREW

BOLTS

2009 TL

If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean them. Do not use bleach, dye, or cleaning solvents. Let the belts air-dry before you use the vehicle.

Push a new bulb straight into the socket until it bottoms, and reinstall the socket into the light assembly by turning it clockwise until it locks.

Test the new bulb to make sure it works.

Reinstall the trunk lining. Make sure it is installed under the edge of the trunk seal.

Put the holding clip into the hole on the side of the trunk lining. Reinstall the screw.

Remove the socket by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise, and pull the bulb straight out of its socket.

Determine which of the three bulbs is burned out: back-up light, turn signal, or side marker.

6.

7.

8.

9.

5.

4.

Lights, Cleaning the Seat Belts

Cleaning the Seat Belts

564

OPENING

BULB SOCKET

2009 TL

The floor mats that came with your vehicle hook over the floor mat anchors. To lock each anchor, turn the knob clockwise. This keeps the floor mats from sliding forward (possibly interfering with the pedals), or backwards (making the front passengers weight sensors ineffective). If you remove a floor mat, make sure to re-anchor it when you put it back in your vehicle.

Dirt build-up around the openings of the seat belt anchors can cause the belts to retract slowly. Wipe the openings with a clean cloth dampened in mild soap and warm water or isopropyl alcohol.

If you use non-Acura floor mats, make sure they fit properly and that they can be used with the floor mat anchors. Do not put additional floor mats on top of the anchored mats.

Make sure the rear floor mats are properly positioned. If not, the floor mat will prevent the seat operation and make the front passengers weight sensors ineffective.

Cleaning the Seat Belts, Floor Mats

Floor Mats

M aintenance

565

FLOOR MAT ANCHORS

DRIVERS SIDE FLOOR MAT REAR PASSENGERS FLOOR MAT

Unlock

Lock

Unlock

Lock

FLOOR MAT ANCHOR

2009 TL

Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every 6 months. Replace them if you find signs of cracking in the rubber, areas that are getting hard, or if they leave streaks and unwiped areas when used.

Raise each wiper arm off the windshield, lifting the drivers side first, then the passengers side.

This filter removes the dust and pollen that is brought in from the outside through the climate control system.

Have your dealer replace the filter when this service is indicated by a maintenance message on the multi- information display. It should be replaced every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) if you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air, or if the flow from the climate control system becomes less than usual.

Disconnect the blade assembly from the wiper arm by pushing in the lock tab. Hold the lock tab in while you push the blade assembly toward the base of the arm.

1.

2.

Dust and Pollen Filter, Wiper Blades

Wiper BladesDust and Pollen Filter

566

LOCK TAB

Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are raised, or you will damage the hood and wiper arms.

2009 TL

Remove the blade from its holder by grabbing the tabbed end of the blade. Pull up firmly until the tabs come out of the holder.

Examine the new wiper blades. If they have no plastic or metal reinforcement along the back edge, remove the metal reinforcement strips from the old wiper blade, and install them in the slots along the edge of the new blade.

Slide the new wiper blade into the holder until the tabs lock.

Slide the wiper blade assembly onto the wiper arm. Make sure it locks in place.

Lower the wiper arm down against the windshield.

3. 5.

4.

6.

7.

Wiper Blades M

aintenance

567

BLADE REINFORCEMENT

BLADE

2009 TL

However, these tires are not suitable for driving on snow or ice, so all- season or winter tires must be installed for winter driving conditions.

See page for

To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be the proper type and size, in good condition with adequate tread, and correctly inflated.

The following pages give more detailed information on how to take care of your tires and what to do when they need to be replaced.

Keeping the tires properly inflated provides the best combination of handling, tread life, and riding comfort.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated.

Overinflated tires can make your vehicle ride more harshly, are more prone to damage from road hazards, and wear unevenly.

Your vehicle is equipped with high performance all-season tires (marked All Season or M S on the sidewalls). These tires provide excellent handling and braking performance in most driving situations.

Your vehicle is equipped with high performance summer tires. These tires have a high-traction compound and tread pattern to provide superior acceleration, cornering, and stopping under most driving conditions.

575

All models except SH-AWD model with high performance tires and SH-AWD TECH HPT models

SH-AWD model with high performance tires and SH-AWD TECH HPT models

Winter Driving.

Tire Types

Inflation Guidelines

Tires

568

Using tires that are excessively worn or improperly inflated can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in this owners manual regarding tire inflation and maintenance.

2009 TL

Even though your vehicle is equipped with TPMS, we recommend that you visually check your tires every day. If you think a tire might be low, check it immediately with a tire gauge.

If you check air pressure when the tires are hot [driven for several miles (kilometers)], you will see readings 4 to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4 kgf/cm ) higher than the cold readings. This is normal. Do not let air out to match the recommended cold air pressure. The tire will be underinflated.

While tubeless tires have some ability to self-seal if they are punctured, you should look closely for punctures if a tire starts losing pressure.

The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) warns you when a tire pressure is low. See page for more information on the TPMS.

Use a gauge to measure the air pressure in each tire at least once a month. Even tires that are in good condition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per month. Remember to check the spare tire at the same time.

Check the air pressures when the tires are cold. This means the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). Add or release air, if needed, to match the recommended cold tire pressures on the next page. You should get your own tire

pressure gauge and use it whenever you check your tire pressures. This will make it easier for you to tell if a pressure loss is due to a tire problem and not due to a variation between gauges.

526

Tires M

aintenance

569

2009 TL

The following chart shows the recommended cold tire pressures for most normal driving conditions.

For additional technical information, see page .

For convenience, the recommended tire sizes and cold tire pressures are on a label on the drivers doorjamb.

The compact spare tire pressure is:

518

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure for Normal Driving

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure for Normal Driving

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure for Normal Driving

Cold Tire Pressure for Normal Driving

Tire Size

U.S. SH-AWD and SH-AWD TECH models

Canadian SH-AWD and SH-AWD TECH models

TL and TECH models

U.S. SH-AWD model with high performance tires and SH-AWD TECH HPT models

Recommended Tire Pressures

Tires

570

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )P245/50R17 98V 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

37 psi (255 kPa , 2.55 kgf/cm ) 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

P245/45R18 96V 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )P245/45R18 96V

245/40ZR19 94Y

Rear:

Front:

Front:

Rear:

Front:

Rear:

Front:

Rear:

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

2009 TL

We strongly recommend that you do not drive faster than the posted speed limits and conditions allow. If you ever drive in a sanctioned competitive event at sustained high speeds (over 118 mph or 190 km/h), be sure to adjust the cold tire pressures as shown below. If you do not, excessive heat can build up and cause sudden tire failure.

Every time you check inflation, you should also examine the tires for damage, foreign objects, and wear.

You should look for:

Bumps or bulges in the tread or side of the tire. Replace the tire if you find either of these conditions.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace the tire if you can see fabric or cord. Your tires have wear indicators

molded into the tread. When the tread wears down, you will see a band 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide band across the tread. This shows there is less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left on the tire. A tire this worn gives very little traction on wet roads. You should replace the tire if you can see three or more tread wear indicators.

Excessive tread wear.

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure for High Speed Driving

SH-AWD and SH-AWD TECH models

Tires

High Speed Driving Tire Inspection

M aintenance

571

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR

33 psi (230 kPa , 2.3 kgf/cm ) 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

P245/45R18 96V Front:

Rear:

2009 TL

The service life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including, but not limited to, driving habits, road conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use).

In addition to your regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five years old. It is also recommended that all tires, including the spare, be removed from service after 10 years from the date of manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear.

The last four digits of the TIN (tire identification number) are found on the sidewall of the tire and indicate the date of manufacture (See

on page ).619

Tires

Tire Service Life

Tire Labeling

572

2009 TL

To help increase tire life and distribute wear more evenly, rotate the tires according to the maintenance messages displayed on the multi-information display. Move the tires to the positions shown in the illustration each time they are rotated. If you purchase directional tires, rotate only front-to-back.

When the tires are rotated, make sure the air pressures are checked.

In addition to proper inflation, correct wheel alignment helps to decrease tire wear. If you find a tire is worn unevenly, have your dealer check the wheel alignment.

Have your dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent vibration while driving. A tire should always be rebalanced if it is removed from the wheel. When you have new tires installed, make sure they are balanced. This increases riding comfort and tire life. For best results, have the installer perform a dynamic balance.

Tire RotationTire Maintenance

Tires M

aintenance

573

Front Front

(For Non-directional Tires and Wheels)

(For Directional Tires and Wheels)

Improper wheel weights can damage your vehicles aluminum wheels. Use only Acura wheel weights f or balancing.

2009 TL

It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that is not possible or necessary, replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicles handling.

If you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the wheels specifications match those of the original wheels.

Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on your vehicle can reduce braking ability, traction, and steering accuracy. Using tires of a different size or construction can cause the ABS and vehicle stability assist system (VSA) to work inconsistently.

Replace your tires with radial tires of the same size, load range, speed rating, and maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tires sidewall).

The ABS and VSA system work by comparing the speed of each wheel. When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle. Tire size and construction can affect wheel speed and may cause the system to activate.

Also be sure you use only TPMS specific wheels. If you do not, the tire pressure monitoring system will not work.

Replacement wheels are available at your dealer.

Replacing Tires and Wheels

Tires

574

Installing improper tires on your vehicle can affect handling and stability. This can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Always use the size and type of tires recommended in this owners manual.

2009 TL

If you mount snow tires on your vehicle, make sure they are radial tires of the same size and load range as original tires. Mount snow tires on all four wheels. The traction provided by snow tires on dry roads may be lower than your original tires. Check with the tire dealer for maximum speed recommendations.

Mount tire chains on your tires when required by driving conditions or local laws. Install them only on the front tires. Do not use chains on the rear tires.

Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, we strongly recommend using this Quality Chain Corp. tire chain:

See page for DOT tire quality grading information, and page

for tire size information.

Tires marked M S or All Season on the sidewall have an all- weather tread design suitable for most winter driving conditions.

For the best performance in snowy or icy conditions, you should install snow tires or tire chains. They may be required by local laws under certain conditions.

If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be aware that these tires are not designed for winter driving conditions. For more information, consult your dealer.

Wheels:

Tires:

If equipped:

617

619On 2WD Models

On U.S. SH-AWD Models

On Canadian SH-AWD Models

On 2WD Models

On U.S. SH-AWD Models

On Canadian SH-AWD Models

Snow Tires

Tire Chains

Winter Driving

Summer Tires

Wheel and Tire Specifications

Tires M

aintenance

575

17 x 8.0 J

18 x 8.0 J 19 x 8.0 J

18 x 8.0 J

P245/50R17 98V

P245/45R18 96V 245/40ZR19 94Y

P245/45R18 96V

(TPMS)

(TPMS) (TPMS)

(TPMS)

2009 TL

Clean the wheels as you would the rest of the exterior. Wash them with the same solution, and rinse them thoroughly.

Aluminum alloy wheels have a protective clear-coat that keeps the aluminum from corroding and tarnishing. Cleaning the wheels with harsh chemicals (including some commercial wheel cleaners) or a stiff brush can damage the clear-coat. To clean the wheels, use a mild detergent and a soft brush or sponge.

This tire chain is available at many auto supply stores. To find a local store that carries the chain, call Quality Chain Corp at 1-800-843-8824. To order the tire chain online, go to

, and enter your vehicle information. When you install the chains, follow the manufacturers instructions, and mount them as tightly as you can. Drive slowly with the chains installed.

If you ever hear the chains contacting the body or chassis, stop and investigate. If the chains have loosened, retighten them. Make sure they do not contact the brake lines or suspension.

Remove the chains as soon as you begin driving on cleared roads.

Rubber chain adjusters, or tensioners, must be used to prevent the chains from contacting the body or the chassis.

:

www.qualitychaincorp.com Wheels

Premium Cobra Cable Chain 1042P with accessory

adjusters

Tires

576

Using the wrong chains, or not properly installing chains, can damage the brake lines and cause a crash in which you can be seriously injured or killed.

Follow all instructions in this owners manual regarding the selection and use of tire chains.

Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly installed can damage your vehicles brake lines, suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are hitting any part of the vehicle.

2009 TL

Check the condition of the battery monthly by looking at the test indicator window. The label on the battery explains the test indicators colors.

If you need to connect the battery to a charger, disconnect both cables to prevent damaging your vehicles electrical system. Always disconnect the negative ( ) cable first, and reconnect it last.

Check the terminals for corrosion (a white or yellowish powder) after removing all engine compartment covers (see page ). To remove it, cover the terminals with a solution of baking soda and water. It will bubble up and turn brown. When this stops, wash it off with plain water. Dry off the battery with a cloth or paper towel. Coat the terminals with grease to help prevent further corrosion.

If additional battery maintenance is needed, see your Acura dealer or a qualified technician.

Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds.

546

Checking the Battery

WARNING:

Wash your hands after handling.

M aintenance

577

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

The battery gives off explosive hydrogen gas during normal operation.

A spark or flame can cause the battery to explode with enough force to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and a face shield, or have a skilled technician do the battery maintenance.

2009 TL

Block the rear wheels.

If the vehicle is to be stored for a longer period, it should be supported on jackstands so the tires are off the ground.

Leave one window open slightly (if the vehicle is being stored indoors).

Disconnect the battery.

Support the front wiper blade arms with a folded towel or rag so they do not touch the windshield.

To minimize sticking, apply a silicone spray lubricant to all door and trunk seals. Also, apply a vehicle body wax to the painted surfaces that mate with the door and trunk seals.

If you need to park your vehicle for an extended period (more than 1 month), there are several things you should do to prepare it for storage. Proper preparation helps prevent deterioration and makes it easier to get your vehicle back on the road. If possible, store your vehicle indoors.

Fill the fuel tank.

Wash and dry the exterior completely.

Clean the interior. Make sure the carpeting, floor mats, etc., are completely dry.

Leave the parking brake off. Put the transmission in Park.

If your vehicles battery is disconnected, or goes dead, the time setting may be lost. To reset the time, see page .

If your vehicles battery is disconnected or goes dead, the audio system may disable itself. The next time you turn on the radio, you will see ENTER CODE in the frequency display. Use the preset buttons to enter the code (see page

).

The navigation system will also disable itself. The next time you set to the ON mode, the system will require you to enter a PIN before it can be used. Refer to the navigation system manual.

377

376

On models without navigation system

On models with navigation system

Vehicle Storage

578

2009 TL

Cover the vehicle with a breathable cover, one made from a porous material such as cotton. Non-porous materials, such as plastic sheeting, trap moisture, which can damage the paint.

If possible, periodically run the engine until it reaches full operating temperature (the cooling fans cycle on and off twice). Preferably, do this once a month.

Vehicle Storage M

aintenance

579

2009 TL

580

2009 TL

This section covers the more common problems that motorists experience with their vehicles. It gives you information about how to safely evaluate the problem and what to do to correct it. If the problem has stranded you on the side of the road, you may be able to get going again. If not, you will also find instructions on getting your vehicle towed.

......................Compact Spare Tire . 582 ....................Changing a Flat Tire . 583

.............If the Engine Wont Start . 588 ................................Jump Starting . 591

..............If the Engine Overheats . 593 .........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 595 ..........Charging System Indicator . 595

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 596 ...............Brake System Indicator . 597

Opening the Fuel Fill Door ....................................Manually . 598

..............................................Fuses . 599 ..............................Fuse Locations . 603

......................Emergency Towing . 606 ..........If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck . 608

Taking Care of the Unexpected T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

581

2009 TL

Use the compact spare tire as a temporary replacement only. Get your regular tire repaired or replaced, and put it back on your vehicle as soon as you can.

Check the inflation pressure of the compact spare tire every time you check the other tires. It should be inflated to:

Replace the tire when you can see the tread wear indicator bars. The replacement should be the same size and design tire, mounted on the same wheel. The spare tire is not designed to be mounted on a regular wheel, and the spare wheel is not designed for mounting a regular tire.

Follow these precautions:

Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

This tire gives a harsher ride and less traction on some road surfaces. Use greater caution while driving.

Do not mount snow chains on the compact spare tire.

Do not use your compact spare tire on another vehicle unless it is the same make and model.

After the flat tire is replaced with the spare tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator stays on. After several miles (kilometers) driving with the spare, this indicator begins to flash, then stays on again. You will also see a CHECK TPMS SYSTEM message on the multi-information display (see page ).529

Compact Spare Tire

582

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

2009 TL

Take the tool case out of the spare tire.

Unscrew the wing bolt and take the spare tire out of its well.

If you have a flat tire while driving, stop in a safe place to change it. Drive slowly along the shoulder until you get to an exit or an area that is far away from the traffic lanes.

Park the vehicle on firm, level, and non-slippery ground. Put the transmission in Park. Apply the parking brake.

Turn on the hazard warning lights, and turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle while you change the tire.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/ stop button instead of an ignition switch. VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) Mode is the equivalent of LOCK (0). See page for ignition switch and power mode comparison.

Open the trunk. Raise the trunk floor by lifting up on the back edge.

5.

4.

3.

2.

1.

180

CONTINUED

Changing a Flat Tire T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

583

EXTENSION

WHEEL NUT WRENCH

JACK

The vehicle can easily roll off the jack, seriously injuring anyone underneath.

Follow the directions for changing a tire exactly, and never get under the vehicle when it is supported only by the jack.

2009 TL

Locate the jacking point nearest the tire you need to change. It is pointed to by an arrow molded into the underside of the body. Place the jack under the jacking point. Turn the end bracket clockwise until the top of the jack contacts the jacking point. Make sure the jacking point tab is resting in the jack notch.

Use the extension and the wheel nut wrench as shown to raise the vehicle until the flat tire is off the ground.

Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn with the wheel nut wrench.

6. 7. 8.

Changing a Flat Tire

584

WHEEL NUT WRENCH WHEEL NUT WRENCH

EXTENSION

JACKING POINT

2009 TL

Before mounting the spare tire, wipe any dirt off the mounting surface of the wheel and hub with a clean cloth. Wipe the hub carefully; it may be hot from driving.

Put on the spare tire. Put the wheel nuts back on finger-tight, then tighten them in a crisscross pattern with the wheel nut wrench until the wheel is firmly against the hub. Do not try to tighten the wheel nuts fully.

Remove the wheel nuts, then remove the flat tire. Handle the wheel nuts carefully; they may be hot from driving. Place the flat tire on the ground with the outside surface facing up.

9. 10. 11.

CONTINUED

Changing a Flat Tire T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

585

BRAKE HUB

2009 TL

Lower the vehicle to the ground, and remove the jack.

Remove the spacer cone from the wing bolt, turn it over, and put it back on the bolt.

Place the flat tire face down in the spare tire well.

Tighten the wheel nuts securely in the same crisscross pattern. Have the wheel nut torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility. Tighten the wheel nuts to:

Remove the center cap before storing the flat tire in the trunk well.

14.

12. 13. 15.

16.

Changing a Flat Tire

586

WING BOLT

For normal tire

SPACER CONE

For compact spare tire

94 lbfft (127 Nm , 13 kgfm)

2009 TL

To remove the spacer cone, squeeze the tabs on the wing bolt to disengage it from the center of the spacer cone, then pull the bolt downward.

To install the wing bolt to the spacer cone, reverse this procedure.

Secure the flat tire by screwing the wing bolt back into its hole.

Store the jack and tools in the tool kit case. Place the tool kit case in the flat tire.

Store the center cap in the trunk. Make sure it does not get scratched or damaged. Unhook the handle from the trunk opening and lower the trunk floor lid, then close the trunk lid.

Your vehicles original tire has a tire pressure monitoring system sensor. To replace a tire, refer to

(see page ).

17.

18. 19.

20.

530

Changing a Flat Tire

Changing a Tire with TPMS

T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

587

SPACER CONE

TAB

Loose items can fly around the interior in a crash and could seriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely before driving.

2009 TL

Check these things: Check the transmission interlock. The shift lever must be in Park or neutral.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position or on models with keyless access system, press the engine start/stop button to set ON Mode (see page ). Turn on the headlights, and check their brightness. If the headlights are very dim or do not come on at all, the battery is discharged. See

on page .

When you turn the ignition switch to the START (III) position or on models with keyless access system, press the engine start/stop button to set START Mode (see page ), you do not hear the normal noise of the engine trying to start. You may hear a clicking sound, a series of clicks, or nothing at all.

Diagnosing why the engine wont start falls into two areas, depending on what you hear when you turn the ignition switch to the START (III) position or on models with keyless access system, press the engine start/stop button to set START Mode (see page ):

You hear nothing, or almost nothing. The engines starter motor does not operate at all, or operates very slowly.

You can hear the starter motor operating normally, or the starter motor sounds like it is spinning faster than normal, but the engine does not start up and run.

591

180

180

180

If the Engine Wont Start

Nothing Happens or the Starter Motor Operates Very Slowly

Jump Starting

588

2009 TL

In this case, the starter motors speed sounds normal, or even faster than normal, when you turn the ignition switch to the START (III) position or on models with keyless access system, press the engine start/stop button to set START Mode (see page ), but the engine does not run.

Are you using a properly coded key? An improperly coded key will cause the immobilizer system indicator in the instrument panel to blink rapidly (see page ).

Turn the ignition switch to the START (III) position or on models with keyless access system, press the engine start/stop button to set START Mode (see page ). If the headlights do not dim, check the condition of the fuses. If the fuses are OK, there is probably something wrong with the electrical circuit for the ignition switch or starter motor. You will need a qualified technician to determine the problem. See

on page .

If the headlights dim noticeably or go out when you try to start the engine, either the battery is discharged or the connections are corroded. Check the condition of the battery and terminal connec- tions (see page ). You can then try jump starting the vehicle from a booster battery (see page

).

65

180

180

591

577

606

CONTINUED

The Starter Operates Normally

Emergency Towing

If the Engine Wont Start T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

589

2009 TL

Do you have your keyless access system remote with you? The vehicle will not start without the remote within operating range. The vehicle will not start without the remote within operating range and with the keyless access main switch in the glove box turned on.

Do you have fuel? Check the fuel gauge; the warning indicator may not be working.

There may be an electrical problem, such as no power to the fuel pump. Check all the fuses (see page ).

If you find nothing wrong, you will need a qualified technician to find the problem. See

on page .

If you are unable to stop the engine normally while in the Park position, see

on page .

Are you using the proper starting procedure? Refer to

on pages and .

600

606

184

505503

On models with keyless access system

If the Engine Wont Start

Emergency Towing

Emergency Engine Stop

Starting the Engine

590

NOTE:

2009 TL

Although this seems like a simple procedure, you should take several precautions.

You cannot start a vehicle with an automatic transmission by pushing or pulling it.

Open the hood, and check the physical condition of the battery. In very cold weather, check the condition of the electrolyte. If it seems slushy or like ice, do not try jump starting until it thaws.

Turn off all the electrical accessories: climate control, audio system, lights, etc. Put the transmission in Park, and set the parking brake.

Pull up the battery terminal cover to remove. The battery terminal cover can be removed without removing front bulkhead cover.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

To Jump Start Your Vehicle:

Jump Starting T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

591

TERMINAL COVER

A battery can explode if you do not follow the correct procedure, seriously injuring anyone nearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking materials away from the battery.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, the electrolyte inside can f reeze. Attempting to jump start with a f rozen battery can cause it to rupture.

2009 TL

Start the vehicle. If the starter motor still operates slowly, check that the jumper cables have good metal-to-metal contact.

If the booster battery is in another vehicle, have an assistant start that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

The numbers in the illustration show you the order to connect the jumper cables.

Connect one jumper cable to the positive ( ) terminal on your battery. Connect the other end to the positive ( ) terminal on the booster battery.

Once the vehicle is running, disconnect the negative cable from your vehicle, then from the booster battery. Disconnect the positive cable from your vehicle, and then from the booster battery.

Install the battery terminal cover.

Keep the ends of the jumper cables away from each other and any metal on the vehicle until everything is disconnected. Otherwise, you may cause an electrical short.

Connect the second jumper cable to the negative ( ) terminal on the booster battery. Connect the other end to the grounding point as shown. Do not connect this jumper cable to any other part of the engine.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Jump Starting

592

2009 TL

If you do not see steam or spray, leave the engine running and watch the temperature gauge. If the high heat is due to overloading, the engine should start to cool down almost immediately. If it does, wait until the temperature gauge comes down to the midpoint, then continue driving.

The pointer of the vehicles temperature gauge should stay in the midrange. If it climbs to the red mark, you should determine the reason (hot day, driving up a steep hill, etc.).

If the vehicle overheats, you should take immediate action. The only indication may be the temperature gauge climbing to or above the red mark. Or you may see steam or spray coming from under the hood.

If the temperature gauge stays at the red mark, turn off the engine.

Look for any obvious coolant leaks, such as a split radiator hose. Everything is still extremely hot, so use caution. If you find a leak, it must be repaired before you continue driving (see

on page ).

Safely pull to the side of the road. Put the transmission in Park, and set the parking brake. Turn off all accessories, and turn on the hazard warning lights.

If you see steam and/or spray coming from under the hood, turn off the engine. Wait until you see no more signs of steam or spray, then open the hood.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

606

CONTINUED

Emergency Towing

If the Engine Overheats T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

593

Steam and spray from an overheated engine can seriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steam is coming out.

Driving with the temperature gauge pointer at the red mark can cause serious damage to the engine.

2009 TL

If you dont find an obvious leak, check the coolant level in the radiator reserve tank. Add coolant if the level is below the MIN mark (see on page ).

If there was no coolant in the reserve tank, you may need to add coolant to the radiator. Let the engine cool down until the pointer reaches the middle of the tempera- ture gauge, or lower, before check- ing the radiator.

Using gloves or a large heavy cloth, turn the radiator cap counterclockwise, without pushing down, to the first stop. After the pressure releases, push down on the cap, and turn it until it comes off.

Start the engine, and set the temperature to maximum heat (climate control to AUTO at ). Add coolant to the radiator up to the base of the filler neck. If you do not have the proper coolant mixture available, you can add plain water. Remember to have the cooling system drained and refilled with the proper mixture as soon as you can.

Put the radiator cap back on tightly. Run the engine, and check the temperature gauge. If it goes back to the red mark, the engine needs repair (see

on page ).

If the temperature stays normal, check the coolant level in the radiator reserve tank. If it has gone down, add coolant to the MAX mark. Put the cap back on tightly.

8.

9. 7.

6. 10.

11.

550 606 Adding Engine Coolant Emergency

Towing

If the Engine Overheats

594

Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap.

2009 TL

Safely pull off the road, and shut off the engine. Turn on the hazard warning indicators.

If necessary, add oil to bring the level back to the full mark on the dipstick (see page ).

Start the engine, and watch the oil pressure indicator. If it does not go out within 10 seconds, turn off the engine. There is a mechanical problem that needs to be repaired before you can continue driving (see on page

).

Let the vehicle sit for a minute. Open the hood, and check the oil level (see page ). An engine very low on oil can lose pressure during cornering and other driving maneuvers.

Go to a service station or garage where you can get technical assistance.

You will also see a CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM message on the multi-information display (see page ).

Immediately turn off all electrical accessories. Try not to use other electrically operated controls such as the power windows. Keep the engine running; starting the engine will discharge the battery rapidly.

If the charging system indicator comes on brightly when the engine is running, the battery is not being charged.

This indicator should never come on when the engine is running. If it starts flashing or stays on, the oil pressure has dropped very low or lost pressure. Serious engine damage is possible, and you should take immediate action.

You will also see a CHECK ENGINE OIL LEVEL message on the multi-information display when this indicator comes on.

1.

2.

3.

4.

490

547

606

88

Emergency Towing

Charging System Indicator

Low Oil Pressure Indicator

Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

595

Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause serious mechanical damage almost immediately. Turn of f the engine as soon as you can saf ely get the vehicle stopped.

2009 TL

If the indicator comes on repeatedly, even though it may go off as you continue driving, have the vehicle checked by your dealer as soon as possible.

If this indicator comes on while driving, it means one

of the engines emissions control systems may have a problem. Even though you may feel no difference in your vehicles performance, it can reduce your fuel economy and cause increased emissions. Continued operation may cause serious damage.

If you have recently refueled your vehicle, the indicator coming on could be due to a loose or missing fuel fill cap. You will also see a TIGHTEN FUEL CAP message on the multi-information display. Tighten the cap until it clicks at least once (see page ). Tightening the cap will not turn the indicator off immediately; it can take several days of normal driving.

Your vehicle has certain readiness codes that are part of the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems. In some states, part of the emissions testing is to make sure these codes are set. If they are not set, the test cannot be completed.

If the battery in your vehicle has been disconnected or gone dead, these codes may be erased. It takes several days of driving under various conditions to set the codes again.

You will also see a CHECK EMISSION SYSTEM message on the multi-information display (see page ).

If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, the malfunction indicator lamp may also come on with the D indicator.

488

88

Readiness Code

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

596

If you keep driving with the malf unction indicator lamp on, you can damage your vehicles emissions controls and engine. Those repairs may not be covered by your vehicles warranties.

2009 TL

If the fluid level is low, take your vehicle to a dealer, and have the brake system inspected for leaks or worn brake pads.

However, if the brake pedal does not feel normal, you should take immediate action. A problem in one part of the systems dual circuit design will still give you braking at two wheels. You will feel the brake pedal go down much farther before the vehicle begins to slow down, and you will have to press harder on the pedal.

You will also see a LOW BRAKE FLUID message on the multi- information display.

You will also see a CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM message on the multi- information display when this indicator comes on.

To check if they are set, turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position (set ON mode on models with keyless access system), without starting the engine. The malfunction indicator lamp will come on for 20 seconds. If it then goes off, the readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes are not set. If possible, do not take your vehicle for an emissions test until the readiness codes are set. Refer to

for more information (see page ).

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. ON Mode is the equivalent of ON (II). For more information, see pages

and .

If the brake system indicator comes on while driving, the brake fluid level is probably low. Press lightly on the brake pedal to see if it feels normal. If it does, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop at a service station (see page ).

The brake system indicator normally comes on when you turn the ignition switch to the ON (II) position, and as a reminder to check the parking brake. It will stay on if you do not fully release the parking brake.

555

626

:

178 180

CONTINUED

Malfunction Indicator Lamp, Brake System Indicator

Brake System Indicator

Emissions Testing

T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

597

CanadaU.S.

2009 TL

If the fuel fill door release button does not work, use the release lever inside the left maintenance lid in the trunk.

To open the fuel fill door, pull the release lever rearward.

Slow down by shifting to a lower gear, and pull to the side of the road when it is safe. Because of the long distance needed to stop, it is hazardous to drive the vehicle. You should have it towed and repaired by your dealer as soon as possible (see

on page ).

If you must drive the vehicle a short distance in this condition, drive slowly and carefully.

If the ABS indicator and the VSA system indicator come on with the brake system indicator, have your vehicle inspected by your dealer immediately.

606

Opening the Fuel Fill Door Manually

Emergency Towing

Brake System Indicator, Opening the Fuel Fill Door Manually

598

RELEASE LEVERMAINTENANCE LID

2009 TL

The vehicles fuses are contained in three fuse boxes.

The interior fuse box is located under the dashboard on the drivers side. The fuse label is attached under the steering column.

The passengers side interior fuse box is on the lower passengers side panel. To remove the fuse box lid, put your finger in the notch on the lid, and pull it upward slightly, then pull it toward you and take it out of its hinges.

The under-hood fuse box is on the drivers side next to the air cleaner housing.

To access the under-hood fuse box, remove the left-side engine compartment cover (see page ).546

Fuses T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

599

DRIVERS SIDE PASSENGERS SIDE

NOTCH

TAB

FUSE LABEL

UNDER-HOOD

AIR CLEANER HOUSING

2009 TL

Also check the combined fuse box in the under-hood fuse box.

If something electrical in your vehicle stops working, the first thing you should check for is a blown fuse. Determine from the chart on pages

, and , or the diagram on the fuse box lid or the fuse label, which fuse or fuses control that component. Check those fuses first, but check all the fuses before deciding that a blown fuse is not the cause. Replace any blown fuses and check if the device works.

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position. Make sure the headlights and all other accessories are off.

Check each of the large fuses in the under-hood fuse box by looking at the wire inside. Removing these fuses requires a Phillips-head screwdriver.

Remove the cover from the fuse box.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/stop button instead of an ignition switch. VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) Mode is the equivalent of LOCK (0). See page for ignition switch and power mode comparison.

3.

1. 2.

603 604 605

180

Checking and Replacing Fuses

Fuses

600

FUSE BLOWN BLOWN

2009 TL

Your vehicle has spare fuses on the back of the under-hood fuse box cover.

Look for a blown wire inside the fuse. If it is blown, replace it with one of the spare fuses of the same rating or lower.

Check the smaller fuses in the under-hood fuse box and all the fuses in the interior fuse boxes by pulling out each one with the fuse puller provided on the back of the under-hood fuse box cover.

5.4.

CONTINUED

Fuses T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

601

BLOWN

FUSE PULLER SPARE FUSES

FUSE PULLER

2009 TL

If the replacement fuse of the same rating blows in a short time, there is probably a serious electrical problem with your vehicle. Leave the blown fuse in that circuit, and have your vehicle checked by a qualified technician.

If you cannot drive the vehicle without fixing the problem, and you do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse of the same rating or a lower rating from one of the other circuits. Make sure you can do without that circuit temporarily (such as the accessory power socket).

If you replace the blown fuse with a spare fuse that has a lower rating, it might blow out again. This does not indicate anything wrong. Replace the fuse with one of the correct rating as soon as you can.

6.

Fuses

602

Replacing a f use with one that has a higher rating greatly increases the chances of damaging the electrical system. If you do not have a replacement f use with the proper rating f or the circuit, install one with a lower rating.

2009 TL

No. Amps.

No.

CONTINUED

Circuits Protected

Circuits Protected

Circuits ProtectedNo.Amps. Amps.

4 5 6 7 8 9

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

40 A

40 A 15 A 20 A

7.5 A

15 A 15 A 10 A

7.5 A 15 A 15 A

7.5 A 7.5 A 7.5 A

1 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4

2 5 2 6

Battery Passengers Side Fuse Box EPS ABS/VSA MTR ABS/VSA Passengers Side Fuse Box Option Headlight Washer SH-AWD

Rear Defroster Not Used Not Used Not Used Heater Motor Hazard Horn and Stop Keyless Access System Not Used IG Coil FI Sub Back Up Interior Lights FI Main DBW Back Up FI ECU MG, Clutch Radiator Fan Timer

IG Main Sub Fan Motor Sub Fan Motor Drivers Side Fuse Box Main Fan Motor

Drivers Side Light Main Wiper Motor Passengers Side Light Main

3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5

3 6 3 7 3 8

120 A 40 A 70 A 40 A 30 A 40 A

30 A 30 A

50 A 40 A 30 A 60 A 40 A 30 A 30 A 30 A 30 A

1 : 2 :

On SH-AWD models only On 2WD models only

1

2

1

2

Fuse Locations T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

603

UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

2009 TL

No. Amps.

No. Amps.

Circuits Protected

Circuits Protected

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

7.5 A 20 A 7.5 A 7.5 A 7.5 A

7.5 A

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27

28 29 30 31

20 A 10 A 10 A

7.5 A 15 A

7.5 A 7.5 A 7.5 A 7.5 A 20 A 20 A 20 A 20 A 15 A 20 A 15 A 10 A 10 A

10 A 7.5 A 15 A

Not Used SH-AWD Washer Wiper ODS ABS/VSA Not Used Starter Relay

Fuel Pump VB SOL SRS Meter ACG Not Used Daytime Running Light A/C Accessory, Key, Lock Accessory Drivers Power Seat Sliding Moonroof Drivers Power Seat Reclining Rear Left Power Window Front ACC Socket Drivers Power Window Drivers Side Door Lock Front Left Fog Light Left Side Small Lights (Exterior) Left Headlight High Beam TPMS Left Headlight Low Beam Not Used : If equipped

Fuse Locations

604

INTERIOR FUSE BOX

Drivers side

2009 TL

No. Amps. Circuits Protected

Amps.No. Circuits Protected

1 2

3 4 5 6

10 A 10 A

10 A 15 A

7.5 A

Right Headlight High Beam Right Side Small Lights (Exterior) Right Front Fog Light Right Headlight Low Beam Not Used Interior Lights

20 A

20 A

10 A 20 A

10 A 20 A

20 A 15 A

7.5 A 20 A

7 8

9

10 11

12 13

14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

Not Used Passengers Power Seat Reclining Passengers Power Seat Sliding Right Side Door Lock Rear Passengers Side Power Window Keyless Access System Front Passengers Power Window Not Used Premium amplifier Console ACC Socket Not Used Lumbar Support Seat Heater Not Used Not Used Not Used

: If equipped

Fuse Locations T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

605

INTERIOR FUSE BOX

Passengers side

2009 TL

If your vehicle needs to be towed, call a professional towing service or organization. Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain. It is very dangerous.

Leave the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I) position so the steering wheel does not lock.

Turn off the engine.

Shift to D position for 5 seconds, then to N.

Start the engine. Release the parking brake.

There are two ways to tow your vehicle:

The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck.

The operator will load your vehicle on the back of a truck. Any other method of towing will damage the drive system. When you contact the towing agency, inform them a flat-bed is required.

If, due to damage, your vehicle must be towed with the front wheels on the ground, do this:

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/ stop button instead of an ignition switch. ACCESSORY Mode is the equivalent of ACCESSORY (I). See page for ignition switch and power mode comparison.

The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the front tires and lift them off the ground. The rear tires remain on the ground.

180

(On SH-AWD models)

(Except SH-AWD models)

Emergency Towing

Flat-bed Equipment

Wheel-lif t Equipment

This is the best way to transport your vehicle.The only way you can safely tow

your vehicle is with flat-bed equipment.

This is an acceptable way to tow your vehicle.

606

Towing with only two tires on the ground will damage parts of the all-wheel-drive system. Your vehicle should be transported on a f lat-bed truck or trailer.

2009 TL

With the front wheels on the ground, it is best to tow the vehicle no farther than 50 miles (80 km), and keep the speed below 35 mph (55 km/h).

If your vehicle is equipped with a front spoiler, remove it before towing so it is not damaged.

Models equipped with the keyless access system have an engine start/ stop button instead of an ignition switch. ACCESSORY Mode is the equivalent of ACCESSORY (I). See page for ignition switch and power mode comparison.

If you decide to tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground, make sure you use a properly- designed and attached tow bar. Prepare the vehicle for towing as described above, and leave the ignition switched in the ACCESSORY (I) position so the steering wheel does not lock. Make sure the radio and any items plugged into the accessory power socket are turned off so they do not run down the battery.

178

CONTINUED

Emergency Towing T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

607

Trying to lif t or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed to support the vehicles weight.

Improper towing preparation will damage the transmission. Follow the above procedure exactly. If you cannot shif t the transmission or start the engine, your vehicle must be transported with the f ront wheels of f the ground.

The steering system can be damaged if the steering wheel is locked. Leave the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I) position, and make sure the steering wheel turns f reely bef ore you begin towing.

On models with the Keyless Access system, the ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON indicator will conf irm that the power mode is in the ACCESSORY mode and that the steering lock is released. If the steering wheel does not turn f reely, rotate the wheel right and lef t while pressing the ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON. This inf ormation also appears on the multi- inf ormation display (see page ).182

2009 TL

To use the towing hook:

Remove the cover from the front bumper using your fingers, or pry it off using a cloth and a flat-tipped screwdriver.

If your vehicle gets stuck in sand, mud, or snow, call a towing service to pull it out (see page ).

For very short distances, such as freeing the vehicle, you can use the detachable towing hook that mounts on the anchor in the front bumper.

When you need to release the steering lock while your vehicles battery is dead, do this:

Follow the proper jump starting procedures, Step 1 through Step 5, to apply the power to your vehicle (see pages and ).

Remove the towing hook and wheel nut wrench from the tool case in the spare tire (see page

).

Follow the jump starting procedures, Step 8 and Step 9, and the instructions to disconnect the jumper cable (see page ). The steering will remain unlocked even if the battery is dead.

Failure to comply means the steering lock may be damaged.

Press the ENGINE START/STOP button to set the power mode to ACCESSORY (see page ) and verify the steering lock is released.

1.

2.

606

1.

2.

3.

592

592591

179

583

On models with keyless access system If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

Emergency Towing, If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

608

2009 TL

Screw the towing hook into the hole, and tighten it with the wheel nut wrench.

3.

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck T aking

C are

of the

U nexpected

609

To avoid damage to your vehicle, use the towing hook f or straight, f lat ground towing only. Do not tow at an angle. The tow hook should not be used to tow the vehicle onto a f lat bed. Do not use it as a tie down.

2009 TL

610

2009 TL

The diagrams in this section give you the dimensions and capacities of your vehicle and the locations of the identification numbers. It also includes information you should know about your vehicles tires and emissions control systems.

................Identification Numbers . 612 ................................Specifications . 614

DOT Tire Quality Grading ..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 617

.................................Tire Labeling . 619 Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) Required Federal ............................Explanation . 621

.......................Emissions Controls . 623 ..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 625

........................Emissions Testing . 626

Technical Information T echnicalInform

ation

611

2009 TL

Your vehicle has several identifying numbers located in various places.

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the 17-digit number your dealer uses to register your vehicle for warranty purposes. It is also necessary for licensing and insuring your vehicle. The easiest place to find the VIN is on a plate fastened to the top of the dashboard. You can see it by looking through the windshield on the drivers side. It is also on the certification label attached to the drivers doorjamb, and is stamped on the engine compartment bulkhead. The VIN is also provided in bar code on the certification label.

Identif ication Numbers

612

CERTIFICATION LABEL

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)

2009 TL

The transmission number is on a label on top of the transmission.

The engine number is stamped into the engine block.

Identif ication Numbers T echnicalInform

ation

613

TRANSMISSION NUMBERENGINE NUMBER

2009 TL

Specifications

614

Capacities

Weights

Dimensions

Seating Capacities

Air Conditioning

195.5 in (4,966 mm)

Excluding the oil remaining in the engine

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the engine Reserve tank capacity: 0.182 US gal (0.69 )

6.1 US qt (5.8 ) 2.6 US qt (2.5 )

0.48 US qt (0.45 ) 0.45 US qt (0.43 )

2.93 US qt (2.77 ) 2.67 US qt (2.53 ) 8.1 US qt (7.7 ) 7.9 US qt (7.5 )

3.0 US qt (2.8 )

5.3 US qt (5.0 ) 4.2 US qt (4.0 ) 4.5 US qt (4.3 )

2.19 US gal (8.3 ) 1.66 US gal (6.3 )

18.5 US gal (70 )

3.5 US qt (3.3 )

Fuel tank

Engine coolant

Engine oil

Automatic transmission fluid

Rear differential fluid (SH-AWD) Transfer assembly fluid (SH-AWD) Windshield washer reservoir

74.0 in (1,880 mm) 57.2 in (1,452 mm) 109.3 in (2,775 mm) 63.2 in (1,605.5 mm) 63.8 in (1,620 mm)

Gross vehicle weight rating

Length Width Height Wheelbase Track

See the certification label attached to the drivers doorjamb.

Total Front Rear

5 2 3

Refrigerant type Charge quantity Lubricant type

HFC-134a (R-134a) 17.6 19.4 oz (500 550 g)

ND-OIL8

Approx.

Front Rear

1 :

2 :

Change Total

Change Total

Change Total Change

Including filter Without filter

Total Change

Total

U.S. Vehicle Canada Vehicle

2WD SH-AWD

2WD SH-AWD

1

2

2009 TL

CONTINUED

Specifications T echnicalInform

ation

615

Engine (2WD)Lights

Fuses

Battery

Alignment

Engine (SH-AWD)

3.50 x 3.66 in (89.0 x 93.0 mm)

Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC VTEC 6-cylinder (V6),

gasoline engine

12 V

1.1 W 3.4 W 5 W

16 W

55 W (H11) 21 W12 V

12 V

12 V 12 V 12 V

211.7 cu-in (3,471 cm ) 11.2 : 1

ILZKR7B11

12 V 60 W (HB3) 12 V 24/2.2 CP

12 V 3 CP

12 V 35 W (D2S)

3 CP

3 CP12 V

12 V

Type

Bore x Stroke Displacement Compression ratio Spark plugs

Headlight (Low beam ) Headlight (High beam/DRL) Front turn signal/parking lights Front side marker lights Front fog lights Rear turn signal lights Back-up lights Rear side marker lights License plate light Trunk light Door courtesy lights Vanity mirror lights

See page 603 or the fuse box cover.

Interior

Under-hood

Capacity 12 V 12 V

72 AH/20 HR 60 AH/5 HR

On vehicles with high voltage discharge type low beam headlights, replacement of a bulb should be performed by your dealer.

Toe-in

Camber

Caster 3.8 1

0.5 0.08 in (2.0 mm) 0.00 in (0.0 mm)

Type

Bore x Stroke Displacement Compression ratio Spark plugs

SXU22HCR11S

11.2 : 1 223.5 cu-in (3,664 cm )

3.54 x 3.78 in (90.0 x 96.0 mm)

Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC IN/EX VTEC 6-cylinder (V6),

gasoline engine

SXU22HCR11

ILZKR7B-11S

See pages 604 and 605 or the fuse label attached to the inside of the fuse box door on each side of the dashboard.

Front Rear Front Rear Front

DENSO:

(Amber) NGK:

(Amber)

:

NGK:

DENSO:

2009 TL

Specifications

616

Tires

Size

Pressure

P245/50R17 98V P245/45R18 96V 245/40ZR19 94Y

T135/80D17 103M

37 psi (255 kPa , 2.55 kgf/cm ) 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm ) 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

Front/Rear

Spare Front

Rear Spare

TL TECH SH-AWD SH-AWD TECH SH-AWD TECH HPT

1 : 2 : 3 : 4 : 5 : 6 : SH-AWD with high performance tires

1, 2

3, 4

5, 6

1, 2, 3, 4

5, 6

2009 TL

The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety Requirements. All tires are also graded for treadwear, traction, and temperature performance according to Department of Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains these gradings.

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:

All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.

The treadwear grade is a compara- tive rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one- half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual condi- tions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tires ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear Traction

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles) T echnicalInform

ation

617

2009 TL

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tires resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Temperature

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

618

2009 TL

The tires that came on your vehicle have a number of markings. Those you should be aware of are described below.

Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size. Below is an example of tire size with an explanation of what each component means.

Vehicle type (P indicates passenger vehicle).

Tire width in millimeters.

Aspect ratio (the tires section height as a percentage of its width).

Tire construction code (R indicates radial).

Rim diameter in inches.

Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the maximum speed rating).

Load index (a numerical code associated with the maximum load the tire can carry).

P

R

17

245

50

V

98

CONTINUED

Tire Size

Tire Labeling T echnicalInform

ation

619

Tire Size

(1)

(1)

Tire Identification Number (TIN) (3) Maximum Tire Pressure (4) Maximum Tire Load

(2)(3)

(4)

(2) (1)

TIRE LABELING EXAMPLE

P245/50R17 98V

2009 TL

The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like the following example. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire.

Tire type code.

Date of manufacture. Year Week

Max Press The maximum air pressure the tire can hold.

Max Load The maximum load the tire can carry at maximum air pressure.

Manufacturers identification mark.

This indicates that the tire meets all requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation.

DOT

4MIC

001X

5207

Tire Identif ication Number (TIN) Maximum Tire Pressure

Maximum Tire Load

Tire Labeling

620

DOT 4MIC 001X 5207

2009 TL

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.

(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale

when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure.

Driving on a significantly under- inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicles handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the drivers responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

CONTINUED

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation T echnicalInform

ation

621

2009 TL

Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation

622

2009 TL

The United States Clean Air Act sets standards for automobile emissions. It also requires that automobile manufacturers explain to owners how their emissions controls work and what to do to maintain them. This section summarizes how the emissions controls work.

In Canada, Acura vehicles comply with the Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS) for Emissions valid at the time they are manufactured.

Your vehicle has a positive crankcase ventilation system. This keeps gasses that build up in the engines crankcase from going into the atmosphere. The positive crankcase ventilation valve routes them from the crankcase back to the intake manifold. They are then

drawn into the engine and burned.

As gasoline evaporates in the fuel tank, an evaporative emissions control canister filled with charcoal adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this canister while the engine is off. After the engine is started and warmed up, the vapor is drawn into the engine and burned during driving.

The onboard refueling vapor recovery (ORVR) system captures the fuel vapors during refueling. The vapors are adsorbed in a canister filled with activated carbon. While driving, the fuel vapors are drawn into the engine and burned off.

The burning of gasoline in your vehicles engine produces several by- products. Some of these are carbon monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen (NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC). Gasoline evaporating from the tank also produces hydrocarbons. Con- trolling the production of NOx, CO, and HC is important to the environ- ment. Under certain conditions of sunlight and climate, NOx and HC react to form photochemical smog. Carbon monoxide does not contri- bute to smog creation, but it is a poisonous gas.

The Clean Air Act

Crankcase Emissions Control System

Evaporative Emissions Control System

Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery

Emissions Controls T echnicalInform

ation

623

2009 TL

The exhaust emissions controls include four systems: PGM-FI, ignition timing control, exhaust gas recirculation, and three way catalytic converter. These four systems work together to control the engines combustion and minimize the amount of HC, CO, and NOx that come out the tailpipe. The exhaust emissions control systems are separate from the crankcase and evaporative emissions control systems.

The emissions control systems are designed and certified to work together in reducing emissions to levels that comply with the Clean Air Act. To make sure the emissions remain low, you should use only new Acura replacement parts or their equivalent for repairs. Using lower quality parts may increase the emissions from your vehicle.

The emissions control systems are covered by warranties separate from the rest of your vehicle. Read your warranty manual for more informa- tion.The PGM-FI system uses sequential

multiport fuel injection. It has three subsystems: air intake, engine control, and fuel control. The powertrain control module (PCM) uses various sensors to determine how much air is going into the engine. It then controls how much fuel to inject under all operating conditions.

This system constantly adjusts the ignition timing, reducing the amount of HC, CO, and NOx produced.

The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system takes some of the exhaust gas and routes it back into the intake manifold. Adding exhaust gas to the air/fuel mixture reduces the amount of NOx produced when the fuel is burned.

The three way catalytic converter is in the exhaust system. Through chemical reactions, it converts HC, CO, and NOx in the engines exhaust to carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen (N ), and water vapor.

2

2

Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts

PGM-FI System

Ignition Timing Control System

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System

Three Way Catalytic Converter

Emissions Controls

624

2009 TL

The three way catalytic converter contains platinum, palladium, and rhodium. These metals serve as catalysts, promoting chemical reactions to convert the exhaust gasses without affecting the metals. The catalytic converter is referred to as a three-way catalyst, since it acts on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement unit must be an original Acura part or its equivalent.

The three way catalytic converter must operate at a high temperature for the chemical reactions to take place. It can set on fire any combustible materials that come near it. Park your vehicle away from high grass, dry leaves, or other flammables.

A defective three way catalytic converter contributes to air pollution, and can impair your engines per- formance. Follow these guidelines to protect your vehicles three way catalytic converter.

Always use unleaded gasoline. Even a small amount of leaded gasoline can contaminate the catalyst metals, making the three way catalytic converter ineffective.

Have your vehicle diagnosed and repaired if it is misfiring, back- firing, stalling, or otherwise not running properly.

Keep the engine well maintained.

Three Way Catalytic Converter T echnicalInform

ation

625

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER WARM UP THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERS

2009 TL

Make sure the gas tank is nearly, but not completely, full (around 3/4).

Without touching the accelerator pedal, start the engine, and let it idle for 20 seconds.

If you take your vehicle for an emissions test shortly after the battery has been disconnected or gone dead, it may not pass the test. This is because of certain readiness codes that must be set in the on- board diagnostics for the emissions systems. These codes are erased when the battery is disconnected, and set again only after several days of driving under a variety of conditions.

If the testing facility determines that the readiness codes are not set, you will be requested to return at a later date to complete the test. If you must get the vehicle retested within the next two or three days, you can condition the vehicle for retesting by doing the following.

Make sure the vehicle has been parked with the engine off for 6 hours or more.

Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40 and 95F (4 and 35C).

Keep the vehicle in Park. Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there until the temperature gauge rises to at least 1/4 of the scale (about 3 minutes).

Without touching the accelerator pedal, let the engine idle for 20 seconds.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Testing of Readiness Codes

Emissions Testing

626

2009 TL

Then drive in city/suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal.

If the testing facility determines the readiness codes are still not set, see your dealer.

Make sure the vehicle has been parked with the engine off for 30 minutes.

Select a nearby lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in D. Do not use the cruise control. When traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds without moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds because of traffic conditions, drive for at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two more times (for a total of 90 seconds).

7. 8.

9.

Emissions Testing T echnicalInform

ation

627

2009 TL

628

2009 TL

..........Client Service Information . 630 ....................Warranty Coverages . 631

Reporting Safety Defects ..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 632

.....................Authorized Manuals . 633

Warranty and Client Relations W

arranty and

C lientR

elations

629

2009 TL

U.S. Owners:

Canadian Owners: When you call or write, please give us this information:

If you are dissatisfied with the decision made by the dealerships management, contact Acura Client Services.

Acura dealership personnel are trained professionals. They should be able to answer all your questions. If you encounter a problem that your dealership does not solve to your satisfaction, please discuss it with the dealerships management. The service manager or general manager can help. Almost all problems are solved in this way.

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin Islands:

Vehicle identification number (see page )

Name and address of the dealer who services your vehicle

Date of purchase

Odometer reading of on your vehicle

Your name, address, and telephone number

A detailed description of the problem

Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you

612

Client Service Information

630

American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Acura Client Services Mail Stop 500-2N-7E 1919 Torrance Blvd. Torrance, CA 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 382-2238

Vortex Motor Corp. Bella International P.O. Box 190816 San Juan, PR 00919-0816

Tel: (787) 620-7546

Honda Canada Inc. 715 Milner Avenue Toronto, ON M1B 2K8

Tel: 1-888-9-ACURA-9

Fax: Toll-free (877) 939-0909 Toronto (416) 287-4776

Acura Client Services

2009 TL

Your new Acura is covered by these warranties:

covers your new vehicle, except for the battery, emissions control systems, and accessories, against defects in materials and workmanship.

these two warranties cover your vehicles emissions control systems. Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for exact information.

provides coverage for as long as the pur- chaser of the muffler owns the vehicle.

provides prorated coverage for a replacement battery purchased from your dealer.

this warranty gives up to 100% credit toward a replacement battery.

a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details.

covers all Acura replacement parts against defects in materials and workmanship.

Acura accessories are covered under this warranty. Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other factors. Please read your warranty manual for details.

all exterior body panels are covered for rust-through from the inside for the specified time period with no mileage limit.

Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the 2009 Acura warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on warranty coverages. Your vehicles original tires are covered by their manufacturer. Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.

Please refer to the 2009 warranty manual that came with your vehicle.

Warranty Coverages

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance Warranty

Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty

Replacement Battery Limited Warranty

Original Equipment Battery Limited Warranty

Seat Belt Limited Warranty

Replacement Parts Limited Warranty

Accessory Limited Warranty

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty W arranty

and C

lientR elations

631

2009 TL

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to

; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from .

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar com- plaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)

632

http://www.saf ercar.gov

http://www.saf ercar.gov

2009 TL

The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can order by phone or online:

Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only) Go online at

If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356.

Covers maintenance and recommended procedures for repair to engine and chassis components. It is written for the journeyman mechanic, but it is simple enough for most mechanically inclined owners to understand.

Complements the Service Manual by providing in-depth troubleshooting information for each electrical circuit in your vehicle.

Describes the procedures involved in the replacement of damaged body parts.

Authorized Manuals

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)

Service Manual:

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Body Repair Manual: A uthorized

M anuals

633

Form Description

2009 Acura TL Service Manual

2009 Acura TL Electrical Troubleshooting Manual

2009 Model Series Acura TL Body Repair Manual

2009 Acura TL Owners Manual

2009 Acura TL Navigation Manual

2009 Acura TL Maintenance Journal

2009 Acura TL Quick Start Guide

Order Form for Previous Years-

Indicate Year and Model Desired

Publication

Form Number

61TK400

61TK400EL

61TK430

31TK4600

31TK4800

31TK4M00

31TK4Q00

ACU-R

www. helminc. com

2009 TL

634

2009 TL

CONTINUED

............................Capacities Chart . 614 .............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 57

Battery Charging System

...........................Indicator . 65, 595 ............................Jump Starting . 591

..............................Maintenance . 577 ............................Specifications . 615

..............................Before Driving . 485 ....................................Belts, Seat . 8, 20

...........................Beverage Holder . 203 .......Bluetooth HandsFreeLink . 392

Brakes ...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 521

.............Break-in, New Linings . 486 ...........................................Fluid . 555

.......................................Parking . 201 .................System Indicator . 65, 597 ........................Wear Indicators . 520

.............................Braking System . 520 .................Break-in, New Vehicle . 486

Brightness Control, ...............................Instruments . 137

....................................Built-In Key . 142 Bulb Replacement

..........................Back-up Lights . 563 .........Daytime Running Lights . 556

.................................Fog Lights . 561 ............................Specifications . 345

............Turn Signal Lights . 559, 563 ..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 556

................................AAC . 265, 307, 357 ...Accessories and Modifications . 495

................................Accessories . 495 ............................Modifications . 496

ACCESSORY (Ignition Key .....................................Position) . 145

ACCESSORY Mode ...........................(Power Mode) . 178

............Accessory Power Sockets . 204 ......................................AcuraLink . 467

................Adding Engine Coolant . 550 ........................Adding Engine Oil . 547

....................Additives, Engine Oil . 548 ...............................Airbag (SRS) . 9, 24

...............Additional Information . 24 ......................................Servicing . 35

...................System Components . 24 ..............Air Conditioning System . 214

.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 568 ......................................Antifreeze . 550

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) ...............................Indicator . 66, 521

...................................Operation . 521 ..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 376

Anti-theft Steering Column ............................................Lock . 145

................................Audio System . 223 .Automatic Lighting Off Feature . 135 ...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 22

.............Automatic Speed Control . 386 ..............Automatic Transmission . 507

..........................Capacity, Fluid . 614 ...............Checking Fluid Level . 553

.......................................Shifting . 508 .Shift Lever Position Indicator . 507

....................Shift Lock Release . 510

Index

A

B

C

IN D

E X

I

2009 TL

..............................Economy, Fuel . 492

............................Carrying, Cargo . 497 .............CAUTION, Explanation of . iii

..................................Ceiling Light . 209 ........................Certification Label . 612

...................................Chains, tires . 575 Changing Oil

........................................How to . 548 ......................................When to . 535

....................Changing a Flat Tire . 583 ...Charging System Indicator . 65, 595

............Checklist, Before Driving . 502 ................Childproof Door Locks . 147

.....................................Child Safety . 37 ..............................Booster Seats . 54

...................................Child Seats . 45 ..........................................Infants . 42

............................Large Children . 53 .........................................LATCH . 47

......................Risks with Airbags . 38 .............................Small Children . 43

.........................................Tethers . 51 .........Where Should a Child Sit? . 38

Cleaning ...................................Seat Belts . 564

..........Client Service Information . 630 ...............Climate Control System . 214

..............................................Clock . 377 ..................CO in the Exhaust . 57, 624 .......................Compact Spare tire . 582

.........................................Compass . 382 .................Console Compartment . 205 ...............Consumer Information . 630

.............Controls, Instruments and . 61 Coolant

........................................Adding . 550 ....................................Checking . 491

.........................Proper Solution . 550 ...................Temperature Gauge . 76

Crankcase Emissions Control ........................................System . 623

................Cruise Control Indicator . 72 ............Cruise Control Operation . 386

...................................Cup Holders . 203 ..........Customer Relations Office . 630

...............DANGER, Explanation of . iii ...................................Dashboard . 3, 62

..............Daytime Running Lights . 136 .Daytime Running Light Indicator . 72

.........Defects, Reporting Safety . 632

..............Defogger, Rear Window . 139

..............Defrosting the Windows . 219 ....................................Dimensions . 614

.............Dimming the Headlights . 133 Dipstick

..........Automatic Transmission . 553 ..................................Engine Oil . 490

........................Directional Signals . 133 ........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 520

.................................Disc Changer . 240 ...Disc Changer Error Messages . 250

.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 550 Doors

........Door Lock Sensor Button . 170 .................Monitor Indicator . 11, 88 ....................Power Door Locks . 146

........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 617 ...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5

...........................................Driving . 501 ....................................Economy . 492

Driving Position Memory ........................................System . 164

Index

D

E

II

2009 TL

CONTINUED

...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 492

Electronic Stability Control ..........................................(ECS) . 523

............Emergencies on the Road . 581 .............Battery, Jump Starting . 591 ...........Brake System Indicator . 597

................Changing a Flat Tire . 583 .....Charging System Indicator . 595

..................Checking the Fuses . 599 .......Hazard Warning Flashers . 139 ......If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck . 608

............................Jump Starting . 591 .....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 595 ...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 596

..................Overheated Engine . 593 .......................................Towing . 606

.........................Emergency Brake . 201 ....................Emergency Flashers . 139

......................Emergency Towing . 606 ..........Emergency Trunk Opener . 150

.......................Emissions Controls . 623 .............Emissions Testing, State . 626

Engine ....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 76

Malfunction Indicator ................................Lamp . 64, 596 .................................Oil Life . 84, 535

........Oil Pressure Indicator . 64, 595

..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 547 ...............................Overheating . 593

............................Specifications . 615

............................Speed Limiter . 510 .......................................Starting . 503

.................Engine, if it wont start . 588 ............Engine Start/Stop Button . 177

......................Ethanol in Gasoline . 487 .Evaporative Emissions Controls . 623

...............................Exhaust Fumes . 57 Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat

........................................Belts by . 18

...................................Fan, Interior . 218 Features, Comfort and

..............................Convenience . 213 ....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 487

........................................Filter, Oil . 548 ...........Flashers, Hazard Warning . 139

...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 583 .....................................Floor Mats . 565

Fluids ..........Automatic Transmission . 553

..........................................Brake . 555 ................Windshield Washers . 552

FM Stereo Radio ...................................Reception . 372

.....................................Fog Lights . 137 ..............................Front Airbags . 9, 26

....................................Front Seats . 155

....................................Adjusting . 155 .......................................Heaters . 193 .....................................Airbags . 9, 26

.................................................Fuel . 486 ......................Fill Door and Cap . 487

...........................................Gauge . 75 ................Octane Requirement . 486

........................Reserve Indicator . 73 ........................Tank, Filling the . 487

.....................Fuses, Checking the . 599

Index

F

G

IN D

E X

III

2009 TL

.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 584 .......................................Jack, Tire . 583

................................Jump Starting . 591

.......................Halogen Fog Bulbs . 556 ......HandsFreeLink (HFL) . 392, 420

............Hazard Warning Flashers . 139 .....................................Headlights . 133

........................................Aiming . 556 Automatic Lighting Off

...................................Feature . 135 .........Daytime Running Lights . 136

..................High Beam Indicator . 71

.......................Reminder Chime . 133 .................................Turning on . 133

............................Head Restraints . 156 ...............High-Low Beam Switch . 133

HomeLink Universal ................................Transceiver . 389

.......................Hood, Opening the . 489

.........................................Gasoline . 486 ...............Fuel Reserve Indicator . 73

...........................................Gauge . 75 ................Octane Requirement . 486

........................Tank, Filling the . 487 ................Gas Station Procedures . 487

Gauges ...Engine Coolant Temperature . 76

...............................................Fuel . 75 ...............................Speedometer . 75

.................................Tachometer . 75 Gearshift Lever Positions

..........Automatic Transmission . 507 ......................................Glove Box . 205

...Identification Number, Vehicle . 612 Ignition

............................................Keys . 141 .........................................Switch . 145

............Timing Control System . 624 ......................Immobilizer System . 143

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6 .........................................Indicators . 64

......ABS (Anti-Lock Brake) . 66, 521 Brake (Parking and Brake

............................System) . 65, 597 ................Charging System . 65, 595

.............................Cruise Control . 72 .....................................Fog Light . 71 ...................................High Beam . 71

........Key (Immobilizer System) . 65

......................................Low Fuel . 73 ................Low Oil Pressure . 64, 595

.....................Side Airbag Off . 33, 67 .........................................SRS . 26, 67

Turn Signal and Hazard ...................................Warning . 70

............................VSA Activation . 68 .................................VSA System . 68 ...............................Infant Restraint . 42

......................................Infant Seats . 42 ..........Tether Anchorage Points . 51

...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 568 .................................Inside Mirror . 161

.............................Inspection, Tire . 571 ............................Instrument Panel . 63

..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 64 ......Instrument Panel Brightness . 137

...............................Interior Lights . 209 ........................................Introduction . i

Index

H

I

J

IV

2009 TL

CONTINUED

................................................Keys . 141 ........................................Built-In . 142

.......Keyless Access Remote . 168, 173 Keyless Access Remote System

....................Entry Main Switch . 187 ................Keyless Access System . 167

.............Keyless Memory Setting . 176 ..................................Maintenance . 533 ........................................Minder . 535

...Owner Maintenance Checks . 543 ..........................................Safety . 534

Malfunction Indicator ....................................Lamp . 64, 596

...........Memory, Driving Position . 164 .........................Meters, Gauges . 63, 75

........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 161 ...............Modifying Your Vehicle . 496

.......................................Moonroof . 199 .............Multi-Information Display . 77

.......................Label, Certification . 612 ...............Lane Change, Signaling . 133

..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 16, 21 Lights

....................Bulb Replacement . 556 .......................................Indicator . 63

.......................................Parking . 133 ..........................Turn Signal . 70, 133

....LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 145 ......................Lockout Prevention . 147

Locks .....Anti-theft Steering Column . 145

..................................Glove Box . 205 ...............................Power Door . 146

.........................................Trunk . 148 ........................Low Coolant Level . 491

...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 64, 595 ...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 614

...........Luggage, Storing (Cargo) . 497

...................Neutral Gear Position . 509 ..................New Vehicle Break-in . 486

...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i

...............Numbers, Identification . 612

...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 486 .........................................Odometer . 81

...............................Odometer, Trip . 81 Oil

........................Change, How to . 548 ......................Change, When to . 544 ......................Checking Engine . 490 ..............Pressure Indicator . 64, 595

Selecting Proper Viscosity ......................................Chart . 547

.........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 145 .............ON Mode (Power Mode) . 178

Onboard Refueling Vapor ....................................Recovery . 623

...........................Operating Range . 168 ............................Outside Mirrors . 161

.....................Outside Temperature . 84 ....................Overheating, Engine . 593

....Owners Maintenance Checks . 543

Index

L

N

M

K

O

IN D

E X

V

2009 TL

............Panel Brightness Control . 137 ........................Park Gear Position . 508

...........................................Parking . 519 ...............................Parking Brake . 201

Parking Brake and Brake .................System Indicator . 65, 597

...............................Parking Lights . 133 ..Parking Over Things that Burn . 519 ....Passenger Airbag Off Indicator . 34

.............................PGM-FI System . 624 ..................................Power Mode . 178

.................ACCESSORY Mode . 179 ...................................ON Mode . 179

............................START Mode . 180 ..............VEHICLE OFF Mode . 179 ...............Power Socket Locations . 202

.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 18

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11 ...Additional Safety Precautions . 19

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 18 ........................Protecting Children . 37

Installing a Child Seat Using ........................................Latch . 47

Installing a Child Seat with a ..................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 49

Installing a Child Seat with a ......................................Tether . 51

.................Selecting a Child Seat . 45 .......................Protecting Infants . 42

.......Protecting Larger Children . 53 .........Protecting Small Children . 43

..........Protecting Your Discs . 251, 313

...................Radiator Overheating . 593 ...Radio/Disc Sound System . 225, 278

...................Readiness Codes . 596, 626 ..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 563

........................Rear Seat Armrest . 160 .Rear View Camera and Monitor . 483

..........................Rear View Mirror . 161 ...............Rear Window Defogger . 139 .............Reclining the Seat Backs . 155

.............................Reminder Lights . 64 ................Remote Audio Controls . 374

.....................Remote Transmitter . 151 Replacement Information

................Engine Oil and Filter . 548

..........................................Fuses . 599 ................................Light Bulbs . 556

...........................................Tires . 568 .............................Wiper Blades . 566

Replacing Seat Belts After a ............................................Crash . 23

...Reserve Tank, Engine Coolant . 491 ...............................Restraint, Child . 37

..................Reverse Gear Position . 509 ................................Rotation, Tire . 573

..................................Safety Belts . 8, 20 .........Safety Defects, Reporting . 632

.................................Safety Features . 7 ...........................................Airbags . 9

..................................Door Locks . 11 ..........................Head Restraints . 15

.......................................Seat Belts . 8 ...........Seats and Seat-Backs . 13, 14

.............Safety Labels, Location of . 59 ..............................Safety Messages . iii

.......................Satellite Radio . 234, 293

Index

P

R S

VI

2009 TL

CONTINUED

.....................................Tachometer . 75 .Taking Care of the Unexpected . 581

Technical Descriptions ....DOT Tire Quality Grading . 617 .....Emissions Control Systems . 623

Three Way Catalytic ...............................Converter . 625

.......................Temperature Gauge . 76 ....................Temperature, Outside . 84

.....................................Seat Belts . 8, 20 ...............Additional Information . 20

.....................................Cleaning . 564 ......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 21

................................Maintenance . 23 Reminder Light and

................................Beeper . 20, 64 ...................System Components . 20

...............Use During Pregnancy . 18 ..................................Seat Heaters . 193

......................Seats, Adjusting the . 155 ............................Security System . 380

..................Sequential Shift Mode . 514 ...............................Serial Number . 612

...........................Service Intervals . 544

...........................Service Manual . 633 .........Service Station Procedures . 488

..........................Setting the Clock . 377 ........................SH-AWD Indicator . 73

.....Shift Lever Position Indicator . 507 ........................Shift Lock Release . 510

...........................................Shifting . 508 ................................Side Airbags . 9, 30

........Side Airbag Off Indicator . 33, 67 ......................Side Curtain Airbags . 32

.............................Signaling Turns . 133

.....................................Snow Tires . 575 ................................Sound System . 223

Spare Tire ......................................Inflating . 582

....................Specifications . 582, 616 ....................Specifications Charts . 614

................................Speed Control . 386 ..........SRS, Additional Information . 24

...Additional Safety Precautions . 36 ....................Airbag Components . 24

.............................Airbag Service . 35 How the SRS Indicator

.......................................Works . 32 How Your Front Airbags

.........................................Work . 26 ...How Your Side Airbags Work . 30

How Your Side Curtain Airbags .........................................Work . 32

.............................SRS Indicator . 32, 67 ..START (Ignition Key Position) . 145

......START Mode (Power Mode) . 178 ...........Start/Stop Button, Engine . 178

..............Starting the Engine . 503, 506 ................With a Dead Battery . 591 ..............State Emissions Testing . 623

........Steam Coming from Engine . 593

Steering Wheel ................................Adjustment . 140

...........Anti-theft Column Lock . 145 ...................Stereo Sound System . 223 ....................Storing Your Vehicle . 578

........................Sunglasses Holder . 207 Super Handling All-Wheel Drive

......................(TM) (SH-AWD ) . 73 ....Supplemental Restraint System . 24

......................................Servicing . 35 ...............................SRS Indicator . 34

...................System Components . 24

Index IN

D E

X

T

VII

2009 TL

Unexpected, Taking Care ..........................................of the . 581

....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 617 ........................Unleaded Gasoline . 486

.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 550

........Temperature, Inside Sensor . 222 ..............Tether Anchorage Points . 51

..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 625 ................Tilt the Steering Wheel . 140

..........................Time, Setting the . 377 ....................................Tire Chains . 575

.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 583 Tire Pressure Monitoring

....................................System . 526 Low Tire Pressure/TPMS

...........................Indicator . 69, 526 ..............TPMS System Failure . 529

Tire Pressure Monitoring System ...................................Messages . 527

...............................................Tires . 568 ..............................Air Pressure . 568

.........................Checking Wear . 571 ..........................Compact Spare . 582

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 617 ......................................Inflation . 568

..................................Inspection . 571 ...................................Replacing . 574

......................................Rotating . 573 ...........................................Snow . 575

............................Specifications . 616 .............................Summer Tire . 575

.......................Traction Devices . 575 ..........................Winter Driving . 575

...................Tools, Tire Changing . 583 Torque Distribution Monitor

...............................(SH-AWD ) . 517 Towing

.....................................A Trailer . 531 ................Emergency Wrecker . 606

...........................Traction Devices . 575 Transmission

Checking Fluid Level, ..............................Automatic . 553

.Checking Fluid Level Manual . 555 ..................Fluid Selection . 554, 555

..............Identification Number . 612 .............Shifting the Automatic . 508

.....................................Treadwear . 617 ................................Trip Computer . 82

.......................................Trip Meter . 81 ..............................................Trunk . 148

......Emergency Trunk Release . 150 ...............................Opening the . 148

.............Open Monitor Light . 11, 88 ..................................Turn Signals . 133

.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 498 ......................Vehicle Dimensions . 614

VEHICLE OFF Mode ...........................(Power Mode) . 178

....Vehicle Identification Number . 612 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA ),

aka Electronic Stability ....Control (ESC), System . 523

........VSA System Indicator . 68, 523 ...VSA Activation Indicator . 68, 523

.........................VSA Off Switch . 524 .............................Vehicle Storage . 578

.................................................VIN . 612 ..................................Viscosity, Oil . 548

Index

U

V

VIII

2009 TL

................XM Satellite Radio . 233, 292............WARNING, Explanation of . iii .........Warning Labels, Location of . 58

..................Warranty Coverages . 631 Washer, Windshield

........Checking the Fluid Level . 552 ...................................Operation . 131

Wheels .............Adjusting the Steering . 140 ............Alignment and Balance . 573

..........................Compact Spare . 582 Windows

................Operating the Power . 195 .........................Rear, Defogger . 139

Windshield .....................................Cleaning . 131 ...................................Defroster . 219

.....................................Washers . 552 Wipers, Windshield

.......................Changing Blades . 566 ...................................Operation . 131 ....................................Worn Tires . 571

.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 606

: U.S.

Index IN

D E

X

W X

IX

2009 TL

Service Information Summary

Gasoline:

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Recommended Engine Oil:

Automatic Transmission Fluid:

Tire Pressure (measured cold):

Transfer Assembly Fluid:

Brake Fluid:

Rear Differential Fluid:

Spare Tire Pressure:4.5 US qt (4.3 )

Premium unleaded gasoline, pump octane number of 91 or higher.

API Service SJ Energy Conserving oil, SAE 5W-20 viscosity (see page ).

Oil change capacity (including filter):

18.5 US gal (70 )

Acura ATF-Z1 (Automatic Transmission Fluid) (see page

).

Capacity:

SAE 90 or SAE 80W-90 viscosity hypoid gear oil, API service classified GL4 or GL5 only.

Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary replacement (see page ).

SH-AWD differential case

Use Acura ATF-Z1 (Automatic Transmission Fluid) only.

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm ) Front/Rear:

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm ) Rear: 37 psi (255 kPa , 2.55 kgf/cm ) Front:

2.67 US qt (2.53 )

547

553

555

All models except SH-AWD with High Performance Tires and SH-AWD TECH HTP models

SH-AWD with High Performance Tires and SH-AWD TECH HTP models

On models with SH-AWD

2009 TL

This owners manual should be considered a permanent part of the vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold.

The information and specifications included in this publication were in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications or design at any time without notice and without incurring any obligation whatsoever.

This Owners Manual covers all models of the Acura TL. You may find descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your particular model.

Owners Identif ication

POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN AVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avez besoin dun Manuel du Conducteur en franais, veuillez demander votre concessionnaire de commander le numro de pice 33TK4C00.

OWNER

ADDRESS

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

OWNERS SIGNATURE

DEALERS SIGNATURE

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/ POSTAL CODE

(Date sold to original retail purchas

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the TL Acura works, you can view and download the Acura TL 2009 Sedan Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Acura TL as well as other Acura manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Acura TL. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Acura TL 2009 Sedan Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Acura TL 2009 Sedan Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Acura TL 2009 Sedan Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Acura TL 2009 Sedan Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Acura TL 2009 Sedan Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.